JP6964954B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachinko machine”) or a rotating drum type gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachislot machine”).

A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine can accept a gaming area in which a gaming medium is driven by a player's operation, a plurality of obstacle nails planted in the gaming area, and a gaming medium in the gaming area. It is equipped with multiple entrances (general winning opening, starting opening, variable winning opening (variable starting opening, large winning opening, accessory winning opening), V winning opening, etc.), and the game medium is at the entrance. When accepted, a predetermined number of gaming media can be paid out to entertain the player. Further, in the center of the game board, an effect display means including a liquid crystal display device capable of displaying an effect image is provided, and the effect according to the game state that changes when the game medium is driven into the game area. By displaying the image, the player can be entertained by the production image.

As such a gaming machine, there is known one having a dish portion in which a gaming medium for driving into the gaming area is stored below the gaming area in front view. (For example, Patent Document 1)

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-200611

However, in a gaming machine provided with such a dish portion, a more suitable structure near the dish portion is required.

Therefore, the present invention proposes a suitable configuration in the vicinity of the dish portion.

The present invention
A gaming machine with a front door
An upper plate (upper plate 321) provided on the front door and
A bulging portion (dish unit cover 326) having a decoration for decorating the front of the upper plate and being configured to bulge in front of the front door.
A predetermined operating device (described in paragraph 0069 and an effect decorative rotating body unit 530) arranged in a predetermined space (mounting space 326j) formed in the bulging portion is provided.
The predetermined space includes a region in which at least a part of the front surface side of the bulging portion is opened.
The upper plate constitutes a part of a member forming the predetermined space regardless of the open / closed state of the front door.
With the operating device removed from the predetermined space, at least a part of the upper plate is visible from the outside through the predetermined space (for example, the description in paragraph 0167 and FIGS. 6, 41 to 44, etc.). See)
It is characterized by that.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a suitable configuration in the vicinity of the dish portion.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one Embodiment of this invention. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front right. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front left. It is a perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front in a state where the door frame is opened from the main body frame and the main body frame is opened from the outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the pachinko machine into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from behind. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right side view of the outer frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the outer frame and looked at from the front. (A) is a perspective view of a portion of the outer frame side upper hinge member in the outer frame as viewed from below with the left frame member omitted, and (b) is an exploded perspective view showing (a) in an exploded manner. be. (A) is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the outer upper hinge member. It is an enlarged perspective view which shows the state which the upper hinge member on the main body side is attached to. It is explanatory drawing which shows the action of the lock member in the outer frame. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right side view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. 19 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 19 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB in FIG. 19 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line CC in FIG. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame for each main member and looked at from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for each main member and looked at from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit after removing the rear case and the fraud prevention member. (A) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit viewed from the front with the lid member removed, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit viewed from the rear with the lid member removed. It is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed. (A) is a front view of the handle unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the handle unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the handle unit as viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. (A) is a perspective view of the plate unit of the door frame viewed from the front right, and (b) is a perspective view of the plate unit viewed from the front left. (A) is a perspective view of the dish unit viewed from the upper right rear, and (b) is a perspective view of the dish unit viewed from the lower left rear. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish unit for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish unit for each main member and looked at from the back. FIG. 8 is an explanatory view showing an enlarged portion of a lower plate with the lower plate cover removed in the cross-sectional view of FIG. 28. (A) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an example in which the lower plate is provided with a ball guide portion, and (b) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an example in which the lower plate is provided with a ball guide portion different from (a). Yes, (c) is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an example provided with a further different ball guiding portion. (A) is an explanatory view schematically showing a splittable lower plate, and (b) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the storage area of the lower plate is expanded according to the size of the space behind the effect operation unit. It is a figure, (c) is explanatory drawing which shows the lower plate of (b) in a schematic perspective view. (A) is a front view of the effect operation unit in the door frame, and (b) is a right side view of the effect operation unit. (A) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the back. It is explanatory drawing which saw the effect operation unit from the direction which the central axis of the operation button extends. FIG. 8 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line DD in FIG. 48 (a). FIG. 4B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line EE in FIG. 48 (b). (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line FF in FIG. 48 (b), and (b) is an enlarged view of part A in (a). It is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled each main member of an effect operation unit and looked at from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and viewed from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view of the decorative board unit of the production operation unit disassembled and viewed from the front. (A) is a perspective view of the base unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the base unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the base unit of the production operation unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the base unit of the production operation unit disassembled and viewed from behind. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which pressed the operation button in the cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit of FIG. In (a), in the view of the effect operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, a part of the operation button is cut out to hide the part to be hidden by the first button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, or the like. It is explanatory drawing which shows, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the part to be concealed by the 1st button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, etc. in the cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit. (A) is an explanatory view showing the appearance of the effect operation unit as a perspective view seen from the front, and (b) is an explanatory view showing the appearance of the effect operation unit from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. .. (A) is a front view of the second effect operation unit having a different embodiment from the effect operation unit of FIGS. 48 to 63, and (b) is a right side view of the second effect operation unit. (A) is a perspective view of the second effect operation unit viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the second effect operation unit viewed from the back. It is explanatory drawing which looked at the 2nd effect operation unit from the direction which the central axis of the operation button extends. FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line GG in FIG. 64 (a). FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line HH in FIG. 64 (b). (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line I-I in FIG. 64 (b), and (b) is an enlarged view of part A in (a). It is an exploded perspective view of the 2nd effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the 2nd effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button of the second effect operation unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button of the second effect operation unit disassembled and viewed from the back. be. It is a perspective view which looked at the 2nd base unit of the 2nd production operation unit from the front. (A) is an explanatory view of the second production operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends with the main screen of the screen unit facing forward, and (b) shows the sub screen of the screen unit. It is explanatory drawing which saw the 2nd effect operation unit from the direction which the central axis of the operation button extends in the state which turned forward. (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line JJ in FIG. 74 (a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line KK in FIG. 74 (b). (A) attempts to hide the second production operation unit by the first button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, etc. in the view from the extending direction of the central axis of the operation button with the main screen facing forward. It is explanatory drawing which shows the part which is present, (b) is the explanatory view which shows the part to hide by the 1st button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, etc. in the cross-sectional view of the 2nd effect operation unit in the state of (a). Is. (A) attempts to hide the second production operation unit by the first button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, etc. in the view from the extending direction of the central axis of the operation button with the sub screen facing forward. It is explanatory drawing which shows the part which is present, (b) is the explanatory view which shows the part to hide by the 1st button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, etc. in the cross-sectional view of the 2nd effect operation unit in the state of (a). Is. (A) is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the back. It is a perspective view. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from behind. FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line LL in FIG. 78 (a). (A) is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the back. It is a perspective view. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from behind. FIG. 8 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line MM in FIG. 82 (a). (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line NN in FIG. 82 (a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line OO in FIG. 82 (a). (A) is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the back. Is. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and looked at from the back. FIG. 8 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line PP in FIG. 87. It is a perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the main body frame for each main member and looked at from the back. It is a perspective view which looked at the payout unit from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the payout unit from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. (A) is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit of the payout unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the ball guidance unit. (A) is a perspective view of the payout device of the payout unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the payout device as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the payout device and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the payout device and looked at from the back. (A) is a front view of the payout device, and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the QQ line in (a). (A) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the ball pulling passage is closed by the ball pulling movable piece in the payout device, and (b) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the ball pulling passage is opened by the ball pulling movable piece. (A) is a perspective view of the upper full tank path unit in the payout unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the upper full tank path unit as viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full tank path unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full tank path unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. (A) is a perspective view of the lower full-filled ball path unit in the payout unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the lower full-filled ball path unit as viewed from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view of the lower full tank path unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the lower full tank path unit disassembled and viewed from behind. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the taxiway opening / closing door is closed in the lower full tank path unit, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the taxiway opening / closing door is open. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and the lower full tank path unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in a payout unit. It is a front view of the game board in which the panel plate of a game panel is in an opaque state. FIG. 11 is a perspective view of the game board in the state of FIG. 114 as viewed from the front right. FIG. 11 is a perspective view of the game board in the state of FIG. 114 as viewed from the front left. It is a perspective view which looked at the game board from the back. It is a front view of the game board which made the panel board of a game panel transparent. FIG. 11 is a front view of the game board in the state of FIG. 114 in which the front unit is cut at substantially the center in the front-rear direction in the game area. It is a front view which shows the part of the arrow A in FIG. 119 in an enlarged manner. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. (A) is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the back unit for each main component and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the back unit for each main component and looked at afterwards. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the back front decoration unit in the back unit into a back front front unit, a back front middle unit, and a back front and rear unit, and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the back front decoration unit in the back unit into a back front front unit, a back front middle unit, and a back front and rear unit and seen from the back. (A) is an enlarged front view showing a portion of the upper left corner of the game board, and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the RR line in (a). It is a perspective view which shows in the state which the center accessory is omitted with respect to the arrow view B in FIG. 128. It is an exploded perspective view of the back front middle unit of the back front decoration unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the back front middle unit of the back front decoration unit disassembled and viewed from behind. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the back-front-middle unit of the back-front decoration unit cut in the middle of the vertical direction and viewed from above, and (b) is an enlarged explanation showing the vicinity of the left end of the cross-sectional view of (a). It is a figure, (c) is an explanatory view which enlarges and shows the vicinity of the right end of the cross-sectional view of (a). (A) is a front view showing the decoration of the first light guide plate of the back front middle unit, and (b) is a front view showing the decoration of the second light guide plate of the back front middle unit. (A) is a perspective view of the under-back movable effect unit of the back unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the under-back movable effect unit of the back unit as viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the lower back movable effect unit divided into the lower back elevating unit and the lower back decorative body unit, and (b) shows the lower back movable effect unit as the lower back elevating unit. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the back by disassembling it into a decorative body unit under the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the lower back elevating unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the back lower elevating unit and looked at from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the lower back decorative body unit and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the lower back decorative body unit and looked at from the back. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the back lower left decorative body unit and the back lower right decorative body unit of the lower back decorative body unit, and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the back lower left decorative body unit and the back lower right decorative body unit of the lower back decorative body unit, and looked at from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the back left movable effect unit and the back right movable effect unit of the back unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a back left movable effect unit and the back right movable effect unit of the back unit as viewed from the back. It is a perspective view. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the back left movable production unit and the back right movable production unit for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the back left movable production unit and the back right movable production unit for each main member and looked at from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the back left decorative body unit of the back left movable effect unit and the back right decorative body unit of the back right movable effect unit viewed from the front by disassembling. It is an exploded perspective view of the back left decorative body unit of the back left movable effect unit and the back right decorative body unit of the back right movable effect unit viewed from behind by disassembling. (A) is a perspective view of the back-inside movable effect unit of the back unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back-inside movable effect unit of the back unit as viewed from the back. It is a front view of the game board which shows the lower back decorative body unit of the lower back movable effect unit in a descending position, and the lower back left decorative unit and the lower right decorative unit in an approaching position. It is a front view of the game board which shows the back lower decorative body unit of the back lower movable effect unit in the raised position, and the back lower left decorative body unit and the back lower right decorative body unit in the separated position. It is a front view of the game board which shows the lower back decorative body unit of the lower back movable effect unit in the raised position, and the lower back left decorative unit and the lower right decorative unit in the approached position. It is a front view of the game board which shows in the state which the back left decorative body unit and the back right decorative body unit of the back left movable effect unit and the back right movable effect unit are in the first appearance position. It is a front view of the game board which shows in the state which the back left decorative body unit and the back right decorative body unit of the back left movable effect unit and the back right movable effect unit are in the second appearance position. With the back lower decorative body unit of the back lower movable effect unit in the lowered position, the back lower left decorative body unit and the back lower right decorative body unit are in the approaching position, and the back of the back left movable effect unit and the back right movable effect unit. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state that the left decorative body unit and the back right decorative body unit are in the second appearance position. With the back lower decorative body unit of the back lower movable production unit in the raised position, the back lower left decorative body unit and the back lower right decorative body unit are in the approaching position, and the back of the back left movable production unit and the back right movable production unit. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state that the left decorative body unit and the back right decorative body unit are in the third appearance position. In the front view of the game board, the back middle left decorative unit, the back middle right decorative unit, and the back middle center decorative unit are positioned between the evacuation position and the appearance position of the back middle movable production unit. be. It is a front view of the game board which shows the back middle left decorative body unit, the back middle right decorative body unit, and the back middle center decorative body unit in the appearance position of the back middle movable effect unit. The back center left decorative unit, the back center right decorative unit, and the back center center decorative unit are the appearance positions of the back center movable production unit, and the sub decoration part of the back center center decorative body is the back center left decorative body. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state of matching with the decoration of. The back center left decorative unit, the back center right decorative unit, and the back center center decorative unit are the appearance positions of the back center movable production unit, and the sub decoration part of the back center center decorative body is the back center left decorative body. It is a front view of a game board showing a state in which the decoration is matched with the decoration of the centerpiece, and the left side decoration unit in the back center and the right side decoration unit in the back center are in the appearance position. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which the 1st light guide plate of the back front middle unit is light-emitting decoration. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which the 2nd light guide plate of the back front middle unit is light-emitting decoration. The lower back decoration unit of the lower back movable production unit is in the descending position, and the lower back left decoration unit and the lower right decoration unit are in the approaching position. It is a front view of the game board which shows in the state which it is light-emitting and decorated in a small V shape using a decorative body. The lower back decoration unit of the lower back movable production unit is in the ascending position, and the lower back left decoration unit and the lower right decoration unit are in the approaching position. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which the decorative body is light-emitting and decorated in the shape of a heart by the same color. The lower back decoration unit of the lower back movable production unit is in the ascending position, and the lower back left decoration unit and the lower right decoration unit are in the approaching position. It is a front view of the game board which shows in the state which it is light-emitting and decorated in a small V shape using a decorative body. With the back lower decorative body unit of the back lower movable effect unit in the lowered position, the back lower left decorative body unit and the back lower right decorative body unit are in the approaching position, and the back of the back left movable effect unit and the back right movable effect unit. The left decorative unit and the back right decorative unit are set as the second appearance position, and the back front upper left decorative body and the back front upper right decorative body, the sub effect display device, the back lower left decorative body, and the back lower right are set as the second appearance position. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which the decorative body, the back left decorative body, and the back right decorative body are used to make a large V-shaped light emitting decoration. With the back lower decorative body unit of the back lower movable effect unit in the raised position, the back lower left decorative body unit and the back lower right decorative body unit are in the approaching position, and the back of the back left movable effect unit and the back right movable effect unit. The left decorative unit and the back right decorative unit are set as the third appearance position, and a medium-sized V is used with the sub-effect display device, the back lower left decorative body, the back lower right decorative body, the back left decorative body, and the back right decorative body. It is a front view of the game board which is shown in the state of being light-emitting and decorated in a character shape. It is a block diagram which shows schematic | control structure of a pachinko machine. (A) is a flowchart showing the procedure of the main process executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment, and (b) is an interrupt process periodically performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the special symbol process processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st start port passage processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd start port passage processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol process process executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol normal processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the jackpot determination process executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. (A) is a jackpot determination table used for the lottery process for the jackpot, and (B) is a symbol determination table used for the lottery process for the type of jackpot. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop symbol setting process executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st variation pattern setting process executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol variation processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the jackpot control processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the big prize opening opening and closing processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd entrance opening / closing process executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the ordinary symbol process processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the gate part passing process executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the ordinary symbol normal processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the sub-main process executed by the peripheral control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 16ms steady-state processing executed by the peripheral control MPU of the same embodiment. The first light guide plate of the first modification 1 is light-emittingly decorated, and the lower back decorative body unit of the lower back movable effect unit is in the lowered position, and the lower back left decorative unit and the lower right decorative unit are in the approaching position, and the back is set. In a state where a large V-shaped light emitting decoration is performed using the back front upper left decoration body, the back front upper right decoration body, the sub-effect display device, the back lower left decoration body, and the back lower right decoration body of the front decoration unit. It is a front view of the game board shown. It is a front view which shows the decoration of the 1st light guide plate of the modification 1. FIG. The first light guide plate of the first modification 1 is light-emittingly decorated, and the lower back decorative body unit of the lower back movable effect unit is in the lowered position, and the lower back left decorative unit and the lower right decorative unit are in the approaching position, and the back is set. In a state where a large V-shaped light emitting decoration is performed using the back front upper left decoration body, the back front upper right decoration body, the sub-effect display device, the back lower left decoration body, and the back lower right decoration body of the front decoration unit. It is a front view of the pachinko machine shown. It is a simplified cross-sectional view seen from the side by cutting the center accessory of the modification 2 at a substantially center in the left-right direction. A pachinko machine showing a state in which the light guide plate of the second modification is light-emitting decorated, and the left intermediate decorative body, the right intermediate decorative body, the left unit decorative cover, and the right unit cover are light-emitting decorated in a super-large V shape. It is a front view of. It is a front view which shows the decoration of the light guide plate of the modification 3. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of animation production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of animation production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of animation production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of animation production. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of animation production.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
The pachinko machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 10. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front right, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the back. Further, FIG. 8 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine as a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the back by disassembling into.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 for opening and closing the front surface of the outer frame 2, and a door frame 3. The main body frame 4 which is supported so as to be openable and closable and is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and the main body frame 4 which is detachably attached from the front side and can be visually recognized from the player side through the door frame 3. It is provided with a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball is hit.

As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 includes an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 which are vertically separated and extend to the left and right, and an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, which are connected to each other at both ends of the 20 and extend vertically, are provided. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same width in the front and rear. Further, the vertical lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20.

Further, the outer frame 2 is attached to the curtain plate member 50 which connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20 and to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 in the front view. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end side of the curtain plate member 50 and the left frame member 30 are provided. The main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable by the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70.

The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 has a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a through-hole 111 having a front-view outer shape extending vertically and penetrating back and forth, and a through-hole of the door frame base unit 100. A handle unit 300 that is attached to the lower right corner of the front surface below 111 and can be operated by the player to drive the game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and a through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100. The dish unit 320, which is attached to the lower part of the front surface below the door, and the player, which is attached to the center of the dish unit 320 and is attached to the center of the dish unit 320, according to the game state that changes when the game ball is driven into the game area 5a. A production operation unit 400 capable of presenting a participatory effect, and a door frame left side unit 530 attached to the front left portion on the upper side of the dish unit 320 and on the left side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100. And, the door frame right side unit 550 attached to the front right part on the upper side of the dish unit 320 and on the right side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100, the door frame left side unit 530, and the door frame right side unit 550. The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the door frame base unit 100.

The main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 has a frame-shaped main body frame base 600 and a main body frame base 600 that can be partially inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5. It is attached to both the upper and lower ends on the left side of the front view and is rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70, respectively, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame of the door frame 3 are attached. The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge member 150 is rotatably attached, the reinforcing frame 660 attached to the front left side surface of the main body frame base 600, and the main body frame base 600. A ball launcher 680 for driving a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5 and an outer frame 2 and a main body frame attached to the right side surface of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front. 4. And the locking unit 700 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the reverse side that is attached to the rear side along the front view upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 and pays out the game ball to the player side. The L-shaped payout unit 800, the board unit 900 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and the game board 5 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 so as to be openable and closable. It includes a back cover 980 that covers the rear side.

The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 is attached to the upper part of the inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and the payout unit base 801 and extends to the left and right open upward. A box-shaped ball tank 802 for storing game balls supplied from an island facility (not shown) and a game ball attached to the payout unit base 801 under the ball tank 802, and the game balls in the ball tank 802 are viewed to the left in the front view. A tank rail 803 extending to the left and right to guide, a ball guiding unit 820 attached to the rear surface of the upper left side of the front view of the payout unit base 801 and guiding the game ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner, and a ball guiding unit 820. The game balls that are detachably attached from the payout unit base 801 on the lower side and are guided by the ball guide unit 820 are paid out one by one based on the instruction from the payout control board 951 housed in the payout control board box 950. The payout device 830 and the game ball attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and paid out by the payout device 830 are guided downward, and the game ball is stored according to the storage state of the game ball in the upper plate 321 in the plate unit 320. It was discharged from the upper full tank path unit 850 to be discharged from either the normal discharge port 850d or the full tank discharge port 850e, and the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full tank path unit 850 attached to the lower end of the payout unit base 801. The normal taxiway 861 that guides the game ball forward and guides it from the front end to the through ball passage 273 of the door frame 3 and the game ball released from the full tank discharge port 850e are guided forward and the door frame 3 is full from the front end. It is provided with a lower full tank path unit 860 having a full tank taxiway 862 for guiding to the tank ball receiving port 274.

The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 is mounted on the rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side of the front view of the board unit base 910 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and the speaker for bass inside. The speaker unit 920 having 921, the power supply board box 930 mounted on the right side of the front view on the rear side of the board unit base 910 and accommodating the power supply board inside, and the power supply board box 930 mounted on the rear side of the speaker unit 920 and inside. The interface control board box 940 in which the interface control board is housed, and the payout control board 951 which is mounted across the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and controls the payout of the game ball are housed therein. The payout control board box 950 and the like are provided.

As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 divides the outer circumference of the game area 5a into which the game ball is hit, and divides the game ball launched from the ball launcher 680 into the upper part of the game area 5a. A front component 1000 having an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 to guide the player, and a flat plate-shaped game panel 1100 attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and partitioning the rear end of the game area 5a. There is.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player rotates the handle 302 with the game ball stored in the upper plate 321, the ball launching device 680 causes the game ball to have a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 302. It is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5. Then, when the game balls driven into the game area 5a are received in the winning opening, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 by the payout device 830 according to the received winning opening. Since the player's interest can be enhanced by paying out the game ball, the game ball in the upper plate 321 can be driven into the game area 5a, and the player can enjoy the game.

[2. Overall composition of the outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 16. FIG. 11 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. Further, FIG. 13 is a perspective view of the outer frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 14 is a perspective view of the outer frame viewed from the back. FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame viewed from the front by disassembling the outer frame. FIG. 16A is a perspective view of a portion of the outer frame side upper hinge member in the outer frame as viewed from below with the left frame member omitted, and FIG. 16B is an exploded perspective view showing (a) in an exploded manner. It is a figure. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in which a pachinko machine 1 is installed, such as a game hall.

As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 connects the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 which are vertically separated and extend to the left and right, and both ends of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. A left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 extending to the left frame member 30 are provided. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same width in the front and rear. Further, the vertical lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. Further, the outer frame 2 is assembled so that the left and right end surfaces of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 and the side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 facing outward in the left-right direction are flush with each other. Has been done.

Further, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame side upper hinge member 60 attached to the front left end side of the upper frame member 10, a lock member 66 attached to the lower surface of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, and the like. The curtain plate member 50 includes an upper portion on the left end side of the front view and an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the left frame member 30. The main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 can be opened and closed by the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2.

Further, the outer frame 2 is attached to the curtain plate member 50 which connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 to each other and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20, and is attached to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50. A curtain plate reinforcing member 80 whose both ends are attached to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively, a flat plate-shaped left sliding member 81 attached to a position on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 to the left from the center of the left and right, and a curtain. A flat plate-shaped right-sliding member 82 attached to a position near the right end on the upper surface of the plate member 50 is provided. The curtain plate reinforcing member 80 is formed of a solid member (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) and is attached to the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40.

Further, the outer frame 2 includes an upper frame member 10 and a left frame member 30, an upper frame member 10 and a right frame member 40, a lower frame member 20 and a left frame member 30, and a lower frame member 20 and a right frame member 40, respectively. It includes a connecting member 85 that is connected. Further, the outer frame 2 is attached to the inside (left side surface side) of the right frame member 40, and the upper hook hook member 90 and the lower hook hook member 91 to which the hook 703 for the outer frame of the locking unit 700, which will be described later, is locked. , Prepared.

[2-1. Upper frame member]
The upper frame member 10 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness. The upper frame member 10 is provided with an engaging notch 11 that penetrates vertically and is recessed toward the center side in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends. The upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, are mounted in the engaging notch 11. Further, the upper frame member 10 is provided with mounting steps 12 recessed from the general surface on the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion in the front view. An outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is attached to the attachment step portion 12.

[2-2. Lower frame member]
The lower frame member 20 of the outer frame 2 is made of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness. The lower frame member 20 is formed so that the left and right lengths and the upper and lower thicknesses are the same as the left and right lengths and the upper and lower thicknesses of the upper frame member 10, and the front and rear widths of the upper frame member 10 are the same. It is formed longer than the width before and after. The lower frame member 20 is provided with an engaging notch 21 that penetrates vertically and is recessed toward the center side in the left-right direction at a position closer to the rear side than the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends. The lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, are mounted in the engaging notch 21.

Further, the lower frame member 20 includes front end notches 22 recessed rearward from the front surfaces of both left and right ends. In the lower frame member 20, the width in the front-rear direction from the rear end of the front end notch portion 22 to the rear surface of the lower frame member 20 is formed to have the same dimensions as the width in the front-rear direction of the upper frame member 10. In the state where the lower frame member 20 is assembled to the outer frame 2, a portion between the left and right front end notches 22 is inserted into the curtain plate member 50.

[2-3. Left frame member and right frame member]
The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and are formed of an extruded metal material such as an aluminum alloy. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed in a shape symmetrical to each other in a plan view. When the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are assembled as the outer frame 2, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are recessed inward from a position rearward to the center in the front-rear direction to the vicinity of the rear end on the outer side surface in the left-right direction. It is provided with recesses 31 and 41 and protrusions 32 and 42 that bulge from the opposite side surfaces of the recesses 31 and 41 and have a hollow inside. The strength and rigidity of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are increased by the protrusions 32 and 42. Further, in the protruding portions 32 and 42, the lower left lateral fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B described later of the connecting member 85 is inserted and attached.

Further, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed with a plurality of grooves extending vertically on the surface thereof. With these plurality of grooves, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed or transported in an island facility such as a game hall, the pachinko machine 1 can be easily held by a worker and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily held. It is possible to enhance the design of the appearance of the machine 1.

[2-4. Curtain board member]
The curtain plate member 50 of the outer frame 2 is formed in a box shape with the rear side open. The curtain plate member 50 has a rear extending portion 51 extending rearward in a flat plate shape near the left end of the front view on the upper surface, and a U-shape having a size that allows a game ball to pass from the left end of the rear extending portion 51. A left discharge hole 52 that is notched and penetrates vertically, and a right discharge hole 53 that penetrates vertically on the right side of the left discharge hole 52 in the rear extension portion 51 so that the game ball can pass through. A standing wall portion 54 extending upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 including the rear end of the rear extending portion 51 in a flat plate shape, and a standing wall portion 54 protruding forward from the vicinity of the upper end of the standing wall portion 54 so that the front surface is upward. It is provided with a return portion 55, which is inclined toward the rear toward the rear.

The curtain plate member 50 is a lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side so that the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side is placed on the upper surface of the front side of the rear extension portion 51 and the upper surface of the rear extension portion 51. A horizontal portion 71, which will be described later, is attached. Further, the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50 is formed at a position corresponding to the discharge hole 74 described later of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 in a state of being assembled to the outer frame 2. Further, the right discharge hole 53 is formed at a position on the right side of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 in a state of being assembled to the outer frame 2. The right discharge hole 53 is formed larger than the left discharge hole 52.

Further, the curtain plate member 50 is inclined so that the upper surface on the right side of the rear extending portion 51 is lower on the front end side. Further, the curtain plate member 50 has a left mounting portion 56 for mounting the left sliding member 81 on a portion on the right side of the rear extending portion 51 on the upper surface and a right mounting portion for mounting the right sliding member 82 near the right end on the upper surface. A unit 57 and a unit 57 are provided. The lower surface of the main body frame 4 is placed on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 via the left sliding member 81 and the right sliding member 82.

As shown in the figure, the curtain plate member 50 has a shallow relief-like decoration formed on the front surface. Further, although not shown, the curtain plate member 50 has a box-shaped interior partitioned by a plurality of ribs in a grid pattern to increase the strength and rigidity. Further, the curtain plate member 50 is formed so that the front half of the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 can be accommodated inside.

[2-5. Upper hinge member on the outer frame side]
As shown in the figure, the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 has a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped upper fixing portion 61 having a quadrangular outer shape and a flat plate shape extending forward from the front end of the upper fixing portion 61. A plan view of the front extension portion 62, the bearing groove 63 extending vertically from the right end of the front extension portion 62 to the left and right center of the front extension portion 62 and penetrating vertically, and the upper fixing portion 61. A flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 64 extending downward from the left side and a horizontal fixing portion extending downward from the end side extending from the left end to the front end of the front extending portion 62 to the portion where the bearing groove 63 is opened. A flat plate-shaped hanging portion 65 continuous with the portion 64 is provided (see FIG. 16B and the like).

In the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the upper fixing portion 61 is placed on the upper surface of the mounting step portion 12 of the upper frame member 10 in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, and is fixed by screws (not shown). There is. Further, the front extending portion 62 extends forward from the front end of the upper frame member 10. Further, the lateral fixing portion 64 is fixed to the left frame member 30 by screws in a state of being inserted from above into the recess 31 on the outer side surface of the left frame member 30.

The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 by inserting the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 into the bearing groove 63 to form the main body frame 4. It can be opened and closed and supported. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

[2-6. Lock member]
As shown in FIG. 16, the lock member 66 of the outer frame 2 has a strip-shaped lock body 66a whose left and right sides extend back and forth with a predetermined width, and an operation unit protruding to the right from the rear end of the lock body 66a. 66b, an elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic portion 66c extending diagonally to the left front after extending to the left from the rear end of the lock main body 66a, and a mounting hole penetrating up and down near the rear end of the lock main body 66a. It is equipped with 66d. The lock member 66 is made of synthetic resin. The lock member 66 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 by the attachment screw 67.

The lock member 66 is mounted at a position where the rear end of the lock body 66a is rearward of the bearing groove 63 in the front extending portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 through the mounting hole 66d. Further, in a state where the lock member 66 is attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the lock body 66a can block the bearing groove 63 in a plan view, and the right side surface near the front end is the outer frame side upper hinge member. It extends forward so that it can come into contact with a portion of the hanging portion 65 of 60 that extends to the opening of the bearing groove 63 (see FIG. 18).

Further, the tip of the elastic portion 66c extending to the left from the rear end of the lock body 66a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. The lock member 66 is urged by the urging force of the elastic portion 66c in a direction in which the front end rotates to the left around the mounting hole 66d. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock member 66 near the front end of the lock body 66a is in contact with the hanging portion 65 (see FIG. 18). In this state, a space in the bearing groove 63 on the front side of the lock main body 66a is formed so as to accommodate the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame, which will be described later, of the hinge member 620 on the main body frame side.

By operating the operation portion 66b, the lock member 66 can rotate the lock body 66a against the urging force of the elastic portion 66c. Then, by operating the operation unit 66b, the lock body 66a is rotated in the direction in which the front end thereof moves to the left, so that the lock body 66a can be retracted from the bearing groove 63 in a plan view, and the bearing groove 63 can be retracted. Can be in a state of being fully passed. As a result, the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be inserted into the bearing groove 63, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-7. Outer frame side lower hinge member]
As shown in the figure, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 stands upward from a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal portion 71 and a portion on the left side of the horizontal portion 71 that is rearward from the center in the front-rear direction. Only one game ball can pass through the rising flat rising portion 72, the hinge pin 73 under the outer frame protruding upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 71, and the horizontal portion 71 up and down. It is provided with a discharge hole 74 having a size. The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the base in a plan view. The lower hinge pin 73 of the outer frame has a columnar shape, and is formed in a truncated cone shape in which the upper end is narrowed above the center in the vertical direction. The lower hinge pin 73 of the outer frame is attached to a position on the left side near the front end of the horizontal portion 71. The discharge hole 74 is formed in the horizontal portion 71 so as to be in contact with the central portion of the rising portion 72 in the front-rear direction and extend from the left side of the horizontal portion 71 to the right in an inverted U shape. The discharge hole 74 is formed to have substantially the same size as the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50.

In the outer frame side lower hinge member 70, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the horizontal portion 71 is placed on the upper surface near the left end of the curtain plate member 50 and on the rear extending portion 51, and the horizontal portion 71. Is fixed to the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 by a screw (not shown) penetrating the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. Further, in the state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the rising portion 72 is attached to a portion of the inner side surface of the left frame member 30 on the inner side surface of the left frame member 30 on the front side of the protruding portion 32 by a screw (not shown). The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 73 into the main body frame lower hinge hole (not shown) in the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable in cooperation with the hinge member 60.

Further, in the state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 74 coincides with the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50. As a result, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 can be dropped (discharged) to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50 through the discharge hole 74 and the left discharge hole 52. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 is closed, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 are closed. Since the space between the two is gradually narrowed, the ball is rolled to the rear side where the interval is wide, and the ball can be discharged from the discharge hole 74. At this time, since the discharge hole 74 is formed at a position substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. By discharging the game ball that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the discharge hole 74, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4, and the outer frame side. It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to stay at the portion of the lower hinge member 70.

[2-8. Connecting member]
The connecting member 85 of the outer frame 2 includes an upper left connecting member 85A that connects the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, an upper right connecting member 85B that connects the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, and a lower frame member. There is a lower left connecting member 85C that connects 20 and the left frame member 30, and a lower right connecting member 85D that connects the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40.

The connecting member 85 includes a flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 86 extending horizontally, a flat plate-shaped upper-horizontal fixing portion 87 extending upward from either the left or right side of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and a horizontal fixing portion. The upper horizontal fixing portion 87 in 86 includes a flat plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extending downward from the same side as the extending portion. The connecting member 85 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extends upward from the center of the horizontal fixing portion 86 in the front-rear direction, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extends from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. It extends downward. That is, in the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, two lower horizontal fixing portions 88 are provided so as to be separated from each other in the front-rear direction. The horizontal fixing portion 86 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is fixed to the upper frame member 10 in a state of being in contact with the lower surface of the upper frame member 10. Further, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is inserted into the engaging notch 21 of the upper frame member 10 and fixed to the end portion of the upper frame member 10 in the left-right direction. Further, the lower lateral fixing portion 88 on the front side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is fixed to the inner side surfaces on the front side of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively. Further, the lower lateral fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is a screw inserted into the protruding portions 32 and 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and screwed from the outer side surface. Is fixed to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively.

In the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D, the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 protrudes rearward from the rear end of the horizontal fixing portion 86 and more than the horizontal fixing portion 86 of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. The lower lateral fixing portion 88 extends downward from the horizontal fixing portion 86 from the lower end of the portion protruding rearward. Further, the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D further include a bent portion 89 projecting from the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 to the same side as the horizontal fixing portion 86. The horizontal fixing portion 86 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D is fixed in a state of being in contact with the upper surface of the lower frame member 20. Further, the upper and horizontal fixing portions 87 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed to the inner side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 on the front side of the protruding portions 32 and 42, respectively. Further, the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D is inserted into the engaging notch 21 of the lower frame member 20 and fixed to the end surface of the lower frame member 20 in the left-right direction. NS.

[2-9. Lock mechanism for upper hinge member on the outer frame side]
Next, in the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, FIGS. 17 and 18 are shown with respect to the locking mechanism of the main body frame 4 with respect to the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 by the lock member 66 in the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. It will be explained with reference to. FIG. 17 (a) is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and FIG. It is an enlarged perspective view which shows the state in which the upper hinge member on the main body side is attached to the hinge member. FIG. 18 is an explanatory view showing the action of the lock member on the outer frame.

When the lock member 66 in the outer frame 2 is attached to the front extending portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 (normal state), the tip of the elastic portion 66c comes into contact with the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65. The lock body 66a does not block a part of the bearing groove 63 bent in a dogleg shape, and the tip portion of the lock body 66a does not block the deepest part of the bearing groove 63. A space is formed in the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63 into which the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame 4 can be inserted.

In the support mechanism of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame using the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the lock member 66 in the present embodiment, the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is inserted into the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63 and the front end of the lock main body 66a. The right side surface of the lock body 66a is in close contact with the right side hanging portion 65 (in this state, there is a slight gap between the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a and the right side hanging portion 65, and they are in contact with each other. In the normal shaft support state, the centers of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame located at the deepest part of the bent bearing groove 63 and the front end surface of the lock main body 66a are obliquely opposed to each other. It is in a state.

In this normal axial support state, the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame that pivotally supports the heavy main body frame 4 is in contact with the front end portion of the bearing groove 63, so that the hinge pin on the main body frame is in contact with the front end portion. Almost no load is applied from 622 to the front end surface of the lock body 66a. That is, no load is applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66. Since the front end surface of the lock body 66a is formed in an arc shape, the lock member 66 rotates smoothly when the operation portion 66b is rotated to rotate the lock member 66. There is. Further, in the figure, the arc center of the front end surface of the lock body 66a is the center of the mounting hole 66d (the center of rotation of the lock member 66).

Therefore, when the acting force F is applied in the direction in which the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame comes out along the inclination of the bearing groove 63 formed in a dogleg shape and comes into contact with the arcuate front end surface of the lock main body 66a, the acting force is applied. F is a component force F1 (in the normal direction of the arc of the front end surface of the lock body 66a) acting on the contact portion between the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame and the arc-shaped front end surface, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame and the bearing groove 63. When divided into a component force F2 that acts on the contact portion with the inner surface on one side, the direction of the component force F1 faces the center of the mounting hole 66d (mounting screw 67) (the center of rotation of the lock member 66). , The moment for rotating the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 in the direction away from the hanging portion 65 on the right side does not act, and the hinge pin 622 on the body frame is one of the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 and the bearing groove 63. The state of being sandwiched between the side inner surface is maintained.

Therefore, even in a normal bearing state or in a state where the acting force of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is applied to the lock member 66, the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 is not constantly loaded and is integrally formed of synthetic resin. It is possible to prevent the elastic portion 66c from being plastically deformed due to creep, and to prevent the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame from falling off from the bearing groove 63 for a long period of time. Even if an unreasonable force is applied and the front end portion of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is rotated in the direction of moving to the right, the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a abuts on the hanging portion 65 and further. Since it does not rotate, the lock member 66 does not protrude to the outside of the forward extending portion 62.

Even if the shape of the front end surface of the lock body 66a is not arcuate, the position where the rotational moment is not generated by the action of the above-mentioned component force F1 or the front end portion of the lock member 66 faces the outside of the front extending portion 62. By locating the rotation center of the lock member 66 (the shaft fixed by the mounting screw 67) at a position where a rotational moment is generated, no load is always applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66. Even if the lock member 66 rotates, the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a only abuts on the hanging portion 65, so that the lock member 66 does not protrude to the outside of the front extending portion 62.

When the bearing groove 63 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 supports the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620, the bearing groove 63 is placed in the bearing groove 63 from the open side on the main body frame. Insert the hinge pin 622. When the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is inserted into the bearing groove 63, the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame comes into contact with the right side surface of the lock main body 66a of the lock member 66, and the front end of the lock main body 66a resists the urging force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates about the mounting screw 67 so as to move to the left. As a result, the lock main body 66a that has closed the bearing groove 63 is retracted to open the bearing groove 63, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be moved to the deepest portion (front end) of the bearing groove 63.

Then, when the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is moved to the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63, the contact between the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame and the lock main body 66a of the lock member 66 is released, and the locking main body 66a is released by the urging force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates so that the front end of the lock member 66 moves to the right, and the lock member 66 returns to the normal state. As a result, the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is housed in the space on the front side of the lock main body 66a in the bearing groove 63, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can rotate in the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63. It becomes a held (locked) state in the state.

When removing the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame from the bearing groove 63, the operation portion 66b of the lock member 66 is operated to rotate the lock member 66 so that the front end of the lock main body 66a moves to the left, and the elastic portion The lock body 66a is retracted from the bearing groove 63 against the urging force of 66c. As a result, the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63 and the opening are in communication with each other, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-10. Security mechanism and ball biting prevention mechanism at the lower hinge member on the outer frame side]
Prevention of ball biting to prevent the game ball from being pinched between the security mechanism and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 at the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment. The mechanism will be described.

In the assembled state of the outer frame 2, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is attached to the left end portion in the front view on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is mounted in a state of being placed near the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 and the upper surface of the rear extending portion 51. The curtain plate member 50 includes a standing wall portion 54 that rises upward from the rear end of the upper surface. As a result, even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire is to be inserted into the rear side of the main body frame 4 (pachinko machine 1) through the gap between the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640. Since the tip of the illegal tool comes into contact with the vertical wall portion 54 extending upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, it is possible to prevent the illegal tool from being further inserted to the rear side. , It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed through the portion of the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side.

Further, since the return portion 55 extending forward is provided at the upper end of the standing wall portion 54, when an illegal tool in contact with the standing wall portion 54 bends upward, the tip of the illegal tool is provided by the return portion 55. Can be further turned forward, so that it is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the rear side of the main body frame 4, and an illegal act is performed through the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70. Can be reliably prevented.

By the way, when the vertical wall portion 54 extending upward is provided at the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, the game ball is on the outer frame side with the main body frame 4 open with respect to the outer frame 2. When the game ball falls on the lower hinge member 70 (horizontal portion 71), the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 is not discharged rearward from the rear end of the horizontal portion 71 due to the presence of the vertical wall portion 54, so that the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 There is a risk of being caught between. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the rear extending portion 51 of the curtain plate member 50 have a discharge hole 74 and a left discharge hole 52 through which the game ball can pass. And, since the right discharge hole 53 is provided, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 can be discharged downward from the discharge hole 74 or the like, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 can be discharged. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the game ball is pinched between the two.

Therefore, when the game ball is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the circumference of the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side is damaged, or the main body frame 4 is not closed in a normal state and is not closed with the outer frame 2. A gap is created between the main body frame 4 and the gap, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed using the gap.

[3. Overall configuration of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 30. 19 is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine, FIG. 20 is a right side view of the door frame, FIG. 21 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 22 is a rear view of the door frame. FIG. 23 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 24 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 25 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the back. 26 is a cross-sectional view cut along the line AA in FIG. 19, FIG. 27 is a cross-sectional view cut along the line BB in FIG. 19, and FIG. 28 is a cross-sectional view cut along the line CC in FIG. It is a figure. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the door frame 3 is attached to a square and frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 whose outer shape in front view extends vertically, and to the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100. The handle unit 300, the plate unit 320 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, the effect operation unit 400 installed in the center of the plate unit 320, and the door frame base unit above the plate unit 320. The door frame left side unit 530 attached to the front left side of the 100, the door frame right side unit 550 attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the dish unit 320, and the door frame left side. The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550.

Although the details of the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described later, the plate-shaped door frame base 110 having a through-hole 111 having a front-view outer shape extending vertically and penetrating in the front-rear direction is a rectangular shape (square). The frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 and the upper and lower ends of the reinforcing unit 130 on the left end side in the front view are attached to the main body frame 4 so as to be hinge rotatable. A door frame side upper hinge member 140, a door frame side lower hinge member 150, a glass unit 190 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 to close the through hole 111, and a security cover 200 covering the lower rear surface of the glass unit 190. Locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 which are attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to penetrate the door frame base 110 and project forward so as to be openable and closable. The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 for opening and closing, the ball feeding unit 250 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110 to send the game ball to the ball launching device 680, and the ball launching device 680 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110. It is provided with a foul cover unit 270 that receives a game ball that has not reached the game area 5a and is discharged to the lower plate 322.

The handle unit 300 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail later, but when the player rotates the rotatable handle 302, the game ball stored in the upper plate 321 is adjusted according to the rotation angle of the handle 302. It can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5 with a strong strength.

Although the details of the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 will be described later, the dish unit 320 is attached to a portion below the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, and the front surface bulges forward. The effect operation unit 400 is attached to the front end at the center in the left-right direction. The plate unit 320 contains an upper plate 321 for storing game balls for driving into the game area 5a, and a game ball arranged below the upper plate 321 and supplied from the upper plate 321 and the foul cover unit 270. Within the range of the lower plate 322 that can be stored, the upper plate ball removal button 327 for pulling out the game ball stored in the upper plate 321 to the lower plate 322, and the balance of cash and prepaid card put into the ball lending machine. A ball lending button 328 for lending a game ball to a player, a return button 329 for returning cash or a prepaid card after deducting the amount of the game ball lent from the ball lending machine, and cash put into the ball lending machine. The ball rental display unit 330 that displays the remaining number of prepaid cards, etc., the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 that can accept the player's operation when presenting the effect, and the lower plate 322. It is provided with a lower plate ball removal button 333 for discharging the game ball below the plate unit 320.

The effect operation unit 400 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front portion of the plate unit 320 in the center in the left-right direction in the front view, and can be pressed by the player and presents the effect image to the player. It is something that can be done. The effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail later, but has a large operation button 410 that can be operated by the player, and a door frame side effect that is visibly arranged in the operation button 410 from the player side and can display an effect image. It includes a display device 460.

The door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front left portion on the upper side of the dish unit 320 and on the left side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100, and the through port 111 ( It decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a). The door frame left side unit 530 includes a left unit decorative lens member (not shown) capable of emitting and decorating.

The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front right portion on the upper side of the dish unit 320 and on the right side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100, and the through port 111 ( It decorates the right outer side of the game area 5a). The door frame right side unit 550 projects far forward from the door frame left side unit 530, and is provided with a right unit left decorative member 554 and a right unit right decorative member 557 provided on both the left and right sides, and at the front end. The right unit decorative lens member 561 and the door are provided. The door frame right side unit 550 can illuminate the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens member 561.

The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 is attached to the upper side of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 and above the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100. It decorates the upper part of the frame 3. The details of the door frame top unit 570 will be described later, but the pair of upper speakers 573 separated to the left and right, the top middle decoration member 576 protruding forward at the center of the front surface, and the left and right sides of the top middle decoration member 576 are It includes a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 that are decorated. The door frame top unit 570 can illuminate the top middle decorative member 576, the top left decorative lens member 579, and the top right decorative lens member 580.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. 31 (a) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 31 (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. be.

The door frame base unit 100 is attached so as to be openable / closable (hinge rotatable) with respect to the main body frame 4 so that the left side side of the front view closes the front surface of the main body frame 4. The door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 300 in the lower front corner, a dish unit 320 in which the effect operation unit 400 is attached to the lower front surface of the through hole 111, and a door frame left side unit 530 in the left outer front surface of the through port 111. The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the right outer front surface of the through opening 111, and the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the through opening 111, respectively.

As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the door frame base unit 100 includes a plate-shaped door frame base 110 having a rectangular outer shape extending vertically and having a through hole 111 penetrating back and forth. , The frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110, and the main body frame 4 which is attached to the upper and lower ends of the reinforcing unit 130 on the left end side of the front view and protrudes forward from the door frame base 110. The door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame side lower hinge member 150 rotatably attached to the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640, and the front surface of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110. The door frame left side decorative board 160, which is mounted on the left side of the door and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and the glass unit 190, which is rotatably mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110, are detachably attached. A glass unit mounting member 170 for the door is provided.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 is attached to the lower right corner of the front view on the front surface of the door frame base 110, and is attached to the tubular handle attachment member 180 for attaching the handle unit 300 and the rear surface of the door frame base 110. A glass unit 190 that closes the through hole 111, a security cover 200 that covers the lower part of the rear surface of the glass unit 190, and an opening / closing cylinder unit that is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to penetrate the door frame base 110 and project forward. It includes 210, a ball feed unit 250 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a foul cover unit 270 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110.

Further, although not shown, the door frame base unit 100 includes various decorative substrates provided in the door frame 3, a ball feed solenoid 255, a handle rotation detection sensor 307, a handle touch sensor 310, a single-shot button operation sensor 312, and the like. Ball rental button 328, return button 329, ball rental display unit 330, effect selection left button 331, effect selection right button 332, vibration motor 424, pressure detection sensor 440, door frame side effect display device 460 (liquid crystal display device 461) , Upper speaker 573, etc., and a door main body relay board for relaying the connection between the main body frame 4 and the door frame relay board 911 of the board unit 900.

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame base 110 is formed in a quadrangle (rectangle) whose outer shape in front view extends vertically. The door frame base 110 penetrates in the front-rear direction, and includes a through-hole 111 formed in a substantially quadrangular shape having an inner peripheral shape extending vertically in a front view. In the through-hole 111, the upper side and the left and right sides forming the inner circumference are close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 110, respectively, and the lower side forming the inner circumference is up and down from the lower end of the door frame base 110. It is located at a height of about 1/3 in the direction. Therefore, the door frame base 110 is entirely formed in a frame shape by the through openings 111 penetrating the front and rear. The door frame base 110 is integrally molded with a synthetic resin.

The door frame base 110 is formed in the lower right corner of the front view and is inclined so that the left end side slightly protrudes forward from the right end side, the handle mounting seat surface 112, the handle mounting seat surface 112, and the through hole 111. The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is recessed from the rear surface to the front near the right end of the front view, and penetrates back and forth between the cylinder mounting portion 113 to which the cylinder mounting plate metal 213 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is mounted and the cylinder mounting portion 113. The cylinder insertion hole 114 through which the cylinder lock 211 of the above is inserted, and the cylinder insertion hole 114 and the handle mounting seat surface 112 penetrate the front and rear on the left side of the front view, and the entrance 251a and the ball outlet 251b of the ball feeding unit 250 are forward. It is equipped with a ball feed opening 115 for facing the cylinder.

Further, the door frame base 110 is to the left of the center of the door frame base 110 in the left-right direction and penetrates back and forth at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 112, and faces the ball discharge port 276 of the foul cover unit 270 forward. It penetrates back and forth between the lower plate passage port 116 and the door frame base 110 near the left end of the front view so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the through hole 111, so that the through ball passage 273 of the foul cover unit 270 faces forward. The dish passage port 117, the glass unit mounting portion 118 into which the glass frame 191 of the glass unit 190 is inserted, and the door frame base 110 on both the left and right sides, which are recessed from the rear surface to the front along the inner circumference of the through port 111. It is provided with a speaker insertion port 119 that penetrates back and forth in the corner and through which the rear end of the upper speaker 573 of the door frame top unit 570 is inserted.

[3-1b. Reinforcement unit]
The reinforcing unit 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31 and 33 and the like. The reinforcing unit 130 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 to reinforce the door frame base 110 and increase the strength and rigidity of the door frame base 110 (door frame 3). The reinforcing unit 130 includes a left-right extending upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 attached along the upper side of the rear surface of the door frame base 110 and a left-right extending middle reinforcement attached to the lower side of the through hole 111 on the rear surface of the door frame base 110. The sheet metal 132, the vertically extending left reinforcing sheet metal 133 attached along the left side of the front view on the rear surface of the door frame base 110, and the vertically extending right reinforcement attached along the right side of the front view on the rear surface of the door frame base 110. It includes a sheet metal 134 and a locking locking portion 135 that is attached to the rear surface of the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 and locks the door frame hook 702 of the locking unit 700.

In the reinforcing unit 130, the left and right ends of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 are connected and fixed to the upper ends of the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 by screws, and the left end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected to the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 by screws. It is fixed. The right end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected and fixed to the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 via the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 described later. Therefore, the reinforcing unit 130 is formed in a frame shape by the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the like.

The upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the locking locking portion 135 of the reinforcing unit 130 are each formed by appropriately bending a metal plate. The middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 has a cutout portion 132a penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the upper plate passage port 117 of the door frame base 110.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the reinforcing unit 130 has a portion bent in the front-rear direction in each of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134. The strength and rigidity are enhanced by the part, and the intrusion of an illegal tool such as a piano wire or a flat-blade screwdriver from the outside is prevented.

[3-1c. Door frame side upper hinge member]
The door frame side upper hinge member 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The door frame side upper hinge member 140 is a pair of protrusions of the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 having a pair of projecting pieces 141a attached to the door frame base 110 and separated vertically, and the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141. A pair of projecting pieces 141a in the columnar door frame upper hinge pin 142 and the door frame upper hinge pin 142 that penetrate the piece 141a and whose upper end is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620. A disk-shaped flange member 143 attached at a position between the door frame and a hinge pin 142 on the door frame while being interposed between the flange member 143 and the lower protruding piece 141a of the pair of protruding pieces 141a. Is inserted, and is provided with a lock spring 144 that urges the hinge pin 142 on the door frame upward.

Although not shown, the hinge shaft bracket 141 on the door frame has a flat plate-shaped mounting piece that connects the rear ends of the pair of projecting pieces 141a, and the shape of the side view is open to the front. It is formed in a character shape. In the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141, a mounting piece connecting a pair of projecting pieces 141a to each other is mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base 110 by a screw.

In the door frame upper hinge pin 142, a portion (upper end) protruding upward from the upper protruding piece 141a is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620. Further, although not shown, the hinge pin 142 on the door frame has a portion protruding downward from the lower protruding piece 141a bent in the horizontal direction. The bent portion abuts on the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 141a to restrict the upward movement of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame.

The collar member 143 is an E-ring, and is inserted and held in a groove formed on the outer periphery of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame. The lock spring 144 is a coil spring through which the hinge pin 142 on the door frame can be inserted, and the upper end is in contact with the flange member 143 and the lower end is in contact with the lower protruding piece 141a. The lock spring 144 is interposed between the collar member 143 and the lower protruding piece 141a in a compressed state, and urges the hinge pin 142 on the door frame upward via the collar member 143. ..

The door frame upper hinge member 140 is in a state in which the door frame upper hinge pin 142 is urged upward by the lock spring 144, and the horizontally bent portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 protrudes downward. Further upward movement is restricted by abutting on the lower surface of the piece 141a. In this state, the upper end of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame protrudes above the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 141a by a predetermined amount.

The door frame side upper hinge member 140 has a horizontally bent portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 when the operator holds the portion and pulls the portion downward against the urging force of the lock spring 144. The upper hinge pin 142 can be moved downward as a whole, and the upper end of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame can be immersed below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 141a. Therefore, in the door frame side upper hinge member 140, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 from below or pulled out downward. Can be done. As a result, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140 is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620, so that the upper left end of the door frame 3 in front view can be inserted. , The hinge can be rotatably supported with respect to the main body frame 4.

Further, in the door frame side upper hinge member 140, the portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 supported by the pair of protruding pieces 141a of the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 is the door frame of the door frame side lower hinge member 150, which will be described later. It is supported coaxially with the lower hinge pin 152. As a result, the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame side lower hinge member 150 can rotate the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 in a good state.

[3-1d. Door frame side lower hinge member]
The door frame side lower hinge member 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32. The door frame side lower hinge member 150 is in the door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 having a flat plate-shaped extension piece 151a attached to the door frame base 110 and extending forward, and the door frame lower hinge shaft bracket. A cylindrical door frame lower hinge pin 152 (see FIGS. 21 and 22) projecting downward from the vicinity of the front end portion of the extension piece 151a is provided.

The hinge shaft bracket 151 under the door frame has a flat plate-shaped mounting piece (not shown) extending upward from the rear end of the horizontally extending flat plate-shaped extending piece 151a, and has an overall shape in a side view. Is formed in a substantially L shape. A mounting piece (not shown) is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 by screws in the door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151.

The lower end of the door frame lower hinge pin 152 is formed in a truncated cone shape in which the lower end thereof narrows toward the bottom. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is rotatably inserted from above into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 in the main body frame 4, which will be described later. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is arranged coaxially with the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140.

In the door frame side lower hinge member 150, the door frame 3 can be hinged with respect to the main body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 152 into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the main body frame side lower hinge member 640. Can be supported by.

[3-1e. Door frame left side decorative board]
The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32. The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 is attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110 on the left side of the through hole 111 when viewed from the front. The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 is a door extending vertically from a height below the speaker insertion port 119 on the left side of the front view of the door frame base 110 to a height near the center in the vertical direction of the through hole 111. The lower decoration on the left side of the door frame extends vertically from the height of the lower side of the upper decorative board 161 on the left side of the frame and the upper decorative board 161 on the left side of the door frame to approximately the same height as the lower end of the passage port 117 for the upper plate. The board 162 and the like are provided.

The door frame left side upper decorative substrate 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 162 of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are each provided with a plurality of LEDs 161a and 162a capable of irradiating light forward on the front surface. These LEDs 161a and 162a are full-color LEDs.

The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 is located behind the door frame left side unit 530, which will be described later, in a state where the door frame 3 is assembled, and has a plurality of (mounted) LEDs 161a and 162a provided on the front surface. The left unit decorative lens member of the door frame left side unit 530 can be light-emitting and decorated by appropriately emitting light.

[3-1f. Glass unit mounting member]
The glass unit mounting member 170 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 31 (b) and the like. The glass unit mounting member 170 is rotatably mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110, and is for mounting the glass unit 190 detachably. The glass unit mounting member 170 has a disk-shaped base 171 that is rotatably mounted around an axis extending back and forth on the rear side of the door frame base 110, and a rod-shaped protrusion from the base 171 in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. It has a protruding portion 172 and a protruding portion 172.

The glass unit mounting member 170 is rotatably mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base 110 at a portion outside the pair of speaker insertion ports 119 and outside the glass unit mounting portion 118, respectively.

The glass unit mounting member 170 is in a state in which the protruding portion 172 is rotated so as to project upward from the base portion 171 so that the protruding portion 172 is outside the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110 when viewed from the rear. In the positioned state, the glass unit 190 can be inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, or the glass unit 190 can be removed from the glass unit mounting portion 118.

When the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the protruding portion 172 protrudes downward from the base 171 in a state where the glass unit 190 is inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, the protruding portion 172 becomes glass. The glass unit 190 can be attached to the door frame base 110 in a state where it comes into contact with the rear side of the attachment piece 191a of the unit 190 and the rearward movement of the upper portion of the glass unit 190 is restricted.

Since the protruding portion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170 protrudes from the disk-shaped base 171 that is rotatably mounted on the door frame base 110, the center of gravity of the glass unit mounting member 170 is located in the protruding portion 172. .. From this, in a state where the glass unit mounting member 170 can rotate freely, the protruding portion 172 is stable in a state of protruding downward from the base portion 171. Then, in the glass unit mounting member 170, when the protruding portion 172 is in the rotational position protruding downward from the base portion 171, the protruding portion 172 regulates the backward movement of the glass unit 190, so that the glass unit is mounted. Even if vibration or the like acts on the member 170, the entire protrusion 172 does not rotate upward from the base 171 and the restriction on the rearward movement of the glass unit 190 is naturally lifted. No.

When removing the glass unit 190 from the door frame base 110, the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the protruding portion 172 projects upward from the base 171 so that the protruding portion 172 is mounted on the glass unit 190 mounting piece 191a. By moving the glass unit 190 to the outside, the upper side of the glass unit 190 can be moved to the rear, and the glass unit 190 can be removed from the door frame base 110.

[3-1 g. Handle mounting member]
The handle mounting member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The handle mounting member 180 is for mounting the handle unit 300 on the front surface of the door frame base 110. As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the handle mounting member 180 has a cylindrical tubular portion 181 extending in the front-rear direction and an outward direction perpendicular to the axis of the tubular portion 181 from the rear end of the tubular portion 181. An annular flange portion 182 that extends, and a plurality of flange portions 182 that project into the tubular portion 181 and extend over the entire axial length of the tubular portion 181 and are arranged at unequal intervals with respect to the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 181. In this example, it is provided with three) ridges 183, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 184 arranged in the circumferential direction of the cylinder portion 181 by connecting the outer peripheral surface of the cylinder portion 181 and the front surface of the flange portion 182. ..

The handle mounting member 180 is mounted on the handle mounting seat surface 112 with screws in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 182 is in contact with the front surface of the handle mounting seat surface 112 on the door frame base 110.

The inner diameter of the tubular portion 181 is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 301a of the handle base 301 in the handle unit 300. One of the three ridges 183 is provided on the upper side in the tubular portion 181 and the other two are provided on the lower side in the tubular portion 181. These three ridges 183 are formed at positions corresponding to the three grooves 301c in the handle base 301. Therefore, the handle mounting member 180 can insert the base portion 301a of the handle base 301 into the tubular portion 181 only when the three ridges 183 and the three groove portions 301c of the handle base 301 are aligned with each other. The rotation position of the handle base 301 (handle unit 300) can be regulated with respect to the door frame base 110.

Since the axis of the cylinder portion 181 extends vertically to the rear surface of the flange portion 182, the handle mounting member 180 can be attached to the inclined handle mounting seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 to form the cylinder portion. The axis of 181 is tilted so as to extend to the front right, and the handle unit 300 can be attached to the door frame base 110 in the same tilted state.

[3-1h. Glass unit]
The glass unit 190 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The glass unit 190 closes the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110 so that the rear can be seen from the front. The glass unit 190 has a frame-shaped glass frame 191 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 and can be attached to the glass unit mounting portion 118, and the glass frame 191 is closed and the outer periphery is a glass frame. It comprises two transparent glass plates 192 attached to 191. The two glass plates 192 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 191 respectively, and are separated from each other in the front-rear direction so as to form a space between them (see FIG. 26 and the like).

The glass frame 191 includes a pair of mounting pieces 191a extending outward in a flat plate shape from a position below the upper left and right corners in the front view, and a band extending downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. It has a plate-shaped locking piece 191b and. The mounting piece 191a of the glass frame 191 can be brought into contact with the protruding portion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170. The locking piece 191b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 110 and the intermediate reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 (see FIG. 26).

In the glass unit 190, the locking piece 191b of the glass frame 191 is inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 from the rear side of the door frame base 110. , The front end of the glass frame 191 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated, and the protruding portion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170 is brought into contact with the mounting piece 191a of the glass frame 191. It is attached to the door frame base 110 by being brought into contact with the rear surface.

When the glass unit 190 is removed from the door frame base 110, it can be removed by the reverse procedure of the above. As a result, the glass unit 190 can be attached to and detached from the door frame base 110.

[3-1i. Security cover]
The security cover 200 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The security cover 200 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 so as to cover the lower portion of the rear surface of the glass unit 190, and is made of a transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 200 is arranged so as to be separated from each other to the left and right by a flat plate-shaped main body 201 having an outer periphery formed in a predetermined shape and a flat plate-shaped rear projecting piece 202 protruding rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the main body 201. It is provided with a pair of locking pieces 203 that protrude forward from the main body 201 and are lockable on the rear side of the door frame base 110.

The main body 201 of the security cover 200 is formed so that the lower end thereof protrudes downward from the lower end of the glass unit 190 when attached to the door frame base 110. Further, the upper end of the main body 201 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5a in the game board 5 in a state where the upper end is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body 201 is formed in a shape along a part of the inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000 described later, an out guide part 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005. The rails are formed so as not to protrude into the game area 5a when assembled in the pachinko machine 1.

The rear projecting piece 202 is formed over substantially the entire circumference of the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 201. Therefore, the crime prevention cover 200 is formed in a shallow box shape that is opened rearward by the main body portion 201 and the rear projecting piece 202, and has high strength and rigidity. Further, as shown in FIG. 33, the rear projecting piece 202 projects rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 201, which is different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 201. The rear projecting piece 202 projecting rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 201 is formed along a part of the outer rail 1001 in the front component 1000 of the game board 5 in a state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. ing.

The rear projecting piece 202 is not formed at a portion of the game board 5 located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in a state of being assembled on the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the game ball (the game ball launched by the ball launching device 680) passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 does not come into contact with the rear projecting piece 202 of the security cover 200, and is inside the game area 5a. It does not hinder the driving of the game ball into the ball.

The pair of locking pieces 203 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110. As a result, the security cover 200 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base 110.

When the security cover 200 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 201 is in contact with the rear surface of the glass unit 190 (the rear end of the glass frame 191), and the portion protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 201 is formed. The removed rear projecting piece 202 is in a state of being inserted into the security recess 10008 of the front component 1000, which will be described later. Further, the security cover 200 is in a state in which the rear projecting piece 202 projecting rearward from the lower side of the main body 201 projects rearward from the front surface of the front component 1000 so as to come into contact with the lower surface of the front component 1000. .. As a result, the space between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projecting piece 202 of the security cover 200 and the security recess 1008 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to enter the game area 5a from below the front surface of the board 5 through between the security cover 200 and the front component 1000, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 202 and the security recess 1008. , It is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

[3-1j. Open / close cylinder unit]
The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is attached from the rear side to the cylinder mounting portion 113 located between the through hole 111 and the handle mounting seat surface 112 near the right end of the door frame base 110 in the front view, and cooperates with the locking unit 700 described later. It works and is used for opening and closing the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and opening and closing the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4.

The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 has a cylindrical cylinder lock 211 having a key hole 211a on the front surface and extending forward and backward, and a locking unit for rotating a key attached to the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 and inserted into the key hole 211a. It includes a rotation transmission member 212 that transmits to the key cylinder 710 of 700, and a cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 that mounts the cylinder lock 211 to the door frame base 110 (reinforcing unit 130).

The cylinder lock 211 can rotate the key by inserting the corresponding key (not shown) into the key hole 211a, and the corresponding key can be either clockwise or counterclockwise when viewed from the front. It can also be rotated by a predetermined angle in the direction of.

The rotation transmission member 212 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear (specifically, a conical cylinder whose diameter increases toward the rear), and faces forward from the rear end to positions facing each other across the central axis. It has a pair of notched portions 212a that are notched. The rotation transmission member 212 is formed so that the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from behind, and the protrusion of the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted into the pair of notches 212a. As a result, the rotation of the rotation transmission member 212 (the key inserted into the key hole 211a of the cylinder lock 211) can be transmitted to the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 to rotate the key cylinder 710.

The cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 is formed by bending a single metal plate, and is formed in a convex shape in which the shape in a plan view protrudes forward. More specifically, the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 has a rectangular flat plate-shaped front plate portion 213a extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a pair of side plate portions 213b extending rearward from both the left and right sides of the front plate portion 213a. And a pair of mounting plate portions 213c extending in a rectangular shape in a direction away from each other from the rear side of each of the pair of side plate portions 213b. The front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 is penetrated by the cylinder lock 211 from the rear at a position substantially central in the vertical direction, and the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 is attached to the rear surface of the front plate portion 213a. In the pair of mounting plate portions 213c of the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213, the mounting plate portion 213c on the left side in the front view is attached to the right end portion of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 in the reinforcing unit 130, and the mounting plate portion 213c on the right side in the front view is the reinforcing unit 130. It is attached to the right reinforcing sheet metal 134. As a result, the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 connects the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 of the reinforcing unit 130.

When the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the front end of the cylinder lock 211 protruding forward from the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 is a cylinder insertion hole from the rear side of the door frame base 110. It is inserted through 114 and protrudes forward of the door frame base 110, and the front plate portion 213a and the pair of side plate portions 213b of the cylinder mounting plate metal 213 are housed in the box-shaped cylinder mounting portion 113 which is open to the rear. ing.

[3-1k. Ball feed unit]
The ball feeding unit 250 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 and 35. FIG. 34 (a) is a perspective view of the ball feed unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 34 (b) is a perspective view of the ball feed unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 35A is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 35B is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit after removing the rear case and the fraud prevention member. The ball feeding unit 250 can supply the game balls supplied from the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 to the ball launcher 680 one by one, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 can be used as the upper plate balls. It can be pulled out to the lower plate by operating the pull-out button 327.

In the ball feed unit 250, the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 were supplied through the upper plate ball feed port 323d of the plate unit base 323 and the ball feed opening 115 of the door frame base 110 and penetrated in the front-rear direction. A box-shaped front cover 251 having an entrance 251a and a ball outlet 251b that opens below the entrance 251a and whose rear is open, and a box in which the rear end of the front cover 251 is closed and the front is open. A rear cover 252 having a hitting ball supply port 252a for supplying a game ball that has entered from the entrance 251a of the front cover 251 penetrating in the front-rear direction to the ball launcher 680, a rear cover 252, and a front cover. A ball pulling member 253 that is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between 251 and has a partition portion 253a that separates the entrance 251a and the ball pulling port 251b on the rear side of the front cover 251. , The game balls on the partition portion 253a of the ball removing member 253 are sent one by one to the hit ball supply port 252a of the rear cover 252, and can rotate around the axis extending in the vertical direction between the front cover 251 and the rear cover 252. The ball feed member 254 supported by the ball feed member 254 and the ball feed solenoid 255 for rotating the ball feed member 254 are provided.

In the ball feed unit 250, as shown in the figure, the ball feed member 254 is arranged on the right side of the entrance 251a, and the ball feed member 253 is on the left side of the ball feed member 254. Ball feed solenoids 255 are arranged on the right side, respectively.

The front cover 251 of the ball feeding unit 250 is provided with an arc-shaped slit 251c formed concentrically with respect to the rotation center of the ball pulling member 253 on the left side of the ball pulling port 251b in front view, and the slit 251c is provided. The working rod 253c of the ball removing member 253, which will be described later, extends forward. Further, the front cover 251 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 251a, and when the door frame 3 is assembled, the front cover 251 is upstream of the ball feed taxiway 323e and the ball removal taxiway 323f of the dish unit base 323. It is formed so as to close the portion that is open to the rear of the end side from the rear side.

The ball pulling member 253 has a partition portion 253a whose upper surface is lowered toward the ball feed member 254 and a ball of the partition portion 253a, which is below the entrance 251a and between the entrance 251a and the ball ejection port 251b. It extends downward from the end opposite to the feed member 254, bends in a dogleg shape from the middle of the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 251b, and rotates around the axis whose lower end extends in the front-rear direction. From the side surface of the rotating rod portion 253b that is movably supported, the rod-shaped operating rod 253c that protrudes forward from the upper end of the rotating rod portion 253b, and the rotating rod portion 253b below the operating rod 253c. It is provided with a weight portion 253d projecting to the side opposite to the partition portion 253a. The working rod 253c of the ball removing member 253 is formed so as to project forward through the arc-shaped slit 251c formed in the front cover 251 (see FIG. 34 (a)). The actuating rod 253c comes into contact with the upper end of the actuating transmission unit 327a operated by pressing the upper plate ball removing button 327 of the plate unit 320 via the ball feed opening 115 of the door frame base 110.

The ball feeding member 254 has a fan-shaped blocking portion 254a centered on a rotation axis extending in the vertical direction toward the partition portion 253a of the entrance 251a and the ball pulling member 253, and the rear end of the blocking portion 254a. It is provided with a ball holding portion 254b recessed in an arc shape toward the center of rotation axis, and a rod-shaped rod-shaped rod portion 254c extending downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 254b. The blocking portion 254a and the ball holding portion 254b of the ball feeding member 254 are formed adjacent to each other within an angle range of about 180 ° about the center of rotation axis. Further, the ball holding portion 254b of the ball feeding member 254 has a size capable of holding one game ball. The ball feed member 254 rotates around the rotation shaft core by moving the rod portion 254c arranged at a position eccentric to the rotation shaft core in the left-right direction by driving the ball feed solenoid 255.

The ball feed member 254 has a supply position in which the blocking portion 254a faces the direction of the partition portion 253a and at the same time the ball holding portion 254b faces the direction in which the ball holding portion 254b communicates with the hit ball supply port 252a, and the ball holding portion 254b faces the direction of the partition portion 253a. It is designed to rotate with and from the holding position facing toward. When the ball feed member 254 is in the supply position, the game ball held by the ball holding portion 254b is supplied to the ball launching device 680 from the hit ball supply port 252a, and the game ball enters the partition portion 253a from the entrance 251a. However, the blocking portion 254a blocks the movement of the ball to the ball holding portion 254b (ball hitting port 252a) side, and the ball stays on the partition portion 253a. On the other hand, when the ball feed member 254 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 254b faces the direction of the partition portion 253a, and the end portion of the ball holding portion 254b on the rod portion 254c side closes the ball hitting supply port 252a. , Only one game ball on the partition portion 253a is held in the ball holding portion 254b.

Further, the ball feed unit 250 has a ball feed operating rod 256 whose tip swings in the vertical direction by driving (energizing) the ball feed solenoid 255, and a ball feed operating rod 256 that swings back and forth due to the movement of the tip swinging in the vertical direction. It includes a ball feed crank 257 that rotates around an axis extending in the direction and rotates the ball feed member 254 around an axis extending in the vertical direction. The ball feed crank 257 has an engaging portion 257a extending in the left-right direction so as to be able to engage with the vertically moving tip of the ball feed operating rod 256, and a side of the engaging portion 257a that engages with the ball feed operating rod 256. A shaft portion 257b that is arranged on the opposite side and is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 251 and the rear cover 252, and a shaft portion 257b that extends upward from the shaft portion 257b and feeds the ball. The member 254 includes a transmission portion 257c that engages with a rod-shaped rod portion 254c (see FIG. 35B) that protrudes downward from a position eccentric with respect to the center of rotation.

The ball feed unit 250 transmits the movement of the ball feed operation rod 256, which swings by the drive of the ball feed solenoid 255 that moves forward and backward in the vertical direction by the ball feed operation rod 256 and the ball feed crank 257, to transmit the ball feed member 254. It can be rotated. When the ball feed solenoid 255 is not driven (normal time), the ball feed operating rod 256 is separated from the lower end of the ball feed solenoid 255 and the tip is positioned downward. In this state, the ball feed member 254 is in the supply position. It will be in the state of being located in. Further, when the ball feed solenoid 255 is driven, the ball feed operating rod 256 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feed solenoid 255, the tip is positioned upward, and the ball feed member 254 rotates to the holding position. That is, when the ball feed solenoid 255 is driven (ON state), the ball feed member 254 receives one game ball, and when the drive of the ball feed solenoid 255 is released (OFF state), the ball feed member 254 is released. The game ball received by the solenoid can be sent (supplied) to the ball launcher 680 side. The drive of the ball feed solenoid 255 in the ball feed unit 250 is controlled by the launch control unit (not shown) of the payout control board 951 in synchronization with the drive control of the launch solenoid 682.

Further, the ball removing member 253 rotatably supported by the ball feeding unit 250 is subjected to a moment such that the weight portion 253d rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, but the ball feeding member 253 projects forward. The operation rod 253c is brought into contact with the upper end of the operation transmission unit 327a operated by the pressing operation of the upper plate ball removal button 327 of the plate unit 320, so that its rotation is restricted. The partition portion 253a of the above partitions between the entrance 251a and the ball outlet 251b, so that the game ball does not invade the ball outlet 251b side.

Then, when the player presses the upper plate ball removal button 327 of the plate unit 320 downward, the upper plate ball removal slider 327b slides downward together with the operation transmission unit 327a and moves downward of the operation transmission unit 327a. Along with this, the operating plate 253c also moves relatively downward. When the operating rod 253c moves downward together with the operation transmitting portion 327a, the ball pulling member 253 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the partition between the entrance 251a and the ball pulling port 251b by the partition portion 253a is released. Will be done. As a result, the game ball that has entered from the entrance 251a is discharged from the ball outlet 251b to the ball extraction guide path 323f of the plate unit 320, and is discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 322 via the lower plate ball supply port 323c. be able to.

The upper plate ball removal slider 327b on which the operation transmission portion 327a with which the operation rod 253c of the ball removal member 253 abuts is formed is urged upward by the upper plate ball removal spring 327c, so that it is on the partition portion 253a. Even if the game ball is vigorously supplied, the impact can be absorbed by the upper plate ball pulling spring 327c via the operating rod 253c, and it is possible to prevent the ball pulling member 253 and the like from being damaged. , It is possible to prevent the game ball from bouncing off at the partition portion 253a.

Further, the ball feeding unit 250 is formed with a rectangular mounting recess 252b (see FIG. 35B and the like) that is recessed forward to the upper right in the rear view of the ball hitting supply port 252a in the rear cover 252, and the ball feeding unit 250 is formed. The fraud prevention member 260 is mounted in the mounting recess 252b. The fraud prevention member 260 of the ball feed unit 250 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the attachment recess 252b of the rear cover 252 from the rear side.

The fraud prevention member 260 is formed in a rectangular shape in which the outer shape of the front view extends to the left and right, and the upper piece portion 261 and the upper piece portion 261 which are separated vertically at substantially the center in the vertical direction within a predetermined distance from the right side to the left. The lower piece portion 262 and the inclined portion 263 formed in a C chamfer shape on the tip side (right end side in the front view) of the sides of the upper piece portion 261 and the lower piece portion 262 facing each other are provided. .. The upper piece 261 of the fraud prevention member 260 is bent so that the right end of the front view projects rearward with respect to the general surface of the fraud prevention member 260. The lower piece portion 262 extends on the same surface as the general surface of the fraud prevention member 260. As a result, in a plan view, the upper piece portion 261 and the lower piece portion 262 form a V-shaped groove that expands toward the right.

The fraud prevention member 260 is attached to the mounting recess 252b of the rear cover 252 so that the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece portion 261 and the lower piece portion 262 communicates with the inside of the ball striking supply port 252a. Become.

According to the fraud prevention member 260, a fraudulent game ball to which a string is attached is driven into the game area 5a from the upper plate 321 via the ball feeding unit 250 by the ball launcher 680, and is attached to the fraudulent game ball. When a fraudulent act such as manipulating a string to move an illegal game ball in and out of the first starting port 2002 or the like is performed, the momentum of the illegal game ball launched (struck) by the ball launcher 680 causes fraud. A string attached to the game ball was inserted between the upper piece 261 and the lower piece 262, and then the V-shape formed by the upper piece 261 and the lower piece 262 became narrower. It can be cut depending on the part, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts using a fraudulent game ball with a string attached.

[3-1l. Foul cover unit]
The foul cover unit 270 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 36 to 38. FIG. 36A is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 36B is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 37 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit viewed from the front with the lid member removed, and FIG. 37 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit viewed from the rear with the lid member removed. Further, FIG. 38 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed.

As shown in the figure, the foul cover unit 270 includes a shallow box-shaped unit main body 271 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 and the front side open, and a flat plate-shaped lid member attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271. 272 and. The foul cover unit 270 penetrates back and forth in the upper left corner of the front view, and is a penetrating ball that communicates the normal taxiway 861 of the lower full tank path unit 860 of the main body frame 4 and the upper dish ball supply port 323a of the dish unit 320. A full-tank ball receiving port 274 that opens rearward on the lower right side of the passage 273 and the through-ball passage 273 in the front view and can communicate with the full-tan taxiway 862 of the lower full-tank ball path unit 860 of the main body frame 4. And have.

Further, the foul cover unit 270 does not reach the game area 5a even though it is launched by the ball launching device 680 of the main body frame 4 because the foul cover unit 270 opens upward on the right side of the front view of the full ball receiving port 274. The foul ball socket 275 that receives the foul ball, and the game ball that is open forward near the lower right corner of the front view and is received by the full tank socket 274 and the foul ball socket 275 are forward. It is provided with a ball discharge port 276 that discharges to and communicates with the lower plate ball supply port 323c of the dish unit 320.

Further, the foul cover unit 270 is formed between the full tank ball receiving port 274 and the foul ball receiving port 275 and the ball discharging port 276 by the unit main body 271 and the lid member 272, and can store a predetermined amount of game balls. A storage passage 277 having a large size, a flat plate-shaped movable piece 278 that constitutes a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 277 and whose lower end is rotatably attached to the unit main body 271, and a movable piece. It includes a full tank detection sensor 279 that detects rotation of the 278 in the direction away from the storage passage 277, and a spring 280 that urges the movable piece 278 toward the center of the storage passage 277.

When the lower plate 322 of the plate unit 320 is filled with the game balls and the game balls are not discharged from the ball discharge port 276 to the lower plate 322 side, the foul cover unit 270 has a certain number in the storage passage 277. The game ball can be stored. Then, when a certain number of game balls are stored in the storage passage 277, the upper end of the movable piece 278 moves in the direction away from the storage passage 277 against the urging force of the spring 280 due to the weight of the game balls. The movable piece 278 rotates, and the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 279. As a result, it can be determined that the lower plate 322 is full with the game balls. Therefore, when the full tank detection sensor 279 detects that the lower plate 322 is full, the payout of the game balls is stopped and the payout of the game balls is stopped. It is possible to notify the player, the staff of the game hall, and the like to that effect, and urge the player to eliminate the fullness of the lower plate 322.

Further, the foul cover unit 270 is attached to the lower side of the penetrating ball passage 273 on the rear side of the unit main body 271, and the taxiway opening / closing door of the lower full tank path unit 860 in the payout unit 800 described later in the main body frame 4. The door opening / closing contact portion 281 to which the actuating protrusion 863e of the 863 can come into contact is provided (see FIG. 112). The door opening / closing contact portion 281 is inclined so as to move forward as the rear surface moves downward. The door opening / closing contact portion 281 is formed so that when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the operating protrusion 863e of the taxiway opening / closing door 863 comes into contact with the main body frame 4. When the actuating protrusion 863e of the taxiway opening / closing door 863 comes into contact with the door opening / closing contact portion 281, the taxiway opening / closing door 863 rotates and the downstream ends (front opening) of the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862. ) Can be released.

[3-2. Handle unit]
The handle unit 300 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40. 39 (a) is a front view of the handle unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the handle unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 39 (b) is a perspective view of the handle unit viewed from the back. Further, FIG. 40A is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 40B is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. The handle unit 300 is attached to the handle mounting member 180 of the door frame base unit 100, and can be operated by the player to drive the game ball in the upper plate 321 into the game area 5a of the game board 5. Is.

The handle unit 300 covers the handle base 301 attached to the tubular portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180 in the door frame base unit 100, the handle 302 rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 301, and the front end side of the handle 302. It is provided with a handle cover 303 that can be attached to the handle base 301.

Further, the handle unit 300 is rotatably attached to the outer periphery by the inner base 304 attached to the front side of the handle base 301 on the rear side of the handle 302 and the handle 302 attached to the front end and rotatably attached by the inner base 304 and the handle base 301. The handle base 301 and the inner have a shaft member 305 having a drive gear portion 305a, a transmission gear 306 meshing with the drive gear portion 305a of the shaft member 305, and a detection shaft 307a rotating integrally with the transmission gear 306. It includes a handle rotation detection sensor 307 sandwiched between the base and the base.

Further, the handle unit 300 is attached so that one end side is attached to the handle base 301 and the other end side is attached to the handle 302 so that the handle 302 is returned to the initial rotation position (rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). The steering wheel return spring 308 and the other end side are attached to the inner base 304 and the other end side are attached to the transmission gear 306. Auxiliary spring 309 urging in the direction, handle touch sensor 310 attached to handle base 301 behind the inner base 304, and the tip side from the left side of the outer peripheral surface of the front end of the handle base 301 from the left side to the outside. The single-shot button 311 that protrudes and the base end side is rotatably attached to the handle base 301 behind the inner base 304 so as to rotate around the axis, and the single-shot button 311 is attached to the handle base 301 by detecting the pressing operation. It is equipped with a single-shot button operation sensor 312.

The handle base 301 of the handle unit 300 is recessed from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base 301a extending in the front-rear direction, the disc-shaped front end 301b protruding radially from the front end of the base 301a, and the cylindrical base 301a. It also has three groove portions 301c that extend in the axial direction and are formed at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer diameter of the base portion 301a of the handle base 301 is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the tubular portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180. Further, the three groove portions 301c are formed at positions corresponding to the three ridges 183 of the tubular portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180. Therefore, with the three groove portions 301c aligned with the three ridges 183, the base portion 301a can be inserted into the tubular portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180, and the ridges 183 are formed in the three groove portions 301c, respectively. When inserted, the handle base 301 becomes unable to rotate relative to the handle mounting member 180.

The handle 302 has four first protrusions 302a, a second protrusion 302b, a third protrusion 302c, and a fourth protrusion 302d protruding outward from the outer peripheral surface in the circumferential direction, and a rotation shaft (shaft member 305). Two slits 302e extending in an arc shape as the center and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and protruding rearward from a position inside the rotation center with respect to the slit 302e, the other end side of the handle return spring 308 is locked. The locking protrusion 302f is provided.

The four first protrusions 302a, the second protrusion 302b, the third protrusion 302c, and the fourth protrusion 302d are provided in order in the clockwise direction in the front view. More specifically, the first protrusion 302a has a side surface in the front-view clockwise direction of the portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302, which bulges outward so as to bulge outward, and is the opposite side around the anti-city decision. The side surface in the direction of is dented (cut) so as to curve inward. In the second protrusion 302b, the most protruding portion from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302 is separated from the most protruding portion of the first protrusion 302a in the clockwise direction at a rotation angle of about 85 degrees, and the second protrusion 302b is separated from the first protrusion 302a. It protrudes slightly low. The side surface of the second protrusion 302b in the clockwise direction of the front view of the most protruding portion bulges outward, and the side surface in the direction around the anti-city decision, which is the opposite side, curves inward. It is recessed so as to be formed in a shape similar to the first protrusion 302a.

In the third protrusion 302c, the portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302 is separated from the most protruding portion of the second protrusion 302b in the clockwise direction at a rotation angle of about 70 degrees, and the first protrusion 302a It protrudes at about half the height. The side surfaces of the third protrusion 302c are inclined substantially linearly on both sides, and the side surface in the clockwise direction is inclined more gently than the side surface in the counterclockwise direction on the opposite side. In the fourth protrusion 302d, the most protruding portion from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302 is separated from the most protruding portion of the third protrusion 302c in the clockwise direction at a rotation angle of about 55 degrees, and the fourth protrusion 302d is separated from the first protrusion 302a. It protrudes slightly higher. The fourth protrusion 302d has side surfaces on both sides that are inclined in a substantially straight line, and is formed in a substantially isosceles triangle.

The handle cover 303 has three mounting bosses 303a whose front center is round and bulges forward and projects rearward. The three mounting bosses 303a penetrate the slit 302e of the handle 302 from the front and are mounted on the front surface of the handle base 301. Since the mounting boss 303a of the handle cover 303 penetrates the slit 302e of the handle 302, the mounting boss 303a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 302e, which regulates the rotation angle of the handle 302. In this example, the handle 302 can be rotated within a rotation angle of about 120 degrees.

The handle unit 300 is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 via the handle mounting member 180. The handle mounting seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 is inclined so that the right end side is located behind the left end side in a plan view and faces the outside (open side). Therefore, the handle mounting member 180 is attached. The handle unit 300 attached via the slingshot unit 300 is also tilted outward in a plan view (in other words, its tip is tilted toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). It is attached and fixed to the door frame 3. As a result, the player can easily grip the handle 302 of the handle unit 300 and perform the rotation operation without any discomfort.

The handle rotation detection sensor 307 of the handle unit 300 is a variable resistor, and when the handle 302 is rotated, the detection shaft 307a of the handle rotation detection sensor 307 rotates via the shaft member 305 and the transmission gear 306. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 307 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 307a, and the driving force of the launch solenoid 682 in the ball launcher 680 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 307. , The game ball is driven into the game area 5a with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 302.

The outer peripheral surfaces of the handle 302 and the handle cover 303 are conductively plated, and the handle touch sensor 310 detects the contact when the player comes into contact with the handle 302 or the like. Then, when the handle 302 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 310 is detecting the contact of the player, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 307 is received, and the firing solenoid has a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 302. The drive of 682 is controlled, and a game ball can be hit. That is, even if the player tries to drive the game ball into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 302 in some way without touching the handle 302, the launch solenoid 682 is not driven and the game ball can be driven. It is not possible. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from rotating the handle 302 in a manner different from the original one to play the game, and it is possible to reduce the load (burden) on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. ..

Further, in the handle unit 300, when the player presses the single-shot button 311 while the player is rotating the handle 302, the single-shot button operation sensor 312 detects the operation of the single-shot button 311 and the launch control unit of the payout control board 951 (illustrated). Is omitted) to stop the rotational drive of the firing solenoid 682. As a result, it is possible to temporarily stop the firing of the game ball without returning the rotation operation of the handle 302, and by releasing the pressing operation of the single-shot button 311 the driving before operating the single-shot button 311. The game ball can be hit into the game area 5a again with strength.

Further, the handle unit 300 includes four first protrusions 302a, second protrusions 302b, third protrusions 302c, and fourth protrusions 302d on the handle 302, and rotates the handle 302 most in the clockwise direction in the front view. When the game ball is driven into the game area 5a most strongly (so-called "right-handed"), the fourth protrusion 302d is the position of the first protrusion 302a when the handle 302 is not rotated. By changing the handle 302 with the fourth protrusion 302d as the first protrusion 302a, the player can maintain the handle 302 in the "right-handed" position in a comfortable state. It is possible to reduce the feeling of fatigue of the person and suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

[3-3. Overall configuration of the dish unit]
The dish unit 320 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 45. FIG. 41 (a) is a perspective view of the plate unit of the door frame viewed from the front right, and FIG. 41 (b) is a perspective view of the plate unit viewed from the front left. Further, FIG. 42A is a perspective view of the dish unit viewed from the upper right rear, and FIG. 42B is a perspective view of the dish unit viewed from the lower left rear. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. FIG. 45 is an explanatory view showing an enlarged portion of the lower plate with the lower plate cover removed in the cross-sectional view of FIG. 28. The dish unit 320 is attached to a portion of the door frame base unit 100 below the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110, and the front surface bulges forward. An effect operation unit 400, which will be described later, is attached to the front surface of the plate unit 320.

The plate unit 320 contains an upper plate 321 for storing game balls for driving into the game area 5a, and a game ball arranged below the upper plate 321 and supplied from the upper plate 321 and the foul cover unit 270. It is provided with a lower plate 322 that can be stored.

The plate unit 320 is attached to the flat plate-shaped plate unit base 323 attached to the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 and the upper part of the front surface of the plate unit base 323, and the left side from the center of the left and right bulges forward greatly. The upper plate body 324 forming the upper plate 321 and the lower plate main body 325 which is attached to the left side of the center of the left and right at the lower part of the front surface of the plate unit base 323 and bulges forward greatly to form the lower plate 322. And a plate unit cover 326 attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 323 so as to cover the front side of the upper plate main body 324 and the lower plate main body 325.

Further, the plate unit 320 is a front view of the upper plate ball removal button 327 and the upper plate ball removal button 327 which are attached so that they can be pressed from above on the right side of the front view of the upper plate 321 on the upper surface of the plate unit cover 326. The ball lending button 328 attached to the upper surface of the plate unit cover 326 on the right side, the return button 329 attached to the upper surface of the plate unit cover 326 on the right side when viewed from the front of the ball lending button 328, and the ball lending button 328. And the ball rental display unit 330 attached to the upper surface of the plate unit cover 326 behind the return button 329, and the plate front upper decoration portion 326b on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 in front of the upper plate 321. The effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332, and the lower plate ball removal button 333 that protrudes forward from the front of the plate unit cover 326 in front of the lower plate 322 and is attached so that it can be pressed from the front. I have.

[3-3a. Upper plate]
The upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 and 44 and the like. The upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 is formed by the plate unit base 323 and the upper plate main body 324, and the left side side bulges forward more than the center of the left and right sides of the front view, and is formed in the shape of a container opened upward. Has been done. In the upper plate 321 (upper plate main body 324), a portion of about 1/3 from the left end to the right with respect to the width of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction bulges most forward. The front end of the upper plate 321 recedes backward from the most bulging portion toward the right in the front view, and a guide passage portion 321a having a depth in the front-rear direction slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball is formed. There is. The entire bottom surface of the upper plate 321 including the guide passage portion 321a is inclined so that the right end side is lowered, and the front view right end side of the guide passage portion 321a is the upper surface of the plate unit cover 326 (upper plate ball removal button 327). ) (See FIG. 44).

The upper plate 321 is assembled on the plate unit base 323, and the bottom surface of the upper plate 321 is a game ball from a position lower than the upper plate ball supply port 323a of the plate unit base 323 with respect to the upper end of the upper plate ball feed port 323d. It is inclined so that it becomes slightly lower than the outer diameter of. As a result, the game balls discharged forward from the upper plate ball supply port 323a can be received and stored in the upper plate 321 and the received game balls can be stored in the upper plate 321a from the right end side of the guide passage portion 321a. It can be supplied to the ball feed port 323d.

As described above, the upper plate 321 is formed so that the bottom surface of the guide passage portion 321a whose depth in the front-rear direction becomes narrower becomes lower toward the lower side. That is, a part of the upper plate 321 protrudes from above into the mounting space 326j of the plate unit cover 326 to which the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) described later is attached. Therefore, in the upper plate 321, a sufficient amount of storage of the game ball can be secured. The upper plate 321 (upper plate main body 324) protrudes into the mounting space 326j of the plate unit cover 326 so as not to come into contact with the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A).

The guide passage portion 321a is provided with a metal ground fitting 321b that is electrically grounded in the pachinko machine 1, and when the game ball comes into contact with (rolls), it becomes a game ball. The charged static electricity can be removed.

[3-3b. Lower plate]
The lower plate 322 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 45 and the like. The lower plate 322 is arranged below the upper plate 321 and on the left side of the center of the plate unit 320 (door frame 3) in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The lower plate 322 is formed in a container shape capable of storing game balls, and is attached to a lower plate ball extraction hole 322a that penetrates vertically through the bottom wall portion 325a and allows the game balls to be discharged, and a plate unit cover 326. It is provided with a relief portion 322b for avoiding contact with the effect effect operation unit 400 (second effect effect operation unit 400A). The relief portion 322b of the lower plate 322 is formed so that the right front corner is recessed in an arc shape toward the rear.

The lower plate 322 has a lower plate main body 325 whose upper and rear sides are open, a lower plate cover portion 326k of a plate unit cover 326 that covers the upper side from the left end side of the lower plate main body 325, and an open lower plate main body 325. The dish unit is formed by a dish unit base 323 that closes the rear side, and a lower dish cover 340 that covers the upper side of a portion protruding into the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a in the lower dish body 325. It faces outward from the lower plate opening 326d of the cover 326. As shown in FIGS. 28 and 45, the lower plate 322 is a trapezoid in which the outer peripheral shape in a plan view is a quadrangle extending to the left and right, and the front side of the quadrangle is the base and the upper side shorter than the bottom is arranged on the front side. It is formed in a shape that looks like a combination of and, and the left and right sides of the trapezoid that extend diagonally are curved so as to be recessed rearward. The lower plate 322 is formed so that the width in the left-right direction increases from the front to the rear in a plan view.

As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, the lower plate main body 325 is formed in a container shape with the upper and rear sides open. The lower plate main body 325 has a flat bottom wall portion 325a, a main body standing wall portion 325b extending upward from the outer peripheral end excluding the rear end side of the bottom wall portion 325a, and a game ball passing through the bottom wall portion 325a. It is provided with a lower plate ball extraction hole 322a that penetrates up and down in a possible size. The outer peripheral shape of the bottom wall portion 325a is a quadrangle extending to the left and right, and the front side of the quadrangle is the base, the upper side shorter than the bottom is arranged on the front side, and the left and right sides extending diagonally are curved so as to be recessed rearward. It is formed in a shape that looks like a combination of a trapezoid and a trapezoid. The bottom wall portion 325a (upper surface) is inclined so as to be lowered toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. The main body standing wall portion 325b rises upward from the bottom wall portion 325a at a height of 2 to 5 times the diameter of the game ball. The lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is formed at a position to the right of the center of the lower plate main body 325 (bottom wall portion 325a) in the left-right direction. In the lower plate main body 325, the curved portion of the front right corner of the front view on the bottom wall portion 325a and the main body standing wall portion 325b corresponds to the relief portion 322b.

The lower plate cover 340 is formed so as to cover an approximately right half portion above the lower plate main body 325. As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, the lower plate cover 340 is abbreviated from the cover standing wall portion 340a rising upward from the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325 and the upper end of the cover standing wall portion 340a. It is provided with a horizontally extending ceiling portion 340b. The cover standing wall portion 340a rises from a portion of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325 from a part on the front side to the rear end on the right side. When the lower plate cover 340 is assembled to the plate unit 320, the rear ends of the cover standing wall portion 340a and the ceiling portion 340b are in contact with the front surface of the plate unit base 323. Further, the front end (left end side in the front side) of the cover standing wall portion 340a is in contact with the right end side of the lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326. Further, the left end of the ceiling portion 340b is in contact with the right end of the lower plate cover portion 326k of the plate unit cover 326. In the lower plate cover 340, the curved surface-shaped portion of the cover standing wall portion 340a and the portion diagonally extending between the cover standing wall portion 340a and the ceiling portion 340b on the rear side correspond to the relief portion 322b. There is.

The lower plate 322 is covered by the plate unit cover 326 (directing operation unit 400) from the vicinity of the left end of the front end to the right side of the portion extending shortly to the left and right on the front end side, and more than half of the lower plate 322 is the directing operation unit 400 in the front view. It is located behind. That is, the lower plate 322 is formed so that the right half wraps around the rear of the effect operation unit 400. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 45, the lower plate 322 includes the lower plate first region A1 (the crosshatch region in FIG. 45) located behind the lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326 described later, and the lower plate. Lower plate second region A2 (shaded in FIG. 45) located behind the opening 326d (the effect operation unit 400, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a in the plate unit cover 326, and the front end side of the lower plate cover 340). Area) and. In other words, the lower plate 322 has more than half of the storage area (corresponding to the storage area in the plan view, which is the combination of the lower plate first region A1 and the lower plate second region A2) in which the game balls can be stored. It is located behind the production operation unit 400. In FIG. 45, the area of the dotted line hatch is the remaining space (area) of the mounting space 326j in the dish unit cover 326.

In the lower plate 322, the lower plate ball supply port 323c of the plate unit base 323 forming the rear wall opens to the right side of the center of the rear wall in the left-right direction in the front view. More specifically, the lower plate ball supply port 323c of the lower plate 322 is the effect operation unit 400, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (right outside of the lower plate opening 326d) in the plate unit cover 326, and the front end of the lower plate cover 340. It is arranged in the lower plate second region A2 which is behind the side, etc. As a result, when the door frame 3 is viewed from the front, the lower plate ball supply port 323c cannot be seen from the player side through the lower plate opening 326d (see FIG. 19 and the like). Therefore, the lower plate 322 is formed so as to be scooped out from the lower plate opening 326d on the left side surface of the plate unit 320 (dish unit cover 326) that bulges forward toward the rear of the effect operation unit 400. The storage volume of the game ball is formed larger than the range that can be seen from the front. In other words, the lower plate 322 is formed larger in the lower plate second region A2 than in the lower plate first region A1. As a result, when the lower plate 322 is viewed from the outside (player side), more game balls can be stored in the lower plate 322 than it looks.

In the lower plate 322, the right half of the lower plate main body 325 in the left-right direction (lower plate second region A2) is, as shown in FIG. 41 (a), the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (mounting space 326j) of the plate unit cover 326. ), And the lower plate cover 340 covers the upper side of the portion of the lower plate main body 325 that protrudes into the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a. The lower plate cover 340 prevents the fingertips from touching the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) when the player inserts a finger into the lower plate 322 through the lower plate opening 326d. can do.

The lower plate 322 is provided with a lower plate ball extraction hole 322a penetrating vertically in front of the lower plate ball supply port 323c in the lower plate second region A2. The bottom surface of the lower plate 322 is inclined so as to be lowered toward the lower plate ball punching hole 322a. The lower plate ball removal hole 322a of the lower plate 322 is closed so as to be openable and closable by a lid member 334 operated by pressing the lower plate ball removal button 333. In the lower plate 322, in a normal state, the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is closed by the lid member 334, and the game ball can be stored in the lower plate 322. Then, when the lid member 334 is opened by pressing the lower plate ball removal button 333, the game ball in the lower plate 322 can be discharged from the lower plate ball removal hole 322a to the lower side of the plate unit 320.

The lower plate ball extraction hole 322a of the lower plate 322 is arranged in front (directly in front of) the lower plate ball supply port 323c of the plate unit base 323 forming the rear wall of the lower plate 322. Therefore, in the state of being assembled to the door frame 3, the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is located on the right side of the lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326 and behind the frame unit 415 in the effect operation unit 400. It is not visible from the player (front) side.

As described above, the lower plate 322 is formed in a shape in which the outer peripheral shape is a combination of a trapezoid with a narrowed front side on the front side of a quadrangle extending to the left and right, and the bottom surface is a lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. It is inclined so that it becomes lower toward. Therefore, in a state where the lid member 334 is opened and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is opened, the game ball supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c into the lower plate 322 is directly in front of the lower plate ball supply port 323c. It is immediately discharged downward from the open lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. Since the left end of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is located slightly to the left of the left end of the lower plate ball supply port 323c, the lower plate ball supply is provided when the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is open. The game ball supplied from the mouth 323c to the lower plate 322 does not directly flow to the area on the left side of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a in the lower plate 322, but is discharged from the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. Become.

On the other hand, since the right end of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is located to the left of the right end of the lower plate ball supply port 323c, the game supplied to the lower plate 322 from the vicinity of the right end of the lower plate ball supply port 323c. The sphere comes into contact with the portion of the main body standing wall portion 325b that forms the right standing wall of the lower plate 322. Since the standing wall on the right side of the lower plate 322 is curved diagonally with respect to the front-rear direction so as to face the direction of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, the game ball supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c is the game ball. When it comes into contact with an inclined portion, it reflects in the direction of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, and is discharged from the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a without going to the area on the left side of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. (See FIG. 45).

As described above, since the lower plate 322 of the present embodiment is formed so as to guide the game ball supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a In the open state, the game ball supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c does not enter the area on the left side of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a in the lower plate 322, and immediately from the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. It can be discharged downward (dollar box). As a result, if the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is left open, the player cannot see the game balls circulating on the lower plate 322, so that the lower plate 321 and the payout device 830 are used for paying out. It is possible to give the illusion that the game ball or the like is directly discharged to the dollar box, and by making it difficult for the game ball to feel the annoyance of passing through the lower plate 322, the player can play the game (the operation of driving the game ball). And directing images, etc.) can be devoted to suppressing the decline in interest.

Further, since the lower plate 322 of the present embodiment includes the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325 and the lower plate covers 340 and 340A extending upward from the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b, the lower plate 322 Even if the game ball supplied to the inside jumps up in the lower plate 322, it is possible to prevent the game ball from invading the mounting space 326j side from the lower plate 322, and the game ball in the lower plate 322 can be prevented. It is possible to prevent the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) from coming into contact with the rear side. Therefore, the game balls supplied in the lower plate 322 and the game balls stored in the lower plate 322 are prevented from coming into contact with or pressing against the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). It is possible to prevent the game ball from damaging the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A).

Further, since the lower plate 322 is provided with the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a in front of the lower plate ball supply port 323c, it is discharged from the lower plate ball supply port 323c when the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is open. Since the game ball can be directly entered into the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a and discharged downward (dollar box), it is difficult for the game ball to reach the front end side of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325. Can be done. Further, since the bottom wall portion 325a of the lower plate main body 325 near the front end of the lower plate 322 becomes higher toward the front, the game ball toward the front end side of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325 is inclined. By climbing the bottom surface, the moving speed of the game ball can be attenuated. Therefore, the impact when the game ball discharged from the lower plate ball supply port 323c into the lower plate 322 can reduce the impact when it comes into contact with the lower plate covers 340, 340A and the main body standing wall portion 325b, and damages them. It can be difficult.

In the present embodiment, the lid member 334 that closes the lower plate ball removal hole 322a may be interlocked with the upper plate ball removal button 327. As a result, when the upper plate ball removal button 327 is operated, the lid member 334 also moves and the lower plate ball removal hole 322a is opened, so that the game ball discharged from the upper plate 321 to the lower plate 322 is further removed from the lower plate ball. It will be discharged from the hole 322a to the lower dollar box. That is, when the upper plate ball removal button 327 is operated to remove the game ball from the upper plate 321, the game ball of the upper plate 321 is discharged to the dollar box even though the lower plate ball removal button 333 is not operated. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a strong illusion that the game ball of the upper plate 321 is directly discharged to the dollar box, and the above-mentioned action and effect can be further exerted. The upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 may be simultaneously opened by driving a drive source such as a motor or a solenoid, or may be simultaneously opened by a mechanical link mechanism.

Further, in the present embodiment, the lower plate main body 325 and the lower plate cover 340 constituting the lower plate 322 are shown as separate bodies that can be disassembled, but the lower plate main body 325 and the lower plate cover 340 are disassembled. It may be an impossible one. Further, although an example is shown in which the cover standing wall portion 340a of the lower plate cover 340 rises from the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325, the lower plate cover 340 rises from the bottom wall portion 325a of the lower plate main body 325. The cover standing wall portion 340a may stand up. Further, an example is shown in which the ceiling portion 340b of the lower plate cover 340 extends substantially horizontally from the upper end of the cover standing wall portion 340a, but the ceiling portion 340b of the lower plate cover 340 is the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325. It may extend substantially horizontally from the upper end.

Further, in the present embodiment, an example is shown in which a relief portion 322b for avoiding contact with the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) of the lower plate 322 is provided, but the relief portion 322b is not provided. It may be a lower plate 322.

Further, in the present embodiment, as the lower plate 322 (lower plate main body 325, lower plate cover 340, etc.), a uniform surface without a through hole is shown, but a plurality of penetrations through which the game ball cannot pass are shown. It may have a hole. Specifically, at least a part of the bottom wall portion 325a, the main body standing wall portion 325b, the cover standing wall portion 340a, the ceiling portion 340b, etc. of the lower plate 322 is formed in a fence shape having a gap through which the game ball cannot pass. It may be a thing or a thing formed in a net shape. A light emitting body such as an LED may be arranged in the dish unit cover 326 (mounting space 326j) to illuminate the inside of the lower dish 322 through a fence-like or mesh-like gap of the lower dish 322 (to illuminate the inside of the lower dish 322). ..

In the present embodiment, the lower plate 322 is formed by the lower plate main body 325, the lower plate cover 340, the plate unit base 323, and the plate unit cover 326 (lower plate cover portion 326k), which are separately formed. However, these four members may be integrated to form the lower plate 322 in an appropriate combination. Specifically, the lower plate cover 340 and the lower plate main body 325 are integrated, the lower plate cover 340 and the plate unit cover 326 are integrated, and the lower plate main body 325 and the plate unit cover 326 are integrated. Integrated, lower plate cover 340 and plate unit base 323 integrated, lower plate body 325 and plate unit base 323 integrated, plate unit base 323 and plate unit cover 326 The lower plate body 325, the lower plate cover 340, and the plate unit base 323 are integrated, and the lower plate main body 325, the lower plate cover 340, and the plate unit cover 326 are integrated. , The lower plate cover 340, the plate unit base 323, and the plate unit cover 326 are integrated, the lower plate body 325, the plate unit base 323, and the plate unit cover 326 are integrated, and the lower plate body 325 and The lower plate cover 340, the plate unit base 323, and the plate unit cover 326 may be integrated, or the like.

[3-3b-1. Ball guidance part of the lower plate]
An embodiment of the lower plate 322 of the plate unit 320 including a ball guide portion 322c for guiding a game ball from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a will be described in detail with reference to FIG. .. FIG. 46 (a) is an explanatory view schematically showing an example in which the lower plate is provided with a ball guide portion, and FIG. 46 (b) is an explanatory view schematically showing an example in which the lower plate is provided with a ball guide portion different from that in (a). It is a figure, (c) is explanatory drawing which shows the example which provided the ball guide part further different. In FIG. 46, the same components as described above are designated by the same reference numerals.

In the example of the lower plate 322 in FIG. 46 (a), the diameter of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is substantially the same as the diameter of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a at the portion between the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a on the bottom surface of the lower plate 322. It is provided with a pair of ball guiding portions 322c arranged apart from each other on the left and right at a distance. The pair of ball guide portions 322c are formed in a rail shape (protrusion) extending back and forth in a state of protruding from the bottom surface of the lower plate 322. Further, the lower plate 322 is inclined so that the bottom surface thereof becomes lower toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. Therefore, the game ball supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c into the lower plate 322 is guided to the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a by the pair of ball guide portions 322c without getting over the ball guide portion 322c, and the lower plate ball It is discharged downward (dollar box) from the punch hole 322a.

Then, in the same manner as described above, the lower plate 322 of this example has the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball behind the lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326 on the right side (lower plate second region A2). The punch holes 322a are arranged side by side in a straight line in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a are located behind the covering wall such as the effect operation unit 400, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a in the plate unit cover 326, and the front end side of the lower plate cover 340. It is not visible from the front.

As described above, since the lower plate 322 of this example includes a pair of ball guide portions 322c, the game ball supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c in the state where the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is open. Can be immediately discharged downward (dollar box) from the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a without invading the area on the left side of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a in the lower plate 322. Since the player cannot see the game balls circulating on the lower plate 322, it is an illusion that the upper plate 321 and the game balls paid out from the payout device 830 are directly discharged to the dollar box. By making it difficult for the game ball to feel the annoyance of passing through the lower plate 322, the player can concentrate on the game (driving operation of the game ball, directing image, etc.) and suppress the decline in interest. Can be done.

In the example of FIG. 46A, a rail-shaped ball guide portion 322c is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game ball is lowered like a groove extending toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. Anything that can be guided to the countersunk hole 322a may be used.

Next, in the example of the lower plate 322 of FIG. 46 (b), the game ball discharged diagonally forward to the right from the lower plate ball supply port 323c is formed on the right wall portion of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a in the lower plate 322. The lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is formed so as to reflect in the direction of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, and the cushioning portion 322d is provided at a portion where the game ball abuts. The buffer portion 322d is made of rubber, a foam, or the like.

Similarly to the above, the lower plate 322 of this example also has the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a arranged directly in front of the lower plate ball supply port 323c, and the bottom surface of the lower plate 322 is lowered toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. It is tilted so that it becomes. Therefore. The game ball discharged straight forward from the lower plate ball supply port 323c is discharged downward (dollar box) from the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a as it is. On the other hand, the game ball discharged to the right front from the lower plate ball supply port 323c is reflected in the direction of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a by the buffer portion 322d, and is discharged downward (dollar box) from the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. Will be done. At this time, since the game ball abuts on the buffer portion 322d and is reflected, the collision sound at the time of reflection is reduced.

Further, the lower plate 322 of this example is also rearward to the right side of the lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326 (the effect operation in the effect operation unit 400 and the plate unit cover 326 which is the lower plate second region A2) in the same manner as described above. It is arranged behind the covering wall such as the unit mounting portion 326a and the front end side of the lower plate cover 340) so that it cannot be seen from the front.

As described above, since the lower plate 322 of this example is provided with the cushioning portion 322d on the wall portion that reflects the game ball, even if the game ball is not discharged straight forward from the lower plate ball supply port 323c. The buffer portion 322d can reflect the sound in the direction of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a and discharge it downward (dollar box) without sound. Therefore, when the game balls and the like paid out from the upper plate 321 and the payout device 830 are discharged to the dollar box, the collision sound of the game balls cannot be heard from the lower plate 322, so that the game balls are directly discharged to the dollar box. By making it difficult for the game ball to feel the annoyance of passing through the lower plate 322, the player can concentrate on the game (driving operation of the game ball, directing image, etc.) and suppress the decline in interest. Can be made to.

Subsequently, in the example of the lower plate 322 of FIG. 46 (c), the portion opposite to the lower plate ball supply port 323c with the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a on the bottom surface (bottom wall portion 325a) of the lower plate 322 in between. It is provided with a return portion 322e that projects upward from the plate and reflects the game ball that has jumped over the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. For the return portion 322e, the same material as the material forming the lower plate 322 may be used, or a cushioning material such as rubber or foam that alleviates the collision sound at the time of reflection may be used. Further, the return portion 322e may not form the side wall of the lower plate 322, or may form a part of the side wall (main body standing wall portion 325b) of the lower plate 322.

In the lower plate 322, the lower plate ball supply port 323c, the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, and the return portion 322e are arranged in a straight line from the rear to the front, and the lower plate of the plate unit cover 326. Behind the right side of the opening 326d (the effect operation unit 400 which is the second area A2 of the lower plate, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a in the plate unit cover 326, and the rear of the covering wall such as the front end side of the lower plate cover 340). It is arranged so that it cannot be seen from the front. In this lower plate 322, even if the game ball flowing from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a jumps over the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, the return portion 322e allows the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a side. It can be reflected downward (dollar box) from the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. Therefore, the same action and effect as described above can be obtained.

In the present embodiment, the ball guiding portion 322c and the buffering portion 322d may be appropriately combined with the lower plate 322. Thereby, the same action and effect as described above can be obtained.

[3-3b-2. Another embodiment of the lower plate]
Another embodiment of the lower plate 322 of the plate unit 320 will be described with reference to FIG. 47. FIG. 47 (a) is an explanatory view schematically showing a splittable lower plate, and FIG. 47 (b) is a schematic view showing a state in which the storage area of the lower plate is expanded according to the size of the space behind the effect operation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows, (c) is the explanatory view which shows the lower plate of (b) in a schematic perspective view. In the lower plate 322 shown in FIG. 47, the lower plate main body 325 can be divided with the dividing line PL arranged in the lower plate second region A2 as a boundary. The area indicated by the dotted line hatch in FIG. 47 indicates the remaining space of the mounting space 326j.

First, the lower plate main body 325 (lower plate 322) shown in FIG. 47 (a) constitutes a part of the lower plate first region A1 and the lower plate second region A2, and has a lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. It includes a main body portion 325A and a first extension portion 325B which is attached to the right side of the main body portion 325A and constitutes the remaining area of the lower plate second area A2. The first extension unit 325B is more than the main body unit 325A, and is the remaining space of the mounting space 326j in which the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is accommodated (the effect operation unit 400 and the second effect operation unit 400A). It protrudes into the rear space). As shown in the figure, the first extension portion 325B is formed so that the width in the left-right direction increases from the front to the rear. Further, in the first extension unit 325B, a relief portion 322b for avoiding contact with the second effect operation unit 400A is formed in the right front corner.

Next, in the examples of FIGS. 47 (b) and 47 (c), the rear end of the effect operation unit 400 does not protrude rearward from the front end of the lower plate 322, and is more than the example of FIG. 47 (a). , The space behind the effect operation unit 400 (the remaining space of the mounting space 326j) is widened. The lower plate main body 325 (lower plate 322) includes a main body portion 325A that forms a part of the lower plate first region A1 and the lower plate second region A2 and has a lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, and a main body. It is attached to the right side of the part 325A and constitutes the remaining area of the lower plate second area A2, and includes a second extension part 325C which is larger than the first extension part 325B. As shown in the figure, the width of the second extension portion 325C in the left-right direction from the front end to the rear end is formed to be constant, and the storage area of the game ball is formed larger than that of the first extension portion 325B. Further, the lower plate cover 340A having a shape corresponding to the shape of the second extension portion 325C is attached to the lower plate 322 (see FIG. 47 (c)).

In the example shown in FIG. 47, by attaching the first extension unit 325B and the second extension unit 325C to the main body portion 325A, the storage areas of the respective game balls are in a continuous (communication) state, and the storage areas of the game balls are connected. Expands. Further, the boundary between the main body portion 325A and the first extension portion 325B and the second extension portion 325C is a dividing line PL. Further, the first extension unit 325B and the second extension unit 325C in the lower plate main body 325 communicate with a predetermined gap (mounting space 326j) between the effect operation unit 400 and the rear surface of the second effect operation unit 400A. Space) is formed so as to occur.

As described above, in the above example, since the lower plate main body 325 (lower plate 322) has a structure that can be divided and at least one of the divided members can be exchanged, the game ball in the lower plate 322 can be replaced. The storage area can be increased or decreased as needed. Further, since the lower plate main body 325 (lower plate 322) can be divided, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the plate unit cover 326 protrudes rearward (inside the mounting space 326j). An extension part (first extension part 325B or second extension part 325C) having a size corresponding to the amount can be attached.

In the above embodiment, the dividing line PL is arranged in the lower plate second region A2 behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), but the dividing line PL is below. It may be arranged on the boundary line between the plate first region A1 and the lower plate second region A2, or may be arranged in the lower plate first region A1.

Further, in the above embodiment, the main body portion 325A of the lower plate main body 325 (lower plate 322) is provided with the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, but the first extension portion 325B and the second extension portion 325C The lower plate ball extraction hole 322a may be provided.

Further, in the above embodiment, the first extension portion 325B and the second extension portion 325C are attached to the right side of the main body portion 325A of the lower plate main body 325, but the game ball is on the right side of the main body portion 325A. A flat plate-shaped closing member that does not have a storage area may be attached.

Further, in the above embodiment, the lower plate main body 325 in the lower plate 322 has been described, but the lower plate cover 340 can also be divided like the lower plate main body 325, and the first extension portion 325B and the second extension portion can be divided. The shape may be adjusted to the size of 325C.

[3-3c. Dish unit base]
The dish unit base 323 of the dish unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44 and the like. The dish unit base 323 is attached to the lower side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, and has a flat plate shape (rear is opened) extending to the left and right over the entire width of the door frame base 110. It is formed in a shallow box shape).

The plate unit base 323 penetrates back and forth near the upper left corner of the front view and also penetrates back and forth under the upper plate ball supply port 323a and the upper plate ball supply port 323a extending rearward in a tubular shape. A speaker slit 323b composed of a plurality of elongated holes extending vertically and vertically, and a lower plate ball supply port 323c penetrating the front and rear at the lower part on the left side from the center of the left and right in the front view and extending in a tubular shape to the rear. The lower plate ball supply port 323c is provided with an upper plate ball feed port 323d which penetrates back and forth on the upper right side of the front view and extends vertically and whose upper portion is located at the right end of the upper plate main body 324.

Further, the plate unit base 323 includes a ball feed guide path 323e that guides a game ball sent to the rear side of the plate unit base 323 through the upper plate ball feed port 323d to the entrance 251a of the ball feed unit 250, and a ball. After hanging from the lower side of the feeding taxiway 323e, it extends in a substantially L shape so as to be lowered toward the right side surface of the tubular front view of the lower plate ball supply port 323c, and is extended from the ball outlet 251b of the ball feeding unit 250. The ball-extracting taxiway 323f that guides the released game ball to the lower plate ball supply port 323c, the lower end of the ball-feeding taxiway 323e and the upper end of the ball-extracting taxiway 323f on the left side of the front view of the ball-feeding taxiway 323e. With an opening 323g that penetrates back and forth at a height between the two, comes into contact with the operating rod 253c of the ball feeding unit 250, and the operation transmitting portion 327a operated by the upper plate ball removing button 327 protrudes rearward. , Is equipped. The downstream end of the ball-extracting taxiway 323f opens into a cylindrical portion of the lower plate ball supply port 323c.

Further, the dish unit base 323 penetrates back and forth at the lower right corner of the front view, and the handle insertion port 323h through which the cylinder portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 is inserted and the front and rear near the right corner of the front view. 323i is provided with a cylinder insertion port 323i through which the cylinder lock 211 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is inserted.

The upper plate ball supply port 323a of the plate unit base 323 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the front end opens to the rear wall of the upper plate 321 and the tubular rear end is the upper plate passage port of the door frame base 110. It penetrates 117 from the front side and is connected to the front end of the through ball passage 273 of the foul cover unit 270. As a result, the game balls paid out from the payout unit 800 are supplied (paid out) into the upper plate 321 through the upper plate ball supply port 323a.

The lower plate ball supply port 323c, in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3, has a front end opening to the rear wall of the lower plate 322 and a cylindrical rear end penetrating the lower plate passage port 116 of the door frame base 110 from the front side. Then, it is connected to the front end of the ball discharge port 276 of the foul cover unit 270. As a result, the game balls circulating in the storage passage 277 of the foul cover unit 270 are supplied into the lower plate 322 through the lower plate ball supply port 323c. The lower plate ball supply port 323c is arranged behind the effect operation unit 400, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (right outside of the lower plate opening 326d) in the plate unit cover 326, the front end side of the lower plate cover 340, and the like. When the door frame 3 is viewed from the front, it cannot be seen from the player side through the lower plate opening 326d.

[3-3d. Dish unit cover]
The dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44 and the like. The plate unit cover 326 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 323 so as to cover the front side of the upper plate main body 324 and the lower plate main body 325. The dish unit cover 326 is provided on both the left and right sides of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a to which the effect operation unit 400 is mounted and the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a in which the center in the left-right direction bulges forward and the effect operation unit 400 is largely opened forward in the center in the left-right direction. It is provided with a plate front upper decoration portion 326b formed at substantially the same height as the upper plate 321 and a plate front lower decoration portion 326c formed below each of the left and right plate front upper decoration portions 326b. There is.

The effect operation unit mounting portion 326a is formed so that the left-right direction is about 1/3 of the total width of the dish unit 320 in the left-right direction, and the up-down direction is substantially the same as the height of the dish unit 320 in the up-down direction. It is formed at a height. Further, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a is inclined so that the front end moves rearward as the front end moves upward. Specifically, the front end of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a is inclined at an angle of 27 degrees with respect to the vertical line.

The front surface of the plate front upper decorative portion 326b moves rearward from the left-right center side of the plate unit cover 326 toward the left-right end sides, and the plate unit cover 326 ends on the left-right center side and the left-right end sides. The middle part is formed in a curved surface shape that slightly bulges forward with respect to the plane connecting the ends of the. Further, the lower end of the plate front upper decorative portion 326b is inclined so as to move upward from the left-right center side of the plate unit cover 326 toward the left and right end sides, and the plate unit cover 326 is inclined to move upward in the left-right direction (center side in the left-right direction). It is formed so as to narrow in the vertical direction from the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a side) toward the left and right end sides. In the plate unit cover 326, an effect selection left button 331 and an effect selection right button 332 are attached to the plate front upper decorative portion 326b on the left side of the front view.

The front surface of the dish front lower decorative portion 326c moves rearward from the left-right center side of the dish unit cover 326 toward the left-right end sides, and the left-right center end and the left-right end side of the dish unit cover 326. It is formed in a curved surface shape such that the middle part is recessed rearward with respect to the flat surface connecting the ends of the above.

A lower plate opening 326d penetrating the front and back is formed in the lower plate front and lower decorative portion 326c on the left side of the front view, and the lower plate 322 faces forward from the lower plate opening 326d. In the lower plate front and lower decorative portion 326c on the left side of the front view, the lower plate ball removal button 333 projects forward from the lower front surface of the lower plate opening 326d. Further, a lower speaker opening 326e made of punching metal is formed on the left side of the lower plate opening 326d in the plate front lower decorative portion 326c on the left side of the front view. The lower speaker port 326e is located in front of the speaker slit 323b of the dish unit base 323 in a state of being assembled in the dish unit 320.

The front lower right decorative portion 326c on the right side of the front view has a handle insertion port 326f that penetrates back and forth at the lower right corner of the front view and into which the cylinder portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 is inserted. A cylinder insertion port 326g, which penetrates back and forth above the handle insertion port 326f near the right corner and into which the cylinder lock 211 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is inserted, is formed.

The plate unit cover 326 has a plate-shaped top plate portion 326h extending from the upper end of the plate front upper decoration portion 326b on the right side of the front view to the front end of the plate unit base 323, and the top plate portion 326h causes the upper plate 321 to have a plate-like top plate portion 326h. It covers the upper right side. An upper plate ball removal button 327, a ball lending button 328, a return button 329, and a ball lending return display unit 330 are attached to the top plate portion 326h.

The dish unit cover 326 includes a flat bottom plate portion 326i extending from the lower end of the dish front lower decorative portion 326c to the front surface of the dish unit base 323. The lower side of the dish unit 320 is closed by the bottom plate portion 326i. The bottom plate portion 326i is formed in a stepped shape so that a portion located below the lower plate 322 is recessed from the lower side to the upper side, and a lower plate ball removing base 335 described later is attached to the portion. Further, in the bottom plate portion 326i, a hole penetrating vertically is formed at a position corresponding to the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a of the lower plate 322.

The dish unit cover 326 is provided with a mounting space 326j that is open forward at the portion of the effect operating unit mounting portion 326a and the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is inserted (accommodated). Further, the plate unit cover 326 extends in a flat plate shape from the left side and the upper side of the lower plate opening 326d to the rear, and includes a lower plate cover portion 326k that covers the lower plate 322 (see FIG. 44). .. The lower plate cover portion 326k is in contact with the upper end of the left side of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325, and the left end of the ceiling portion 340b of the lower plate cover 340 is in contact with the right end. There is.

[3-3e. Upper plate ball removal button]
The upper plate ball removal button 327 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44 and the like. The upper plate ball removal button 327 is attached to the top plate portion 326h of the plate unit cover 326 on the right side of the front view of the upper plate 321. By pressing the upper plate 321, the game ball in the upper plate 321 is moved to the lower plate 322. It can be pulled out. Although detailed illustration of the upper plate ball removal button 327 is omitted, the rear end side is left and right below the top plate portion 326h by the ball removal button holder attached to the lower side of the top plate portion 326h of the plate unit cover 326. It is rotatably mounted around an axis that extends to. The upper end of the ball pulling lever extending vertically is in contact with the lower surface of the front end of the upper plate ball pulling button 327. The ball pulling lever is slidably attached in the vertical direction by a ball pulling base attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 323 below the upper dish ball pulling button 327.

The ball pulling lever whose upper end is in contact with the lower surface of the front end of the upper dish ball pulling button 327 is brought into contact with the upper portion of the upper dish ball pulling slider 327b which is slidably attached up and down by the dish unit base 323 from above. ing. The upper plate ball removing slider 327b includes an operation transmission portion 327a projecting rearward from the rear surface, and in a state where the door frame 3 is assembled, the operation transmission portion 327a is formed from the opening 323g in the plate unit base 323. It projects rearward so as to face it, and abuts from below on the operating rod 253c of the ball removing member 253 in the ball feeding unit 250. The upper plate ball removing slider 327b is urged upward by the upper plate ball removing spring 327c, and by the urging force of the upper plate ball removing spring 327c, the upper plate ball removing slider 327b and the ball removing lever are used. The upper plate ball removal button 327 is located at the rising end.

Therefore, when the upper plate ball removal button 327 is pressed downward against the urging force of the upper plate ball removal spring 327c, the operation transmission portion 327a of the upper plate ball removal slider 327b moves downward, and the operation transmission unit 327a Since the operating rod 253c of the ball removing member 253 that is in contact with the upper end side also moves relatively downward, the ball removing member 253 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the partition portion 253a enters. The partition between the mouth 251a and the ball ejection port 251b is released, and they are in a state of communicating with each other. As a result, the game balls in the upper plate 321 are discharged from the ball outlet 251b of the ball feeding unit 250 to the ball extraction guide path 323f of the plate unit 320, and discharged to the lower plate 322 via the lower plate ball supply port 323c. Can be (supplied).

When the upper plate ball removal button 327 is operated, the lid member 334 closing the lower plate ball removal hole 322a may be moved in conjunction with the operation. As a result, when the upper plate ball removal button 327 is operated, the lid member 334 also moves and the lower plate ball removal hole 322a is opened, so that the game ball discharged from the upper plate 321 to the lower plate 322 is further removed from the lower plate ball. It will be discharged from the hole 322a to the lower dollar box. That is, when the upper plate ball removal button 327 is operated to remove the game ball from the upper plate 321, the game ball of the upper plate 321 is discharged to the dollar box even though the lower plate ball removal button 333 is not operated. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a strong illusion that the game ball of the upper plate 321 is directly discharged to the dollar box, and it is difficult to make the player feel the troublesomeness of the game ball passing through the lower plate 322. It is possible to dedicate the player to the game (driving operation of the game ball, directing image, etc.) and suppress the deterioration of the interest. The upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 may be simultaneously opened by driving a drive source such as a motor or a solenoid, or may be simultaneously opened by a mechanical link mechanism.

[3-3f. Ball lending button, return button, and ball lending display section]
The ball lending button 328, the return button 329, and the ball lending return display unit 330 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 41. As shown in the figure, the ball lending button 328, the return button 329, and the ball lending return display unit 330 are inside the circular decoration on the right side of the front view of the upper plate ball removing button 327 on the top plate portion 326h of the plate unit cover 326. It is attached to.

The ball lending button 328 inserts cash or a prepaid card into a ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 and then presses the ball lending button to plate a predetermined number of game balls. It is rented (paid out) into the upper plate 321 of the unit 320. When the return button 329 is pressed while the cash or prepaid card inserted in the ball lending machine is inserted, the cash or prepaid card is returned after deducting the amount of the lent game ball.

Although not shown, the ball lending display unit 330 has a three-digit 7-segment LED arranged under the transparent surface, and the remaining number of cash or prepaid cards inserted into the ball lending machine, or It displays an error code, etc. when the ball lending machine breaks down.

[3-3 g. Production selection left button and production selection right button]
The effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 41 and the like. As shown in the figure, the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 are attached to the plate unit cover 326 near the right end of the plate front upper decorative portion 326b on the left side of the front view near the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a. The effect selection left button 331 is formed in a triangular shape with one apex facing left. The effect selection right button 332 is formed in a triangular shape with one apex directed to the right on the right side of the effect selection left button 331.

The effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 are used for the player in the main effect display device 1600 arranged in the game area 5a in the front view, the door frame side effect display device 460 of the effect operation unit 400, and the like. When the effect image prompting the selection is displayed, the pressing operation can be accepted, and the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 are operated within a predetermined time to select a desired option.

[3-3h. Lower plate ball removal button]
The lower plate ball removal button 333 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44 and the like. The lower plate ball removal button 333 is below the lower plate opening 326d in the plate unit cover 326, which is in front of the lower plate 322, and projects forward from the lower front lower end of the lower plate front lower decoration portion 326c on the left side of the front view. By pressing the lower plate ball removal button 333, the lid member 334 that closes the lower plate ball removal hole 322a of the lower plate 322 can be rotated, and the lid member 334 rotates. The lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is opened, and the game ball stored in the lower plate 322 can be discharged below the plate unit 320.

The lower plate ball removal button 333 can be slid in the front-rear direction by the lower plate ball removal base 335 (see FIG. 42 (b)) attached to the bottom plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326 on the lower side of the lower plate body 325. It is attached to. The lower plate ball removal button 333 is arranged to the left of the lower plate ball removal hole 322a of the lower plate 322 (see FIG. 28 and the like).

The lower plate ball removal base 335 has a bottom plate so as to be accommodated in a portion of the bottom plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326 that is formed in a stepped shape so as to be recessed from the lower side to the upper side at a position below the lower plate 322. It is attached to the portion 326i. The lower plate ball removing base 335 has a discharge port 335a having the same size as the lower plate ball removing hole 322a and penetrating vertically at a position directly below the lower plate ball removing hole 322a of the lower plate 322. .. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the lid member 334 is arranged between the lower plate main body 325 and the lower plate ball removing base 335. As a result, when the lid member 334 that closes the lower plate ball removal hole 322a of the lower plate 322 is opened, the discharge port 335a of the lower plate ball removal base 335 is also opened, and the lower plate ball removal hole 322a and the discharge port 335a are also opened. And are in communication with each other.

Although not shown, the lid member 334 is rotatably attached to the lower plate ball removal base 335 about a position to the left of the lower plate ball removal button 333 in a plan view. The lower plate ball removal button 333 is connected to a portion of the lid member 334 that closes the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a and a portion that is rotatably attached by the lower plate ball extraction base 335. As a result, when the lower plate ball removal button 333 is moved in the front-rear direction, the lid member 334 rotates around an axis extending vertically, and the lower plate ball removal hole 322a (discharge port 335a) can be opened and closed.

Although not shown, the lower plate ball removing base 335 has a holding device for holding the lower plate ball removing button 333 when the lower plate ball removing button 333 is pushed backward and moved, and a lower plate ball removing button. A lower plate ball pulling spring that urges the 333 forward is attached. When the lower plate ball removal button 333 protrudes forward and the lower plate ball removal hole 322a is closed by the lid member 334, when the lower plate ball removal button 333 is pressed and moved backward, the lid member 334 rotates. As the lower plate ball removal hole 322a is opened by moving, the lower plate ball removal button 333 is held by the holding device and remains moved to the rear. In this state, even if the lower plate ball removal button 333 is released, the lower plate ball removal button 333 does not move forward, and the lower plate ball removal hole 322a is maintained in an open state, and the lower plate is maintained. The game ball in the 322 can be discharged below the plate unit 320 through the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a and the discharge port 335a.

Then, when the lower plate ball removal button 333 is held by the holding device and the lower plate ball removal hole 322a is open, the lower plate ball removal button 333 is pressed backward to release the holding by the holding device. In this state, when the pressure of the lower plate ball removal button 333 is released, the lower plate ball removal button 333 moves forward by the urging force of the lower plate ball removal spring, returns to the protruding state, and the lid member 334 rotates. By moving, the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a (discharge port 335a) is closed. As a result, the game ball can be stored in the lower plate 322.

In addition to the pressing operation of the lower plate ball removing button 333, the pressing operation of the upper plate ball removing button 327 also moves the lid member 334 that closes the lower plate ball removing hole 322a (discharge port 335a). The lower plate ball extraction hole 322a may be opened. As a result, when it is desired to discharge the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 to the dollar box arranged below the plate unit 320, simply operating the upper plate ball removal button 327 causes the dollar box via the lower plate 322. It is possible to simplify the time and effort involved in removing the ball. The upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 may be simultaneously opened by driving a drive source such as a motor or a solenoid, or may be simultaneously opened by a mechanical link mechanism.

[3-4. Overall configuration of the production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the effect operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 48 to 55 and the like. FIG. 48A is a front view of the effect operation unit in the door frame, and FIG. 48B is a right side view of the effect operation unit. Further, FIG. 49A is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 49B is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the back. FIG. 50 is an explanatory view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. FIG. 51 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line DD in FIG. 48 (a), and FIG. 52 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line EE in FIG. 48 (b). FIG. 53 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line FF in FIG. 48 (b), and FIG. 53 (b) is an enlarged view of part A in FIG. 48 (a). FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 55 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. The effect operation unit 400 is attached to the front portion of the plate unit 320 in the center in the left-right direction in the front view, and can be pressed by the player and can present the effect image to the player. Is.

The effect operation unit 400 has a circular outer shape and a transparent central side excluding the outer peripheral edge, and the operation button 410 that can be pressed and operated by the player, and the effect operation unit of the plate unit cover 326 that surrounds the outer periphery of the operation button 410. A frame-shaped frame unit 415 attached to the mounting portion 326a, a decorative substrate unit 420 arranged behind the operation button 410 and capable of emitting and decorating the outer peripheral edge of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415, and a frame. The base unit 430, which is attached to the rear side of the unit 415 and the operation button 410 and the decorative board unit 420 are attached to the front side, and the base unit 430, which is visible from the player side through the operation button 410, are attached to the effect. It is equipped with a door frame side effect display device 460 capable of displaying an image.

[3-4a. Manual operation button]
The operation buttons 410 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. FIG. 56A is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 56B is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and viewed from the rear. The operation button 410 is formed in a circular shape having an outer shape slightly smaller than the height of the dish unit 320 in the vertical direction, and the central side excluding the outer peripheral edge is transparently formed. The operation button 410 is formed on a transparent button lens 411 having a circular outer circumference and a curved surface shape (a part of a spherical surface) so that the central side bulges forward, and on the front side of the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. It includes an annular button frame 412 that is attached, and a cylindrical button base 413 that is attached to the rear side of the button frame 412 so as to sandwich the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 and the button base 413 are formed of members that do not allow light to pass through.

The button lens 411 is formed to have a substantially constant thickness as a whole. Further, the button lens 411 is formed on the surface side in a smooth curved surface shape without unevenness. The button lens 411 extends from the back surface to the center side (inside) with a predetermined length at a position on the inner peripheral side of the button frame 412 in a W-shaped cross section, and is arranged in a row in the circumferential direction. The one-button decorative portion 411a and the first button decorative portion 411a extend along the axis toward the center in a state of being recessed from the back surface in an arc shape at a position on the outer peripheral side, and are lined up within a predetermined angle range in the circumferential direction. It is provided with a plurality of (six) second button decoration portions 411b provided.

As shown in the figure, the first button decorative portion 411a of the button lens 411 extends from the inner circumference of the button frame 412 to the center side when assembled to the operation button 410, and a group on both the left and right sides is a group on both the upper and lower sides. It extends longer to the center than.

The plurality of second button decorative portions 411b of the button lens 411 extend in an arc shape on the same circumference, and are formed three on each of the left and right sides. These second button decoration portions 411b are formed so as to face the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412, and project forward so that the front surface side is substantially flush with the front surface of the button frame 412.

The button lens 411 exhibits a lens effect in which light is refracted due to irregularities having a W-shaped cross section or an arc-shaped cross section formed on the back surface of the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button decoration portion 411b. Therefore, the rear side is not clearly visible.

The button frame 412 is formed in an annular shape, and includes a plurality (six) frame openings 412a that penetrate in the front-rear direction and extend in an arc shape with a predetermined length in the circumferential direction. The six frame openings 412a are provided on each of the left and right sides, respectively, and correspond to the six second button decoration portions 411b of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 has a plating layer having a metallic luster on its surface.

The button base 413 has a substantially cylindrical main body 413a extending shortly in the front-rear direction, an annular flange 413b protruding outward from the front end of the main body 413a, and a main body 413a from the rear side of the flange 413b. Along the outer circumference of the main body 413a from the rear side of the guide boss portions 413c and the flange portions 413b, which project rearward in a columnar shape along the outer circumference of the flange portion 413b and are arranged in a plurality (four) at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction. The detection pieces 413d, which project rearward in a strip shape and are arranged in a plurality (three) in the circumferential direction, penetrate the flange portion 413b in the front-rear direction on the outside of the main body portion 413a and have a predetermined length along the outer circumference. A plurality (six) base openings 413e extending in the circumferential direction and a cylindrical shape extending forward from the front end of the main body 413a, and the front end side is inside along the inner surface of the button lens 411. It is provided with an inner extension portion 413f that is narrowed to (center side).

The outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 and the button frame 412 are attached to the outer peripheral surface of the inner extending portion 413f of the button base 413 and the front surface of the flange portion 413b. The four guide boss portions 413c are arranged at portions corresponding to the four corners of the upper, lower, left, and right sides with respect to the circumferential direction of the main body portion 413a. These four guide boss portions 413c are slidably inserted into the holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 in the base unit 430. The three detection pieces 413d are arranged at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction so that two detection pieces 413d are arranged on the upper side and one on the lower side with respect to the circumferential direction of the main body portion 413a. When the operation button 410 is pressed, these three detection pieces 413d are detected by the push detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430.

The six base openings 413e are provided on each of the left and right sides, respectively, and correspond to the second button decoration portion 411b of the button lens 411 and the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412. At the portion of the base opening 413e in the button base 413, a part of the main body portion 413a and the inner extending portion 413f is recessed from the outer peripheral side to the inner side. The inner diameter of the front end of the inner extending portion 413f, which is narrowed inward, substantially coincides with the inner diameter of the button frame 412.

The front surface of the operation button 410 bulges forward in a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) and is transparently formed. The door frame side effect display device 460 is arranged on the rear side. The display screen of is visible from the front. The operation button 410 has four guide boss portions 413c slidably inserted into the holding hole 431b of the unit base 431 in the base unit 430, and the operation button spring 438 inserted into the holding hole 431b of the unit base 431. Is being urged forward by. The operation button 410 is restricted from moving further forward by the urging force of the operation button spring 438 of the base unit 430, which causes the front side of the outer peripheral edge to abut against the frame unit 415, and the urging force of the operation button spring 438. By pressing against the above, the rear end moves rearward until it comes into contact with the front surface of the base unit 430. When the operation button 410 is pressed and moved backward, at least one of the three detection pieces 413d is detected by the pressure detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430. The operation button 410 is operated by the detection of the detection piece 413d by the push detection sensor 440.

Further, the operation button 410 is a first button decoration formed over the entire circumference so as to extend from the inner peripheral end to the central side of the button frame 412 in the transparent button lens 411 in a state where the effect operation unit 400 is assembled. The portion 411a makes it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the decorative member 432 inside the operation button of the base unit 430.

Further, the operation button 410 closes the front end opening of the cylindrical button base 413 with the button lens 411 and the button frame 412, and the operation button is provided by the button frame 412 attached to the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. With respect to the outer diameter of 410, a transparent portion whose rear is visible is formed so as to be narrowed from the outer circumference to the inside. The presence of the button frame 412 also makes it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the decorative member 432 inside the operation button of the base unit 430.

Further, when the operation button 410 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400, the rear end of the cylindrical button base 413 (main body portion 413a) passes through the inner peripheral side of the decorative board unit 420 and is closer to the front surface of the decorative board unit 420. It will be in a state of protruding backward. As a result, the light radiated forward from the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b mounted on the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 of the decorative board unit 420, respectively, is a button. It is possible to prevent leakage from the outside to the inside of the base 413, and the operation button left inner decorative board 433, the operation button right inner decorative board 434, the operation button upper inner decorative board 435, and the operation button lower inner of the base unit 430. It is possible to prevent the light emitted forward from the LED mounted on the decorative substrate 436 from leaking from the inside to the outside of the button base 413. Therefore, the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b of the decorative board unit 420, the operation button left inner decorative board 433 of the base unit 430, the operation button right inner decorative board 434, the operation button upper inner decorative board 435, and the operation button It is possible to prevent the LED mounted on the lower inner decorative substrate 436 from being luminescently decorated except for the portion targeted for luminescent decoration, and it is possible to perform luminescent decoration with good appearance.

[3-4b. Frame unit]
The frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 53 to 55 and the like. The frame unit 415 is attached from the front side to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 so as to surround the outer circumference from the front side of the operation button 410, and decorates the outside of the operation button 410. The outer shape of the frame unit 415 is formed so as to match the front end side of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a.

The frame unit 415 is a frame-shaped frame main body 416 which is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 and has a circular central opening 416a, and the frame main body 416 on both the left and right sides of the central opening 416a. A pair of translucent frame side lenses 417 attached from the rear side, and a translucent frame top lens 418 attached to the frame body 416 above the central opening 416a from the front side. There is.

The frame body 416 has a circular central opening 416a having a diameter smaller than the outer diameter of the operation button 410 and penetrating back and forth, and the center opening 416a penetrating back and forth on both the left and right sides of the center opening 416a. A plurality of (six) outer peripheral openings 416b extending in an arc shape along the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a and notched portions 416c having a predetermined width on the upper front surface of the central opening 416a. , Is equipped. The central opening 416a is formed to have substantially the same size as the diameter on the outer peripheral side of the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 in the operation button 410. As a result, the front end side of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 can come into contact with the outer peripheral rear side of the frame opening 412a.

The six outer peripheral openings 416b are provided on both the left and right outer sides of the central opening 416a, and are closed by a frame side lens 417 from the rear side. The notch 416c also penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the frame top lens 418 is fitted from the front side.

Further, the frame main body 416 includes a substantially cylindrical inner cylindrical portion 416d extending rearward from a position slightly outside the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a. The inner tubular portion 416d extends rearward from a position between the central opening 416a and the outer peripheral opening 416b, and a portion corresponding to the notch 416c is notched. In the state where the effect operation unit 400 is assembled, the inner cylinder portion 416d has the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 of the decorative board unit 420, respectively. It is located between the first LED 422a and 423a and the second LED 422b and 423b (see FIG. 52).

Further, the frame main body 416 extends outward on each of the upper left and right sides of the outer circumference, and includes a pair of mounting portions 416e to be mounted on the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320. In the frame body 416 (effect operation unit 400), the pair of mounting portions 416e and the left and right side portions of the cutout portion 416c are mounted on the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320.

The frame body 416 is made of metal on substantially the entire surface except for a portion having the same width as the notch 416c on the side opposite to the notch 416c side (the side where the frame top lens 418 is attached) with the central opening 416a in between. A glossy plating layer is formed.

The frame side lens 417 closes the outer peripheral openings 416b formed on each of the left and right sides of the frame body 416 from the rear side. The front surface of the frame side lens 417 is formed on a smooth surface without unevenness, and a plurality of irregularities along the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a are formed on the rear surface side (see FIGS. 53 and 63). Light is refracted by these plurality of irregularities so that the rear side of the frame side lens 417 cannot be seen.

The frame top lens 418 is formed in a substantially quadrangular outer shape so as to be fitted into the notch 416c of the frame body 416 from the front side. The front side of the frame top lens 418 is smoothly formed. Further, the frame top lens 418 has a plurality of irregularities extending in a zigzag shape along the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a on the rear surface side in a plurality of rows in the radial direction of the central opening 416a (FIGS. 51 and 63). reference). Light is refracted by these plurality of irregularities so that the rear side of the frame top lens 418 cannot be seen.

In the frame unit 415, with the effect operation unit 400 assembled, the pair of frame side lenses 417 are the second LEDs 422b and 423b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 of the decorative board unit 420, respectively. The frame top lens 418 is located in front of the frame top lens decorative substrate 437 of the base unit 430, and the second LEDs 422b, 423b, etc. mounted on them enable light emission decoration. ..

[3-4c. Decorative board unit]
The decorative substrate unit 420 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 53 to 57 and the like. FIG. 57 is an exploded perspective view of the decorative substrate unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front by disassembling it. The decorative substrate unit 420 is attached to the front surface of the base unit 430 below the frame unit 415, and can illuminate and decorate the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. Vibration can be applied to the operation unit 400.

The decorative board unit 420 includes a C-shaped board base 421 with an open upper side, an operation button left outer decorative board 422 and an operation button right outer decorative board 423 attached to the front surfaces of the left and right sides of the board base 421, respectively. A vibration motor 424 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the board base 421 and a motor cover 425 attached to the front surface of the board base 421 so as to cover the front side of the vibration motor 424 are provided.

The inner peripheral side of the board base 421 is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, and the outer peripheral side is larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413. Moreover, it is formed to be smaller than the outer diameter of the frame unit 415.

The left outer decorative substrate 422 of the operation button extends in an arc shape along the front surface of the substrate base 421. The operation button left outer decorative board 422 has a plurality of first LEDs 422a mounted along the inner circumference of the board base 421 on the front side, and a plurality of first LEDs 422a mounted on the inner circumference of the board base 421 radially outside the plurality of first LEDs 422a. It includes a plurality of second LEDs 422b mounted along the line. The right outer decorative substrate 423 of the operation button extends in an arc shape along the front surface of the substrate base 421. The right outer decorative board 423 of the operation button is mounted on the front side along the inner circumference of the board base 421 on the inner circumference of the board base 421 on the outer side in the radial direction from the plurality of first LEDs 423a and the plurality of first LEDs 423a. It includes a plurality of second LEDs 423b mounted along the line. The front and rear sides of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are white.

A weight 424a eccentric to the rotation shaft is attached to the vibration motor 424, and vibration can be generated by rotating the weight 424a.

When the decorative board unit 420 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400, the rear end side of the cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 is inserted inside the board base 421. Further, in the decorative board unit 420, the first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are located behind the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410, respectively. The second LEDs 422b and 423b are located behind the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. Further, in the state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 400, a frame is placed between the first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 and the second LEDs 422b and 423b, respectively. The inner cylinder portion 416d of the unit 415 is located (see FIG. 52).

Therefore, the decorative board unit 420 emits and decorates only the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410 by the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423, respectively. At the same time, only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be light-emitting and decorated by the light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b, respectively.

Further, the decorative substrate unit 420 can generate vibration by rotating the weight 424a of the vibration motor 424 to vibrate the entire effect operation unit 400.

[3-4d. Base unit]
The base unit 430 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 58 to 60 and the like. FIG. 58 (a) is a perspective view of the base unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 58 (b) is a perspective view of the base unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective view of the base unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front by disassembling it. Further, FIG. 60 is an exploded perspective view of the base unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from behind by disassembling. The base unit 430 of the effect operation unit 400 is attached to the operation button 410 so as to be able to advance and retreat in the front-rear direction, and is attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415.

The base unit 430 consists of four through holes 431a attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415 and penetrating in a substantially quadrangular shape extending vertically at the center, and four stop holes opened forward on the outside of the through holes 431a. An annular unit base 431 having a holding hole 431b, and an operation button internal decoration member 432 which is attached so as to cover the through hole 431a on the front surface of the unit base 431 and has a short tubular shape in the front-rear direction and has translucency. The operation button left inner decorative board 433, the operation button right inner decorative board 434, and the operation button inner decorative member 432 attached to the left and right sides of the through holes 431a on the front surface of the unit base 431 behind the button inner decorative member 432, respectively. The operation button upper inner decorative board 435 and the operation button lower inner decorative board 436 attached to the upper and lower sides of the through hole 431a on the front surface of the unit base 431 at the rear, and the frame top lens attached to the upper front surface of the unit base 431. It includes a decorative substrate 437.

Further, the base unit 430 includes four operation button springs 438 inserted into the four holding holes 431b of the unit base 431, three sensor holders 439 mounted on the front surface of the unit base 431, and each sensor holder. Three pressure detection sensors 440, which are attached to the 439 respectively to detect the pressing operation of the operation button 410, the effect operation unit relay board 441 attached to the rear side of the unit base 431, and the effect operation unit relay board 441. A relay board cover 442 attached to the rear side of the unit base 431 so as to cover the rear side is provided.

The outer shape of the unit base 431 is substantially circular, and is formed to be slightly smaller than the outer shape of the frame unit 415. The unit base 431 penetrates back and forth at the center, and a substantially quadrangular through hole 431a extending vertically is formed. The through hole 431a has a size that fits within the cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, and is formed to a size that allows the display screen of the door frame side effect display device 460 to be inserted. A door frame side effect display device 460 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 431.

The four holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 are formed at four corners on the outer side of the through hole 431a at the upper, lower, left, and right corners corresponding to the four guide boss portions 413c of the button base 413 of the operation button 410. The inner diameter of these holding holes 431b is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the guide boss portion 413c, and the guide boss portion 413c can be slidably inserted.

More specifically, the holding hole 431b on the upper left side of the four holding holes 431b is from the vertically extending center line passing through the center of the unit base 431 (the center of the operation button 410) to the center of the unit base 431. It is formed at a position rotated about 30 degrees in the counterclockwise direction. Further, the holding hole 431b on the upper right side of the four holding holes 431b is clockwise from the center line extending vertically through the center of the unit base 431 (the center of the operation button 410) with respect to the center of the unit base 431. It is formed at a position rotated about 47 degrees in the direction of. On the other hand, the two holding holes 431b arranged on the lower side of the four holding holes 431b are formed at positions opposite to the center of the unit base 431 with respect to the upper two holding holes 431b, respectively. ..

Further, the unit base 431 has a light-shielding wall portion 431c that protrudes forward in a flat plate shape from the portion where the inner decorative substrate 435 on the operation button is attached and the portion where the frame top lens decorative substrate 437 is attached in the upper part of the front surface. It has. With this light-shielding wall portion 431c, the frame top lens 418 can be light-emitting decorated only by the frame top lens decorative substrate 437.

The decorative member 432 inside the operation button is formed in a curved surface shape so that the substantially cylindrical peripheral wall portion 432a extending shortly in the front-rear direction and the front end side of the peripheral wall portion 432a are closed and the center protrudes forward. A front plate portion 432b, a rectangular opening 432c that penetrates the front plate portion 432b in the front-rear direction and extends vertically, a flange portion 432d that extends outward from the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 432a, and a flange portion 432d. It is provided with a plurality of mounting bosses 432e, which project rearward from the surface and are mounted on the unit base 431.

The outer diameter of the peripheral wall portion 432a of the operation button inner decorative member 432 is formed to be substantially the same as the inner diameter of the button frame 412 of the operation button 410. The opening 432c penetrating the front plate portion 432b is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the door frame side effect display device 460.

In the operation button interior decorative member 432, the outer peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion 432a and the front surface of the front plate portion 432b are formed on a smooth surface without unevenness.

The operation button internal decoration member 432 is formed on the inner peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion 432a, is recessed in an arc shape and extends in the front-rear direction, and has a plurality of first button internal decoration portions 432f provided in the circumferential direction. , It is formed on the rear surface of the front plate portion 432b, bulges in an arc shape, extends into a variable octagonal shape centered on the center of the front plate portion 432b, and is concentric circles centered on the center of the front plate portion 432b. It is provided with a second button internal decoration portion 432 g (see FIG. 63), which is provided in a plurality of shapes. The second button inner decorative portion 432g is formed so as to have a portion extending parallel to the four inner periphery of the opening 432c.

The decorative member 432 inside the operation button is formed of a transparent member. The rear part of the operation button interior decoration member 432 cannot be clearly seen due to the lens effect of the first button interior decoration portion 432f of the peripheral wall portion 432a and the second button interior decoration portion 432g of the front plate portion 432b. ..

The operation button left inner decorative board 433, the operation button right inner decorative board 434, the operation button upper inner decorative board 435, and the operation button lower inner decorative board 436 each have a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side, and these LEDs are mounted. By emitting light, the decorative member 432 inside the operation button can be made to emit light. By luminescent decoration of the operation button interior decoration member 432, the inside of the operation button 410 and the outside of the door frame side effect display device 460 can be luminescently decorated.

A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decoration substrate 437, and the frame top lens 418 in the frame unit 415 can be light-emitting and decorated by emitting light from these LEDs.

The LEDs mounted on the operation button left inner decorative board 433, the operation button right inner decorative board 434, the operation button upper inner decorative board 435, the operation button lower inner decorative board 436, and the frame top lens decorative board 437 are full-color LEDs, respectively. It is said that. The front surface of the operation button left inner decorative board 433, the operation button right inner decorative board 434, the operation button upper inner decorative board 435, the operation button lower inner decorative board 436, and the frame top lens decorative board 437 is white. ..

The operation button spring 438 is a coil spring, and is inserted from the front into the four holding holes 431b in the unit base 431. When the operation button spring 438 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400, the rear end is in contact with the bottom surface of the holding hole 431b, and the front end is a guide boss projecting rearward from the main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410. It is in contact with the rear end of the portion 413c. These operation button springs 438 urge the operation button 410 forward.

The three pressure detection sensors 440 are arranged at positions corresponding to the three detection pieces 413d of the button base 413 on the operation button 410. More specifically, in the front surface of the unit base 431, one of the three pressure detection sensors 440 is on the lower left side of the upper left holding hole 431b, the other is on the lower right side of the upper right holding hole 431b, and the other one is on the lower left side. It is attached to the lower right side of the holding hole 431b of the above via the sensor holder 439, respectively. The three pressure detection sensors 440 are mounted at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction around the center of the unit base 431. These three pressure detection sensors 440 can detect the three detection pieces 413d of the operation button 410.

The effect operation unit relay board 441 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 431 on the left side (right side of the front view) of the through hole 431a in the rear view. The effect operation unit relay board 441 includes an operation button left outer decorative board 422, an operation button right outer decorative board 423, a vibration motor 424, an operation button left inner decorative board 433, an operation button right inner decorative board 434, and an operation button upper inner decorative board. 435, decoration board 436 under the operation button, frame top lens decoration board 437, pressure detection sensor 440, and door frame side effect display device 460 for relaying the connection between the door frame base unit 100 and the door body relay board. It is a thing.

The relay board cover 442 extends from the lower end of the portion covering the rear side of the effect operation unit relay board 441 to the left in the front view, and includes a leg portion 442a attached to the lower rear surface of the unit base 431. The leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442 extends substantially horizontally on the lower surface when assembled on the door frame 3, and is between the leg portion 442a and the bottom plate portion 326i forming the bottom surface of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. A slight gap is formed in (see FIG. 26). As a result, when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly pressed or hit downward, the frame unit 415 is used until the lower surface of the leg portion 442a comes into contact with the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326. The impact can be absorbed by bending the mounting portion 416e, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, and the like downward. After the lower surface of the leg portion 442a comes into contact with the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the movement of the effect operating unit 400 is restricted downward, and the effect unit mounting portion of the frame unit 415 mounting portion 416e and the dish unit cover 326 is restricted. It is possible to prevent the 326a and the like from being subjected to an unreasonable force and prevent their damage.

[3-4e. Door frame side production display device]
The door frame side effect display device 460 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 54 and 55. The door frame side effect display device 460 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 431 so that the display screen faces forward from the opening 432c of the operation button interior decorative member 432 in the base unit 430, and the operation button 410 is transparent. The display screen can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the central portion, and the effect image can be displayed on the display screen.

The door frame side effect display device 460 is attached to the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 461 having a square display screen on the front side and the liquid crystal display device 461, and is attached to the rear side of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430. It is provided with a bottomed square tubular mounting bracket 462. The liquid crystal display device 461 is a commercially available color liquid crystal display having an aspect ratio of 16: 9 and a diagonal length of about 4.3 inches. The outer circumference of the mounting bracket 462 is formed to have the same shape as the outer circumference of the liquid crystal display device 461, and the bottom of the bottomed cylinder is attached so as to be in contact with the rear surface of the liquid crystal display device 461.

When the door frame side effect display device 460 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400, the liquid crystal display device 461 penetrates the through hole 431a of the unit base 431 from the rear side, and the inside of the peripheral wall portion 432a of the decorative member 432 inside the operation button. (See FIG. 51). The front surface (display screen) of the liquid crystal display device 461 is located near the front end of the peripheral wall portion 432a of the decorative member 432 inside the operation button, and faces forward from the opening 432c penetrating the front plate portion 432b.

The door frame side effect display device 460 can display a predetermined effect image based on the control signal from the peripheral control board 1510 on the liquid crystal display device 461.

[3-4f. Effect of production operation unit]
The operation and effect of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 61 to 63 and the like. FIG. 61 is an explanatory view showing a state in which the operation button is pressed in the cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit of FIG. 51. FIG. 62A shows a production operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, and a part of the operation button is cut out to be hidden by a first button decoration part of the operation button, a button frame, or the like. It is explanatory drawing which shows the part, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the part to hide by the 1st button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, etc. in the cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 63 (a) is an explanatory view showing the appearance of the effect operation unit as a perspective view seen from the front, and FIG. 63 (b) is an explanatory view showing the appearance of the effect operation unit from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. Is.

The effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment can show the effect image to the player according to the game state that changes when the game ball is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and is operated by the player. It is possible to entertain the player by having the player participate in the effect presented to the player by operating the button 410.

The total height of the effect operation unit 400 is formed to be substantially the same as the height of a portion of the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 below the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110. Further, the total width of the effect operation unit 400 is formed to be slightly larger than 1/3 of the total width of the door frame 3. The effect operation unit 400 is arranged in the center in the left-right direction on the lower side of the game area 5a (the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110) in the front view.

In the effect operation unit 400, the upper portion of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. When the effect operation unit 400 is attached to the plate unit 320, a gap is provided between the lower surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442, which is the bottom surface, and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. Is formed. That is, the effect operation unit 400 is attached only to the upper part of the dish unit 320, and is attached in a suspended state.

Further, in the effect operation unit 400, the front surface of the frame unit 415 (the surface formed by the inner circumference of the front end of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416) is parallel to the inclined surface of the front end opening of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a. It is installed like this. As a result, in the effect operation unit 400, the central axis CL of the transparent operation button 410 that bulges forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) is at an angle of 63 degrees with respect to the vertical line. It is tilted so that it moves upward as it goes forward. As a result, when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 in order to play a game using the pachinko machine 1, the player's head is arranged above the plate unit 320 (directing operation unit 400). Since it is located in front of the center of the game area 5a on the game board 5, the central axis CL of the operation button 410 passes near the player's head. Therefore, when the player looks down from the game area 5a to the effect operation unit 400 (operation button 410), the operation button 410 is as close as possible to the front view (projected view from a direction parallel to the central axis CL). It can be seen in a state, and the operation button 410, the door frame side effect display device 460 in the operation button 410, and the like can be visually recognized in a good state.

In the effect operation unit 400, the four guide boss portions 413c of the operation button 410 are slidably inserted into the four holding holes 431b of the base unit 430, and are urged forward by the operation button spring 438. In the normal state (when the operation button 410 is not pressed), the effect operation unit 400 causes the front end of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 to be the frame unit 415 due to the urging force of the operation button spring 438. It is in contact with a portion of the rear surface of the frame body 416 near the central opening 416a.

In a normal state, the effect operation unit 400 projects forward from the vicinity of the inner circumference of the button frame 412 of the operation button 410 to the center side (center axis CL side) from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415. There is. In other words, in the transparent button lens 411 that bulges forward in the shape of a curved surface (a part of a substantially spherical surface) of the operation button 410, the portion that protrudes forward from the inner circumference (inside) of the button frame 412 is , The frame unit 415 projects forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 (see FIG. 51 and the like).

Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the diameter of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415 is about 15 cm, and the button lens 411 (front end) is the frame unit with respect to the central axis CL direction of the operation button 410. It protrudes about 4 cm forward from the front surface of the 415.

In a normal state, when the player presses the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400, the operation button 410 moves backward along the central axis CL against the urging force of the operation button spring 438. Then, when the rear end of the operation button 410 comes into contact with the front surface of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, the rearward movement is restricted and the rearward movement of the operation button 410 is stopped. When the player presses the operation button 410, he presses the button lens 411 that bulges forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface).

Since the outer diameter of the operation button 410 is formed to be much larger than that of the operation button for production provided in the conventional pachinko machine, the vicinity of the peripheral edge away from the central portion of the button lens 411 is pressed. It is likely to be done. More specifically, the operation buttons for effect in the conventional pachinko machine are attached so that the central axis extends substantially parallel to the vertical line, whereas the operation buttons 410 of the effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment. Since the central axis CL is attached at an angle with respect to the vertical line, when the player presses the operation button 410 from above as in the conventional pachinko machine, as shown by the white arrow in FIG. The portion of the operation button 410 away from the central axis CL is pressed.

By the way, in the operation buttons for directing in the conventional pachinko machine, since the surface to be pressed by the player is formed on a flat surface, when the operation button is enlarged while the part to be pressed is a flat surface. , If you press a part that is off the center of the operation button, the surface to be pressed will tilt so that the pressed part will retract first, and the operation button will not be able to retract straight, so you can press the operation button. There is a risk that the pressing operation will not be possible.

On the other hand, the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment has a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) in which a portion (button lens 411) to be pressed by the player is bulged forward. Therefore, when a position away from the center of the operation button 410 is pressed, the force is distributed to the entire operation button 410 to make it difficult for the operation button 410 to tilt, and the operation button 410 moves straight backward. Can be done. Therefore, no matter which position on the front side of the operation button 410 is pressed, the operation button 410 can be smoothly retracted without tilting, so that the pressing operation can be reliably detected and the operation button 410 is pressed. You can fully enjoy the production of operation.

Further, in the effect operation unit 400, the vibration motor 424 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the substrate base 421 of the decorative substrate unit 420, and as described above, only the upper part is a plate so that the effect operation unit 400 can be hung. Since it is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the unit cover 326, when the weight 424a is rotated by the vibration motor 424 to generate vibration, the vibration is generated at the part farthest from the mounted part. , The entire effect operation unit 400 can be vibrated greatly (strongly), and the vibration can be transmitted to the player who is in contact with the effect operation unit 400. Further, since the vibration motor 424 is arranged directly under the position (the position of the white arrow in FIG. 61) where the player is relatively easy to press, the operation button 410 is pressed against the player. It is possible to transmit strong vibrations, which can surprise the player and entertain the production.

Further, the effect operation unit 400 is attached to the dish unit cover 326 in a suspended state, and the lower surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442 forming the lower surface and the bottom plate of the dish unit cover 326. Since a gap is formed between the upper surface of the portion 326i and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the frame is formed until the lower surface of the leg portion 442a abuts on the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i when the operation button 410 is strongly pressed or hit. The impact can be absorbed by bending the mounting portion 416e of the unit 415, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, and the like downward. Further, after the lower surface of the leg portion 442a abuts on the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the downward movement of the effect operation unit 400 is restricted, and the effect operation unit attachment of the frame unit 415 attachment portion 416e and the dish unit cover 326 is restricted. It is possible to prevent an unreasonable force from acting on the portion 326a or the like, and it is possible to prevent damage to the effect operation unit 400 or the like. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 is pressed or hit with a strong force when the player is presented with an effect of pressing the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400, the operation button 410 or the effect operation unit Since the 400 etc. are not damaged, it is possible to avoid interruption of the game due to the damage, suppress the deterioration of the player's interest, and increase the burden on the game hall side by making it hard to be damaged. It can be suppressed.

As described above, since the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 that the player presses and operates is formed in a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) protruding forward, it is made into a flat plate shape. The strength and rigidity are higher than in the case, and even if the lens is hit strongly, the impact can be dispersed over the entire button lens 411, and the lens is less likely to be damaged.

Further, as shown in FIG. 63, in the effect operation unit 400, the button lens 411, the frame side lens 417, the frame top lens 418, and the operation button interior decorative member 432 are made of transparent members. The front side (player side) is decorated with irregularities such as the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the first button inner decoration portion 432f, and the second button inner decoration portion 432g formed on the back surface side. ) Can be visually recognized. In addition, in the part where the uneven decoration is formed, the light is refracted in a complicated manner due to the change in the plate thickness, so that it is difficult to see the rear side through the part where the uneven decoration is formed. ..

Since the effect operation unit 400 includes a first button decoration portion 411a extending from the inner circumference of the button frame 412 in the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 toward the center side, the uneven decoration of the first button decoration portion 411a is provided. This makes it difficult to see the rear part of the outer peripheral edge of the part inside the button lens 411. Behind the portion where the first button decoration portion 411a is formed (rear in the central axis CL direction), the inner peripheral surface of the main body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the peripheral wall portion of the operation button inner decoration member 432. A gap is located between the outer peripheral surface of the 432a, but the first button decorative portion 411a located in front of the gap allows the outer peripheral gap of the decorative member 432 inside the operation button to be opened from the front side (player side). It can be difficult to see. As a result, even if the operation button internal decoration member 432 having a fixed position is provided in the operation button 410 that can be pressed, it is possible to prevent the operation button 410 from deteriorating in appearance, and the operation button 410 is seen. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable, and the decorative member 432 inside the operation button can be arranged without any problem in the transparent operation button 410, so that the appearance of the operation button 410 can be improved.

More specifically, the effect operation unit 400 is formed by the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, and the button frame 412 of the button lens 411 in the operation button 410, thereby forming the outer periphery of the operation button inner decoration member 432 of the base unit 430. The unit base 431, the decorative substrate unit 420, and the like, which are on the outer side and on the rear side (back side), are formed so as not to be seen from the player side through the transparent button lens 411. Specifically, in FIG. 62, the portion of the cross hatch surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line is hidden from the player side. As described above, since the operation button 410 is provided with the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the like, the outside and the back side of the operation button interior decoration member 432 are obscured and hidden. This makes it possible to improve the appearance of the operation button 410 and, by extension, the effect operation unit 400 as a whole.

Further, in the effect operation unit 400, the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 extends toward the central axis CL of the operation button 410 and is arranged in a row in the circumferential direction. The second button inner decoration portion 432g formed on the front plate portion 432b of the operation button inner decoration member 432 arranged behind the inside of the operation button 410 extends into a variable octagonal shape centered on the central axis CL. As shown in FIG. 63, the uneven line of the first button decorative portion 411a and the concave-convex line of the second button inner decorative portion 432g intersect with each other and are geometrically arranged. The decoration can be shown to the player.

Further, in the effect operation unit 400, since the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button inner decoration portion 432g are separated from each other in the front-rear direction (the direction in which the central axis CL extends), the effect operation unit 400 is separated from the first button decoration portion 411a. With the decoration portion 432g inside the second button, it is possible to show the player a geometric pattern having a three-dimensional feeling with depth, and it is possible to enjoy the decoration including the inside of the operation button 410.

Further, in the effect operation unit 400, since the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button inner decoration portion 432g are separated in the front-rear direction, when the position of the player's eyes moves, the unevenness of the first button decoration portion 411a Since the degree of overlap between the line and the uneven line of the decorative portion 432 g in the second button changes, the moving decoration can be shown to the player, and the player can be entertained.

In this way, the effect operation unit 400 gives the player a moving and three-dimensional decoration by the first button decoration part 411a of the operation button 410 and the second button inner decoration part 432g of the operation button inner decoration member 432. Since it can be shown, it is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player, and it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 with high appealing power.

Further, the effect operation unit 400 is inside the operation button 410 (inside the button frame 412), and behind the operation button inner decoration member 432, the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, and the operation button. The upper inner decorative board 435 and the lower inner decorative board 436 are arranged, and by making a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of them emit light, the operation button inner decorative member 432 in the operation button 410 emits light. Can be decorated. That is, the inside of the operation button 410 can be light-emitting decorated by the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436. As shown in FIG. 52, the LEDs mounted on the front surfaces of the operation button left inner decorative board 433, the operation button right inner decorative board 434, the operation button upper inner decorative board 435, and the operation button lower inner decorative board 436 are as shown in FIG. When viewed from the extending direction of the central axis CL, since they are arranged inside the cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, the light from them does not leak to the outside of the main body 413a. , Only the inside of the operation button 410 can be luminescent and decorated satisfactorily.

Further, the effect operation unit 400 is located behind the second button decorative portion 411b facing from the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 located near the outer periphery of the operation button 410, and the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 of the decorative substrate unit 420. The first LED 422a and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are arranged, and by causing the first LEDs 422a and 423a to emit light, the six second button decoration portions 411b of the operation button 410 are light-emitting and decorated. Can be done. As shown in FIG. 52, the first LED 422a of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are the tubular main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the frame unit. It is located between the tubular inner cylinder portion 416d of the frame body 416 of the 415, and the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not leak to the inside of the main body portion 413a or the outside of the inner cylinder portion 416d, and the operation is performed. Only the second button decoration portion 411b of the button 410 can be satisfactorily luminescent and decorated.

Further, the effect operation unit 400 has a second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and an operation button right outer decoration board behind the frame side lens 417 facing from the six outer peripheral openings 416b of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415. The second LED 423b of the 423 is arranged, and the frame side lens 417 can be light-emitting and decorated by causing the second LEDs 422b and 423b to emit light. The second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the second LED 423b of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are located between the cylindrical inner tubular portion 416d of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 and the outer periphery of the frame body 416. It is located so that the light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b does not leak to the inside of the inner cylinder portion 416d or the outside of the frame body 416, and only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be luminescently decorated satisfactorily. ..

Further, the effect operation unit 400 has a plurality of frame top lens decorative substrates 437 in the base unit 430 arranged behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 and mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decorative substrate 437. The frame top lens 418 can be light-emitting and decorated by emitting light from the LED. From the lower side of the portion of the base unit 430 where the frame top lens decorative substrate 437 of the unit base 431 is attached, a flat plate-shaped light-shielding wall portion 431c projects forward to the vicinity of the lower end rear of the frame top lens 418, and the frame. The light from the LED of the top lens decoration substrate 437 does not leak to the operation button 410 or the frame side lens 417 side, and only the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 can be satisfactorily luminescent and decorated.

[3-4 g. Overall configuration of the second embodiment of the production operation unit]
Next, the second effect operation unit 400A, which is the second embodiment of the effect operation unit 400, will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 64 to 71 and the like. FIG. 64 (a) is a front view of the second effect operation unit having a different embodiment from the effect operation unit of FIGS. 48 to 63, and FIG. 64 (b) is a right side view of the second effect operation unit. FIG. 65 (a) is a perspective view of the second effect operation unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 65 (b) is a perspective view of the second effect operation unit viewed from the back. FIG. 66 is an explanatory view of the second effect operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. FIG. 67 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line GG in FIG. 64 (a). FIG. 68 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line HH in FIG. 64 (b). 69 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line I-I in FIG. 64 (b), and FIG. 69 (b) is an enlarged view of part A in (a). FIG. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the second effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 71 is an exploded perspective view of the second effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. It is a figure.

The second effect operation unit 400A can be attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit 320 in place of the above effect operation unit 400. Similar to the effect operation unit 400, the second effect operation unit 400A can be pressed by the player and can present the effect image to the player. Hereinafter, in the second effect operation unit 400A, the same components as the effect operation unit 400 will be described with the same reference numerals.

The second effect operation unit 400A has a circular outer shape and a transparent central side excluding the outer peripheral edge, and the operation button 410 that can be pressed and operated by the player, and the plate unit cover 326 that surrounds the outer periphery of the operation button 410. A frame-shaped frame unit 415 attached to the operation unit mounting portion 326a, and a decorative board unit 420 arranged behind the operation button 410 and capable of emitting and decorating the outer peripheral edge of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415. The second base unit 450, which is mounted on the rear side of the frame unit 415 and has the operation button 410 and the decorative board unit 420 mounted on the front side, and the second base unit 450, which is visible from the player side through the operation button 410. The door frame side second effect display device 460A, which is attached to the door frame side second effect display device 460A, and the buffer unit 510 attached to the lower surface of the door frame side second effect display device 460A are provided.

Further, the second effect operation unit 400A covers the surfaces of the second effect operation unit relay board 515 and the second effect operation unit relay board 515 attached to the right side surface of the door frame side second effect display device 460A in the front view. A relay board cover 516 attached to the right side surface of the door frame side second effect display device 460A so as to cover it is provided. The second effect operation unit relay board 515 and the relay board cover 516 are attached to the right side surface of the projector mounting member 505 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A.

The second production operation unit relay board 515 includes an operation button left outer decorative board 422, an operation button right outer decorative board 423, a vibration motor 424, a pressure detection sensor 454, a frame top lens decorative board 482, a switching drive motor 492, and a projector 500. The purpose is to relay the connection between the rotation detection sensor 507 and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100.

[3-4g-1. Manual operation button]
The operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 69 to 72 and the like. FIG. 72 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button of the second effect operation unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 72 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button of the second effect operation unit disassembled and viewed from behind. It is a figure. The operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A is formed in a circular shape having an outer shape slightly smaller than the height of the dish unit 320 in the vertical direction, and the central side excluding the outer peripheral edge is transparently formed. The operation button 410 has a transparent button lens 411 formed in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) so that the outer circumference is circular and the central side bulges forward, and the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. It is provided with an annular button frame 412 attached to the front side and a cylindrical button base 413 attached to the rear side of the button frame 412 so as to sandwich the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. It has substantially the same configuration as the operation button 410 of the operation unit 400.

The specific difference is that the operation button 410 of the second production operation unit 400A and the operation button 410 of the production operation unit 400 have the pattern of the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411 and the guide boss of the button base 413. The shape of the portion 413c is different.

More specifically, as shown in the figure, the first button decorative portion 411a of the operation button 410 in the second effect operation unit 400A has one apex toward the center side of the button lens 411 at a portion in contact with the inner circumference of the button frame 412. A triangle with a triangle facing and a triangle with one apex facing away from the center are arranged in multiple rows alternately over the entire circumference in the circumferential direction, and a button lens 411 in the truss-like pattern. A right-angled triangular pattern composed of a base facing the center side, a side extending from both ends of the bottom side to the center side of the button lens 411, and an oblique side extending from the tip of the side to the center of the bottom side. And the diagonal side of the right-angled triangle pattern, the side extending from the center of the base of the triangle of the truss-like pattern to the center side of the button lens 411 longer than the right-angled triangle pattern, and the right-angled triangle shape from the tip of that side. It is formed by a variable isosceles triangular pattern composed of a side extending to the tip of the diagonal side of the pattern of.

That is, the first button decoration portion 411a is composed of a combination of a plurality of triangles. Although not shown, each triangle constituting the first button decorative portion 411a has its own surface facing in a different direction and is formed in a polyhedral shape. As a result, the front surface side of the button lens 411 is formed in a smooth curved surface shape, whereas the back surface side is formed in a polyhedral shape at the portion of the first button decoration portion 411a, so that the first button decoration portion 411a is formed. The plate thickness of the button lens 411 changes in a complicated manner at this portion, and the light passing through this portion is diffusely refracted. Therefore, at the portion of the first button decoration portion 411a, it is possible to show the player a geometric pattern in which a plurality of triangles are combined, and at the same time, it is possible to make the rear member difficult to see due to diffuse refraction.

The guide boss portion 413c in the button base 413 of the second effect operation unit 400A is formed in a cylindrical shape with the rear side open. The guide boss portion 413c is inserted into the holding hole 451d of the second base unit 450, and the button shaft 452 is held in the holding hole 451d of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 inside the cylindrical shape. Is slidably inserted. In this example, the operation button 410 is attached to the guide boss portion 413c so as to be able to advance and retreat in the front-rear direction by the button shaft 452 of the second base unit 450 inserted from the rear.

[3-4g-2. Frame unit]
The frame unit 415 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71 and the like. The frame unit 415 is attached from the front side to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 so as to surround the outer circumference from the front side of the operation button 410, and decorates the outside of the operation button 410. The outer shape of the frame unit 415 is formed so as to match the front end side of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a.

The frame unit 415 of the second effect operation unit 400A has the same configuration as the frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400, and is designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

[3-4g-3. Decorative board unit]
The decorative substrate unit 420 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 57, 69 to 71 and the like. The decorative substrate unit 420 is attached to the front surface of the second base unit 450 below the frame unit 415, and can illuminate the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. , The second effect operation unit 400A can be made to vibrate.

The decorative board unit 420 includes a C-shaped board base 421 with an open upper side, an operation button left outer decorative board 422 and an operation button right outer decorative board 423 attached to the front surfaces of the left and right sides of the board base 421, respectively. A vibration motor 424 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the board base 421 and a motor cover 425 attached to the front surface of the board base 421 so as to cover the front side of the vibration motor 424 are provided.

The decorative board unit 420 of the second effect operation unit 400A has the same configuration as the decorative board unit 420 of the effect operation unit 400, and is designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

[3-4g-4. Second base unit]
The second base unit 450 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 73 and the like. FIG. 73 is a perspective view of the second base unit of the second effect operation unit as viewed from the front. The second base unit 450 of the second effect operation unit 400A has an operation button 410 attached so as to be able to advance and retreat in the front-rear direction, and a door frame side second effect display device 460A is attached and attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415. It is something that can be done.

The second base unit 450 protrudes from the front surface of the unit base 451 attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415 and the rear of the four cylindrical guide boss portions 413c in the button base 413 of the operation button 410. An operation button spring through which four cylindrical button shafts 452 and four button shafts 452, which are slidably inserted from each other, are inserted and the rear end of the guide boss portion 413c of the operation button 410 is urged forward. (Not shown), and three pressure detection sensors 454, which are attached to the front surface of the unit base 451 and detect each of the three detection pieces 413d of the button base 413 on the operation button 410.

The unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 has an annular main body 451a, a cover portion 451b that hemispherically protrudes rearward from the inner peripheral edge of the main body 451a, and a direction perpendicular to the front surface of the main body 451a. A through-hole 451c that penetrates the cover portion 451b back and forth in a substantially square shape that extends vertically when viewed, four holding holes 451d that are recessed from the front surface to the rear of the main body portion 451a in the shape of a blind hole, and the main body portion 451a. The upper bearing portion 451e, which is recessed in a semicircular shape (U-shape) from the front to the rear in the upper part of the main body portion 451a, and the upper bearing portion 451e, which is vertically recessed from the front to the rear in the lower part of the main body portion 451a, are semicircular in coaxial with the upper bearing portion 451e. A pair of rotation restricting portions 451g that are formed on both the left and right sides of the upper bearing portion 451e on the upper front surface of the lower bearing portion 451f and the main body portion 451a that are recessed in a (U shape) shape and regulate the rotation of the screen unit 470. And have.

The annular main body portion 451a of the unit base 451 has an inner circumference and an outer circumference formed in substantially the same size as the substrate base 421 of the decorative substrate unit 420 formed in a C shape. The decorative substrate unit 420 is attached to the front surface of the main body 451a. The cover portion 451b is formed in a size that can be accommodated without contact when the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A, which is rotatably attached by the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f, rotates. There is. The through-hole 451c is formed in a size that allows the projector 500 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A to pass through from behind.

The four holding holes 451d of the unit base 451 are formed at the four corners of the front surface of the main body portion 451a at the upper, lower, left, and right corners at positions corresponding to the four guide boss portions 413c of the button base 413 of the operation button 410. The inner diameter of these holding holes 451d is larger than the outer diameter of the guide boss portion 413c, and the guide boss portion 413c can be inserted. A button shaft 452 is mounted coaxially with the central axis of these four holding holes 451d. The front end of the button shaft 452 attached to the holding hole 451d protrudes forward from the front surface of the main body portion 451a. By inserting the button shaft 452 attached to the holding hole 451d into the cylindrical guide boss portion 413c of the operation button 410, the operation button 410 can be slidably attached in the front-rear direction via the guide boss portion 413c. Can be done.

The upper left holding hole 451d of the four holding holes 451d is counterclockwise with respect to the center of the unit base 451 from the vertically extending center line passing through the center of the unit base 451 (the center of the operation button 410). It is formed at a position rotated about 30 degrees in the direction. Further, the holding hole 451d on the upper right side of the four holding holes 451d is clockwise from the center line extending vertically through the center of the unit base 451 (the center of the operation button 410) with respect to the center of the unit base 451. It is formed at a position rotated about 47 degrees in the direction of. On the other hand, the two holding holes 451d arranged on the lower side of the four holding holes 451d are formed at positions opposite to the center of the unit base 451 with respect to the upper two holding holes 451d. ..

Further, operation button springs (not shown) are inserted into the four holding holes 451d, respectively, and the front ends of these operation button springs come into contact with the rear ends of the guide boss portion 413c, so that the operation buttons are inserted through the guide boss portion 413c. The 410 is being urged forward.

The upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f of the unit base 451 are formed in a U shape with the front open and extending rearward. In the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f, the centers of the portions extending in a semicircular shape are coaxially located. In the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f, the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A are inserted from the front side, and then the upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485 are inserted from the front side. Is attached to the front surface of the main body portion 451a, so that the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A can be rotatably supported.

Each of the pair of rotation restricting portions 451g of the unit base 451 passes through the central axis of the semicircular portion of the upper bearing portion 451e in which the extension line (plane) thereof is recessed rearward in a U shape. It is formed so as to be separated from each other in a predetermined angle circumferential direction with the central axis as the center. The pair of rotation restricting portions 451g regulate the rotation range of the screen unit 470 by abutting the stopper 475b of the operating gear member 475 in the screen unit 470 in a state of being assembled to the second effect operation unit 400A. There is. In the present embodiment, the rotation range of the screen unit 470 is restricted to an angle range of 90 degrees by a pair of rotation restricting portions 451g.

Although not shown, magnets are embedded in each pair of rotation restricting portions 451g, and by magnetically adhering to an iron plate attached to the stopper 475b, they come into contact with the rotation restricting portions 451g. The stopper 475b is made difficult to separate from the rotation restricting portion 451g. Therefore, the magnet in the rotation restricting portion 451g and the iron plate of the stopper 475b allow the screen unit 470 to be in the first position with the main screen 471 facing forward, or the second with the sub screen 472 facing forward. The screen unit 470 can be held in any of the positions, and the movement of the screen unit 470 to rotate is suppressed by the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the vibration by the vibration motor 424 or the like, and the door frame side. The effect image by the second effect display device 460A can be enjoyed in a good state.

The three pressure detection sensors 454 are attached to the front surface of the main body portion 451a of the unit base 451 at positions corresponding to the three detection pieces 413d of the button base 413 on the operation button 410. More specifically, the three pressure detection sensors 454 remain on the front surface of the main body 451a of the unit base 451, one on the lower left side of the upper left holding hole 451d and the other on the lower right side of the upper right holding hole 451d. One of them is attached to the lower right side of the lower left holding hole 451d, respectively. The three pressure detection sensors 454 are mounted at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction around the center of the unit base 451. These three pressure detection sensors 454 can detect the three detection pieces 413d of the operation button 410.

[3-4g-5. Door frame side second production display device]
The door frame side second effect display device 460A of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The door frame side second effect display device 460A is attached to the second base unit 450 and can show the effect image to the player through the transparent portion of the operation button 410. The door frame side second effect display device 460A includes a screen unit 470 rotatably attached around an axis extending vertically by an upper bearing portion 451e and a lower bearing portion 451f of the second base unit 450, and a second base. The upper bearing member 480, which is mounted on the upper front surface of the unit 450 and rotatably mounts the upper side of the screen unit 470 in cooperation with the second base unit 450, and the lower front surface of the second base unit 450 are mounted. It includes a lower bearing member 485 that rotatably attaches the lower side of the screen unit 470 in cooperation with the second base unit 450.

Further, the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side rotates the screen unit 470 and is installed in the rotation drive unit 490 attached to the upper part of the second base unit 450 and in the cover portion 451b of the second base unit 450. A projector 500 that is arranged and capable of projecting an effect image onto the screen unit 470 from the rear, and a projector 500 are attached, and the rear surface of the unit base 451 is attached so as to cover the cover portion 451b of the second base unit 450 from the rear side. The box-shaped projector mounting member 505, which is open at the front, and the operating gear member 475 of the screen unit 470 are mounted so as to cover from above on the left side of the rotation drive unit 490 in the upper part of the second base unit 450 when viewed from the front. The upper cover 506 is provided, and two rotation detection sensors 507 attached to the upper cover 506 and detecting the rotation position (rotation position) of the screen unit 470 are provided.

[3-4g-5a. Screen unit]
The screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A is rotatably attached to the second base unit 450 around an axis extending vertically, and the effect image is projected from the projector 500. The effect image can be displayed (projected) so as to be visible to the player.

The screen unit 470 has a semi-cylindrical shape, a milky white and translucent main screen 471, and a disk shape having one end side in the axial direction of the main screen 471 as a part of the outer circumference, and the central portion is an axis. The sub-screen 472, which is curved so as to bulge outward in the direction, is milky white and has translucency, and the main screen 471 protrudes in a columnar shape from the center of both ends in the axial direction to the outward in the direction perpendicular to the axis. Penetrates the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474, the operating gear member 475 attached to the tip of the upper shaft member 473 and having gear teeth 475a formed over substantially half of the outer circumference, and the sub-screen 472. A sub-screen decorative member 476 (see FIGS. 74 and 75, etc.) formed in a relief shape that is transparent and imitates a predetermined character (skull), and a sub-screen 472 that is attached to the back surface side of the sub-screen 472. The sub-screen decorative substrate 477 (see FIG. 75, etc.) on which a plurality of LEDs 477a are mounted on the surface facing the screen and the end of the main screen 471 opposite to the sub-screen 472 toward the central axis of the main screen 471. It is provided with a semi-arc-shaped peripheral decorative member 478 that extends shortly.

The semi-cylindrical main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 is formed to have a radius smaller than the inner diameter of the annular main body 451a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450. The length of the main screen 471 in the axial direction is formed to be about 4/3 times the radius of the semi-cylindrical shape. The main screen 471 is decorated so that both ends in the axial direction are bordered by the peripheral decoration portion 472a of the sub screen 472 and the peripheral decoration member 478.

The sub-screen 472 is formed in a circular shape whose outer shape coincides with the radius of the semi-cylindrical main screen 471 when viewed from the direction in which the central axis extends (see FIG. 74 (b)). .. The sub-screen 472 is formed in an annular shape with a predetermined width from the outer periphery to the center side, and the peripheral decorative portion 472a in which a plurality of square pyramid-shaped irregularities are arranged in the circumferential direction and the inside of the peripheral decorative portion 472a are closed. It is provided with a curved surface-shaped screen general portion 472b. The peripheral decorative portion 472a of the sub screen 472 is formed in a truncated cone shape as a whole so that the inner peripheral side projects in a direction away from the main screen 471. The screen general portion 472b bulges in a spherical shape having a radius larger than the radius of the semi-cylindrical main screen 471 in a direction away from the main screen 471. A through hole is formed in the general screen portion 472b of the sub screen 472, and a sub screen decorative member 476 is attached so as to close the hole.

The upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 are respectively inserted from the front into the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f of the unit base 451 in the second base unit 450 and are rotatably attached.

The operating gear member 475 protrudes outward from one of the gear teeth 475a formed over substantially half a circumference by meshing with the second transmission gear 495 of the rotary drive unit 490 and the circumferential end portion of the gear teeth 475a. The stopper 475b is provided with a detection piece 475c that protrudes outward in a flat plate shape from the side opposite to the stopper 475b at the circumferential end of the gear tooth 475a. The stopper 475b of the operating gear member 475 is located in the recess 481a of the upper bearing member 480 which is recessed in an arc shape about the axis of the upper shaft member 473 in the state of being assembled in the second effect operation unit 400A. The rotation range of the screen unit 470 is restricted by contacting the pair of rotation restricting portions 451g of the unit base 451 in the second base unit 450 located at both ends in the recess 481a.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, an iron plate is attached to a portion of the stopper 475b that comes into contact with the rotation restricting portion 451g, and this iron plate can be magnetized with a magnet embedded in the rotation restricting portion 451g. It has become like.

The screen unit 470 can rotate between a first position with the main screen 471 facing forward and a second position with the subscreen 472 facing forward. The detection piece 475c is detected by the rotation detection sensor 507 attached to the upper cover 506.

The sub-screen decorative member 476 is attached to the screen general portion 472b of the sub-screen 472. The sub-screen decorative member 476 is formed in a relief shape imitating a skull by a transparent member, and since the plate thickness thereof changes in a complicated manner, the transmitted light is intricately refracted and the rear can be visually recognized. It's getting harder. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the sub-screen decorative member 476 has the characters "PUSH" formed in a relief imitating a skull.

The sub-screen decorative substrate 477 is attached to the back surface side of the sub-screen 472 so as to form a gap between the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 and the sub-screen 472, and a plurality of LEDs 477a are attached to the front surface side (the side facing the sub-screen 472). Is implemented. The sub-screen decorative substrate 477 has an outer shape smaller than that of the sub-screen decorative member 476, and has a white surface. By emitting light from the LED 477a of the sub-screen decorative substrate 477, the sub-screen decorative member 476 and the sub-screen 472 can be light-emitting and decorated. More specifically, the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 can strongly illuminate the "eyes" portion of the skull and the character portion of "PUSH" by emitting light from the LED 477a.

Further, since the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 is arranged relatively close to the sub-screen 472 and does not have a member for diffusing light between the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 and the sub-screen 472, the LED 477a is made to emit light. , The player can recognize the point light source of the LED 477a. Further, the subscreen decorative substrate 477 can block the light from the projector 500. Therefore, the projector 500 can project the shadow of the subscreen decorative substrate 477 on the subscreen 472.

The peripheral decoration member 478 is formed in the same shape as a part of the peripheral decoration portion 472a of the sub-screen 472, and similarly to the peripheral decoration portion 472a, a plurality of square pyramid-shaped irregularities are provided in a row in the circumferential direction of the arc. ..

As described above, the screen unit 470 includes two different screens, such as the main screen 471 and the sub screen 472. The main screen 471 is intended to display an effect image that is projected from the projector 500 over the entire semi-cylindrical shape and attracts the attention of the player by the projection from the projector 500. On the other hand, the sub-screen 472 has a narrow range (narrower than the main screen 471) in which the effect image from the projector 500 forms the periphery of the central sub-screen decorative member 476 due to the presence of the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 in the center on the back side. The purpose is to display a production image that is projected onto the sub-screen decorative member 476 and brightly colors the surroundings of the sub-screen decorative member 476, and the operation button 410 is pressed by the player by the light emitting decoration of the sub-screen decorative member 476 using the LED 477a. The purpose is to encourage people.

[3-4g-5b. Upper bearing member and lower bearing member]
The upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485 are the main body portions of the unit base 451 so as to close the front side of the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f which are open to the front in the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450. It is attached to the front surface of the 451a. Further, in the upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485, the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 of the screen unit 470 are inserted into the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f of the unit base 451 from the front, respectively. By attaching to the front surface of the unit base 451 the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 can be rotatably attached to the second base unit 450.

The upper bearing member 480 is a bearing member 481 attached to the upper portion of the main body portion 451a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 so as to close the front side of the upper bearing portion 451e whose front side is open, and the bearing member. It includes a frame top lens decorative substrate 482 attached to the upper front surface of the 481. The bearing member 481 has a recess 481a that is recessed in an arc shape from the rear surface to the front so that the center in the left-right direction is the deepest. The recess 481a of the bearing member 481 in the upper bearing member 480 is recessed in an arc shape centered on the shaft core of the upper shaft member 473 of the screen unit 470 in a state of being assembled in the second effect operation unit 400A, and the screen is internally formed. A stopper 475b of the operating gear member 475 in the unit 470 is inserted and arranged, and a pair of rotation restricting portions 451g of the unit base 451 are located at both ends of the arc of the recess 481a. The arcuately recessed recess 481a allows the stopper 475b of the operating gear member 475 to satisfactorily rotate between the pair of rotation restricting portions 451g.

The frame top lens decorative substrate 482 of the upper bearing member 480 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the surface side, and is located behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 in a state of being assembled to the second production operation unit 400A. ing. As a result, the frame top lens 418 can be light-emitting and decorated by emitting the LED of the frame top lens decoration substrate 482.

The lower bearing member 485 is formed in a substantially flat plate shape, and is attached to the front surface of the main body portion 451a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 so as to close the front of the lower bearing portion 451f. By attaching the lower bearing member 485 to the front surface of the unit base 451 in a state where the lower shaft member 474 of the screen unit 470 is inserted into the lower bearing portion 451f of the unit base 451 in the second base unit 450, the lower shaft member 474 Can be mounted rotatably.

[3-4g-5c. Rotation drive unit]
The rotation drive unit 490 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The rotation drive unit 490 is attached to the upper surface of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450, and can rotate the screen unit 470. The rotary drive unit 490 includes a unit case 491 that is mounted on the upper surface of the unit base 451 and has a hollow inside, and a switching drive motor 492 that is mounted on the lower surface of the unit case 491 and whose rotary shaft projects into the unit case 491. , A spur gear-shaped drive gear fixed to the rotating shaft of the switching drive motor (not shown) and a spur gear-shaped first spur gear that meshes with the drive gear and is rotatably mounted in the unit case 491. The transmission gear (not shown) meshes with the first transmission gear and is rotatably mounted in the unit case 491 so that it can mesh with the gear teeth 475a of the operating gear member 475 in the screen unit 470. It is provided with a spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 495.

The rotation drive unit 490 is assembled in the second effect operation unit 400A, and the second transmission gear 495 meshes with the gear teeth 475a of the operating gear member 475 in the screen unit 470. The rotary drive unit 490 rotationally drives the switching drive motor 492 to rotate the screen unit 470 around the axis extending back and forth via the drive gear, the first transmission gear, the second transmission gear 495, and the gear teeth 475a. It can be rotated.

[3-4g-5d. projector]
The projector 500 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The projector 500 is arranged in the hemispherical cover portion 451b of the unit base 451 in the second base unit 450, and is mounted on the rear side of the unit base 451 via the projector mounting member 505. The projector 500 can project and display the effect image on the main screen 471 or the sub screen 472 by irradiating the effect image toward the main screen 471 or the sub screen 472 of the screen unit 470.

The projector 500 includes a cubic projector body 501 that is attached to the projector mounting member 505, and a lens unit 502 that projects forward in a columnar shape from the projector body 501 and irradiates an effect image forward from the front end.

In this projector 500, the rear portion of the projector main body 501 is attached to the projector mounting member 505, and the lens portion 502 and the projector main body 501 are arranged in the cover portion 451b through the through hole 451c of the unit base 451 from the rear side. It is installed like this.

The projector 500 can project an effect image over substantially the front surface of the main screen 471 and the sub screen 472 of the screen unit 470, and can project and display a still image or a moving image as the effect image. The projector 500 is a commercially available liquid crystal projector and has an autofocus function.

[3-4g-5e. Projector mounting member]
The projector mounting member 505 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The projector mounting member 505 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the projector 500 is mounted inside and is mounted on the rear side of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450. By mounting the projector mounting member 505 on the rear side of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450, it is possible to cover the cover portion 451b of the unit base 451 and the rear side of the projector 500.

The projector mounting member 505 has a bottom wall extending in the horizontal direction and a rear wall extending in the vertical direction, so that the projector 500 can be mounted in a state of being tilted so as to match the tilt of the operation button 410. .. A plurality of slits 505a penetrating the front and rear are formed on the rear wall of the projector mounting member 505, and the heat released from the projector 500 can be discharged to the outside through the slits 505a.

The second effect operation unit relay board 515 and the relay board cover 516 are mounted on the right side surface of the projector mounting member 505 when viewed from the front.

[3-4g-5f. Top cover and rotation detection sensor]
The upper cover 506 and the rotation detection sensor 507 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The upper cover 506 is attached to the upper surface of the main body portion 451a of the unit base 451 in the second base unit 450 so as to cover the upper side of the operating gear member 475 of the screen unit 470. The rotation detection sensor 507 is for detecting the rotation position of the screen unit 470, and is attached to the lower surface of the upper cover 506 in a state of being separated from each other.

Although detailed illustrations are omitted, the two rotation detection sensors 507 are mounted at positions separated from each other by 90 degrees in the circumferential direction with respect to the rotation axis of the screen unit 470, and the operating gear in the screen unit 470. The detection piece 475c of the member 475 can be detected. Specifically, the two rotation detection sensors 507 are the detection piece 475c when the main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 is in the first position facing forward, and the detection piece 475c in the second position where the sub screen 472 is facing forward. The time detection piece 475c and the time detection piece 475c can be detected respectively. The rotation drive of the switching drive motor 492 of the rotation drive unit 490 is controlled based on the detection signals of the detection piece 475c by these two rotation detection sensors 507.

[3-4g-6. Buffer unit]
The buffer unit 510 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The buffer unit 510 is attached to the lower surface of the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side, and cushions the impact when the second effect operation unit 400A is hit from above to reduce the impact of the dish unit cover in the dish unit 320. It is transmitted to the bottom plate portion 326i of 326.

The cushioning unit 510 is in contact with the elastically deformable flat cushioning member 511, whose upper surface is in contact with the lower surface of the projector mounting member 505 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A, and the lower surface of the cushioning member 511. It includes a cushioning base 512 that is mounted so as to be relatively accessible to the lower surface of the projector mounting member 505.

The cushioning base 512 of the cushioning unit 510 includes a flat plate-shaped main body 512a that abuts on the lower surface of the cushioning member 511, and leg pieces that project downward from both left and right sides of the main body 512a and extend in the front-rear direction. 512b and. The leg piece portion 512b of the cushioning base 512 is in contact with the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3.

In this cushioning unit 510, when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly pressed or hit downward, the projector mounting member 505 attached to the base unit 430 compresses the cushioning member 511 in the cushioning unit 510. Move down to. The impact is absorbed by compressing the cushioning member 511. Then, when the projector mounting member 505 moves further downward, the lower surface of the projector mounting member 505 comes into contact with the upper surface side of the main body portion 512a of the cushioning base 512. Since the left and right leg pieces 512b form a gap between the main body 512a and the upper surface of the bottom plate 326i of the dish unit cover 326, the projector mounting member is in contact with the upper surface side of the main body 512a. When the 505 moves further downward, the flat plate-shaped main body portion 512a bends, and the impact can be absorbed by the bending of the main body portion 512a. Further, when the projector mounting member 505 moves downward, the lower surface of the main body portion 512a that is bent downward comes into contact with the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326, and further bending of the main body portion 512a is restricted. , The impact will be transmitted to the dish unit cover 326. In this way, when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly hit from above, the impact can be absorbed in multiple stages, and the mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415 or the effect operating unit mounting portion of the dish unit cover 326 can be absorbed. It is possible to prevent the 326a and the like from being subjected to an unreasonable force and prevent their damage.

[3-4g-7. Action effect of the second production operation unit]
The operation and effect of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 74 to 77 and the like. FIG. 74 (a) is an explanatory view of the second effect operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends with the main screen of the screen unit facing forward, and FIG. 74 (b) is a sub of the screen unit. It is explanatory drawing which saw the 2nd effect operation unit from the direction which the central axis of the operation button extends with the screen facing forward. Further, FIG. 75 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line JJ in FIG. 74 (a), and FIG. 75 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line KK in FIG. 74 (b). FIG. 76 (a) shows the second effect operation unit hidden by the first button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, etc. in the view seen from the extending direction of the central axis of the operation button with the main screen facing forward. It is explanatory drawing which shows the part which is trying to show, and (b) shows the part which is going to hide by the 1st button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, etc. in the cross-sectional view of the 2nd effect operation unit in the state of (a). It is explanatory drawing. In FIG. 77 (a), the second effect operation unit is hidden by the first button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, etc. in the view seen from the extending direction of the central axis of the operation button with the sub screen facing forward. It is explanatory drawing which shows the part which is trying to show, and (b) shows the part which is going to hide by the 1st button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, etc. in the cross-sectional view of the 2nd effect operation unit in the state of (a). It is explanatory drawing.

The second effect operation unit 400A of the present embodiment changes the decoration in the operation button 410 or changes the operation button according to the game state that changes when the game ball is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5. It is possible to entertain the player by displaying an effect image in the 410, and to let the player operate the operation button 410 so that the player can participate in the effect presented to the player. be.

The total height of the second effect operation unit 400A is formed to be substantially the same as the height of the portion below the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3. Further, the total width of the second effect operation unit 400A is formed to be slightly larger than 1/3 of the total width of the door frame 3. The second effect operation unit 400A is arranged in the center in the left-right direction below the game area 5a (the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110) in the front view.

In the second effect operation unit 400A, the upper portion of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. The second effect operation unit 400A is between the lower end of the leg piece portion 512b of the cushioning base 512 of the cushioning unit 510 and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 in a state of being attached to the dish unit 320. A gap is formed in. That is, the second effect operation unit 400A is attached only to the upper part of the dish unit 320, and is attached in a suspended state.

Further, in the second effect operation unit 400A, the front surface of the frame unit 415 (the surface formed by the inner circumference of the front end of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416) is parallel to the inclined surface of the front end opening of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a. It is installed so that it becomes. As a result, in the second effect operation unit 400A, the central axis CL (see FIG. 67) of the transparent operation button 410 that bulges forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) becomes a vertical line. It is tilted at an angle of 63 degrees so that it moves upward as it moves forward. As a result, when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 in order to play a game using the pachinko machine 1, the player's head is arranged above the plate unit 320 (second production operation unit 400A). Since it is located in front of the center of the game area 5a on the game board 5, the central axis CL of the operation button 410 passes near the player's head. Therefore, when the player drops his / her line of sight from the game area 5a to the second effect operation unit 400A (operation button 410), the operation button 410 is as good as possible for the front view (projective view from a direction parallel to the central axis CL). The operation button 410 and the door frame side second effect display device 460A in the operation button 410 can be visually recognized in a good state.

In the second effect operation unit 400A, the button shaft 452 held in the four holding holes 451d of the unit base 451 in the second base unit 450 is slid on the four cylindrical guide boss portions 413c of the operation button 410, respectively. It is movably inserted and is urged forward by an operation button spring (not shown). In the normal state (when the operation button 410 is not pressed), the second effect operation unit 400A causes the front end of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 to be the frame unit 415 due to the urging force of the operation button spring. It is in contact with a portion near the central opening 416a on the rear surface of the frame body 416 of the above.

In the normal state, the second effect operation unit 400A has the center side (central axis CL side) from the vicinity of the inner circumference of the button frame 412 of the operation button 410 forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415. It is protruding. In other words, in the transparent button lens 411 that bulges forward in the shape of a curved surface (a part of a substantially spherical surface) of the operation button 410, the portion that protrudes forward from the inner circumference (inside) of the button frame 412 is , The frame unit 415 projects forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 (see FIG. 67 and the like).

Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the diameter of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415 is about 15 cm, and the button lens 411 (front end) is the frame unit with respect to the central axis CL direction of the operation button 410. It protrudes about 4 cm forward from the front surface of the 415.

In a normal state, when the player presses the operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A, the operation button 410 moves backward along the central axis CL against the urging force of the operation button spring. Then, when the rear end of the operation button 410 comes into contact with the front surface of the main body portion 451a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450, the rearward movement is restricted and the rearward movement of the operation button 410 is stopped. When the player presses the operation button 410, he presses the button lens 411 that bulges forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface).

Since the outer diameter of the operation button 410 is formed to be much larger than that of the operation button for production provided in the conventional pachinko machine, the vicinity of the peripheral edge away from the central portion of the button lens 411 is pressed. It is likely to be done. More specifically, the operation buttons for effect in the conventional pachinko machine are attached so that the central axis extends substantially parallel to the vertical line, whereas the operation of the second effect operation unit 400A of the present embodiment is performed. Since the central axis CL of the button 410 is attached at an angle with respect to the vertical line, when the player presses the operation button 410 from above as in the conventional pachinko machine, the button 410 is separated from the central axis CL of the operation button 410. The part will be pressed (see FIG. 61).

By the way, in the operation buttons for directing in the conventional pachinko machine, since the surface to be pressed by the player is formed on a flat surface, when the operation button is enlarged while the part to be pressed is a flat surface. , If you press a part that is off the center of the operation button, the surface to be pressed will tilt so that the pressed part will retract first, and the operation button will not be able to retract straight, so you can press the operation button. There is a risk that the pressing operation will not be possible.

On the other hand, the operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A of the present embodiment has a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) in which the portion (button lens 411) to be pressed by the player is bulged forward. Because of the shape), when a position away from the center of the operation button 410 is pressed, the force is distributed to the entire operation button 410, making it difficult for the operation button 410 to tilt, and the operation button 410 moves straight backward. can do. Therefore, no matter which position on the front side of the operation button 410 is pressed, the operation button 410 can be smoothly retracted without tilting, so that the pressing operation can be reliably detected and the operation button 410 is pressed. You can fully enjoy the production of operation.

Further, in the second effect operation unit 400A, the vibration motor 424 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the board base 421 of the decorative substrate unit 420, and as described above, the second effect operation unit 400A is suspended. Since only the upper part is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, when the weight 424a is rotated by the vibration motor 424 to generate vibration, the vibration is generated at the part farthest from the mounted part. Since it is generated, the entire second effect operation unit 400A can be vibrated greatly (strongly), and the vibration can be transmitted to the player who is in contact with the second effect operation unit 400A. Further, since the vibration motor 424 is arranged directly under the position (near the upper part of the operation button 410) where the player can relatively easily press the operation button, the player who presses the operation button 410 vibrates strongly. Can be transmitted, and the player can be surprised and entertained.

Further, the second effect operation unit 400A is attached to the dish unit cover 326 in a suspended state, and the projector mounting member 505 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A and the bottom plate of the dish unit cover 326. A buffer unit 510 is arranged between the upper surface of the portion 326i and the upper surface of the portion 326i. The cushioning unit 510 includes a cushioning member 511 that is elastically deformable, and forms a gap between the main body portion 512a in which the cushioning member 511 is in contact with the upper surface and the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326. Therefore, when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly pressed or hit downward, the impact is applied in multiple stages due to elastic deformation (compression) of the cushioning member 511, bending of the main body 512a of the cushioning base 512, and the like. It can be absorbed, and it is possible to prevent an unreasonable force from acting on the mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415, the effect operating unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, etc., and the second effect operating unit 400A, etc. is damaged. Can be prevented. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is pressed or hit with a strong force when the player is presented with an effect of pressing the operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A, the operation is performed. Since the button 410, the second production operation unit 400A, etc. are not damaged, it is possible to avoid interruption of the game due to the damage, suppress the deterioration of the player's interest, and make it difficult to be damaged. It is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side.

Since the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 that the player presses and operates is formed in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) that protrudes forward, it is compared with the case where it is made into a flat plate shape. The strength and rigidity are high, and even if the lens is hit hard, the impact can be dispersed throughout the button lens 411, making it less likely to be damaged.

Further, in the second effect operation unit 400A, since the button lens 411, the frame side lens 417, and the frame top lens 418 are made of transparent members, the first button decoration portion formed on the back surface side thereof. The decoration due to the unevenness of the 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, and the like can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) (see FIG. 63). In addition, in the part where the uneven decoration is formed, the light is refracted in a complicated manner due to the change in the plate thickness, so that it is difficult to see the rear side through the part where the uneven decoration is formed. ..

Since the second effect operation unit 400A includes a first button decoration portion 411a extending from the inner circumference of the button frame 412 in the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 toward the center side, a plurality of the first button decoration portions 411a are provided. By decorating the unevenness by combining the triangles of the above, it is possible to make it difficult to see the rear part at the outer peripheral edge portion of the portion inside the button lens 411. Behind the portion where the first button decorative portion 411a is formed (rearward in the CL direction of the central axis), the inner peripheral surface of the main body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the second effect display device on the door frame side. A gap is located between the 460A and the outer periphery of the screen unit 470, but the first button decoration portion 411a located in front of the gap allows the front side (player side) to be seen from the front side (player side) to the outside or rear side of the screen unit 470. It is possible to make the members of the door difficult to see. As a result, even if the door frame side second effect display device 460A is provided in the operation button 410 that can be pressed, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the operation button 410 from deteriorating, and the player who sees the operation button 410 can see the operation button 410. It is possible to prevent discomfort, and the door frame side second effect display device 460A can be arranged without any problem in the transparent operation button 410, so that the appearance of the operation button 410 can be improved.

More specifically, the second effect operation unit 400A is attached to the door frame side second effect display device 460A by the first button decoration part 411a, the second button decoration part 411b, and the button frame 412 of the button lens 411 in the operation button 410. The second base unit 450, the upper shaft member 473, the lower shaft member 474, etc., which are on the rear side (back side) outside the outer periphery of the main screen 471, the sub screen 472, etc., pass through the transparent button lens 411 from the player side. It is formed so that it cannot be seen. Specifically, in the state of the first position with the main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 facing forward, the upper and lower outer sides of the main screen 471, the left outer side of the peripheral decorative portion 472a of the sub screen 472, and the right side of the peripheral decorative member 478. The outer part (the part of the crosshatch surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 76) is hidden from the player side.

On the other hand, in the state of the second position with the sub-screen 472 of the screen unit 470 facing forward, the outer portion of the annular peripheral decoration portion 472a of the sub-screen 472 (in FIG. 76, the portion of the cross hatch surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line). ) Is hidden from the player's side. As described above, since the operation button 410 is provided with the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the like, it is difficult to see the outside and the back side of the main screen 471 and the sub screen 472. It can be hidden, and the appearance of the operation button 410 and, by extension, the second production operation unit 400A as a whole can be improved.

Further, in the state of the first position where the main screen 471 faces forward, the screen general part of the sub screen 472 is formed by the first button decoration part 411a, the second button decoration part 411b, the button frame 412, etc. of the button lens 411. The 472b and the sub-screen decorative member 476, and the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 are difficult to see (see FIG. 76). This makes it difficult for the player to notice the existence of the sub screen 472 and the fact that the main screen 471 can be rotated. Therefore, when the screen unit 470 is rotated to switch from the main screen 471 to the sub screen 472, the operation is performed. A movement exceeding the player's expectation can be performed in the button 410 to give a strong impact to the player, entertain the player, and suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, in the state of the second position in which the sub screen 472 faces forward, the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft are formed by the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the like of the button lens 411. The member 474 is difficult to see (see FIG. 77). This makes it difficult for the player to notice that the sub-screen 472 (sub-screen decorative member 476) is rotatable, so that the impact when the sub-screen 472 (screen unit 470) is rotated can be increased. It can entertain the player.

Further, the second effect operation unit 400A is a button lens 411 capable of visually recognizing the door frame side second effect display device 460A arranged on the rear side of the operation button 410, from the inner circumference to the center side of the button frame 412. A polyhedral first button decorative portion 411a that combines a plurality of triangular surfaces within a predetermined width is provided, and a door frame side second effect display arranged behind the inside of the operation button 410 is provided. The device 460A is provided with a peripheral decoration portion 472a of a sub-screen 472 in which a plurality of square weights are arranged in a row, and a peripheral decoration member 478. As a result, the triangular decoration (first button decoration portion 411a) arranged on the front side and the quadrangular decoration (peripheral decoration portion 472a and peripheral decoration member 478) arranged on the rear side overlap each other so as to intersect with each other. It is possible to show the complicated geometric pattern to the player, improve the appearance, and suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

Further, as described above, since the first button decoration portion 411a mainly composed of a triangle, the peripheral decoration portion 472a mainly composed of a quadrangle, and the peripheral decoration member 478 are separated in the front-rear direction, the player's eyes As the position moves, the degree of overlap between them changes, so the geometric patterns that appear to overlap change, making it possible to show the player a moving decoration, and at the same time, the player can create a deep, three-dimensional decoration. It can be shown to the player and can entertain the player.

Further, in the door frame side second effect display device 460A arranged behind the inside of the operation button 410, the screen unit 470 is rotated by the driving of the switching drive motor 492 to turn the main screen 471 forward, or the sub screen. The 472 can be turned forward, and the decoration consisting of a plurality of squares can be changed. More specifically, when the main screen 471 is directed forward, as shown in FIG. 74 (a), the peripheral decorative portion 472a and the peripheral decorative member 478 are separated from each other to the left and right and extend vertically, and are vertically extended. A geometric pattern decoration in which the decoration consisting of a plurality of square pyramids arranged in a row traverses the decoration consisting of a plurality of triangles arranged in an annular shape of the first button decoration portion 411a in the button lens 411. It can be shown to the player. On the other hand, when the sub-screen 472 is directed forward, as shown in FIG. 74 (b), the peripheral decorative portion 472a is in a state in which the peripheral decorative portion 472a extends in an annular shape, and the decoration is composed of a plurality of square pyramids arranged in a circular shape. However, it is possible to show the player the decoration of the geometric pattern that overlaps with the decoration consisting of a plurality of triangles arranged in an annular shape of the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411. Therefore, by rotating the screen unit 470, the decoration (physical decoration) of the operation button 410 can be changed, so that the player's interest can be attracted to the operation button 410 by the change of the decoration, or the decoration can be changed. The change can make the player suggest the arrival of an opportunity, etc., and can entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, the second effect operation unit 400A is a screen having different screens (main screen 471 and sub screen 472) that can be switched to the door frame side second effect display device 460A provided in the operation button 410. Since the unit 470 and the projector 500 for projecting and displaying the effect image on the screen unit 470 are provided, it is possible to display an effect image completely different from the display of the effect image by the liquid crystal display device, which has a strong impact on the player. Can be given and entertained. More specifically, in the screen unit 470, the semi-cylindrical main screen 471 and the sub-screen 472 having the disk-shaped and relief-shaped sub-screen decorative member 476 in the center are the centers of the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474. It is provided so as to be separated from the axis by a rotation angle of 90 degrees in the circumferential direction.

Then, in the door frame side second effect display device 460A, in the state of the first position where the main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 is directed forward, the semi-cylindrical central axis is positioned so as to extend in the left-right direction. When viewed from the front, it looks like a quadrangle (rectangle) extending vertically (see FIG. 74 (a)). When the effect image is projected forward from the projector 500 arranged behind the main screen 471, the effect image is projected on the rear surface of the main screen 471 (see FIG. 75 (a)), and is milky white having translucency. Through the main screen 471 of the above, the effect image projected from the front side can be visually recognized. Since the surface of the main screen 471 is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape with a smooth surface, the display screen of the effect image is also curved in a semi-cylindrical shape. As a result, while the display screen of a general liquid crystal display device is flat, the display screen of the main screen 471 is curved in a semi-cylindrical shape, so that the player can see the conventional display screen at first glance. It is possible to recognize that it is different from the above, to surprise the player, and to draw the player's attention to the main screen 471, and to entertain the effect image projected on the main screen 471. be able to.

On the other hand, in the state of the second position with the sub-screen 472 of the screen unit 470 facing forward, the disk-shaped central axis substantially coincides with the central axis of the operation button 410, and the circular operation button 410 is viewed from the front. A sub-screen decorative member 476 that imitates a skull appears to be located in the center (see FIG. 74 (b)). When the effect image is projected forward from the projector 500 arranged at the rear in this state, the effect image is projected on the rear surface of the sub screen 472. By the way, since the flat and translucent sub-screen decorative substrate 477 is attached to the rear side of the sub-screen 472, the effect image (light) emitted from the projector 500 at the portion of the sub-screen decorative substrate 477. Is blocked, and the shadow of the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 is projected on the central portion of the rear surface of the sub-screen 472 (see FIG. 75 (b)). Therefore, on the sub-screen 472, the effect image from the projector 500 is projected and displayed on the outer peripheral portion excluding the central portion where the shadow of the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 is projected. At this time, when the LED 477a mounted on the front surface of the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 is made to emit light, the central portion of the sub-screen 472 can be light-emitting and decorated by the light, and the sub provided in the center of the sub-screen 472 can be made to emit light. The screen decoration member 476 can be light-emitting decorated. Further, by emitting the LED 477a of the sub-screen decorative substrate 477, the shadow of the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 projected on the rear surface of the sub-screen 472 by the light from the projector 500 can be made difficult to see, and the front surface of the sub-screen 472 can be made difficult to see. The entire side can be brightly decorated with light emission.

The second effect display device 460A on the door frame side emits LED 477a of the sub screen decorative substrate 477 with the sub screen 472 of the screen unit 470 facing forward, and displays the effect image (moving image) forward from the projector 500. When irradiated, the effect image is displayed on the part of the subscreen 472 where the shadow of the subscreen decorative substrate 477 is not projected, that is, the part outside the subscreen decoration member 476 made of decoration imitating a skull. The sub-screen decorative member 476, which is inside the sub-screen decorative member 476, is luminescently decorated by the LED 477a of the sub-screen decorative substrate 477. In this state, the outside of the light emitting decoration of the fixed sub-screen decorative member 476 is decorated with the effect image (moving image), and the decorative effect is completely different from the light emitting decoration of the decorative member in the conventional pachinko machine. It can be shown to the player, can give a strong impact to the player, and can strongly draw the player's attention to the sub-screen 472. Further, in this state, the light of the LED 477a shines brighter (with higher brightness) than the brightness of the production image inside the production image, so that the production image is partially bright, which cannot be achieved by the conventional liquid crystal display device. Can be displayed, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and a production image that makes the player more entertaining can be displayed.

Further, in the door frame side second effect display device 460A, the screen facing forward is rotated in an appropriate direction in a state where the effect image is irradiated forward from the projector 500, and the main screen 471 is changed to the sub screen 472. When the sub-screen 472 is changed to the main screen 471, the part located in the projection range of the projector 500 on the main screen 471 and the sub-screen 472 while the main screen 471 and the sub-screen 472 are rotating. The effect image is projected and displayed on the screen. That is, the effect image is displayed so as to straddle the main screen 471 and the sub screen 472. Therefore, when the main screen 471 is slowly changed to the sub screen 472, a mysterious visual effect is produced in which the peripheral decoration portion 472a and the sub screen decoration member 476 rotate and move on the effect image projected from the projector 500. It can be shown to the player and can entertain the player.

As described above, the second effect operation unit 400A includes the decoration of the screen unit 470 in the first button decoration portion 411a of the operation button 410 and the door frame side second effect display device 460A (peripheral decoration portion 472a and peripheral decoration member 478). As a result, it is possible to show the player a moving and three-dimensional decoration, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal can be obtained.

Further, the second effect operation unit 400A can irradiate the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 on which the LED 477a is mounted on the front surface and the light such as the effect image to the front behind the operation button 410 (inside the button frame 412). The door frame side second effect display device 460A is provided with the projector 500, and the inside of the operation button 410 can be satisfactorily light-emitting and decorated by the door frame side second effect display device 460A.

Further, behind the second button decorative portion 411b facing from the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 located near the outer periphery of the second effect operation unit 400A and the operation button 410, the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 of the decorative substrate unit 420 The first LED 422a and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are arranged, and by causing the first LEDs 422a and 423a to emit light, the six second button decoration portions 411b of the operation button 410 are light-emitting and decorated. be able to. As shown in FIG. 68, the first LED 422a of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are the tubular main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the frame unit. It is located between the tubular inner cylinder portion 416d of the frame body 416 of the 415, and the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not leak to the inside of the main body portion 413a or the outside of the inner cylinder portion 416d, and the operation is performed. Only the second button decoration portion 411b of the button 410 can be satisfactorily luminescent and decorated.

Further, the second effect operation unit 400A is behind the frame side lens 417 facing from the six outer peripheral openings 416b of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415, the second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and the operation button right outside. The second LED 423b of the decorative substrate 423 is arranged, and the frame side lens 417 can be light-emitting and decorated by emitting light of the second LEDs 422b and 423b. The second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the second LED 423b of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are located between the cylindrical inner tubular portion 416d of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 and the outer periphery of the frame body 416. It is located so that the light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b does not leak to the inside of the inner cylinder portion 416d or the outside of the frame body 416, and only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be luminescently decorated satisfactorily. ..

Further, in the second effect operation unit 400A, the frame top lens decorative substrate 482 of the upper bearing member 480 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A is arranged behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415, and the frame. By emitting light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the top lens decoration substrate 482, the frame top lens 418 can be satisfactorily luminescent and decorated.

Further, the second effect operation unit 400A has display screens having different forms from each other by rotating the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A arranged behind the inside of the operation button 410. The effect image can be displayed by switching to the main screen 471 or the sub screen 472, and the player can be presented with an effect that the shape of the display screen changes (switches), which is not possible with a conventional pachinko machine. , Can give a strong impact to the player and entertain.

[3-5. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 78 to 81. FIG. 78A is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, FIG. 78B is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 78C is a rear view of the door frame left side unit. It is a perspective view seen from. FIG. 79 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 80 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 81 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line LL in FIG. 78 (a). The door frame left side unit 530 is a door frame base unit that covers the front side of the door frame left side upper decorative board 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 162 (door frame left side decorative board 160) on the upper side of the dish unit 320. It is attached to the front left portion on the left side of the through hole 111 in 100. The door frame left side unit 530 is for decorating the front left side of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110.

The door frame left side unit 530 is a strip-shaped left unit base 531 extending vertically and attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 on the left side of the front view of the through hole 111, and the left unit base 531. It has a transparent strip-shaped left unit diffuser lens member 532 attached to the front surface and a translucent one that is arranged in front of the left unit diffuser lens member 532 and has a polyhedron-like decoration at the front end. On the left unit decorative lens member (not shown) and on the left unit which is attached to the upper front surface of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member and protrudes forward in a tubular frame shape and extends vertically. The decorative base 534, the left unit lower decorative base 535, which is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member, and is shorter than the left unit upper decorative base 534 and protrudes forward in a frame shape. A transparent left unit decorative cover 536 attached to the front side of the left unit base 531 so as to cover the front end side of the left unit decorative lens member from the front side of the left unit upper decorative base 534 and the left unit lower decorative base 535, and the left unit. It includes a plurality of decorative members 537 attached to the front side of the decorative cover 536.

The left unit base 531 of the door frame left side unit 530 is formed in a shallow box shape with the rear side open, and has a plurality of openings 531a penetrating the front and rear in the front surface. As shown in the figure, the plurality of openings 531a have a circular hole and a quadrangular hole extending vertically. In the left unit base 531, LEDs 161a and 162a mounted on the front surface of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 (door frame left side upper decorative substrate 161 and door frame left side lower decorative substrate 162) are formed from a plurality of openings 531a. It is attached to the front left side of the door frame base 110 so as to face forward. Each opening 531a of the left unit base 531 is formed so that the LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are located substantially in the center in the vertical direction when assembled into the door frame 3. The left unit base 531 is formed of a translucent member.

The left unit diffusing lens member 532 is formed of a transparent member, and is vertically divided into an upper diffusing lens member 532A and a lower diffusing lens member 532B. The left unit diffuser lens member 532 has a front-view circular circular lens portion 532a corresponding to the circular opening 531a in the left unit base 531 and a front-view quadrangular square shape corresponding to the square opening 531a. It includes a lens unit 532b. When the door frame left side unit 530 is assembled to the door frame 3, the LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are located immediately after the center of the circular lens portion 532a and the square lens portion 532b. It is formed.

The circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 is formed in a convex lens shape with smooth front and rear surfaces. The circular lens portion 532a can irradiate the light from the LEDs 161a and 162a arranged at the rear to the front in the form of dots. The circular decorative portion of the left unit decorative lens member can be luminescently decorated by the light radiated forward from the circular lens portion 532a.

The square lens portion 532b of the left unit diffuser lens member 532 includes a central diffuser reflection portion 532c that is recessed rearward in a conical shape at the center of the front surface, and a front diffuser lens portion 532d formed outside the central diffuser reflection portion 532c on the front surface. , The input lens portion 532e that bulges rearward in a curved surface shape at the center of the rear surface (immediately after the central diffusion reflection portion 532c), and the input lens portion 532e on the rear surface as a whole, moving forward as it moves away from the input lens portion 532e. It is provided with a front reflecting portion 532f that is inclined so as to move.

The front diffusion lens portion 532d of the square lens portion 532b is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves divided in the circumferential direction by radially extending lines centered on the central diffusion reflection portion 532c. More specifically, in the front diffusion lens portion 532d, the groove portion is recessed rearward in an arc shape in the cross-sectional shape when cut along the radial direction, and the mountain portion between the grooves is forward. It bulges in an arc shape, and the front surface is formed in a smooth wavy shape. Further, the front diffusion lens portion 532d is formed so that the groove portion and the mountain portion are alternately positioned in the circumferential direction with the line extending radially extending in the circumferential direction as a boundary.

The front reflection portion 532f of the square lens portion 532b is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves divided in the circumferential direction by a line extending radially around the input lens portion 532e. These plurality of grooves are recessed in a V shape from the rear to the front, and the deepest portion is formed in an arc shape. The front reflecting portion 532f has a cross-sectional shape when cut along the radial direction, in which the mountain portion between the grooves is formed in a triangular shape with a pointed rearward portion, and is formed in a saw shape. The front reflecting portion 532f is formed so that the groove and the mountain portion move forward as the distance from the center increases. Further, the front reflecting portion 532f is formed so that the groove portion and the mountain portion are alternately positioned in the circumferential direction with the line extending radially extending in the circumferential direction as a boundary. The line extending radially extending in the circumferential direction coincides with the dividing line extending radially in the front diffusion lens portion 532d.

The square lens portion 532b is assembled on the door frame 3, and the corresponding LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are located immediately after the input lens portion 532e.

In the square lens unit 532b, the light radiated forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a is input from the input lens unit 532e into the square lens unit 532b. Since the input lens unit 532e bulges rearward in a curved surface shape (convex lens shape), the light spreading forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a is refracted so as to travel parallel to the front, and the input light is transmitted. Almost everything can be guided to the conical central diffuse reflector 532c. Then, the light guided to the central diffuse reflector 532c is perpendicular to the axis extending in the front-rear direction (parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160) due to the inclined conical surface of the central diffuse reflector 532c. It is reflected so as to be diffused in the above direction), and travels in the square lens portion 532b from the center side to the outside along the front surface thereof. Further, the light reflected by the central diffuse reflection unit 532c travels from the central side to the outside (direction away from the center line of the central diffuse reflection unit 532c) over the entire thickness of the square lens unit 532b in the front-rear direction.

When the light reflected from the center side to the outside in the square lens portion 532b substantially parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 reaches the saw-shaped front reflecting portion 532f, it is forward by the surface of the front reflecting portion 532f. It reflects to the side. At this time, since the rear surface of the front reflecting portion 532f is inclined so as to move forward as the distance from the central diffuse reflection portion 532c increases, the thickness of the square lens portion 532b in the front-rear direction becomes thinner as the distance from the center increases. (See FIG. 81). As a result, the light reflected outward by the central diffuse reflection unit 532c over the entire thickness of the square lens unit 532b in the front-rear direction is sequentially forwarded by the front reflection unit 532f from the center side to the outside. Can be reflected.

Then, the light reflected forward by the front reflecting portion 532f is emitted forward from the square lens portion 532b through the front diffusion lens portion 532d. At this time, since the front diffusing lens portion 532d has a wavy cross section, the light reflected forward by the front reflecting portion 532f can be diffused in various directions, and the square lens portion 532b It is possible to irradiate the front surface (the rear surface of the left unit decorative lens member) substantially uniformly from the front surface of the lens.

In the front diffuser lens portion 532d and the front reflection portion 532f, the square lens portion 532b is formed by dividing a plurality of concentric grooves by a plurality of radially extending lines, and then dividing a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves with the dividing line as a boundary. Since the concentric arcuate grooves are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction by shifting in the radial direction, the light emitted from the front surface to the front of the square lens portion 532b has a concentric striped pattern. It is possible to prevent the light from becoming light, and it is possible to irradiate the light with a more uniform shade forward. As a result, the multi-faceted decorative portion in front of the square lens portion 532b in the left unit decorative lens member can be luminescent and decorated substantially uniformly.

The left unit decorative lens member (not shown) is formed along the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 536. The left unit decorative lens member is located in front of the circular decorative portion formed in the front position of the circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffuser lens member 532 and the square lens portion 532b of the left unit diffuser lens member 532. It is equipped with a multi-faceted decorative part formed on the part. The circular decorative portion is formed in a shape in which a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction on the outer periphery of a columnar portion whose front surface is recessed and extends shortly in the front-rear direction. In the polyhedral decoration part, a plurality of square pyramid-shaped parts are arranged in the vertical direction on the front surface of the rectangular parallelepiped extending vertically, and a polyhedron consisting of a plurality of triangles is arranged in the vertical direction on both the left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped part. It is formed in a shape like that. The circular decorative portion and the multifaceted decorative portion are formed in the same shape as the circular decorative portion 561a and the multifaceted decorative portion 561b of the right unit decorative lens member 561 in the door frame right side unit 550.

The left unit decorative lens member can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the transparent left unit decorative cover 536. Further, in the left unit decorative lens member, the multifaceted decorative portion is forward from the square lens portion 532b of the left unit diffuser lens member 532 by the light radiated forward from the circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffuser lens member 532. Each lens is decorated with light emitted from the lens.

The decorative base 534 on the left unit is a quadrangle whose front view shape extends vertically, and is formed in a square cylinder shape extending back and forth. The upper decorative base 534 of the left unit is inclined so that a portion forming the lower surface on the outer periphery protrudes downward from the front end side to the rear end side, and the lower portion of the portion penetrates back and forth. The decorative base 534 on the left unit is formed of a translucent member.

The front view of the decorative base 535 under the left unit is formed in a U shape that is open upward. The lower decorative base 535 of the left unit is inclined from substantially the center in the vertical direction at the front end to the rear end so that the upper side moves rearward as it goes upward. The decorative base 535 under the left unit is formed of a translucent member.

The left unit decorative cover 536 extends up and down over the entire height of the door frame left side unit 530. The left unit decorative cover 536 is bent so that the middle portion in the vertical direction is recessed rearward, and the lower portion is bent rearward along the front end of the upper decorative base 534 of the left unit, and the left It connects the dogleg-shaped part whose upper part is bent backward along the front end of the lower decorative base 535 of the unit, and the lower end of the upper doglegged part and the upper end of the lower doglegged part. It is composed of a linear part.

The upper and lower ends of the left unit decorative cover 536 are attached to the front surface of the left unit upper decorative base 534 and the front surface of the left unit lower decorative base 535, respectively. The left unit decorative cover 536 is formed of a transparent member, and the left unit decorative lens member arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front side.

The decorative member 537 extends vertically and shortly, and is attached to the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 536 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The decorative member 537 is formed of a translucent member.

[3-6. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 82 to 86 and the like. 82 (a) is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the front, and (c) is a rear view of the door frame right side unit. It is a perspective view seen from. FIG. 83 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 84 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 85 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line MM in FIG. 82 (a). FIG. 86 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line NN in FIG. 82 (a), and FIG. 86 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line OO in FIG. 82 (a). The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the upper side of the dish unit 320 and to the right side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100.

The door frame right side unit 550 includes a vertically extending box-shaped right unit base 551 attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 and attached to the right side of the front view of the through hole 111, and the front surface of the right unit base 551. The door frame right side decorative board 552 and the door frame right side decorative board 552 are attached to the left side from the center of the front view on the front side of the right unit base 551 and extend in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction. A transparent flat plate-shaped right unit left diffusing lens member 553, a sheet-shaped right unit left decorative member 554 attached to the left side surface of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and decorated, and a right unit left decorative member. It includes a transparent flat plate-shaped right unit left cover 555 attached to the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 so as to cover the left side of the 554.

Further, the door frame right side unit 550 is located on the front side of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 and on the right side of the front view of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553. A transparent flat plate-shaped right unit right diffuser lens member 556 attached to the member 553 and extending in the vertical and front-rear directions, and a right unit right diffuser lens member 556 attached to the right surface and decorated. It is provided with a sheet-shaped right unit right decorative member 557 and a transparent flat plate-shaped right unit right cover and 558 attached to the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 so as to cover the right side of the right unit right decorative member 557. There is.

Further, the door frame right side unit 550 is arranged between the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, and is shallow extending in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction in which the front and right sides are open. The box-shaped, opaque right unit left light-shielding member 559 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 are attached so as to close the open right side of the right unit left light-shielding member 559. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped right unit right light-shielding member 560.

Further, the door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the front end of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, and has a translucent right having a polyhedron-like decoration at the front end. It is attached to the front surface of the right unit base 551 so as to cover the left and right sides of the unit decorative lens member 561, the right unit decorative lens member 561, the right unit left diffuser lens member 553, and the front end side of the right unit right diffuser lens member 556. A frame-shaped right unit decorative base 562 that penetrates back and forth, a transparent right unit cover 563 that is attached to the front side of the right unit decorative base 562 so as to close the front end opening of the right unit decorative base 562, and a right unit cover. It includes a plurality of decorative members 564 attached to the front side of the 563. Although not shown, the door frame right side unit 550 is attached so as to penetrate the right unit base 551 vertically, and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 and the door frame of the door frame top unit 570. A connection cable for connecting to the top unit relay board 589 is provided.

The right unit base 551 of the door frame right side unit 550 is a quadrangle whose front view is elongated vertically, is short in the front-rear direction and extends in a square cylinder shape, and is formed in a box shape in which the vicinity of the center in the front-rear direction is closed. Has been done. The right unit base 551 is formed of a translucent member.

The decorative substrate 552 on the right side of the door frame is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically. The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is mounted on a plurality of left LEDs 552a mounted on the left side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface, a right LED 552b mounted on the right side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface, and a center in the left-right direction on the front surface. It is provided with a plurality of medium LEDs 552c and the like. The left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is for causing the right unit left decorative member 554 to emit light and decorate via the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. Further, the right LED 552b is for causing the right unit right decorative member 557 to emit light and decorate via the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The middle LED 552c is for illuminating and decorating the right unit decorative lens member 561.

The front and rear sides of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 are formed in white. The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is vertically divided into an upper door frame right side upper decorative substrate 552A and a lower door frame right side lower decorative substrate 552B. Although not shown, the door frame right side lower decorative board 552B is connected to the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100, and the door frame right side upper decorative board 552A is the door frame right side lower decorative board 552B. It is connected to the.

The right unit left diffuser lens member 553 includes a flat plate-shaped main body portion 553a extending in the vertical and front-rear directions, and a rear wall portion 553b protruding shortly from the rear side of the main body portion 553a to the right in the front view. The rear wall portion 553b is cut out in a quadrangular shape from the right end side in the front view to the left, and a plurality of cutout portions 553c are formed in the vertical direction at predetermined intervals, and the right unit left decorative member on the left surface side in the front view of the main body portion 553a. A housing recess 553d that is shallowly recessed to accommodate 554, an input lens portion 553e that protrudes rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 553a and is provided in a plurality of vertical directions, and a front view right side of the main body portion 553a, respectively. A plurality of side reflecting portions 553f arranged in the vertical direction so that the input lens portion 553e is centered in the vertical direction are provided.

The main body portion 553a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 has a side view shape in which the upper corner on the front end side of a quadrangle extending vertically is notched diagonally in a C chamfer shape, and the lower side is upward as it goes forward. It is formed in a shape that is inclined so as to move to. Further, as shown in FIG. 86, the main body portion 553a is entirely moved to the right in the front view from the rear end side to the front with respect to the vertical line on the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552. It is slightly tilted. The front end of the main body portion 553a protrudes forward more than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3.

The rear wall portion 553b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and its right end extends to substantially the center in the left-right direction of the right unit base 551. The left end of the rear wall portion 556b of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 abuts on the right end of the rear wall portion 553b.

A plurality of the plurality of cutout portions 553c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the LED 552c in the decorative substrate 552 on the right side of the door frame. In the state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 faces forward from the plurality of notches 553c, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 is satisfactorily emitted by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c. Can be decorated.

The bottom surface of the accommodating recess 553d is formed on a flat surface, and the outer peripheral shape substantially matches the outer shape of the right unit left decorative member 554. Thereby, the right unit left decorative member 554 can be accommodated.

The plurality of input lens portions 553e project rearward at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction from the rear end surface of the main body portion 553a. Specifically, when the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is divided into six equal parts in the vertical direction, they are formed substantially in the center of each vertical direction. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the input lens portion 553e is recessed forward so as to be curved in a spherical shape from a rectangular parallelepiped portion in which a vertically extending quadrangle protrudes rearward and the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. Has a site and. These input lens portions 553e are respectively located immediately before the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 in a state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. As a result, the light from the left LED 552a can be input so as to be widely diffused in the main body portion 553a.

A plurality (six) of side reflecting portions 553f are provided in the vertical direction. Each side reflection portion 553f is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves divided in the circumferential direction by a line extending radially around the input lens portion 553e. In each of these concentric arcuate grooves, the surface on the side closer to the input lens portion 553e is inclined with respect to the surface on the main body portion 553a, and the surface on the side far from the input lens portion 553e is the main body portion. It extends perpendicular to the surface of 553a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The side reflecting portion 553f has a cross-sectional shape formed into a sharp triangular shape such that the mountain portion between the grooves faces the center side when cut in the radial direction about the input lens portion 553e. , The whole is formed in a saw shape. Further, the side reflecting portion 553f is formed so that the groove portion and the mountain portion are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction with the radial line dividing the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the circumferential direction as a boundary. ing.

In the right unit left diffusion lens member 553, the light radiated forward from the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 flows from the rear surface of the input lens portion 553e into the main body portion 553a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. Being incident. Since the rear end of the input lens portion 553e is recessed in a curved shape toward the front, the curved surface refracts the light from the left LED 552a so as to spread, and in the main body portion 553a, each input lens portion 553e It will diffuse radially forward around the center.

Since the main body portion 553a is slightly inclined with respect to the line extending vertically from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 so that the whole body moves to the right in the front view toward the front, the door frame The light emitted from the left LED 552a mounted on the front surface of the right side decorative substrate 552 and incident from the input lens portion 553e into the main body portion 553a hits the flat left surface in the main body portion 553a. However, the direct light from the left LED 552a is not radiated from the left surface of the main body 553a to the outside due to the incident angle with respect to the left surface of the main body 553a, but is reflected to the side reflecting portion 553f side on the inner surface of the left surface. It becomes.

Then, the light incident forward from the input lens portion 553e into the main body portion 553a is reflected to the left in the front view by hitting the saw-shaped side reflecting portion 553f, and is reflected outward from the left surface of the main body portion 553a. It will be irradiated. Light is also emitted from the right surface (side reflection portion 553f) of the main body portion 553a to the outside (right side when viewed from the front), but the right unit left light shielding member 559 arranged on the right side of the main body portion 553a is white. Since it is a member, the left surface of the right unit left light-shielding member 559 is brightly illuminated, and the indirect light reflected by the right unit left light-shielding member 559 is emitted to the left side through the main body portion 553a. .. Therefore, from the left surface of the main body portion 553a, the light reflected to the left by the side reflecting portion 553f in the main body portion 553a and the light irradiated to the right from the side reflecting portion 553f to the left on the left surface of the right unit left shading member 559. Since the light that reflects toward the main body and passes through the main body 553a is emitted to the left, the right unit left decorative member 554 attached to the left side of the main body 553a can be light-emitting and decorated with good brightness. can.

Further, in the side reflecting portion 553f, a plurality of concentric grooves are divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, and then the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves are shifted in the radial direction with the dividing line as a boundary to form a concentric arc-shaped groove. Are arranged alternately in the circumferential direction, so that the light radiated from the left surface of the main body 553a to the outside (left side) is prevented from becoming light having concentric striped shades. It is possible to irradiate more uniform light to the left. As a result, the left decorative member 554 of the right unit housed in the storage recess 553d on the left side of the main body 553a can be lightly decorated substantially uniformly.

Since the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is formed of a transparent member, side reflections formed on the opposite side from the front left side (the side where the accommodating recess 553d is formed) of the main body portion 553a. A pattern composed of a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves and radially extending lines of the portion 553f can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent portion is formed in the right unit left decorative member 554, the pattern of the side reflecting portion 553f of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 can be visually recognized through the transparent portion, and the transparent portion in the right unit left decorative member 554 is transparent. Can be decorated by the side reflecting portion 553f.

The right unit left decorative member 554 is formed in the shape of a thin sheet, and decorations such as the maker logo of the pachinko machine 1 and the logo in line with the production concept presented to the player on the game board 5 are translucent. It is given to have. The right unit left cover 555 protects the outer surface of the right unit left decorative member 554 in a state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550.

The right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is formed substantially symmetrically with the right unit left diffusion lens member 553, and has a similar configuration. More specifically, the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 includes a flat plate-shaped main body portion 556a extending in the vertical and front-rear directions, and a rear wall protruding shortly from the rear side of the main body portion 556a to the left in the front view. The portion 556b and the rear wall portion 556b are notched from the left end side in the front view to the right in a quadrangular shape, and a plurality of cutout portions 556c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and the right side of the main body portion 556a in the front view. Front view of the housing recess 556d, which is shallowly recessed to accommodate the unit right decorative member 557, the input lens portion 556e, which protrudes rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556a and is provided in the vertical direction, and the main body portion 556a. On the left side, each input lens unit 556e is provided with a plurality of side reflection units 556f arranged in the vertical direction so as to be centered in the vertical direction.

Right unit The main body of the right diffusion lens member 556a has a side view shape in which the upper corner of the front end side of a quadrangle extending vertically is notched diagonally in a C chamfer shape, and the lower side is upward as it goes forward. It is formed in a shape that is inclined so as to move to, and has substantially the same outer shape as the main body portion 553a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. Further, as shown in FIG. 86, the main body portion 556a is entirely moved to the left in the front view from the rear end side to the front with respect to the vertical line on the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552. It is slightly tilted. The front end of the main body portion 556a protrudes forward more than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3.

The rear wall portion 556b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and its left end extends to substantially the center in the left-right direction of the right unit base 551. The right end of the rear wall portion 553b of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 comes into contact with the left end of the rear wall portion 556b.

A plurality of notches 556c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the LED 552c in the decorative substrate 552 on the right side of the door frame. These plurality of notch portions 556c are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of notch portions 553c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. Therefore, in the state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the cutout portion 553c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the notch portion 556c of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 have a square opening penetrating back and forth. Is formed, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 faces forward from the opening, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 can be satisfactorily luminescent and decorated by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c.

The bottom surface of the accommodating recess 556d is formed on a flat surface, and the shape of the outer periphery substantially matches the outer shape of the right decorative member 557 of the right unit. As a result, the right unit right decorative member 557 can be accommodated.

The plurality of input lens portions 556e project rearward at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556a. Specifically, the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is formed at substantially the center of each vertical direction when the right diffusion lens member 556 is divided into six equal parts in the vertical direction. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the input lens portion 556e is recessed forward so as to be curved in a spherical shape from the rear surface of a rectangular parallelepiped portion in which a vertically extending quadrangle protrudes rearward and the rectangular parallelepiped portion. Has a site and. These input lens portions 556e are respectively located immediately before the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 in a state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. As a result, the light from the right LED 552b can be input so as to be widely diffused in the main body portion 556a.

A plurality (six) of side reflecting portions 556f are provided in the vertical direction. Each side reflection portion 556f is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves divided in the circumferential direction by a line extending radially around the input lens portion 556e. In each of these concentric arcuate grooves, the surface on the side closer to the input lens portion 556e is inclined with respect to the surface on the main body portion 556a, and the surface on the side far from the input lens portion 556e is the main body portion. It extends perpendicular to the surface of 556a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The side reflecting portion 556f has a cross-sectional shape formed into a sharp triangular shape such that the mountain portion between the grooves faces the center side when cut in the radial direction about the input lens portion 556e. , The whole is formed in a saw shape. Further, the side reflecting portion 556f is formed so that the groove portion and the mountain portion are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction with the radial line dividing the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the circumferential direction as a boundary. ing.

In the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, the light radiated forward from the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 flows from the rear surface of the input lens portion 556e into the main body portion 556a of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. Being incident. Since the rear end of the input lens portion 556e is recessed in a curved shape toward the front, the curved surface refracts the light from the right LED 552b so as to spread, and in the main body portion 556a, each input lens portion 556e It will diffuse radially forward around the center.

Since the main body portion 556a is slightly inclined with respect to the line extending vertically from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 so that the whole body moves to the left in the front view as the whole moves forward, the door frame The light emitted from the right LED 552b mounted on the front surface of the right side decorative substrate 552 and incident from the input lens portion 556e into the main body portion 556a hits the flat right surface in the main body portion 556a. However, the direct light from the right LED 552b is not radiated from the left surface of the main body 556a to the outside due to the angle of incidence with respect to the right surface of the main body 556a, but is reflected to the side reflecting portion 556f side on the inner surface of the right surface. It becomes.

Then, the light incident forward from the input lens portion 556e into the main body portion 556a is reflected to the right in the front view by hitting the saw-shaped side reflecting portion 556f, and is reflected outward from the right surface of the main body portion 556a. It will be irradiated. Light is also emitted from the right surface (side reflection portion 556f) of the main body portion 556a to the outside (left side when viewed from the front), but the right unit right shading member 560 arranged on the left side of the main body portion 556a is white. Since it is a member, the right surface of the right light-shielding member 560 of the right unit is brightly illuminated, and the indirect light reflected by the right light-shielding member 560 of the right unit is emitted to the right side through the main body portion 556a. .. Therefore, from the right side of the main body portion 556a, the light reflected to the right by the side reflecting portion 556f in the main body portion 556a and the light reflected to the left from the side reflecting portion 556f are emitted to the left and the right side of the right unit right shading member 560 is right. Since the light that reflects toward the body and passes through the main body 556a is emitted to the right, the right unit right decorative member 557 attached to the right side of the main body 556a can be light-emitting and decorated with good brightness. can.

Further, in the side reflecting portion 556f, a plurality of concentric grooves are divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, and then the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves are shifted in the radial direction with the dividing line as a boundary to form a concentric arc-shaped groove. Are arranged alternately in the circumferential direction, so that the light radiated from the right surface of the main body portion 556a to the outside (right side) is prevented from becoming light having concentric striped shades. It is possible to irradiate more uniform light to the right. As a result, the right unit right decorative member 557 housed in the storage recess 556d on the right side of the main body portion 556a can be luminescent and decorated substantially uniformly.

Since the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is formed of a transparent member, the side reflection formed on the opposite side from the front view right side (the side where the accommodating recess 556d is formed) of the main body portion 556a. A pattern composed of a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves and radially extending lines of the portion 556f can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent portion is formed in the right decorative member 557 of the right unit, the pattern of the side reflecting portion 556f of the right diffuser lens member 556 of the right unit can be visually recognized through the transparent portion, and the transparent portion of the right decorative member 557 of the right unit is transparent. Can be decorated by the side reflecting portion 556f.

The right unit right decorative member 557 is formed in the shape of a thin sheet, and decorations such as the maker logo of the pachinko machine 1 and the logo in line with the production concept presented to the player on the game board 5 are translucent. It is given to have. The right unit right cover 558 protects the outer surface of the right unit right decorative member 557 in a state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. The right unit right decorative member 557 and the right unit right cover 558 are formed substantially symmetrically with the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit left cover 555. Further, the decorations applied to the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 may be the same decoration or different decorations.

The right unit left light-shielding member 559 is formed so that the side view shape is substantially the same as the side view shape of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit left light-shielding member 559 is formed in a shallow box shape with the front and right sides open. The right unit left light-shielding member 559 includes a flat plate-shaped main body portion 559a extending in the vertical and front-rear directions, a rear wall portion 559b protruding from the rear side of the main body portion 559a to the right in the front view in a short flat plate shape, and rear. The wall portion 559b is cut out in a square shape from the right end side to the left in the front view, and a plurality of cutout portions 559c are formed in the vertical direction at predetermined intervals, and the main body portion 559a extends from the right side to the right and is rearward. It includes a plurality of flat plate-shaped reinforcing portions 559d extending from the wall portion 559b to the front end of the main body portion 559a.

The main body 559a of the right unit left light-shielding member 559 has a side view shape in which the upper corner on the front end side of a quadrangle extending vertically is notched diagonally in a C chamfer shape, and the lower side is upward as it goes forward. It is formed in a shape that is inclined so as to move, and has substantially the same outer shape as the main bodies 553a and 556a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556.

The rear wall portion 559b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and its left end extends to the right side of the right unit base 551 substantially in the left-right direction. The left surface of the right unit right shading member 560 abuts on the right end of the rear wall portion 559b.

A plurality of notches 559c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the LED 552c in the decorative substrate 552 on the right side of the door frame. These plurality of notched portions 559c are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of notched portions 553c and 556c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. Therefore, in the state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 faces forward from the plurality of notches 559c, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 is satisfactorily emitted by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c. Can be decorated.

The plurality of reinforcing portions 559d are provided as a set of a pair of reinforcing portions 559d separated in the vertical direction at substantially the same height as the left and right widths, and three sets separated in the vertical direction by a predetermined distance. The reinforcing portion 559d of each set is formed at a position behind the decorative member 564 attached to the right unit cover 563. These plurality of reinforcing portions 559d enhance the overall strength and rigidity of the door frame right side unit 550.

The right light-shielding member 560 has a side view shape such that the upper corner on the front end side of a quadrangle extending vertically is notched diagonally in a C-chamfer shape, and the lower side moves upward as it moves forward. It is formed in an inclined shape, and is formed in substantially the same shape as the main body portion 559a in the right unit left light shielding member 559. The right unit right light-shielding member 560 closes the right opening opened to the right of the right unit left light-shielding member 559 formed in a shallow box shape in a state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550.

The right unit left light-shielding member 559 and the right unit right light-shielding member 560 are each formed of white members. As shown in FIG. 86, the right unit left light-shielding member 559 and the right unit right light-shielding member 560 are assembled into the door frame right side unit 550, and the main body 559a and the right unit right light-shielding member 560 are the right units. The left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 are arranged so as to be close to the main bodies 553a and 556a. As a result, the main body portion 559a of the right unit left shading member 559 and the right unit right shading member 560 are separated from each other in the left-right direction, forming a space extending in the up-down direction and the front-back direction with a predetermined width in the left-right direction. .. The light radiated forward from the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 through the space formed between the main body portion 559a of the right unit left shading member 559 and the right unit right shading member 560 is used to decorate the right unit. The rear side of the lens member 561 is irradiated.

Further, the right unit left light-shielding member 559 and the right unit right light-shielding member 560 are formed of a translucent member, and illuminate forward from the left LED 552a, the middle LED 552c, and the right LED 552b on the door frame right side decorative substrate 552, respectively. The left LED 552a, the right LED 552b, and the right LED 552b corresponding to the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 are prevented from interfering with each other. The light emitting decoration can be made only by the medium LED 552c.

Further, the right unit left light-shielding member 559 and the right unit right light-shielding member 560 are arranged behind each of the divided spaces because the internal space is divided into four in the vertical direction by three sets of reinforcing portions 559d. The LED 552c in the right side decorative substrate 552 of the door frame can prevent light from interfering with each other, and the portion of the right unit decorative lens member 561 located in front of each space can be prevented. , Each can be independently luminescent and decorated. That is, on the front end side of the door frame right side unit 550, it is possible to divide the door frame into a plurality of (four) regions in the vertical direction and independently illuminate each region.

The right unit decorative lens member 561 is formed in a shape that follows the front end shape of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 includes a circular decorative portion 561a formed in a circular shape in a front view, and a polyhedral decorative portion 561b extending vertically and forming a plurality of polyhedra. The circular decorative portion 561a is formed in a shape in which a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction on the outer periphery of a columnar portion whose front surface is recessed and extends shortly in the front-rear direction. In the polyhedral decorative portion 561b, a plurality of square pyramid-shaped portions are arranged in the vertical direction on the front surface of the rectangular parallelepiped extending vertically, and a plurality of rows of polyhedrons composed of a plurality of triangles are vertically arranged on both left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. It is formed in a shape as if it were installed.

More specifically, in the right unit decorative lens member 561, a plurality of circular decorative portions 561a and multifaceted decorative portions 561b are divided into four by three sets of reinforcing portions 559d in the right unit left light shielding member 559. Among the parts located in the front, one multi-faceted decorative portion 561b is arranged on each of the upper and lower sides of the circular decorative portion 561a arranged in the center in the vertical direction in the three parts from the top, and one multi-faceted decorative portion 561b is arranged in the lowermost part. It is formed so that only the portion 561b is arranged.

The right unit decorative lens member 561 is attached to the front end of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the transparent right unit cover 563. The right unit decorative lens member 561 is light-emitting decorated by the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 arranged at the rear.

The right unit decorative base 562 is formed in a tubular frame shape penetrating in the front-rear direction. The right unit decorative base 562 is formed in a shape that follows the shapes of the front end and the upper end of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative base 562 is formed so as to cover both the left and right outer sides of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 near the front end and the left and right sides of the right unit decorative lens member 561. In the state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the front end of the right unit decorative lens member 561 protrudes slightly forward from the front end of the right unit decorative base 562. The right unit decorative base 562 is formed of a translucent member.

The right unit cover 563 is formed so that the front end opening of the right unit decorative base 562 can be closed. The right unit cover 563 is formed of a transparent member, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front side.

The decorative member 564 extends shortly in the vertical direction and is attached to the front surface of the right unit cover 563 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The decorative member 564 is formed of a translucent member. The three decorative members 564 divide the right unit cover 563 (right unit decorative lens member 561) into four in the vertical direction.

The door frame right side unit 550, in the state of being assembled to the door frame 3, protrudes forward in a large plate shape from the door frame left side unit 530, and slightly protrudes forward from the front end of the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320. There is. The door frame right side unit 550 is independent of the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 provided on both the left and right protruding sides, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 provided at the front end. It can be luminescent and decorated.

Since the door frame right side unit 550 is plate-shaped and protrudes greatly forward, when this pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island equipment of the game hall, the door frame right side unit 550 is adjacent to the pachinko machine on the right side. It can exert an action effect like a partition between them. As a result, the player playing the pachinko machine 1 can be made to have the illusion that he / she is playing in a private room, and other players around him / her can play the game in a relaxed atmosphere without hesitation. Can be done.

Further, since the door frame right side unit 550 protrudes greatly forward, in the game hall where the pachinko machines 1 are installed side by side, even if the pachinko machines 1 are not located in front of the pachinko machines 1, the island equipment It can be visually recognized even from the lateral direction along the line, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made to stand out in the game hall where a large number of pachinko machines are lined up. Therefore, if the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 on both the left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550 are light-emitting decorated, the book can be viewed from a distance even if it is not located near the front of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to notify the existence of the pachinko machine 1 and to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to the player.

Further, in the door frame right side unit 550, when a problem such as a ball jam or an error occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens on both the left and right sides are used. By illuminating and decorating the member 561 and the like in a peculiar manner, it is possible to immediately notify and recognize the occurrence of a defect to the staff of the game hall, and it becomes possible to quickly respond to the defect. Therefore, the interruption of the game of the player can be resolved at an early stage, and the player can be frustrated and suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

[3-7. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 87 to 90 and the like. FIG. 87A is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, FIG. 87B is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 87C is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the back. It is a perspective view. FIG. 88 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 89 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 90 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line PP in FIG. 87. The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper side of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 and above the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100.

The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the central base 571 which is attached to the center in the left-right direction on the upper side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, and is attached to both the left and right sides of the central base 571. A pair of side bases 572 attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110 and a pair of upper speakers 573 attached to the front surfaces of the pair of side bases 572, respectively, extending left and right and the center in the left-right direction protruding forward. From the position closer to the center in the left-right direction to the vicinity of the center than the pair of openings 574a and the pair of openings 574a, which are box-shaped with the rear part open and penetrate the front and rear of the pair of upper speakers 573. It has a plurality of slits 574b (three on each side) that extend and penetrate each other in the front-rear direction and are separated from each other in the vertical direction, and are attached to the front side of the central base 571 and the pair of side bases 572. It includes a unit body 574 and a speaker cover 575 made of punching metal, which is arranged on the front side of the pair of upper speakers 573 and attached to the rear side of the unit body 574 so as to close the pair of openings 574a. ing.

Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the front surface of the center of the unit body 574 in the left-right direction and has translucency, and is attached to the rear side of the top middle decoration member 576 and the top middle decoration member 576. The door frame top middle decoration board 577 on which multiple LEDs are mounted on the front of the cage, and the left and right ends of the top middle decoration member 576, which are attached to the front of the unit body 574 and close the plurality of slits 574b respectively. A plurality of transparent flat plate-shaped light guide members 578 (three on each side) extending from the vicinity to the vicinity of both left and right ends of the unit body 574 straddling the opening 574a, and a top middle decoration member 576 on the front surface of the unit body 574. Top left decorative lens member 579 and top right decorative lens member 580, top left decorative lens member 579 and top right decoration, which are attached to both the left and right sides and cover the front surfaces of a plurality (three) light guide members 578, respectively. The top middle left decorative member 581 and the top middle left decorative member 581, which are attached to the front surface of the unit main body 574 from the front side of each of the lens members 580 and extend from the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 to the vicinity of the central side end of the opening 574a, respectively. It is provided with a top middle right decorative member 582.

Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the inside of each of the left and right side surfaces of the unit body 574, and LEDs are mounted on the portions of the plurality (three) light guide members 578 facing the left and right outer ends. The door frame top left decorative board 583 and the door frame top right decorative board 584, and a plurality (three) slits 574b formed on the left and right sides of the center in the left-right direction on the rear side of the unit body 574 penetrate through the door frame top left decorative board 583 and the door frame top right decorative board 584. A pair of board bases 585 that are attached to each part, and a door that is attached to the front surface of the pair of board bases 585 and has a plurality of LEDs 586a and 587a mounted at positions behind the slit 574b of the unit main body 574. The frame top middle left decorative board 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587, and the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 are attached to the rear side of the unit body 574, respectively. It includes a pair of light-shielding members 588.

Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the door frame top unit relay board 589 mounted on the front surface of the center base 571 in the unit main body 574 and the center base 571 so as to cover the front surface of the door frame top unit relay board 589. The unit so as to close the attached relay board cover 590, the upper cover 591 attached to the unit main body 574 so as to close the upper opening 574c of the unit main body 574, and the lower opening 574d of the unit main body 574. It includes a lower cover 592 attached to the main body 574.

The central base 571 of the door frame top unit 570 is formed in a quadrangle whose front view shape extends to the left and right. The central base 571 is formed in a box shape that is open to the rear, and has a plurality of irregularities on the front surface. The pair of side bases 572 are attached to the left and right ends of the central base 571, respectively. The pair of upper speakers 573 are attached to the front surface of each side base 572, respectively. The pair of upper speakers 573 are attached obliquely so that the front surfaces of the door frame top unit 570 move rearward on the side closer to the center in the left-right direction in the state of being assembled to the door frame top unit 570. The pair of upper speakers 573 are full-range cone-type speakers capable of outputting sound in a wide frequency band.

The unit main body 574 is formed so that the shape of the front view is such that the lower portion of the quadrangle extending to the left and right near both left and right ends bulges downward. In other words, the unit main body 574 is formed in a shape such that a quadrangle extending to the left and right is cut out in a trapezoidal shape narrowed upward from the lower end side. The unit body 574 has a quadrangle whose shape in a plan view extends to the left and right, and a portion having about 1/2 of the total width (length in the left and right direction) centered on the center in the left and right direction on the front end side of the quadrangle as the base. It is formed in a shape that combines a trapezoid that protrudes forward and a quadrangle that protrudes forward shortly with the front end side of the trapezoid as the long side. Therefore, in the unit main body 574, both sides of the portion protruding forward in the center in the left-right direction on the front surface connect the left-right end portion of the unit main body 574 and the left-right end portion of the front end of the portion protruding forward. It is located behind (recessed).

The unit main body 574 is formed with openings 574a penetrating back and forth, respectively, at a portion on the front surface from both ends in the left-right direction to a position outside the portion protruding forward. Further, the unit main body 574 has a plurality of slits extending in the vertical direction at a predetermined height to the left and right and penetrating in the front-rear direction in a portion extending diagonally in a portion protruding forward in a trapezoidal shape on the front surface. 574b is formed. The plurality of slits 574b extend left and right from the vicinity of the front end of the portion of the front surface of the unit main body 574 that extends diagonally forward to the vicinity of the opening 574a. Further, the plurality of slits 574b are formed on both sides of the center of the unit main body 574 in the left-right direction, three each vertically separated from each other.

Further, the unit main body 574 has an upper opening 574c notched from the rear end to the front in the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface, and a lower opening 574d notched from the rear end to the front in the left-right direction on the lower surface. , Is equipped. The upper opening 574c of the unit body 574 is closed by the upper cover 591. Further, the lower opening 574d is closed by the lower cover 592.

Further, the unit main body 574 includes a top left decorative portion 574e and a top right decorative portion 574f extending vertically at both left and right ends. The front surface of the top left decorative portion 574e is formed at a position substantially the same in the front-rear direction as the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The top right decorative portion 574f is formed so that the front surface thereof is located forward of the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The unit body 574 is formed of a translucent member.

The top middle decorative member 576 is attached to the front end of a portion of the front surface of the unit body 574 that projects forward in the center in the left-right direction. The top middle decorative member 576 has a modified pentagon whose front view shape is bent so that the central portion in the left-right direction of the lower side of the substantially square is located downward, and the modified pentagon extends outward in the left-right direction from the upper ends of the left and right sides of the modified pentagon. It is formed in a shape that looks like a combination of a substantially right triangle connecting the tip of the side and the lower ends of the left and right sides of the pentagon. The top middle decorative member 576 is inclined so that the variable pentagonal portion on the front surface moves backward as it goes downward. The top middle decorative member 576 is formed in a three-dimensional shape as a whole, and has translucency.

The front surface of the door frame top interior decorative substrate 577 is tilted so as to move backward as it goes downward so as to be along the front surface of the modified pentagonal portion of the top interior decorative member 576. Attached to the side. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the door frame top middle decoration substrate 577, and by making these LEDs emit light, the top middle decoration member 576 can be light-emittingly decorated.

The light guide member 578 is formed of a transparent member. The light guide member 578 is formed in a shape that follows the shape on both the left and right sides of the front end of the portion of the front surface of the unit main body 574 that protrudes forward. Explaining that the side of the unit body 574 near both ends in the left-right direction is the end side and the side near the center is the center side, the light guide member 578 is a straight portion extending straight to the left and right from the end side toward the center side. It is composed of 578a and an arc portion 578b extending in an arc shape having a large radius so as to move forward from the end side on the center side of the straight portion 578a toward the center side. The light guide member 578 is formed so that the depth in the front-rear direction is smaller than the height in the vertical direction in the straight portion 578a, and the depth in the front-rear direction is formed to be larger than the height in the vertical direction in the arc portion 578b. Further, the light guide member 578 is formed so that the height in the vertical direction is constant in the straight portion 578a and the height in the vertical direction becomes smaller in the arc portion 578b toward the center side. In the state where the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the straight portion 578a is located immediately before the opening 574a of the unit main body 574, and the arc portion 578b closes the slit 574b of the unit main body 574 from the front. There is.

The light guide member 578 includes a diffuse reflection portion 578c formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a and a diffusion input portion 578d composed of a plurality of irregularities formed on the rear surface side of the arc portion 578b. It has.

When the light guide member 578 is assembled on the door frame top unit 570, both outer ends in the left-right direction face the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584. At the same time, the diffusion input unit 578d faces the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 or the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587. When light from the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 is incident on the light guide member 578 from both outer ends in the left-right direction, the light is emitted from the straight portion 578a. As it advances toward the center side, it is sequentially reflected forward from the end side by the diffuse reflection portion 578c formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a, and light is emitted forward from the entire front surface of the straight portion 578a. A top left decorative lens member 579 or a top right decorative lens member 580 is arranged in front of the light guide member 578, and a portion of them in front of the straight portion 578a is light-emitting decorated.

Further, the light guide member 578 receives light from the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 or the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 from the diffusion input portion 578d formed on the rear surface of the arc portion 578b. Then, the light is widely diffused into the arc portion 578b due to the unevenness of the diffusion input portion 578d, and the light is radiated forward from the entire front surface of the arc portion 578b. As a result, the portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 or the top right decorative lens member 580 located in front of the arc portion 578b can be light-emitting decorated.

As described above, the light guide member 578 is the LED 583a, 586a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586, or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587. Light from the LEDs 584a and 587a can be guided to illuminate and decorate the entire top left decorative lens member 579 or top right decorative lens member 580 arranged in front in a good (uniform) state.

The top left decorative lens member 579 is attached to the front surface of the unit body 574 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 arranged on the left side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the unit body 574. The top left decorative lens member 579 has three decorative lens portions 579a that independently accommodate the three light guide members 578 from the front. The decorative lens portion 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 is formed in a shape that resembles the light guide member 578, and covers the front surface and both the upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578. On the front surface of each decorative lens portion 579a, the unevenness of the square pyramid protruding forward is arranged in rows on the left and right.

The top left decorative lens member 579 extends from the left end of the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 to the right end of the top left decorative portion 574e of the unit body 574. That is, the top left decorative lens member 579 decorates substantially the entire left side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. The top left decorative lens member 579 is light-emittingly decorated by the LEDs 583a and 586a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 via three light guide members 578.

The top right decorative lens member 580 is attached to the front surface of the unit body 574 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 arranged on the right side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the unit body 574. The top right decorative lens member 580 has three decorative lens portions 580a that independently accommodate the three light guide members 578 from the front. The decorative lens portion 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 is formed in a shape that resembles the light guide member 578, and covers the front surface and both the upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578. On the front surface of each decorative lens portion 580a, irregularities of a square weight stand protruding forward are arranged in rows on the left and right.

The top right decorative lens member 580 extends from the right end of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 to the left end of the top right decorative portion 574f of the unit main body 574. That is, the top right decorative lens member 580 decorates substantially the entire right side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. The top right decorative lens member 580 is light-emittingly decorated by the LEDs 584a and 587 of the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 via three light guide members 578.

The top middle left decorative member 581 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 574 from the front of the top left decorative lens member 579 between the left opening 574a on the front surface of the unit main body 574 and the top middle decorative member 576. The top middle left decorative member 581 is attached so as to fill the space between the three decorative lens portions 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 in a state of being assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the front center side is the top left. It protrudes forward from the front surface of the decorative lens member 579. The top middle left decorative member 581 is formed of a translucent member.

The top middle right decorative member 582 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 574 from the front of the top right decorative lens member 580 between the right opening 574a on the front surface of the unit main body 574 and the top middle right decorative member 576. The top middle right decorative member 582 is attached so as to fill the space between the three decorative lens portions 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 in a state of being assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the front center side is the top right. It protrudes forward from the front surface of the decorative lens member 580. The top middle right decorative member 582 is formed of a translucent member.

The door frame top left decorative substrate 583 is attached to the inside of the left side surface (top left decorative portion 574e) in the unit main body 574 with the surface on which the LED 583a is mounted facing to the right. In the door frame top left decorative substrate 583, the LED 583a is mounted at a position facing the left end surface of the three light guide members 578 attached to the front surface on the left side from the center in the left-right direction of the unit body 574 (see FIG. 90). ). Each of the three LEDs 583a can emit light independently. The LED 583a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 allows a portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 located in front of the left opening 574a of the unit body 574 via the straight portion 578a of the three light guide members 578. It can be luminescent and decorated.

The door frame top right decorative substrate 584 is attached to the inside of the right side surface (top right decorative portion 574f) in the unit main body 574 with the surface on which the LED 584a is mounted facing left. In the door frame top right decorative substrate 584, the LED 584a is mounted at a position facing the right end surface of the three light guide members 578 attached to the front surface on the right side of the center of the unit body 574 in the left-right direction (see FIG. 90). ). Each of the three LEDs 584a can emit light independently. The LED 584a of the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 allows a portion of the top right decorative lens member 580 located in front of the right opening 574a of the unit body 574 via the straight portion 578a of the three light guide members 578. It can be luminescent and decorated.

The pair of substrate bases 585 are attached to the rear side of the portion where the plurality of slits 574b are formed in the unit main body 574. The pair of substrate bases 585 are formed substantially symmetrically with each other. The substrate base 585 is formed from a side wall having a substantially square side view having sides extending vertically and front and back, a rear wall of a front view square extending outward at right angles from the rear side of the side wall, and the front end of the upper side of the side wall. An approximately right-angled triangular upper wall that connects the side wall and the upper side of the rear wall with a line connecting halfway up the upper side of the side wall as a hypotenuse, and an abbreviation that connects the side wall and the lower side of the rear wall on the opposite side of the upper wall. It is formed in the shape of a triangular columnar box with a right-angled lower wall and an open space between the upper and lower hypotenuses. The board base 585 is attached to the unit body 574 so that the open portion is closed by the unit body 574. The door frame top middle left decorative board 586 or the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is attached to the board base 585 so that the open portion is closed.

The door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is attached to the substrate base 585 attached to the rear side on the left side from the left and right center of the unit main body 574 so as to close the box-shaped open portion from the front. Be done. The door frame top middle left decorative board 586 is attached to the front surface of the board base 585 so that the front surface moves forward toward the center side in the left-right direction of the unit main body 574 with respect to the surface extending to the left and right. It will be in a tilted state. As a result, the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is assembled on the door frame top unit 570, and the front surface thereof is the surface of the portion where the three slits 574b on the left side of the center of the unit body 574 in the left-right direction are formed. It becomes a state almost parallel to.

A plurality of LEDs 586a are mounted on the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 at positions corresponding to the three slits 574b of the unit main body 574. As a result, the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is in a state in which a plurality of LEDs 586a face forward from the three slits 574b on the left side of the center of the unit main body 574 in a state of being assembled to the door frame top unit 570. The door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 emits light from a plurality of LEDs 586a to illuminate and decorate a portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 close to the top middle decorative member 576 via the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

The door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 is attached to the substrate base 585 attached to the rear side on the right side from the center of the left and right in the unit main body 574 so as to close the box-shaped open portion from the front. Be done. The door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is attached to the front surface of the board base 585 so that the front surface moves forward toward the center side in the left-right direction of the unit main body 574 with respect to the surface extending to the left and right. It will be in a tilted state. As a result, the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 is assembled on the door frame top unit 570, and the front surface thereof is the surface of the portion where the three slits 574b on the right side of the center of the unit body 574 in the left-right direction are formed. It becomes a state almost parallel to.

A plurality of LEDs 587a are mounted on the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 at positions corresponding to the three slits 574b of the unit main body 574. As a result, the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 is in a state in which a plurality of LEDs 587a face forward from the three slits 574b on the right side of the center of the unit main body 574 in a state of being assembled to the door frame top unit 570. The door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 emits light from a plurality of LEDs 587a to illuminate and decorate a portion of the top right decorative lens member 580 close to the top middle decorative member 576 via the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

The pair of light-shielding members 588 are attached to the front rear side of the unit main body 574 at a position between the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 and the unit main body 574. The pair of light-shielding members 588 are formed substantially symmetrically with each other by a translucent member. The light-shielding member 588 is placed between the upper and lower sides of the plurality of LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 arranged in a row corresponding to the three slits 574b in the unit main body 574. It is partitioning. With this light-shielding member 588, light can be guided forward by the light guide member 578 only by the LEDs 586a and 587 located immediately after each light guide member 578, and the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decoration The decorative lens portions 579a and 580a of the lens member 580 can be satisfactorily luminescent and decorated in an independent state.

The door frame top unit relay board 589 is attached to the front surface of the central base 571. The door frame top unit relay board 589 includes a pair of upper speakers 573, a door frame top middle decorative board 577, a door frame top left decorative board 583, a door frame top right decorative board 584, a door frame top middle left decorative board 586, and a door. The connection between the right decorative board 587 on the top of the frame and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 is relayed. The door frame top unit relay board 589 is connected to the door body relay board via a connection cable (not shown) provided on the door frame right side unit 550. The front side of the door frame top unit relay board 589 is covered with a relay board cover 590.

The door frame top unit 570 includes a top middle decoration member 576 that protrudes forward in the center in the left-right direction, and is curved so that the front surfaces of the top middle decoration member 576 on both the left and right sides are hollowed out rearward. Therefore, the player can be illusioned that only the decorative member 576 in the top protrudes greatly forward, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the pachinko machine 1.

Further, the door frame top unit 570 includes a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 that decorate the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 arranged in the center, and left and right of the top middle decorative member 576. It is formed so as to extend from both sides to the top left decorative portion 574e and the top right decorative portion 574f formed on the left and right ends of the unit main body 574. Thereby, the upper part of the front surface of the door frame 3 can be totally decorated by the door frame top unit 570.

At this time, in the door frame top unit 570, the front surface is protected by a speaker cover 575 made of punching metal behind each of the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 near both ends in the left-right direction. Since the upper speaker 573 is provided and the speaker cover 575 faces forward from between the three decorative lens portions 579a and 580a that are separated from each other above and below the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580. The sound output from the left and right upper speakers 573 can be heard by the player in good condition, and a high-quality stereo sound can be enjoyed.

Further, the door frame top unit 570 includes a door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and a door frame top right decoration by a plurality of light guide members 578 provided on the rear side of the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580. Light from the substrate 584, the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586, and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 can be guided to the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580, and the top left decorative lens member. The entire front surface of the 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 can be luminescently decorated satisfactorily. Therefore, the door frame top unit 570 can illuminate and decorate the entire front surface of the upper part of the door frame 3 including the front of the left and right upper speakers 573.

[3-8. Door frame action effect]
The operation and effect of the door frame 3 will be described. In the door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the through holes 111 penetrating the front and rear of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 are made larger in the vertical and horizontal directions than those of the conventional pachinko machine. The height of the dish unit 320 and the door frame top unit 570 in the vertical direction is reduced in accordance with the expansion of the through hole 111, and the width of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 in the horizontal direction. Is made smaller. As a result, the front surface of the game board 5 (game area 5a) attached to the main body frame 4 can be seen as widely as possible from the player (front) through the through hole 111 (glass unit 190). , Corresponds to the game board 5 having a wide game area 5a.

The door frame 3 is an effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) having a large hemispherical operation button 410 in the center in the left-right direction of the dish unit 320 that bulges forward under the through-hole 111. The front surface (front surface of the front and lower decorative portion 326c of the plate) of the lower half (the portion below the upper plate 321) on both the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 400 is recessed so as to be recessed rearward (dish unit). It is formed in a concavely curved shape so that the front surfaces of the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 400 are located rearward from the straight line connecting the front ends of the left and right ends of the 320 and the front ends of the left and right ends of the effect operation unit 400). ing. As a result, the effect operation unit 400 attached to the front surface of the dish unit 320 in the center in the left-right direction appears to protrude greatly forward, so that the player is made to stand out and emphasize the effect operation unit 400. It is possible to draw a strong attention to the effect operation unit 400.

The door frame 3 tilts the effect operation unit 400 arranged in front of the plate unit 320 below the through hole 111 so that the large hemispherical transparent operation button 410 faces diagonally upward and forward. Since it is installed in the state, when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1, the operation button 410 is in a state of facing the player's head (face), and the player drops his / her line of sight to operate the production operation unit 400. When you look at it, you can see the operation button 410 in a state close to the front, and you can see the large and round operation button 410 intensely, and you can raise the expectation for the production using the operation button 410. At the same time, the effect image displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 arranged in the transparent operation button 410 can be visually recognized in a good state, and the effect image can be fully enjoyed.

Further, since the door frame 3 is provided with an operation button 410 having a diameter substantially the same as the total height of the plate unit 320 and bulging forward in a round shape, when operating the operation button 410, a short distance of hand movement is required. Any part of the operation button 410 can be touched, and the "quick press" of the operation button 410 can be performed relatively easily. In addition, since the operation button 410, which has a large diameter and bulges forward in a round shape, is attached in an inclined state, it can be pressed from above like the operation buttons of a conventional pachinko machine, and it can be pressed to the left or right. It can be operated satisfactorily from the front or the front, and the operation button 410 having good operability makes it possible to further enjoy the production using the operation button 410.

Further, since the door frame 3 is attached with the effect operation unit 400 in a suspended state by the plate unit 320 and is provided with a vibration motor 424 that generates vibration at the lower part of the effect operation unit 400, the game is played. When the vibration motor 424 is rotated according to the state to generate vibration, strong vibration can be transmitted to the player's hand touching the upper part of the operation button 410, which surprises the player and operates the operation button. The production using 410 can be further enjoyed.

Further, since the door frame 3 is provided with a large operation button 410 (directing operation unit 400) over the entire height of the plate unit 320 in the center of the front surface of the plate unit 320, the upper plate 321 is compared with the conventional pachinko machine. Since the lower plate 322 underneath is less noticeable, it is possible to make it easier for a player who is accustomed to seeing a conventional pachinko machine to recognize that it is clearly different, and an appeal that strongly attracts the player's attention. It can be a powerful pachinko machine 1.

Further, the door frame 3 is formed so that the lower plate 322 wraps around to the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 with respect to the lower plate opening 326d which is opened on the left side of the effect operation unit 400 on the front surface of the plate unit 320. Therefore, the volume of the lower plate 322 can be increased with respect to the size of the lower plate opening 326d, and a sufficient number of game balls stored in the lower plate 322 can be secured. Further, since the rear part of the lower plate 322 wraps around to the rear side of the effect operation unit 400, when the player puts his left hand in the lower plate 322 or puts his left hand finger on the lower plate opening 326d. Since it is difficult for the fingertips to touch the wall behind the lower plate 322, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game, and the size of the lower plate opening 326d is large. It is possible to recognize by touch that the volume of the lower plate 322 is larger than that of the lower plate 322.

Further, the door frame 3 is a lower portion for pulling out the lower plate ball supply port 323c at which the game balls from the upper plate 321 are discharged to the lower plate 322 and the game balls of the lower plate 322 into a dollar box or the like below the plate unit 320. The countersunk ball extraction holes 322a are arranged in a straight line in the front-rear direction, and are arranged on the right outer side of the lower plate opening 326d (on the right side of the left end of the frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400) in the front view. That is, the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a are provided with the effect operation unit 400, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (right outside of the lower plate opening 326d) in the plate unit cover 326, and the front end of the lower plate cover 340. Since it is arranged behind the side, etc., the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a cannot be seen from the player side, and the appearance of the plate unit 320 (pachinko machine 1) can be refreshed. The appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

Further, since the door frame 3 has the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a arranged below the front (direct front) of the lower plate ball supply port 323c in the lower plate 322, the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is opened. Then, the game ball discharged from the upper plate 321 or the like to the lower plate 322 is immediately discharged from the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a to the lower dollar box or the like as soon as it enters the lower plate 322. At this time, since the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a cannot be seen from the player side, the flow of the game ball discharged from the upper plate 321 or the like through the lower plate 322 to the dollar box also I can't see it. As a result, it is possible to give the player the illusion that the game ball of the upper plate 321 and the game ball paid out from the payout device 830 in a state where the upper plate 321 is full are directly discharged to the dollar box. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to feel the annoyance of passing through the lower plate 322, and it is possible to concentrate the player on the game (driving operation of the game ball, directing image, etc.) and suppress the deterioration of the interest. can.

Further, in the door frame 3, the lower plate ball supply port 323c has the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a arranged at a position on the front left side of the lower plate 322, and the lower plate 322 stands on the right side of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. Since the raised wall portion is curved diagonally so as to face the direction of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, the game ball supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate 322 can be directly fed to the lower plate ball. It can be guided to the punching hole 322a, or can be reflected on the right wall portion and indirectly guided to the lower plate ball punching hole 322a. As a result, in the state where the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a remains open, the game ball supplied to the lower plate 322 from the lower plate ball supply port 323c is in the area on the left side of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a in the lower plate 322. Since the ball can be discharged downward from the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a without invading (lower plate first region A1), the lower plate 322 does not show the game ball circulating in the lower plate 322 to the player. The game ball can be discharged downward (dollar box), and the same effect as described above can be obtained.

Further, the door frame 3 is provided with a lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326 with the lower plate 322 facing forward between the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (effect operation unit 400) and the lower speaker port 326e. Therefore, even if the player puts his / her hand on the lower plate opening 326d or puts his / her hand on the lower plate 322, the front of the lower speaker opening 326e is not blocked by the player's hand. The sound from the speaker 921 in the board unit 900 can be satisfactorily output forward, and the sound produced by the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed. Further, when the player puts his or her hand on or approaches the lower plate 322, the player can feel the vibration due to the deep bass from the speaker 921 output forward from the lower speaker port 326e, and the game can be played. It is possible to entertain people and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the door frame 3 is provided with a door frame right side unit 550 which is plate-shaped and greatly protrudes forward from the right side of the through hole 111, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility of the game hall, the door is opened. Since the right side unit 550 of the frame can exert an action effect like a partition between the pachinko machine adjacent to the right side, the player playing with the pachinko machine 1 can play in a private room. You can make the player feel as if you are there, and you can let other players around you play the game in a relaxed atmosphere without hesitation.

Further, since the door frame 3 can be light-emittingly decorated on the front end and the left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550, which is plate-shaped and protrudes greatly forward, a game hall in which the pachinko machines 1 are installed side by side. Even if the pachinko machine 1 is not located in front of the pachinko machine 1, the presence of the pachinko machine 1 can be notified even from a distance such as from the lateral direction along the island facility, and the pachinko machine has a high appeal to the player. It can be machine 1.

Further, the door frame 3 includes a top middle decoration member 576 that protrudes forward in the center in the left-right direction in the door frame top unit 570 on the upper side of the through opening 111, and fronts on both left and right sides of the top middle decoration member 576. The shape is recessed so as to be hollowed out to the rear (the top middle decoration member of the door frame top unit 570 is more than the straight line connecting the front ends of the left and right ends of the door frame top unit 570 and the front ends of the left and right ends of the top middle decoration member 576. The front surface of both the left and right sides of the 576 is formed in a concavely curved shape so as to be located rearward. As a result, only the top middle decoration member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 seems to protrude greatly forward, so that the top middle decoration member 576 can be highlighted and emphasized to the player. The interior decorative member 576 can be strongly noticed.

By the way, in the upper part of the door frame in the conventional pachinko machine, a pair of upper speakers separated to the left and right are provided, and the two upper speakers are conspicuous. On the other hand, the door frame 3 of the present embodiment is a pair of upper parts of the door frame top unit 570 attached to the upper side of the through hole 111, whose front surfaces are protected by speaker covers 575 made of punching metal on both left and right ends. A top with a speaker 573, a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 extending from both left and right sides of the central top middle decorative member 576 to both ends in the left-right direction through the front of the speaker cover 575, and a top. The entire front surface of the left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 can be luminescently decorated. As a result, the upper part of the front surface of the door frame 3 can be decorated as a whole, so that the pair of upper speakers 573 becomes inconspicuous at the upper part of the door frame 3, and the decoration is clearly different from that of the conventional pachinko machine. At first glance, the player can be made aware of the fact that the pachinko machine 1 has a high appeal to the player, and the pair of upper speakers 573 can entertain the player with a high-quality stereo sound. can.

As described above, in the door frame 3 of the present embodiment, the effect operation unit 400 attached to the dish unit 320 and the top interior decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 are formed below and above the through hole 111. Since each of them protrudes greatly forward at the center in the left-right direction, it is possible to show the player a unified decoration at the top and bottom where the virtual line passing through the center in the left-right direction stands out. The pachinko machine 1 can be made more prominent than other pachinko machines and has high appeal.

Further, in the door frame 3, since the top middle decoration member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 and the effect operation unit 400, which are arranged vertically in the center in the left-right direction, are projected forward, the top middle decoration member 576. And when the effect operation unit 400 is light-emittingly decorated, it is possible to show the player a light-emitting line extending vertically at the center of the front surface of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction, and the line of sight of the player is arranged in the center of the left-right direction. It can be guided to the operation button 410 or the like of the effect operation unit 400.

[4. Overall configuration of the main body frame]
The main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 94. FIG. 91 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 92 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the back. Further, FIG. 93 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 94 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 of the present embodiment is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably housed inside. The main body frame 4 is vertically attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall above and below the front end on the left side of the front side, and the door frame 3 is closed so that the opened front side is closed. It can be installed so that it can be opened and closed.

The main body frame 4 of the present embodiment has a frame-shaped main body frame base 600 and a main body frame base 600 that can be partially inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5. It is attached to the upper and lower ends on the left side of the front view and is rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70, respectively, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame of the door frame 3 are attached. It includes a main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and a main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge member 150 is rotatably attached, and a reinforcing frame 660 attached to the front left side surface of the main body frame base 600. ..

Further, the main body frame 4 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base 600, and is a ball launching device 680 for driving a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and a front view right side surface of the main body frame base 600. The locking unit 700 that locks between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the main body frame base 600 are attached to the rear side along the upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600. An inverted L-shaped payout unit 800 that pays out the game ball to the player side, a board unit 900 that is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and an openable and closable attachment to the rear side of the main body frame base 600. It includes a back cover 980 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 600.

[4-1. Body frame base]
As shown in FIGS. 91 to 94, the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment is formed in a rectangular shape having a front view extending vertically. The main body frame base 600 penetrates back and forth within a height range of about 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly below the upper end, and the game board insertion port 601 into which the game board 5 is inserted from the front side and a game. The game board mounting portion 602, which forms the lower side of the board insertion slot 601 and on which the game board 5 is mounted, and the game board mounting portion 602 project upward from the center in the left-right direction and are left and right at the lower end of the game board 5. And a game board regulation unit 603 that regulates the movement to the rear.

Further, the main body frame base 600 is provided on the right side of the front view of the launcher mounting portion 604 for mounting the ball launcher 680 formed on the lower right side of the game board mounting portion 602 and the launch device mounting portion 604. The door of the board unit 900 penetrates back and forth through the cylinder insertion port 605 through which the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted, and the front left and right center of the game board mounting portion 602 on the lower left side. A circular shape that penetrates back and forth between the connection opening 606 that allows the frame relay board 911 to face forward and the lower left side of the front view of the game board mounting part 602 so that the speaker unit 920 in the board unit 900 faces forward. It includes an opening 607 for a speaker.

Further, the main body frame base 600 extends from the right side of the game board insertion port 601 to the rear in a plate shape, and the locking unit 700 is attached to the right side surface, and the back cover 980 can be rotated at the rear end. It includes a rear extension 608 that can be attached. Further, the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 4 is formed in the vicinity of the upper and lower ends of the left end of the front view on the rear surface, and the upper hinge member 620 for attaching the upper hinge member 620 on the main body frame side and the upper hinge member 640 for attaching the lower hinge member 640 on the main body frame side are attached. A portion 609 and a lower hinge mounting portion 610 are provided.

Further, the main body frame base 600 is rotatably attached to an opening cover 615 that closes the connection opening 606 so as to be openable and closable, and a position slightly lower on the left side of the front left and right center of the game board mounting portion 602. A game board lock member 616 capable of restricting the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted through the game board insertion port 601 is provided.

[4-2. Main body frame side upper hinge member and main body frame side lower hinge member]
The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 94. The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 are attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 609 and the lower hinge mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600.

The upper hinge member 620 on the main body frame side has an upper hinge main body 621 in which the rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate material is bent downward in an L shape, and the upper hinge main body 621 protrudes upward in a columnar shape from the front end. The hinge pin 622 on the main body frame, which is pivotally supported by the upper hinge member 60 on the outer frame side, and the upper hinge main body 621, which penetrates the upper hinge main body 621 on the left side of the front view of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame, pivotally support the upper hinge member 140 on the door frame side. It is provided with an upper hinge hole 623 for the door frame for the purpose. The downwardly bent portion of the upper hinge main body 621 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 is attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 609 of the main body frame base 600.

The lower hinge member 640 on the main body frame side penetrates vertically through the lower hinge first main body 641 in which the rear portion of the horizontally extending flat plate material is bent upward in an L shape and the front end of the lower hinge first main body 641. A lower hinge hole for the outer frame (not shown) that is pivotally supported by the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side of the outer frame 2, and a flat plate that is arranged above the lower hinge first main body 641 and extends horizontally. The lower hinge second main body 643 in which the rear portion of the shaped plate material is bent upward in an L shape, and the lower hinge member 150 on the door frame side of the door frame 3 which penetrates vertically at the front end of the lower hinge second main body 643. The door frame hinge hole 644 for axially supporting the door frame and the door frame 3 extending upward from the left end behind the door frame hinge hole 644 in the horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 643. It is provided with a regulation piece 645 for restricting the rotation range of the door.

In the lower hinge second main body 643, the horizontally extended portion is above the horizontally extended portion of the lower hinge first main body 641 with a certain interval, and the portion bent upward is the lower hinge first body. It is in contact with the front surface of the upwardly bent portion of the main body 641. In the main body frame side lower hinge member 640, the portions of the lower hinge first main body 641 and the lower hinge second main body 643 that are bent upward are attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600.

[4-3. Reinforcement frame]
The reinforcing frame 660 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 94. The reinforcing frame 660 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600. The reinforcing frame 660 has a cross-sectional shape in a plan view formed in a U-shape with the right side open, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. Further, the reinforcing frame 660 restricts the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion port 601 of the main body frame base 600 from moving forward and up and down on the rear side of the portion extending to the right from the front end. A set of left positioning members 661 are attached vertically separated from each other.

The hinge side (left side when viewed from the front) of the main body frame base 600 can be reinforced by this reinforcing frame 660, and the inside of the main body frame 4 (game board 5) from the left side passing between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 can be reinforced. It is possible to prevent unauthorized insertion of tools.

[4-4. Ball launcher]
The ball launcher 680 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91, 93 and 94. The ball launching device 680 is a device for driving a game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 into the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4. In this ball launching device 680, the driving strength of the game ball changes according to the rotation angle of the handle 302 of the handle unit 300 in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3.

The ball launcher 680 is attached to a flat plate-shaped launch base 681 attached to the launcher attachment portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 and a rear surface of the right portion of the launch base 681 when viewed from the front, and the rotation shaft is attached to the launch base 681. A launch solenoid 682 consisting of a rotary solenoid that penetrates and extends forward, a ball hammer 683 whose base end is attached to the rotation axis of the launch solenoid 682, and a ball hammer 683 that extends diagonally upward to the left from the vicinity of the tip. It is equipped with a launch rail 684, which is attached to the front surface of the launch base 681 so that the game ball can roll.

In this ball launching device 680, a game ball is supplied from the ball feeding unit 250 of the door frame 3 to the upper right end of the launch rail 684, and the game ball is supplied to the upper right end of the launch rail 684. Then, when the handle 302 is rotated, the firing solenoid 682 is driven with a strength corresponding to the rotation operation angle, and the game ball is hit by the hitting mallet 683. Then, the game ball struck by the ball hammer 683 is guided by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the launch rail 684 and is driven into the game area 5a.

If the hit game ball does not reach the game area 5a due to the driving strength of the game ball, etc., the space between the launch rail 684 and the game board 5 (outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002). Then, it falls into the foul ball receiving port 275 of the lower foul cover unit 270, passes through the inside of the foul cover unit 270, and is discharged to the lower plate 322.

[4-5. Locking unit]
The locking unit 700 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 94. The locking unit 700 of the present embodiment is attached to the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 4, and can lock between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3, and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2. The locking unit 700 includes a unit base 701 that is attached to the right side surface of the rear extension portion 608 of the main body frame base 600 and extends vertically, and a plurality of lock units 701 that protrude forward from the unit base 701 and can be locked to the door frame 3. The door frame hook 702, a plurality of outer frame hooks 703 protruding rearward from the unit base 701 and lockable to the outer frame 2, and a columnar projecting forward from the lower part of the unit base 701. A protrusion protrudes from the front end in a direction perpendicular to the axis, and the rotation of the cylinder lock 211 is transmitted by engaging with the rotation transmission member 212 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 of the door frame 3, and the door is transmitted according to the rotation direction of the key. It includes a key cylinder 710 that unlocks either the frame hook 702 or the outer frame hook 703.

[4-6. Payout unit]
The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 95 to 113. FIG. 95 is a perspective view of the payout unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 96 is a perspective view of the payout unit as viewed from the back. Further, FIG. 97 is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 98 is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 99A is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit of the payout unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 99B is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 100 is an exploded perspective view of the ball guidance unit. Further, FIG. 101A is a perspective view of the payout device of the payout unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 101B is a perspective view of the payout device as viewed from the back. Further, FIG. 102 is an exploded perspective view of the payout device disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 103 is an exploded perspective view of the payout device disassembled and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 104 (a) is a front view of the payout device, and FIG. 104 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the QQ line in (a). Further, FIG. 105 (a) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the ball pulling passage is closed by the ball pulling movable piece in the payout device, and FIG. 105 (b) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the ball pulling passage is opened by the ball pulling movable piece. Is.

Further, FIG. 106 (a) is a perspective view of the upper full tank path unit in the payout unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 106 (b) is a perspective view of the upper full tank path unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 107 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full tank path unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 107 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full tank path unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. be. Further, FIG. 108 (a) is a perspective view of the lower full-filled ball path unit in the payout unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 108 (b) is a perspective view of the lower full-filled ball path unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 109 is an exploded perspective view of the lower full tank path unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 110 is an exploded perspective view of the lower full tank path unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 111A is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the taxiway opening / closing door is closed in the lower full tank path unit, and FIG. 111B is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the taxiway opening / closing door is open. .. Further, FIG. 112 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the foul cover unit of the door frame and the lower full tank path unit. FIG. 113 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of the game ball in the payout unit.

As shown in FIGS. 95 and 96, the payout unit 800 of the present embodiment is attached to the inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and the upper part of the payout unit base 801. It is attached to the ball tank 802 that stores the game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall (not shown) in the shape of a box that extends upward and extends to the left and right, and the payout unit base 801 under the ball tank 802. It is provided with a tank rail 803 extending to the left and right to guide the game ball in the cage ball tank 802 to the left in the front view. In the tank rail 803, while guiding the game ball to the left, the ball leveling member 804 (see FIG. 113) that hangs swingably from above aligns the game balls in two rows in the front-rear direction.

Further, the payout unit 800 is attached to the rear surface of the upper left side of the front view of the payout unit base 801 to guide the game ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner, and the ball guide unit 820 below the ball guide unit 820. A payout device 830 that is detachably attached to the payout unit base 801 and pays out game balls guided by the ball guidance unit 820 one by one based on an instruction from the payout control board 951 housed in the payout control board box 950. And have. Game balls are distributed in two rows from the tank rail 803 to the payout device 830, and the game balls are paid out one by one from the payout device 830.

Further, the payout unit 800 guides the game balls paid out by the payout device 830 attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 downward, and also guides the game balls downward according to the storage state of the game balls in the upper plate 321 in the plate unit 320. Is discharged from either the normal discharge port 850d or the full tank discharge port 850e, and the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full tank path unit 850 attached to the lower end of the payout unit base 801. The normal taxiway 861 that guides the game ball forward and guides it from the front end to the through ball passage 273 of the door frame 3, and guides the game ball released from the full tank discharge port 850e forward and guides the game ball forward from the front end of the door frame 3. A taxiway opening / closing door 863 that opens and closes the front end openings of the full taxiway 862 that guides to the full taxiway receiving port 274, and the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 according to the opening and closing of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4. The lower full tank path unit 860 and the like are provided.

[4-6a. Ball guidance unit]
The ball guidance unit 820 of the payout unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100. The ball guidance unit 820 has a box-shaped front case 821 that extends vertically and has an open rear side, a box-shaped rear case 822 that is attached to the rear side of the front case 821 and has an open front side, and a front case. A flat partition plate 823 that is attached between the 821 and the rear case 822 and separates the front case 821 and the rear case 822, and the front and rear ends are connected to the front case 821 and the rear case 822 through the partition plate 823. A pair of movable piece members front 825 and rear movable piece members that are rotatably attached by the attached rod-shaped shaft member 824 and are arranged in the front case 821 and the rear case 822, respectively. It includes an 826 and a ball breakage detection sensor 827 that is mounted in the front case 821 and can detect the rotational positions of a pair of movable piece member front 825 and movable piece member rear 826.

The front case 821 has a ball guidance inlet 821a that is open so that the game ball can pass in the upper part of the right side surface, and a ball guidance outlet that is open so that the game ball can pass through at a position to the right of the center in the left-right direction of the bottom surface. The 821b is provided with a guide passage 821c that communicates the ball guide inlet 821a and the ball guide outlet 821b and allows the game ball to circulate. The guide passage 821c has an introduction portion 821d extending diagonally from the ball guidance inlet 821a to the vicinity of the left end at a small angle with respect to the horizontal, and a center of height along the left side of the front case 821 from the introduction portion 821d. It is composed of a detection unit 821e that extends straight downward to the vicinity and a meandering unit 821f that extends from the detection unit 821e in a meandering manner with the left and right widths of the front case 821. Further, the front case 821 is provided with a notch 821g on the wall on the right side of the front view of the detection unit 821e in the guidance passage 821c.

The rear case 822 has a ball guidance inlet 822a that is open so that the game ball can pass in the upper part of the right side surface, and a ball guidance outlet that is open so that the game ball can pass through at a position to the right of the center in the left-right direction of the bottom surface. It is provided with a guide passage 822c that communicates the 822b, the ball guidance inlet 822a, and the ball guidance outlet 822b, and allows the game ball to circulate. The guide passage 822c has an introduction portion 822d extending diagonally from the ball guidance inlet 822a to the vicinity of the left end at a small angle with respect to the horizontal, and a center of height along the left side of the rear case 822 from the introduction portion 822d. It is composed of a detection unit 822e that extends straight downward to the vicinity and a meandering unit 822f that extends from the detection unit 822e in a meandering manner with the left and right widths of the rear case 822. Further, the rear case 822 is provided with a notch 822g on the wall on the right side of the front view of the detection unit 822e in the guidance passage 822c.

After this, the rear case 822 is formed substantially symmetrically to the left and right with respect to the front case 821, and in a state of being assembled to the ball guidance unit 820, the guidance passage 821c and the guidance passage 822c are formed so as to coincide with each other in the front-rear direction. There is.

The shaft member 824 has front and rear ends attached below the upper ends of the notches 821g and 822g in the front case 821 and the rear case 822 and outside the guide passages 821c and 822c.

The movable piece member front 825 has a flat plate-shaped movable piece 825a extending vertically, a shaft hole 825b that penetrates back and forth at the upper end of the right-angled surface of the movable piece 825a and through which the shaft member 824 is inserted, and the movable piece 825a. The extension portion 825c extending to the right at right angles to the right surface of the movable piece 825a from the upper end of the The connecting portion 825d, the weight mounting portion 825e having a through hole that protrudes outward from the vicinity of the center of the upper portion of the extending portion 825c and the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d and penetrates back and forth, and the extending portion 825c. The detection piece 825f, which extends outward from the tip on the right side and can be detected by the ball breakage detection sensor 827, and the movable piece 825a on the outer circumference of the connecting portion 825d, extend outward in a flat plate shape. It is provided with a stopper piece of 825 g.

When the shaft member 824 is passed through the shaft hole 825b, the movable piece member front 825 rotates so that the weight mounting portion 825e protruding from the outer circumference of the connecting portion 825d is located directly below the shaft hole 825b due to its own weight. Then, the movable piece 825a is in a state of extending diagonally downward from the portion of the shaft hole 825b. Therefore, in the state where the ball guidance unit 820 is assembled, the connecting portion 825d is inserted into the notch portion 821g of the front case 821, the lower end of the movable piece 825a protrudes into the guidance passage 821c, and the stopper piece 825g is provided. It is in a state of being in contact with the outer wall of the guide passage 821c (detection unit 821e). When the stopper piece 825g comes into contact with the outer wall of the guidance passage 821c, the lower end of the movable piece 825a is restricted from further rotating in the direction of projecting into the guidance passage 821c (leftward in front view). Further, when the lower end of the movable piece 825a is rotated in the direction (to the right in the front view) of the movable piece member front 825 so as to approach the wall of the guide passage 821c, the left surface of the movable piece 825a becomes the guide passage 821c. Match the inner surface. In this state, the detection piece 825f in front of the movable piece member 825 is in a non-detection state with respect to the ball breakage detection sensor 827. That is, when there is a game ball in the guidance passage 821c, the ball breakage detection sensor 827 does not detect it.

The movable piece member rear 826 has a flat plate-shaped movable piece 826a extending vertically, a shaft hole 826b penetrating back and forth at the upper end of the right-angled surface of the movable piece 826a through which the shaft member 824 is inserted, and the movable piece 826a. 826c extending to the right at right angles to the right surface of the movable piece 826a from the upper end of the The connecting portion 826d, the weight mounting portion 826e having a through hole that protrudes outward from the vicinity of the center of the upper portion of the extending portion 826c and the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d and penetrates back and forth, and the extending portion 826c. The detection piece 826f, which extends outward from the tip on the right side and can be detected by the ball breakage detection sensor 827, and the movable piece 826a on the outer circumference of the connecting portion 826d, extend outward in a flat plate shape. It is provided with a stopper piece of 826 g.

When the shaft member 824 is passed through the shaft hole 826b, the movable piece member rear 826 rotates so that the weight mounting portion 826e protruding from the outer circumference of the connecting portion 826d is located directly below the shaft hole 826b due to its own weight. Then, the movable piece 826a is in a state of extending diagonally downward from the portion of the shaft hole 826b. Therefore, in the state where the ball guidance unit 820 is assembled, the connecting portion 826d is inserted into the notch portion 822g of the rear case 822, the lower end of the movable piece 826a protrudes into the guidance passage 822c, and the stopper piece 826g It is in a state of being in contact with the outer wall of the guidance passage 822c (detection unit 822e). When the stopper piece 826g comes into contact with the outer wall of the guidance passage 822c, the lower end of the movable piece 826a is restricted from further rotating in the direction of projecting into the guidance passage 822c (leftward in front view). Further, when the lower end of the movable piece 826a is rotated in the direction (to the right in the front view) of the movable piece member 826 so as to approach the wall of the guide passage 822c, the left surface of the movable piece 826a becomes the guide passage 822c. Match the inner surface. In this state, the detection piece 826f of the movable piece member 826 is in a non-detection state with respect to the ball breakage detection sensor 827. That is, when there is a game ball in the guidance passage 822c, the ball out detection sensor 827 is not detected.

The ball guidance unit 820 of the present embodiment is supplied with a plurality of game balls arranged in a row in the front-rear direction by a tank rail 803, and the front case 821 and the rear case are in a state in which the plurality of game balls are arranged in a row. The 822 can guide the lower payout device 830 in two rows back and forth (see FIG. 113). At this time, since the front case 821 and the rear case 822 are separated by a partition plate 823, the game balls circulating in the respective guide passages 821c and 822c do not interfere with each other and are satisfactorily distributed. Can be done.

Further, when the game ball circulates in the guide passages 821c and 822c of the ball guidance unit 820, the game ball comes into contact with the movable pieces 825a and 826a of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826, and the movable pieces 825a and 826a come into contact with each other. The front 825 of the movable piece member and the rear 826 of the movable piece member rotate in the direction corresponding to the wall surfaces of the guide passages 821c and 822c. As a result, the detection pieces 825f and 826f of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 are not detected by the ball breakage detection sensor 827, and it can be seen that the game balls are in the guide passages 821c and 822c.

Then, when the game ball is paid out by the payout device 830 on the downstream side of the ball guidance unit 820, the game ball in the guidance passages 821c and 822c flows downstream. When the game ball flows through the guide passages 821c and 822c, the momentum of the game ball flowing through the introduction portions 821d and 822d becomes stronger, and the game ball flowing through the introduction portions 821d and 822d becomes a movable piece at the upper part of the detection units 821e and 822e. It bounces toward the 825a and 826a sides and comes into contact with the movable pieces 825a and 826a. Since the movable pieces 825a and 826a vibrate due to the contact of the game balls, the movable pieces 825a and 826a are sandwiched or intruded between the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the notches 821g and 822g of the guide passages 821c and 822c. It is possible to remove dust and dirt, and the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be satisfactorily rotated by their own weight or the like.

Further, the ball guidance unit 820 detects the game balls circulating in the guide passages 821c and 822c by the separate movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826, and also detects the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826. Since each of the detection pieces 825f and 826f of the movable piece member 826 is detected by one ball breakage detection sensor 827, when the game balls in any of the guide passages 821c and 822c are exhausted, the movable piece member is in front. The movable pieces 825a and 826a of the 825 or the movable piece member 826 rotate so as to protrude into the guide passages 821c and 822c, and the detection pieces 825f and 826f on the side where the game ball has disappeared are detected by the ball breakage detection sensor 827. NS. Therefore, since the out-of-ball of the game ball can be detected at an early stage, the game ball can be replenished promptly, and the time during which the game is interrupted can be shortened as much as possible, thereby reducing the interest of the player. It can be suppressed.

Further, by screwing a metal screw as a weight into the weight mounting portions 825e and 826e of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826, the weight of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 and the weight of the weight As a result, the lower end side of the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be easily rotated in the direction of projecting into the guide passages 821c and 822c. Further, since the upper ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a are rotatably attached to the outside of the guide passages 821c and 822c so that the lower end side protrudes into the guide passages 821c and 822c, dust in the guide passages 821c and 822c is formed. And dust do not adhere to the upper and lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a. Therefore, even if the movable pieces 825a, 826a rotate toward the wall side of the guide passages 821c, 822c, dust, dirt, etc. do not get caught between the lower end of the movable pieces 825a, 826a and the wall. It is possible to rotate the movable pieces 825a and 826a satisfactorily, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem that the movable pieces 825a and 826a do not rotate.

As described above, in the ball guidance unit 820 of the present embodiment, in the movable pieces 825a and 826a of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 whose lower end side projects into the guide passages 821c and 822c through which the game ball flows due to its own weight. By attaching a weight made of metal screws to the weight mounting portions 825e and 826e on the opposite side of the surface that comes into contact with the game ball, the movable piece depends on the weight of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 and the weight of the weight. The lower end side of the 825a and 826a can be easily rotated (protruded) into the guide passages 821c and 822c. Further, since the upper ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a are rotatably attached to the outside of the guide passages 821c and 822c so that the lower end side protrudes into the guide passages 821c and 822c, dust in the guide passages 821c and 822c is formed. And dust do not adhere to the upper and lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a. Therefore, even if the movable pieces 825a and 826a rotate toward the wall side of the guide passages 821c and 822c, dust and dirt do not get caught between the lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the wall. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem that the movable pieces 825a and 826a (825 in front of the movable piece member and 826 after the movable piece member) do not rotate.

Further, since the metal screw as the weight is screwed into the weight mounting portions 825e and 826e which are the through holes, the weight is attached even if the front 825 of the movable piece member and the rear 826 of the movable piece member rotate frequently. The front 825 of the movable piece member and the rear 826 of the movable piece member (weight mounting portions 825e, 826e) do not come off, and the front 825 of the movable piece member and the rear 826 of the movable piece member can be maintained in good condition for a long period of time. .. Further, the weight can be easily attached to the front 825 of the movable piece member and the rear 826 of the movable piece member simply by screwing the metal screws into the weight attachment portions 825e and 826e, so that the time and effort for attaching the weight can be simplified. This makes it possible to reduce the cost associated with assembling the pachinko machine 1.

Further, since the introduction portions 821d and 822d for guiding the game ball toward the movable pieces 825a and 826a are provided on the upstream side of the portion where the movable pieces 825a and 826a project inward in the guide passages 821c and 822c. As the game ball flows in the guide passages 821c and 822c, the game ball comes into contact with the movable pieces 825a and 826a, so that the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be vibrated by the contact of the game ball. Therefore, due to the vibration of the movable pieces 825a and 826a, dust and dirt that are sandwiched or invaded between the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the walls of the guide passages 821c and 822c can be removed, and the movable pieces can be moved by their own weight or the like. The front 825 of the single member and the 826 after the movable single member can be made to rotate satisfactorily.

Therefore, since the front 825 of the movable piece member and the rear 826 of the movable piece member can be satisfactorily rotated, the state (presence or absence) of the game ball in the guide passages 821c and 822c can be reliably detected, and the game ball can be reliably detected. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of defects due to false positives and the like. Further, even if the game ball supplied to the payout device 830 disappears from the guide passages 821c and 822c, the presence or absence in the guide passages 821c and 822c can be reliably detected via the movable pieces 825a and 826a, so that the presence or absence of the game balls can be quickly detected. By replenishing the game balls and shortening the time during which the game is interrupted as much as possible, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

[4-6b. Payout device]
The payout device 830 of the payout unit 800 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 101 to 105. The payout device 830 has a box shape with the rear side open, and has a payout entrance 831a that is open so that the game ball can pass through in the center of the upper surface in the left-right direction, and a game ball is open so that the game ball can pass near the left end of the front view on the bottom surface. The payout outlet 831b, the ball outlet 831c that is open so that the game ball can pass near the right end of the front view on the bottom surface, the payout entrance 831a and the payout outlet 831b are connected to each other, and the game ball can be distributed through the payout passage 831d. , And a front box 831 having a ball removal passage 831e, which branches from the middle of the payout passage 831d and communicates with the ball removal outlet 831c and allows game balls to circulate, and is attached to the rear side of the front box 831. A box-shaped box with an open front side, and a payout entrance 832a that opens in the center of the upper surface in the left-right direction so that the game ball can pass through. The exit 832b, the ball ejection outlet 832c that is open so that the game ball can pass near the right end of the front view on the bottom surface, the payout entrance 832a and the payout outlet 832b that communicate with each other, and the payout passage 832d that allows the game ball to circulate, and the payout. It is provided with a rear box 832 having a ball-extracting passage 832e, which branches from the middle of the passage 832d and communicates with the ball-extracting outlet 832c so that game balls can be distributed.

Further, the payout device 830 has a shallow box-shaped front cover 833 mounted on the front side of the front box 831 and the rear side is open, and a rotating shaft mounted in the front box 831 so that the rotating shaft penetrates the front box 831. The payout motor 834 extending into the front cover 833, the drive gear 835 attached to the rotating shaft of the payout motor 834, and the drive gear 835 mesh with each other and can rotate with the front box 831 and the front cover 833. The spur gear-shaped intermediate gear 836 attached to the intermediate gear 836, the driven gear 837 meshing with the intermediate gear 836, and the driven gear 837 rotatably penetrate, and the front end is attached to the front cover 833 and the rear end is attached. A shaft member 838 whose end penetrates the front box 831 and is attached to the rear box 832, and a shaft member 838 that is rotatably attached through the shaft member 838 and the payout passages 831d and 832d of the front box 831 and the rear box 832. It is equipped with a payout blade 839 that is arranged inside and rotates integrally with the driven gear 837, and a blade rotation detection sensor 840 that is attached between the front box 831 and the rear box 832 and detects the rotation of the payout blade 839. ing.

Further, the payout device 830 is attached between the front box 831 and the rear box 832, and has a flat plate-shaped partition plate 841 that separates the payout passage 831d of the front box 831 and the payout passage 832d of the rear box 832, and the front box 831. The payout detection sensor 842, which is attached between the box and the rear box 832 and detects the game ball that is paid out by the rotation of the payout blade 839 and is discharged from the payout outlets 831b and 832b, and the payout passages 831d, 832d and the ball removal passage. A movable ball removal piece 843 that is rotatably attached by the front box 831 and the rear box 832 at the portion where the 831e and 832e are branched and can close the ball removal passages 831e and 832e, and the front box 831 and the rear. The box 832 is provided with a ball pulling lever 844 that is slidably attached up and down on the upper right side of the front view and makes the ball pulling movable piece 843 rotatable or non-rotatable.

The payout passage 831d of the front box 831 extends diagonally to the lower right of the front view from the payout entrance 831a toward the ball ejection port 831c, and is downward at a height of about 1/3 from the upper surface with respect to the total height of the front box 831. It bends so that it extends vertically to, and after bending so that it extends almost horizontally to the left near the center of the total height, it extends vertically again downward about 1/3 from the left end with respect to the left and right width of the front box 831. It is bent in a crank shape so as to be located directly above the payout outlet 831b at a height of about 1/4 from the bottom surface with respect to the total height of the front box 831 and extends vertically to the payout outlet 831b. The payout blade 839 is arranged at a crank-shaped bent portion in the payout passage 831d.

On the other hand, the ball removing passage 831e is a form in which the portion of the payout passage 831d extending diagonally from the payout entrance 831a to the lower right is further extended, and the height is about 1/3 from the upper surface with respect to the total height of the front box 831. It branches up to the height near the center.

Further, the front box 831 is formed on a guide shelf 831f that protrudes rearward as it goes downward at a portion of the payout passage 831d that extends vertically toward the payout outlet 831b, and on the upper part of the right side surface in the front view. It is provided with a lever mounting portion 831 g for mounting the ball pulling lever 844 so as to be slidable up and down.

The payout passage 832d of the rear box 832 extends diagonally to the lower right of the front view from the payout entrance 832a toward the ball ejection port 832c, and is downward at a height of about 1/3 from the upper surface with respect to the total height of the rear box 832. It bends so that it extends vertically to, and after bending so that it extends almost horizontally to the left near the center of the total height, it extends vertically again downward about 1/3 from the left end with respect to the left and right width of the rear box 832. It is bent in a crank shape so as to be located directly above the payout outlet 832b at a height of about 1/4 from the bottom surface with respect to the total height of the rear box 832, and extends vertically to the payout outlet 832b. The payout blade 839 is arranged at a crank-shaped bent portion in the payout passage 832d.

On the other hand, the ball removing passage 832e is a form in which the portion of the payout passage 832d extending diagonally from the payout entrance 832a to the lower right is further extended, and the height is about 1/3 from the upper surface with respect to the total height of the rear box 832. It branches up to the height near the center.

Further, the rear box 832 is formed on a guide shelf 832f that protrudes forward as it goes downward at a portion of the payout passage 832d that extends vertically toward the payout outlet 832b, and on the upper part of the right side surface in the front view. It is provided with a lever mounting portion 832 g for mounting the ball pulling lever 844 so as to be slidable up and down.

The payout passages 831d, 832d and the ball removal passages 831e, 832e of the front box 831 and the rear box 832 are formed in the same shape. The payout passages 831d and 832d are partitioned by a partition plate 841 up to the upstream of the portion where the payout blade 839 is arranged. Further, a payout detection sensor 842 is attached between the guide shelves 831f, 832f and the payout outlets 831b, 832b. That is, the game ball that circulates through the payout passage 831d of the front box 831 and the game ball that circulates through the payout passage 832d of the rear box 832 are before and after the front box 831 and the rear box 832 by the guide shelves 831f and 832f, respectively. It is brought close to the boundary and detected by one payout detection sensor 842.

The driven gear 837 protrudes radially from the rear surface of the spur gear-shaped gear portion 837a that meshes with the intermediate gear 836 and the rear surface of the gear portion 837a at an interval of 60 degrees in the circumferential direction, and can be detected by the blade rotation detection sensor 840. It includes a plurality of detection pieces 837b, and a connecting portion 837c that projects rearward from the center of the gear portion 837a in a cylindrical shape and has irregularities formed on the peripheral surface of the rear end so that it can be connected to the payout blade 839. ..

The payout blades 839 extend in a cylindrical shape in the front-rear direction and project from the front end of the base cylinder portion 839a through which the shaft member 838 is inserted and the base cylinder portion 839a in the direction perpendicular to the axis at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. The plurality (three) front blades 839b and the plurality of (three) front blades 839b project from the rear end of the base cylinder 839a in the direction perpendicular to the axis of the base cylinder 839a at regular intervals in the circumferential direction so as to be staggered. 3) The rear blade 839c and the connected portion that protrudes forward from the front end of the base tubular portion 839a in a cylindrical shape and has irregularities that can be connected to the connecting portion 837c of the driven gear 837 on the peripheral surface of the front end. It is equipped with 839d.

The front blades 839b and the rear blades 839c of the payout blades 839 are provided with three each at an interval of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction, and the rear blades 839c rotate with respect to the front blades 839b so as to be staggered. It is offset in the direction at an angle of 60 degrees and extends outward. In the payout blade 839 of the present embodiment, the three front blades 839b (rear blades 839c) are connected by an arc recessed toward the center, and the diameter of the arc is the same as or slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, a ball accommodating portion 839e capable of accommodating only one game ball is formed between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c).

Further, the diameter D1 of the outer circumferences of the three front blades 839b and the rear blades 839c centered on the axis of the base cylinder portion 839a is formed to be 1 to 1.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball. Further, the diameter D2 centered on the axis of the base cylinder portion 839a up to the portion closest to the axis of the base cylinder portion 839a in the arc portion (ball accommodating portion 839e) between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c). Is formed to be about 0.3 to 0.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball. That is, the depth [(diameter D1-diameter D2) / 2] from the outer circumferences of the front blades 839b and the rear blades 839c to the most recessed portion of the ball accommodating portion 839e is 0.1 to 0. It is said to be four times.

Therefore, the arc portion (ball accommodating portion 839e) between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c) can hold about 3/10 (between 1/4 and 1/3) of the outer circumference of the game ball. can. In other words, it can accommodate a depth of about 1/5 (1/7 to 1/4) of the outer diameter of the game ball. As a result, the game balls in the payout passages 831d and 832d can be quickly accommodated between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c) (ball accommodating portion 839e).

In the payout blade 839 of the present embodiment, the front blade 839b is located in the payout passage 831d of the front box 831 and the rear blade 839c is located in the payout passage 832d of the rear box 832 in a state where the payout device 830 is assembled. The game balls in the payout passages 831d and 832d can be paid out, respectively. Further, the payout blades 839 are arranged in the payout passages 831d and 832d at locations where the front box 831 and the rear box 832 are bent in a crank shape below the center of the total height. Specifically, in the payout passages 831d and 832d, the rotation center of the payout blade 839 is located directly below the portion extending vertically downward from the vicinity of the center of the total height of the front box 831 and the rear box 832. Then, at the crank-shaped bent portions of the payout passages 831d and 832d, the wall (inner wall) on the side far from the payout blade 839 is centered on the rotation center of the payout blade 839, and from the outer periphery of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c. It is formed in an arc shape separated by a distance S smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball. In the present embodiment, the distance S is 0.7 to 0.9 times the outer diameter of the game ball. In other words, the distance from the most recessed portion of the ball accommodating portion 839e to the arc-shaped portions of the payout passages 831d and 832d is 1.03 to 1.1 times the outer diameter of the game ball. ..

As a result, when the game ball flowing down on the payout blade 839 comes into contact with the outer circumferences of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c, the payout device 830 passes through the crank-shaped bent portions of the payout passages 831d and 832d. It cannot be discharged from the outlets 831b and 832b downward. On the other hand, when the game ball is accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 839e, it moves with the rotation of the payout blade 839 and can pass through the crank-shaped bent portions of the payout passages 831d and 832d from the payout outlets 831b and 832b. It is released downward.

Further, in the payout device 830, the diameter D1 of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c is set to about 1.2 to 1.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball, and the ball accommodating portion 839e makes the diameter D1 1 of the outer diameter of the game ball. Since the depth of / 7 to 1/4 is accommodated, the time required for accommodating the game ball can be shortened while the outer diameter of the payout blade 839 is made as small as possible. As a result, even if the payout blade 839 is rotated at high speed, the game ball can be accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 839e and sent to the payout outlets 831b and 832b. Therefore, the number of game balls to be paid out per unit time can be increased as compared with the conventional case, and the time required to pay out the game balls can be shortened.

The ball-pulling movable piece 843 has a main body portion 843a that extends vertically and back and forth in a plate shape and has a bent lower portion formed in a front view shape, and a main body portion 843a that extends in a tubular shape in the front and rear at the upper end of the main body portion 843a. A barrel portion 843b whose both ends are rotatably attached to the front box 831 and the rear box 832, a protruding portion 843c protruding from the upper part of the outer surface of the main body portion 843a which is bent in a dogleg shape, and a main body portion 843a. It is provided with a weight mounting portion 843d (see FIG. 105) formed of through holes penetrating back and forth at the lower portion that is bent in a dogleg shape.

In the state where the payout device 830 is assembled, the ball-extracting movable piece 843 is oriented so that the lower part of the main body part 843a extends diagonally to the lower left in the front view, and the upper end shaft tube part 843b pays out the front box 831 and the rear box 832. In the passages 831d and 832d, the rotation is possible at a portion extending diagonally to the lower right of the front view from the outlets 831a and 832a and at a position outside the wall on the right side of the front view slightly above the portion that bends downward. It is attached to.

In the normal state, the payout device 830 of the present embodiment has the ball pulling lever 844 slid downward, and the lower portion of the ball pulling lever 844 hits the protruding portion 843c of the ball pulling movable piece 843 from the right side when viewed from the front. I'm in contact. As a result, the ball-extracting movable piece 843 is restricted from rotating counterclockwise when viewed from the front (see FIG. 105 (a)).

In this normal state, in the main body portion 843a that is bent in a dogleg shape of the ball-extracting movable piece 843, the upper side extends vertically from the bent portion, and the lower side of the bent portion is diagonally lower left in front view. Extends to. The lower end of the main body portion 843a is located near the portion where the payout passages 831d and 832d and the ball removal passages 831e and 832e are branched. Therefore, the ball pulling passages 831e and 832e are closed by the ball pulling movable piece 843 (main body portion 843a), and the surface of the main body portion 843a facing the left side forms a part of the wall of the payout passages 831d and 832d. doing.

The ball pulling movable piece 843 of the present embodiment is formed so that the center of gravity of the ball pulling movable piece 843 is located on the left side of the front view of the vertical line passing through the center of the barrel portion 843b under a normal state, and its own weight. A force is acting to rotate the ball counterclockwise when viewed from the front, but the ball pulling lever 844 regulates the rotation counterclockwise, so that the normal state is maintained.

When the ball pulling lever 844 is slid upward from the normal state, the lower part of the ball pulling lever 844 separates from the protruding portion 843c of the ball pulling movable piece 843, and the ball pulling movable piece 843 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front. The regulation of movement is lifted. Therefore, the ball-extracting movable piece 843 rotates counterclockwise due to its own weight so that the center of gravity is located directly below the barrel portion 843b. The ball-extracting movable piece 843 rotates counterclockwise until the lower right side surface of the main body portion 843a abuts on the left surface of the member forming the right side surface of the front box 831 and the rear box 832. (See FIG. 105 (b)). As a result, the ball pulling passages 831e and 832e are opened, and the game balls entering from the payout entrances 831a and 832a come into contact with the main body portion 843a of the ball pulling movable piece 843 in the middle of the payout passages 831d and 832d. The ball-extracting movable piece 843 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front to open the ball-extracting passages 831e and 832e. The Rukoto.

In the present embodiment, since the ball pulling movable piece 843 is provided with the weight mounting portion 843d, the ball pulling lever 844 is slid upward by screwing and mounting the weight made of a metal screw into the weight mounting portion 843d. When the restriction on the counterclockwise rotation in the front view is lifted, the lower end of the ball-extracting movable piece 843 protrudes into the ball-extracting passages 831e and 832e due to the weight of the ball-extracting movable piece 843 and the weight of the weight. It can be easily rotated in the direction (counterclockwise when viewed from the front).

Further, in a normal state in which the ball pulling lever 844 is slid downward to close the ball pulling passages 831e and 832e, the game ball entering from the payout ports 831a and 832a enters the main body portion 843a of the ball pulling movable piece 843. Since the contact is made, the ball-pulling movable piece 843 can be vibrated by the contact of the game ball. Therefore, dust, dust, etc. that are sandwiched or invaded between the lower end of the ball-extracting movable piece 843 and the inner surfaces of the ball-extracting passages 831e and 832e can be removed by the vibration of the ball-extracting movable piece 843, and the dust can be removed. It is possible to prevent the ball-extracting movable piece 843 from being unable to rotate due to biting dust or the like.

Further, since the metal screw as the weight can be screwed into the weight mounting portion 843d which is a through hole and mounted, even if the ball pulling movable piece 843 rotates frequently, the weight can be pulled out and the ball pulling movable piece 843. The ball-extracting movable piece 843 can be maintained in a good state for a long period of time without coming off from the (weight mounting portion 843d). Further, since the weight can be easily attached to the ball-extracting movable piece 843 simply by screwing the metal screw into the weight attachment portion 843d, the time and effort for attaching the weight can be simplified, and the pachinko machine 1 can be assembled. It is possible to reduce the cost related to.

By the way, when the ball pulling passages 831e and 832e are closed for a long period of time by the ball pulling movable piece 843, fine dust adheres to the rotating shaft of the ball pulling movable piece 843 or the rotating shaft rusts, resulting in a ball. The pull-out movable piece 843 may be difficult to rotate. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the game ball entering from the payout entrances 831a and 832a is brought into contact with the main body portion 843a of the ball pulling movable piece 843, the ball pulling passage 831e is provided by the ball pulling movable piece 843. , 832e is closed, and when the ball pulling lever 844 to release the closing is slid upward to unlock, the game ball comes into contact with the ball pulling movable piece 843, and the impact of the contact causes the ball to come into contact with the movable piece 843. The ball pulling movable piece 843 can be rotated, and the ball pulling passages 831e and 832e can be reliably opened.

Therefore, when the ball pulling lever 844 is operated to open the ball pulling passages 831e and 832e, the ball pulling movable piece 843 can rotate satisfactorily, so that the game ball can be pulled out reliably. , Workability at the time of maintenance etc. can be improved.

[4-6c. Upper full tank path unit]
The upper full tank path unit 850 of the payout unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 106 and 107. The upper full tank path unit 850 is attached to the payout unit base 801 at a position below the payout device 830. The upper full tank path unit 850 is attached to the payout unit base 801 and has a box-shaped upper full tank base 851 with the rear side open, and the upper full tank base 851 is attached to the rear side and the front side is open. It includes a box-shaped upper full tank cover 852 and a payout device pressing member 853 that is rotatably attached to the rear side of the upper full tank cover 852 and can press the payout device 830 upward.

Further, the upper full tank path unit 850 has an upper payout ball receiving port 850a that opens upward so that a game ball can pass through a portion on the left side from the center on the left and right in the front view on the upper surface, and a right side from the center on the left and right in the front view on the upper surface. It is formed between the upper full tank base 851 and the upper full tank cover 852, and is received by the upper payout ball receiving port 850a. An upper ball storage passage 850c having a predetermined size for distributing game balls, a normal discharge port 850d opening downward at a portion directly below the upper payout ball receiving port 850a at the lower end of the upper ball storage passage 850c, and an upper ball storage. The full tank discharge port 850e, which is open downward at the lower end of the passage 850c except for the normal discharge port 850d, and the upper ball storage passage which protrudes upward from between the normal discharge port 850d and the full tank discharge port 850e. It is provided with a partition section 850f that partitions the lower part of the 850c to the left and right.

Further, the upper full ball path unit 850 has an upper ball pulling passage 850 g that guides the game ball that has entered from the upper ball pulling entrance 850b downward, and an upper portion that opens downward at the lower end of the upper ball pulling passage 850 g. It is equipped with a ball removal outlet 850h. The upper full tank path unit 850 is opened downward with the normal discharge port 850d, the full tank discharge port 850e, and the upper ball extraction outlet 850h arranged in this order from the left side when viewed from the front. Further, the upper full tank path unit 850 is provided with a back cover mounting portion 854 for mounting the back cover 980 at the right end of the upper full tank base 851.

In the upper full tank path unit 850, the upper payout ball receiving port 850a is located directly under the payout outlets 831b and 832b of the payout device 830 in a state of being assembled to the payout unit 800, and the upper ball ejection port 850b. Is located directly below the ball ejection ports 831c and 832c of the payout device 830. Further, in a state where the upper full tank path unit 850 is assembled to the payout unit 800, the normal discharge port 850d, the full tank discharge port 850e, and the upper ball ejection port 850h are the normal taxiways of the lower full tank path unit 860. 861, the full tank taxiway 862, and the lower ball-extracting taxiway 865 each have an opening directly above the rear end opening (see FIG. 113).

In the upper full tank path unit 850, the game balls discharged downward from the payout outlets 831b and 832b, which are paid out by the payout device 830, enter the upper ball storage passage 850c from the upper payout ball receiving port 850a. When the normal discharge port 850d at the lower end of the upper ball storage passage 850c is not closed, the game ball that has entered the upper ball storage passage 850c from the upper payout ball receiving port 850a opens directly under the upper payout ball receiving port 850a. It is discharged from the normal discharge port 850d.

When the upper plate 321 of the door frame 3 is filled with the game balls and the game balls cannot be stored, and the normal taxiway 861 of the lower full tank path unit 860 is filled with the game balls, it is normally released. The exit 850d is closed. When a game ball enters the upper ball storage passage 850c in this state, it is normally stored above the discharge port 850d. Then, when the amount of the game balls stored above the normal discharge port 850d becomes higher than the partition 850f, the game balls newly entering the upper ball storage passage 850c get over the partition 850f and become full. It will be discharged downward from the tongue discharge port 850e, and will be sent to the lower plate 322 through the full tank guide path 862 of the lower full tank ball path unit 860.

In this way, the upper full tank path unit 850 automatically lowers the game balls paid out from the payout device 830 from the upper plate 321 according to the amount of the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 in the door frame 3. It can be distributed to the plate 322.

[4-6d. Lower full tank path unit]
The lower full tank path unit 860 of the payout unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 108 to 112. The lower full tank path unit 860 is attached to the lower side of the upper full tank path unit 850 in the payout unit base 801. The lower full taxiway unit 860 guides the game ball released from the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full taxiway unit 850 forward and guides it from the front end to the through ball passage 273 of the door frame 3 normal taxiway 861. And a full taxiway 862 that guides the game ball released from the full tank discharge port 850e of the upper full tank path unit 850 forward and guides it from the front end to the full tank reception port 274 of the door frame 3 and normal. The taxiway opening and closing door 863 that opens and closes the front end opening of the taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 according to the opening and closing of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, and the taxiway opening and closing door 863 are the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862. It is provided with a closing spring 864, which is urged to close the front end opening of the door.

Further, the lower full ball path unit 860 guides the game ball discharged from the upper ball extraction outlet 850h of the upper full ball path unit 850 forward, and is above the board unit base 910 of the board unit 900 from the central right end in the front-rear direction. It is provided with a lower ball-extracting taxiway 865 that discharges to.

In the lower full tank taxiway unit 860, the normal taxiway 861, the full taxiway 862, and the lower taxiway 865 are arranged in order from the left side to the right side in the front view. The rear ends of the normal taxiway 861, the full tank taxiway 862, and the lower taxiway 865 are open upward. Further, the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 have a width in which a plurality of game balls are lined up on the left and right, and extend forward to the vicinity of the front end of the main body frame 4 so that the front end side is lowered. Further, the full taxiway 862 extends forward at a position lower than the normal taxiway 861. The normal taxiway 861, the full tank taxiway 862, and the lower taxiway 865 are formed by an upper case 866 and a lower case 867 that can be divided into upper and lower parts as shown in the figure.

The taxiway opening / closing door 863 is rotatably attached to a portion between the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 at the front end of the lower case 867, and is rotatably attached in the front-view clockwise direction by the closing spring 864. Being urged. More specifically, at the front end of the lower full taxiway unit 860, the full taxiway 862, which is open to the right of the front end opening of the normal taxiway 861 in front view, is one game with respect to the normal taxiway 861. It is placed at a position lower than the height of the sphere. The taxiway opening / closing door 863 is normally attached below the taxiway 861 and at a position on the left side of the full taxiway 862 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending back and forth.

The taxiway opening / closing door 863 includes a disk-shaped base portion 863a that is rotatably attached, and a first door plate portion 863b that extends diagonally to the upper left from the base portion 863a in a flat plate shape and can normally close the front end opening of the taxiway 861. A second door plate portion 863c that extends from the base portion 863a to the right in a flat plate shape and can close the front end opening of the full taxiway 862, and an extension portion 863d that extends diagonally from the base portion 863a to the lower left side in a flat plate shape. The extension portion 863d is provided with an actuating protrusion 863e that protrudes forward from the front surface of the tip portion and is capable of contacting the door opening / closing contact portion 281 of the foul cover unit 270 in the door frame 3.

Here, closing the front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 means that it is not necessary to seal the openings and it is sufficient that the game ball cannot pass through. The actuating protrusion 863e is formed in a short arc shape centered on the base portion 863a in a front view, and is inclined so that the front end surface protrudes forward as it approaches the end side in the counterclockwise direction. doing.

The taxiway opening / closing door 863 is urged in the clockwise direction in the front view by the closing spring 864, and the second door plate portion 863c is from the lower side of the front end opening of the full taxiway 862 at the front end of the lower case 867. By abutting on the boss portion 867a protruding forward, rotation in the clockwise direction is restricted.

The lower full tank path unit 860 of the present embodiment has the pachinko machine 1 assembled, and the front end thereof is the through ball passage 273, the full tank socket 274, and the door opening / closing contact in the foul cover unit 270 of the door frame 3. It is mounted at a position facing the contact portion 281 (see FIG. 112). When the door frame 3 is open with respect to the main body frame 4, the taxiway opening / closing door 863 does not come into contact with the operating protrusion 863e. Therefore, the taxiway opening / closing door 863 has an urging force of the closing spring 864. The second door plate portion 863c is rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view, and stops in a state where the second door plate portion 863c is in contact with the boss portion 867a of the lower case 867. In this state, the first door plate portion 863b and the second door plate portion 863c are located in front of the front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862, and close the front end openings (FIG. 111). (A). Therefore, in this state, the game balls in the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 cannot move forward from the front end opening, and even if the door frame 3 is opened, the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 861 and the full taxiway are guided. No game ball spills from Road 862.

Then, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the door opening / closing contact portion 281 of the foul cover unit 270 in the door frame 3 comes into contact with the front end surface of the operating protrusion 863e of the taxiway opening / closing door 863 and operates. Due to the inclination of the front end surface of the protrusion 863e, a force that tends to rotate the taxiway opening / closing door 863 in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front acts against the urging force of the closing spring 864. As a result, the first door plate portion 863b and the second door plate portion 863c that closed the front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 rotate in a direction away from the front end opening, and the normal taxiway 861 And the front end opening of the full taxiway 862 is opened (see FIG. 111 (b)). In this state, as shown, the first door plate portion 863b is located below the front end opening of the normal taxiway 861, and the second door plate portion 863c is located above the front end opening of the full taxiway 862. ..

In the state where the front end opening of the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 is opened, the door frame 3 is completely closed with respect to the main body frame 4, and the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 861 and the full tank are filled. The through ball passage 273 and the full tank ball receiving port 274 of the foul cover unit 270 in the door frame 3 are located on the front side of the front end opening of the taxiway 862, and penetrate from the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 side. The game ball can be delivered to the ball passage 273 and the full tank receiving port 274 side.

In this way, the front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 are different in the vertical direction, and the front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 are opened by rotating the taxiway opening / closing door 863. Since the taxiway is opened and closed, the operating range of the taxiway opening / closing door 863 can be narrowed as much as possible, and the opening / closing mechanism of the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 can be miniaturized. Therefore, the space for other members can be relatively widened, and the internal space of the pachinko machine 1 can be used more effectively.

In the payout unit 800 of the present embodiment, more game balls are released from the payout device 830 in a state where the upper plate 321 of the door frame 3 is filled with the game balls and the game balls cannot be discharged to the upper plate 321. Is paid out, the game balls can be stored until the inside of the normal taxiway 861 of the lower full tank path unit 860 is filled with the game balls. Then, when the game ball is further discharged from the payout device 830 in a state where the normal taxiway 861 is full of game balls, the game ball is normally released in the upper ball storage passage 850c of the upper full tank ball path unit 850. If it stays above the outlet 850d and exceeds the section 850f, it will flow to the full tank discharge port 850e side, and from the full tank discharge port 850e, the full tank taxiway 862 of the lower full tank path unit 860, The payout of the game ball is automatically switched to the lower plate 322 through the foul cover unit 270. After that, when the game ball is further paid out from the payout device 830 and the lower plate 322 is filled with the game ball in addition to the upper plate 321 and the game ball cannot be supplied to the lower plate 322, the foul cover unit 270 The game ball is stored in the storage passage 277 of the above. Then, when the movable piece 278 rotates due to the game ball being stored in the storage passage 277 and is detected by the full tank detection sensor 279, the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 are full with the game ball. Is notified, and the payout of the game ball by the payout device 830 is temporarily stopped until the detection of the movable piece 278 by the full tank detection sensor 279 is canceled.

It should be noted that the payout device 830 stops the payout of the game ball in response to the detection of the movable piece 278 by the full tank detection sensor 279, for example, the game ball is stored until the movable piece 278 is detected in the storage passage 277 of the foul cover unit 270. The number of storage passages 277 on the upstream side, the full taxiway 862 of the lower full tank path unit 860, and the upper ball storage passage 850c of the upper full ball path unit 850 can be filled in this state. When the game ball is paid out, the payout of the game ball by the payout device 830 may be stopped. As a result, more game balls can be stored than in the conventional pachinko machine. Therefore, in a game state in which a large number of game balls are paid out, such as during a big hit game, the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 are paid out by paying out the game balls. It is possible to reduce the need to worry about being full of game balls, and it is possible to dedicate the player to the jackpot game and entertain it.

[4-7. Board unit]
The substrate unit 900 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 94. The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 is mounted on the rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side of the front view of the board unit base 910 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and the speaker for bass inside. The speaker unit 920 having 921, the power supply board box 930 mounted on the right side of the front view on the rear side of the board unit base 910 and accommodating the power supply board inside, and the power supply board box 930 mounted on the rear side of the speaker unit 920 and inside. The interface control board box 940 in which the interface control board is housed, and the payout control board 951 which is mounted across the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and controls the payout of the game ball are housed therein. The payout control board box 950 and the like are provided.

The board unit 900 includes a door frame relay board 911 attached to the front surface of the board unit base 910 so as to face forward from the connection opening 606 of the main body frame base 600. The door frame relay board 911 relays the connection between the payout control board 951, the main control board 1310, and the peripheral control board 1510 and the door body relay board attached to the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3. Is for. The payout device 830 is controlled by the payout control board 951 housed in the payout control board box 950.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
Next, the overall configuration of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 114 to 122. FIG. 114 is a front view of the game board in which the panel plate of the game panel is in an opaque state. FIG. 115 is a perspective view of the game board in the state of FIG. 114 from the front right, FIG. 116 is a perspective view of the game board in the state of FIG. 114 from the front left, and FIG. 117 is a view of the game board from the back. It is a perspective view. Further, FIG. 118 is a front view of the game board in which the panel plate of the game panel is in a transparent state. Further, FIG. 119 is a front view of the game board in the state of FIG. 114 in which the front unit is cut at a substantially center in the front-rear direction in the game area. FIG. 120 is an enlarged front view showing the portion of arrow A in FIG. 119. Further, FIG. 121 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 122 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear.

The game board 5 has a game area 5a in which a game ball is hit by a player operating the handle 302 of the handle unit 300. Further, the game board 5 is attached to the front component 1000, which divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially square outer shape in front view, and the rear end of the game area 5a, which is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 to be partitioned, a board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and a game ball attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 by driving the game ball into the game area 5a. It includes a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 166) that controls the game content. A plurality of obstacle nails K that come into contact with the game ball are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion of the front surface of the game panel 1100 that is within the game area 5a (see FIG. 120).

Further, the game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and has a function display unit 1400 and a game panel visibly attached to the player side in the lower left corner of the front component 1000. Peripheral control unit 1500 mounted on the rear side of 1100, main effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and mounted on the front surface of the game panel 1100. The front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 are further provided. The main effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the main effect display device 1600.

The game panel 1100 holds the transparent flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 and the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110, which are formed to be slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front component 1000, and the front component 1000. It is provided with a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 that is attached to the rear side and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

The table unit 2000 has a plurality of (here, four) general winning openings 2001 that are always open so that game balls driven into the game area 5a can be received, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are game areas. The first start port 2002, which is always open so that the game ball can be received at different positions in 5a, the gate portion 2003, which is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball, and the game ball. The second starting port 2004 (see FIG. 119) and the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 are capable of accepting game balls according to the result of a normal lottery drawn by passing through the gate portion 2003. It is provided with a large winning opening 2005 that enables acceptance of game balls according to the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery, which is drawn by accepting the game balls.

Further, the front unit 2000 is attached from directly above the out port 1126 to the left in the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction, and has one general winning opening 2001 and a first starting port 2002. The side unit 2200, which is mounted along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starting port unit 2100 and has two general winning openings 2001, and the lower right corner of the game area 5a in the front view. The attacker unit 2400 and the start port unit 2100, which are attached to the right side of the start port unit 2100 when viewed from the front and have one general winning port 2001, a gate portion 2003, a second starting port 2004, and a large winning port 2005. It is provided with a frame-shaped center accessory 2500, which is attached slightly above the center of the front view in the game area 5a.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 which is box-shaped and has a square opening 3010a in the rear wall and is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. On the rear surface of the back box 3010, the lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the effect display device 1600, the panel relay board 3031 attached to the left end of the rear view below the opening 3010a on the rear surface of the back box 3010, and the rear surface of the back box 3010. The effect drive board 3032 attached to the right side of the panel relay board 3031 in the rear view, the motor drive board 3033 attached to the rear surface of the effect drive board 3032 on the rear surface of the back box 3010, and the rear surface of the back box 3010. The upper relay board 3034 attached to the upper side of the opening 3010a is provided.

Further, the back unit 3000 is attached to the flat frame-shaped back front decoration unit 3100 attached to the front end of the back box 3010 and to the lower side of the opening 3010a on the rear side of the back front decoration unit 3100 in the back box 3010. The back left movable production unit 3200 and the back left movable production unit 3300 and the back right movable production unit 3400 attached to the upper side of the opening 3010a on the rear side of the back front decoration unit 3100 in the back box 3010. Inside the back box 3010, the back middle movable production unit 3500 is installed so as to surround the upper side and the left and right sides of the opening 3010a between the back front decoration unit 3100, the back left movable production unit 3300, and the back right movable production unit 3400. And have.

[5-1. Front component]
Next, the front component 1000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 121 and 122. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has a substantially circular inner shape penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the outer circumference of the game area 5a is divided by the inner circumference of the inner shape. The front component 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc shape from the lower end to the left from the center in the left-right direction in the front view in an arc shape along the clockwise circumferential direction, passes through the upper end in the center in the left-right direction in the front view, and extends diagonally to the upper right. The game is played on the inner rail 1002, which is arranged inside the front component 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view to the diagonally upper left side in the front view, and the right side in the front view of the lower end of the inner rail 1002. It includes an out-guide portion 1003, which is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and is inclined so as to be lowered toward the rear.

Further, the front component 1000 has a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the out guide portion 1003 in the front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000. Right rail 1005 extending from the right end of the front component 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component 1000, and the upper end curved inward of the front component 1000, and the upper end and outer rail of the right rail 1005. It is provided with an abutting portion 1006 that is connected to the upper end of the 1001 and is in contact with a game ball that has rolled along the outer rail 1001.

Further, the front component 1000 is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close between the front constituent member 1000 and the front view clock. A backflow prevention member urged by a spring (not shown) so that it can rotate only with the open position that rotates in the circumferential direction and opens between the outer rail 1001 and returns to the closed position side. It is equipped with 1007.

Further, the front component 1000 is formed on the outside of the portion of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 that extends substantially vertically from the lower end, the lower side of the out guide portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outer side of the right rail 1005. Each portion is provided with a security recess 1008 recessed from the front end to the rear. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security recess 1008 has a rear projecting piece 202 protruding rearward of the security cover 200 in the door frame 3. It will be in the inserted state. As a result, the space between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projecting piece 202 of the security cover 200 and the security recess 1008 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to enter the game area 5a from below the front surface of the board 5 through between the security cover 200 and the front component 1000, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 202 and the security recess 1008. , It is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

Further, although not shown, the front component 1000 includes a plurality of positioning protrusions protruding rearward from the rear end of the inner rail 1002. By inserting these positioning protrusions into the inner rail fixing holes formed in the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, the inner rail 1002 can be positioned and fixed to the front surface of the panel plate 1110.

Further, although not shown, the front component 1000 includes a plurality of mounting bosses projecting rearward from the rear surface. The plurality of mounting bosses can be positioned between the panel holder 1120 (game panel 1100) by being inserted into the mounting holes (not shown) of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100.

Further, the front component 1000 includes a notch portion 1011 notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner of the front view. This notch 1011 coincides with the notch 1127 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, it penetrates the notch 1011 and the notch 1127 to fill the lower part. The front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 of the ball path unit 860 face forward.

A function display unit 1400 is attached to the front component 1000 in the lower left corner of the front view on the outside of the game area 5a.

[5-2. Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 121 and 122. The game panel 1100 holds a flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front component 1000 and is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110. It is provided with a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 which is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, a polyarylate resin, or a methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The plate thickness of this panel plate 1110 is thinner than that of the panel holder 1120, and is the minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently held even if the obstacle nail K is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. ). In this example, the panel plate 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

The panel plate 1110 is formed with an out recess 1111 recessed upward from the lower end at the lowest position in the game area 5a. Further, the panel plate 1110 is formed with a plurality of openings 1112 that penetrate the panel plate 1110 in the front-rear direction and for mounting the table unit 2000.

Although not shown, the panel plate 1110 has a plurality of fitting holes arranged near the outer periphery and formed of round holes penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the panel plate 1110 is arranged near the outer periphery of the lower left and penetrates in the front-rear direction and penetrates in the vertical direction. It has a long hole that extends. These fitting holes and elongated holes are arranged outside the game area 5a and are positioned with the panel holder 1120. Further, the panel plate 1110 is provided with stepped engaging step portions having a recessed front side at both ends of the upper side and both ends of the lower side, respectively. These engaging steps are notched to approximately half the thickness of the panel plate 1110, and are arranged outside the game area 5a in the same manner as the fitting holes and the elongated holes, and the panel plate 1110. Is for engaging and fixing to the panel holder 1120.

Further, although not shown, the panel plate 1110 is provided with a plurality of inner rail fixing holes at predetermined positions. The inner rail 1002 can be fixed at a predetermined position by fitting and fixing a positioning protrusion (not shown) protruding from the rear side of the inner rail 1002 to the inner rail fixing hole.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 has a size including the panel plate 1110 and has a substantially quadrangular outer shape, and is formed to be thicker than the panel plate 1110 (about 20 mm in this example). The panel holder 1120 is made of a synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 has a holding step portion (not shown) that holds the panel plate 1110 detachably and is recessed from the front side to the rear side, and the inside of the holding step portion is substantially the same size as the game area 5a. It is provided with a through-hole 1122 that penetrates in the front-rear direction.

The depth from the front surface of the holding step portion of the panel holder 1120 is substantially the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1110, and the front surface of the panel plate 1110 held in the holding step portion is substantially the same as the front surface of the panel holder 1120. It will be on the same side. Further, the holding step portion is formed so that the front inner peripheral surface thereof has a size such that a predetermined amount of clearance is formed with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110. Due to this clearance, even if the panel plate 1110 expands and contracts relatively due to changes in temperature and aging, the expansion and contraction can be absorbed.

Further, although not shown, the panel holder 1120 is arranged at a position corresponding to the fitting hole and the elongated hole formed in the panel plate 1110 held by the holding step portion, and is arranged forward from the front surface of the holding step portion. It extends toward and is provided with a plurality of protruding pins that can be fitted and inserted into the fitting and elongated holes of the panel plate 1110. By fitting and inserting these protruding pins into the fitting holes and the elongated holes of the panel plate 1110, the panel holder 1120 and the panel plate 1110 can be positioned with each other.

Further, although not shown, the panel holder 1120 is provided with an engaging claw and an engaging piece that engage with the engaging step portion at a position corresponding to the engaging step portion of the panel plate 1110. More specifically, the engaging claws are arranged above the holding step portion of the panel holder 1120, correspond to the upper engaging step portion of the panel plate 1110, and project forward from the front surface of the holding step portion. It is designed to elastically engage with the engagement step. The engaging claw has a size such that the tip does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 1120.

The engaging piece of the panel holder 1120 is arranged below the holding step portion of the panel holder 1120 and corresponds to the lower engaging step portion of the panel plate 1110. This engaging piece is placed on the upper side (center side) along the front surface of the panel holder in a state where a gap of a size that allows the engaging step portion of the panel plate 1110 to be inserted is formed between the engaging piece and the front surface of the holding step portion. It extends by a predetermined amount toward. By engaging the engaging step portion of the panel plate 1110 with these engaging claws and engaging pieces, the panel plate 1110 is detachably held with respect to the panel holder 1120.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is provided with an out port 1126 that penetrates back and forth at the lowest position in the game area 5a. In the panel holder 1120, the lower side of the rear surface of the out port 1126 is recessed forward to the lower end with the same width as the out port 1126.

Further, the panel holder 1120 includes a notch 1127 that is notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner of the front view. The cutout portion 1127 coincides with the cutout portion 1011 of the front component 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the cutout portion 1127 penetrates the cutout portions 1011 and 1127 of the lower full tank path unit 860. The front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 face forward.

Further, although not shown, the panel holder 1120 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to a plurality of mounting bosses (not shown) in the front component 1000. By inserting the mounting boss of the front component 1000 into these plurality of mounting holes, the panel holder 1120 can be mounted on the rear side of the front component 1000, and the panel holder 1120 ( The game panel 1100) can be positioned.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is provided with a square insertion hole 1129 that penetrates in the front-rear direction on the upper side of the notch 1127. The rear end of the function display unit 1400 is inserted through the insertion hole 1129.

When the game panel 1100 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, the out port 1126 of the panel holder 1120 is opened on the rear side of the out guide portion 1003 of the front component 1000. As a result, the game ball that has flowed down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear out port 1126 by the out guide unit 1003, and is discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1126.

[5-3. Board holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1200 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 121 and 122. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the upper side and the front side open, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to be lowered toward the center in the left-right direction. The board holder 1200 can cover the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side in a state of being assembled on the game board 5. As a result, all the game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1126 and the game balls discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can be received and formed on the bottom surface. It can be discharged downward from the discharged unit 1201.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 121 and 122. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 houses a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 166) that controls game contents, payout of game balls, and the like, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to a board holder 1200. And have.

The main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms, and when the main control board box 1320 is closed by using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is destroyed in order to open the main control board box 1320. It is necessary to leave a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrent force against illegal acts on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the payout control board 951 and the peripheral control board 1510. Further, the main control board 1310 has a function display unit 1400, a gate sensor 2401, a second start port sensor 2402, a large winning opening sensor 2403, a starting opening solenoid 2412, an attacker solenoid 2414, and a general winning opening via the panel relay board 3031. It is connected to a sensor 3166, a first starting port sensor 3167, and a magnetic sensor (not shown).

[5-5. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 114. As shown in the figure, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 on the outside of the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) through the through hole 111 of the door frame 3 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1. The function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display a game state (game status), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like.

As shown in the figure, the function display unit 1400 includes a status indicator 1401 consisting of one LED for displaying the game status, and four LEDs for displaying the normal lottery result drawn by the passage of the game ball to the gate unit 2003. The normal symbol display 1402, the normal hold display 1408 consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of holds related to the passage of the game ball to the gate portion 2003, and the first start port 2002 are drawn by accepting the game ball. (1) The first special symbol display 1403 consisting of eight LEDs for displaying the result of the special lottery, and the first special holding number display consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of holdings related to the acceptance of the game ball to the first starting port 2002. The second special symbol display 1405 consisting of the device 1404 and eight LEDs displaying the result of the second special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball to the second starting port 2004, and the game ball to the second starting port 2004. 2nd special hold number indicator 1406 consisting of two LEDs that display the number of holds related to acceptance, and the opening and closing pattern of the big prize opening 2005 when the 1st special lottery result or the 2nd special lottery result is "big hit" etc. It mainly includes a round display 1407 composed of three LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions (number of rounds).

In this function display unit 1400, the number of pending numbers, symbols, and the like can be displayed by appropriately turning on, turning off, blinking, and the like the LEDs provided.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 117 and 122. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the main effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 166) that controls an effect presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board that houses the peripheral control board 1510. It is equipped with a box 1520. The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling light emission effect, sound effect, movable effect, and the like, and an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling an effect image.

The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 includes a main control board 1310, an effect operation unit 400, various decorative boards on the door frame 3 side, a main effect display device 1600, a sub effect display device 3240, an effect drive board 3032, and a motor drive board. It is connected to 3033, etc.

[5-7. Main production display device]
Next, the main effect display device 1600 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 121 and 122. The main effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in the front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. More specifically, the main effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface at the substantially center of the rear wall of the back box 3010. The main effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled. The main effect display device 1600 is a full-color liquid crystal display device backed by a white LED. The main effect display device 1600 is connected to the peripheral control board 1510, and can display a predetermined still image or moving image.

The main effect display device 1600 includes two left fixed pieces 1601 protruding outward from the left side surface in front view, and a right fixed piece 1602 protruding outward from the right side surface in front view. The main effect display device 1600 has two fixing grooves 3010c opened on the left inner peripheral surface of the front view in the frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of the back box 3010, which will be described later, with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. After inserting the two left fixing pieces 1601 diagonally from the rear of the back box 3010, move the right fixing piece 1602 side forward, insert the right fixing piece 1602 into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020, and insert the lock mechanism 3020. Is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding it downward.

[5-8. Overall configuration of table unit]
Next, the overall configuration of the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 121 and 122. The front unit 2000 of the game board 5 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, the front end protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the rear end penetrates the opening 1112. It protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110.

The table unit 2000 of the present embodiment can accept game balls driven into the game area 5a, and has a plurality of (here, four) general winning openings 2001 that are always open, and a plurality of general winning openings. The first start port 2002, which is always open so that the game ball can be received at a different position in the game area 5a, and the gate portion, which is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball. 2003, a second start port 2004 (see FIGS. 119 and 120) at which the game ball can be accepted according to the result of a normal lottery drawn by passing the game ball through the gate portion 2003, and the first start. It is provided with a first special lottery result drawn by accepting a game ball into the opening 2002 or a second starting port 2004, or a large winning opening 2005 capable of accepting a game ball according to the second special lottery result. ..

A plurality of (here, four) general winning openings 2001 are arranged at the lower part in the game area 5a, three on the left side and one on the right side with respect to the center in the left-right direction. The general winning opening 2001 on the left side of the center in the left-right direction is arranged below the lower end of the stage 2530 in the center accessory 2500, and the general winning opening 2001 on the right side of the center in the left-right direction is the stage of the center accessory 2500. It is located above the lower end of the 2530. The first starting port 2002 is arranged at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a and directly above the out port 1126.

The gate portion 2003 is located on the upper right side of the front view with respect to the general winning opening 2001 on the right side of the center in the left-right direction, and is arranged below the center in the vertical direction near the right end of the front view in the game area 5a. The second starting port 2004 is arranged directly below the gate portion 2003 at substantially the same height as the general winning port 2001 on the right side of the center in the left-right direction. The large winning opening 2005 is arranged below the general winning opening 2001 on the right side of the center in the left-right direction.

Further, the front unit 2000 is mounted in the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction from directly above the out port 1126 to the left side in the front view, and has one general winning opening 2001 and a first starting port 2002. The side unit 2200, which is mounted along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the front view of the unit 2100 and the start port unit 2100 and has two general winning openings 2001, and the right side of the front view of the start port unit 2100. An attacker unit 2400 having one general winning opening 2001, a gate portion 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a large winning opening 2005, and a frame attached substantially in the center of the game area 5a. It is equipped with a center accessory 2500.

[5-8a. Starting port unit]
Next, the start port unit 2100 of the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 114 to 116 and the like. The start port unit 2100 is arranged in the game area 5a so as to extend from directly above the out port 1126 to the left in the front view near the lower end portion in the center in the left-right direction, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The start port unit 2100 is provided with a first start port 2002 at the uppermost portion of the game area 5a at the center in the left-right direction, and is slightly below the first start port 2002, and a plurality of general devices are left in the front view. One of the winning openings 2001 is provided. The general winning opening 2001 and the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100 are large enough to accept only one game ball at a time and are always open upward.

The start port unit 2100 includes a transparent unit main body 2101 in which the first start port 2002 is formed and is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front. The start port unit 2100 passes through the transparent unit main body 2101 and the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and allows the player to pass the back front lower middle decoration body 3168 of the back front decoration unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 arranged rearward. It can be visually recognized from the side (front).

By attaching the starting port unit 2100 to the panel plate 1110, the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting port 2002 protrude forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 and are opened upward. The starting port 2002 is located directly below the central guide portion 2531 in the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500, which will be described later. Therefore, when the game ball is released downward from the central guide portion 2531 of the stage 2530, it is received by the first starting port 2002 with an extremely high probability. The start port unit 2100 guides the game ball received in the first start port 2002 to the rear of the panel plate 1110, and receives the game ball in the first start port discharge port 3162 of the back front decoration unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 described later. Can be passed.

[5-8b. Side unit]
Next, the side unit 2200 of the table unit 2000 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 114 to 116 and the like. The side unit 2200 extends in an arc shape on the left side of the starting port unit 2100 along the inner rail 1002 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The side unit 2200 is arranged near the right end of the front view adjacent to the start port unit 2100, and has two general winning openings 2001 that are always open toward the upper left of the front view and the right of the front view. .. Further, the side unit 2200 has a transparent flat plate-shaped unit main body 2201 attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, and the side unit 2201 protrudes forward near the left end of the front view and lowers the right end side of the front view. It has a shelf portion 2202 extending to the left and right. The side unit 2200 is formed so that two general winning openings 2001 project forward from the unit main body 2201.

By attaching the side unit 2200 to the panel plate 1110, the two general winning openings 2001 are located below the first starting port 2002 and between the starting port unit 2100 and the shelf 2202. It is in a state of protruding forward from the front surface of 1110. In the state where the side unit 2200 is assembled on the game board 5, the shelf portion 2202 on the left end side is located above the two general winning openings 2001, the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002 of the starting port unit 2100. ing.

The side unit 2200 passes the transparent unit main body 2201 and the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and the back front left lower decorative body 3118 of the back front decorative unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 arranged rearward to the player side ( It can be visually recognized from the front).

Further, the side unit 2200 can guide the game ball that has flowed down the left side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a to the right side (center side in the left-right direction of the game area 5a) by the shelf portion 2202. .. The game ball guided to the shelf 2202 may be accepted by the two general winning openings 2001, the general winning opening of the starting opening unit 2100, and the first starting opening 2002. The side unit 2200 guides the game ball received in each general winning opening 2001 to the rear of the panel plate 1110 and delivers it to the general winning opening left discharge port 3163 of the back front decoration unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 described later. Can be done.

[5-8c. Attacker unit]
Next, the attacker unit 2400 of the table unit 2000 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 119 to 122 and the like. The attacker unit 2400 is arranged in the game area 5a on the right side of the start port unit 2100, which is the lower right corner of the front view, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 from the front. The attacker unit 2400 includes a general winning opening 2001, a gate portion 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a large winning opening 2005, which is one of the four general winning openings 2001.

The attacker unit 2400 has a gate portion 2003 in which a game ball flows (passes) up and down in the upper right corner of the front view, and a second starting port 2004 that opens forward directly below the gate portion 2003. Have been placed. The second starting port 2004 is separated downward from the gate portion 2003 by a distance slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball. The general winning opening 2001 and the second starting opening 2004 are separated from each other in the left-right direction by about twice the outer diameter of the game ball. Further, in the attacker unit 2400, one general winning opening 2001 that is always open upward to the left of the second starting port 2004 is arranged, and the attacker unit 2400 opens forward below the general winning opening 2001. The horizontally long winning opening 2005 is arranged. The large winning opening 2005 is separated downward from the general winning opening 2001 (second starting opening 2004) by a distance of 4 to 6 times the outer diameter of the game ball.

The general winning opening 2001 and the second starting opening 2004 of the attacker unit 2400 are formed in a size capable of accepting only one game ball. The gate portion 2003 is formed in a size that allows only one game ball to pass through. The large winning opening 2005 is formed in a size that opens in the left-right direction with a length of about five times the outer diameter of the game ball. The large winning opening 2005 is arranged so that the center in the left-right direction is located slightly to the left of the center in the left-right direction of the general winning opening 2001 arranged above.

The attacker unit 2400 includes a gate sensor 2401 that detects a game ball passing through the gate unit 2003 and a second start port sensor 2402 (see FIG. 165) that detects a game ball received by the second start port 2004. It is equipped with a large winning opening sensor 2403 that detects a game ball received in the winning opening 2005.

The attacker unit 2400 passes through the second starting door 2411 and the second starting door 2411 so as to project forward from the lower side of the second starting door 2004 by passing the game ball of the gate portion 2003. The start port solenoid 2412 that protrudes forward according to the result of the ordinary lottery, and the large winning opening 2005 are square plates that can be closed from the front and extend to the left and right. Depending on the result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery, which is drawn by accepting the game ball into the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, and the large winning opening door 2413 which is rotatably attached. It is equipped with an attacker solenoid 2414 that rotates the grand prize opening door 2413.

When the start port solenoid 2412 is OFF (non-energized), the second start port door 2411 moves (retracts) rearward, and the tip (front end) is located behind the front surface of the game panel 1100. Even if the game ball passes in front of the second starting port 2004, which is always open forward in the state (normal state), it is not accepted by the second starting port 2004, and the second starting port 2004 It will pass in front of. On the other hand, when the start port solenoid 2412 is ON (energized), the second start port door 2411 moves forward (advances) and protrudes into the game area 5a. When the game ball flows down in front of the second start port 2004 while the second start door 2411 is protruding forward, the game ball comes into contact with the upper surface of the second start door 2411, and the second start door 2411 causes the game ball to come into contact with the upper surface of the second start door 2411. It will be guided backward and accepted into the second starting port 2004. In this way, the second starting port 2004 can accept or cannot accept the game ball by moving the second starting opening door 2411 forward and backward by the starting opening solenoid 2412.

The large winning opening door 2413 is in an upright state when the attacker solenoid 2414 is OFF (non-energized), and closes the large winning opening 2005 that opens toward the front. In this state (normal state), even if the game ball passes in front of the large winning opening 2005, it will not be accepted by the large winning opening 2005 and will pass in front of the large winning opening 2005. On the other hand, when the attacker solenoid 2414 is ON (energized), the large winning opening door 2413 rotates so that the upper side moves forward around the lower side thereof, and the upper side is located slightly above the lower side. Stop in the state. In this state, when the game ball flows down in front of the big prize opening 2005, the game ball comes into contact with the surface facing upward of the big winning door 2413, and is guided backward by the big winning door 2413. It will be accepted in the winning opening 2005. As described above, in the large winning opening 2005, the large winning opening door 2413 is rotated by the attacker solenoid 2414, so that the game ball can be accepted or cannot be accepted.

The attacker unit 2400 extends vertically along the left side of the second starting port 2004 and protrudes forward from the second starting port left wall portion 2421 and the game ball from the upper end of the second starting port left wall portion 2421. The second starting port shelf 2422, which is shorter than the outer diameter of the The right wall portion 2423 of the second starting port and the right wall portion 2423 of the second starting port are slightly separated from the outer diameter of the game ball to the left, and from the height near the lower end of the gate portion 2003, from the second starting port 2004. Also includes a right passage wall portion 2424, which extends up and down to a lower height and projects forward. The second starting port shelf portion 2422 is inclined so that the right end side (second starting port 2004 side) is slightly lower.

Further, the attacker unit 2400 is arranged between the lower end of the right passage wall portion 2424 and the big winning opening 2005, and has a block member 2430 that protrudes forward (inside the game area 5a) and affects the flow of the game ball. I have. The block member 2430 extends from the lower end of the right passage wall portion 2424 to the lower portion of the general winning opening 2001 to the left so that the left end side is lowered, and the attacker shelf portion 2431 and the attacker shelf portion projecting forward. The attacker left standing wall portion 2432 extending downward from the left end of 2431 to the vicinity of the upper side of the large winning opening 2005 and protruding forward, and the attacker left standing wall portion 2432 extending from the lower end to the right side of the right end of the large winning opening 2005. Attacca lower wall part 2433 that protrudes forward and the attacker right standing wall part that extends vertically and protrudes forward so as to connect the right end of the attacker lower wall part 2433 and the right end of the attacker shelf part 2431. 2434 and.

The lowest left end of the attacker shelf 2431 protrudes slightly to the left of the left end of the upper general winning opening 2001, and is longer than twice the outer diameter of the game ball from the left end of the large winning opening 2005. It is located to the right by a distance L (see FIG. 120). In other words, the position of the left end of the attacker shelf 2431 in the left-right direction is slightly larger than half of the outer diameter of the game ball from the center in the left-right direction of the grand prize opening 2005 to the right. Further, the left end of the attacker shelf portion 2431 is located at a height of about 2.5 times the outer diameter of the game ball upward from the upper side (upper end) of the large winning opening 2005.

The attacker left standing wall portion 2432 is formed so as to extend downward from the left end of the attacker shelf portion 2431, and then extend diagonally downward to the lower right from the left end of the attacker shelf portion 2431 and then extend vertically downward. That is, the attacker left standing wall portion 2432 is bent so that the vicinity of the upper end extends diagonally to the upper left. The position of the vertically extending portion of the attacker left standing wall portion 2432 in the left-right direction is slightly to the left (in other words, from the left end to the right of the big prize opening 2005) with respect to the center in the left-right direction of the big winning opening 2005. It is located at a distance of about 2.5 times the outer diameter of.

The lower wall portion 2433 of the attacker extends horizontally along the upper side of the big winning opening 2005, and the right end is located at a distance of about twice the outer shape of the game medium from the right end of the big winning opening 2005 to the right. .. The lower wall portion 2433 of the attacker covers a part of the upper part of the grand prize opening 2005.

The attacker unit 2400 is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100, and the gate portion 2003 is located below the downstream end of the right guide passage 2540 of the center accessory 2500, which will be described later, and a general prize is awarded. The opening 2001, the gate portion 2003, and the second starting port 2004 are located above the lower end of the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500. Further, as shown in FIG. 120, a plurality of obstacle nails K are also planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement around the attacker unit 2400 in the game area 5a.

Subsequently, the flow of the game ball in the attacker unit 2400 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 119 and 120, the general winning opening 2001, the gate portion 2003, and the second starting port 2004 of the attacker unit 2400 are from the lower end of the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 in the state of being assembled on the game board 5. Even if the game ball is released from the stage 2530, it will not be accepted by the general winning opening 2001 and the second starting opening 2004, or will not pass through the gate portion 2003. Therefore, in order for the game ball to be received by the general winning opening 2001 or the second starting port 2004 of the attacker unit 2400 or to pass through the gate portion 2003, it is necessary to distribute the right side of the center accessory 2500.

As shown in FIG. 120, a plurality of obstacle nails K are planted between the gate portion 2003 of the attacker unit 2400 and the right guide passage 2540 of the center accessory 2500, and thus downstream of the right guide passage 2540. Multiple paths are formed on the side. Therefore, the game ball released from the right guide passage 2540 of the center accessory 2500 passes through the gate portion 2003 with a certain probability. The passage of the game ball at the gate unit 2003 is detected by the gate sensor 2401. When the passage of the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 2401, a lottery of the normal lottery result is performed on the main control board 1310.

The game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2003 passes in front of the second starting port 2004 arranged directly below the gate portion 2003 and flows down onto the attacker shelf portion 2431 of the block member 2430. A gap having a distance of about 1.5 times the outer diameter of the game ball is formed between the gate portion 2003 and the second starting port 2004. Therefore, even if the game ball released from the right guide passage 2540 of the center accessory 2500 circulates on the left side or the right side of the gate portion 2003 without passing through the gate portion 2003, the gate portion 2003 and the second starting port 2004 There is a possibility of circulating in front of the second starting port 2004 through the gap between the two.

More specifically, when the game ball circulates on the left side of the gate portion 2003, when it flows down onto the second starting port shelf portion 2422 by a plurality of obstacle nails K planted in the area on the left side of the gate portion 2003, the first (Ii) The inclination of the start port shelf 2422 guides it to the right, and it is highly likely that it will be sent to the front of the second start port 2004. On the other hand, when the game ball circulates on the right side of the gate portion 2003, when it flows down near the upper end of the right passage wall portion 2424, the upper portion of the right passage wall portion 2424 is inclined so as to be lowered toward the second starting port 2004. There is a possibility that the vehicle will be guided to the left and pass in front of the second starting port 2004 through the upper side of the gap between the gate portion 2003 and the second starting port 2004 (the right wall portion 2423 of the second starting port). There is. The game ball that has circulated between the second starting port 2004 (the right wall portion 2423 of the second starting port) and the right passage wall portion 2424 flows down onto the attacker shelf portion 2431 of the block member 2430.

When the game ball circulates in front of the second starting port 2004, if the second starting port door 2411 moves forward and protrudes into the game area 5a, the front of the second starting port 2004 The flowing game ball comes into contact with the upper surface of the second starting port door 2411 and is guided to the rear second starting port 2004 side, and is received by the second starting port 2004. The game ball received in the second starting port 2004 is delivered to the second starting port discharge port 3165 of the back front decorative unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 described later on the rear side of the game panel 1100, and then the lower substrate. It is discharged onto the holder 1200.

The second start door 2411 is set according to the result of the normal lottery drawn when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 (the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 2401) (the normal lottery result is "normal hit"). Occasionally), when the start port solenoid 2412 is turned on, it is moved so as to project forward. By moving the second starting port door 2411 forward, it becomes possible to accept the game ball into the second starting port 2004. That is, the second starting port 2004 opens and closes depending on the advancement and retreat of the second starting port door 2411.

The opening / closing timing of the second start port 2004 with respect to the lottery of the normal lottery result at the gate portion 2003 can be appropriately set. It can also be accepted at the start port 2004.

The game ball that circulates on the left side of the gate portion 2003 and does not flow down onto the second starting opening shelf 2422 is arranged on the left side of the second starting opening 2004 by a plurality of obstacle nails K. There is a possibility that the general winning opening 2001, which is guided in the direction of the above and is always open upward, will be accepted. The game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400 is handed over to the general winning opening right outlet 3164 of the back front decoration unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 described later on the rear side of the game panel 1100, and the general winning is given. After being detected by the mouth sensor 3166, it is discharged onto the lower substrate holder 1200.

The game ball distributed on the left side of the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400 may be accepted by the first starting opening 2002 of the starting port unit 2100 arranged on the downstream side or the large winning opening 2005 in the open state. be. Further, the game ball circulated on the right side of the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400, that is, between the general winning opening 2001 and the second starting port 2004, flows down onto the attacker shelf portion 2431 of the block member 2430.

The game ball that has flowed down onto the attacker shelf 2431 of the block member 2430 is guided to the left in the front view by the inclination of the attacker shelf 2431, and is discharged downward from the left end of the attacker shelf 2431. Since the big winning opening 2005 is arranged below the left end side of the attacker shelf 2431, when the big winning opening 2005 is open, the game ball is on the left side of the attacker shelf 2431, that is, the block member 2430. If it flows down near the left side, it will be accepted into the big prize opening 2005 with high probability.

As shown in the figure, the large winning opening 2005 of the attacker unit 2400 is covered by the block member 2430 above the right half or more. The right end side of the block member 2430 (attacker right standing wall portion 2434) is close to the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000, and is formed so that the game ball does not circulate on the right side of the block member 2430. Therefore, the game ball that is discharged downward from the right guide passage 2540 of the center accessory 2500 and is not accepted by the general winning opening 2001 or the second starting opening 2004 is formed so as to circulate on the left side of the block member 2430. There is.

The left end (attacker left standing wall portion 2432) of the block member 2430 covering the upper right half or more of the big winning opening 2005 is the outer diameter of the game ball from the left end to the right of the big winning opening 2005 in the left-right direction. It is arranged so as to be located at a distance L of about 2.5 times that of. As shown in FIG. 120, a plurality of obstacle nails K are planted in the area on the left side of the block member 2430, and a plurality of routes leading to the front of the large winning opening 2005 are formed on the left side of the block member 2430. Has been done. Therefore, the game ball that has circulated on the left side of the general winning opening 2001 in the attacker unit 2400 or on the attacker shelf 2431 passes through any of a plurality of paths formed by the plurality of obstacle nails K, and is in front of the large winning opening 2005. It will be distributed toward.

When the game ball circulates in front of the big prize opening 2005, if the big prize opening door 2413 rotates and the big winning opening 2005 is in the open state, the game ball flowing down in front of the big winning opening 2005 , The large winning opening door 2413 comes into contact with the upward facing surface and is guided to the rear large winning opening 2005 side, and is accepted by the large winning opening 2005. In this example, if the game ball is released from the left end of the attacker shelf 2431 when the large winning opening 2005 is open, it is accepted by the large winning opening 2005 with a high probability. The game ball received in the big winning opening 2005 is detected by the big winning opening sensor 2403. Since the large winning opening sensor 2403 is arranged on the left side of the block member 2430 in the large winning opening 2005, that is, a portion above which the block member 2430 does not cover, the large winning opening sensor 2403 is guided backward by the large winning opening door 2413. When the game ball is received in the big winning opening 2005, it is immediately detected by the big winning opening sensor 2403. Then, the game ball detected by the large winning opening sensor 2403 is discharged onto the lower substrate holder 1200 on the rear side of the game panel 1100.

In the large winning opening door 2413, the attacker solenoid 2414 is turned on according to the result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery, which is drawn by accepting the game ball in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. As a result, the upper side rotates around the lower side so that the upper side moves forward, and the large winning opening 2005 is opened so that the game ball can be accepted. The opening / closing timing and opening / closing pattern of the grand prize opening 2005 are appropriately set according to the result of the first special lottery and the result of the second special lottery.

The game ball that is not accepted in the grand prize opening 2005 flows down onto the lower right rail 1004, passes through the out port 1126 at the lower end of the game area 5a, and is discharged onto the lower substrate holder 1200 on the rear side of the game panel 1100. NS.

As described above, according to the attacker unit 2400 of the present embodiment, the distance L in the left-right direction is about 2.5 times the outer shape of the gaming ball between the left end of the large winning opening 2005 and the left end of the block member 2430. Because there are multiple routes (flow paths) to the big winning opening 2005 compared to the conventional pachinko machine, it is planted in the area above the big winning opening 2005. Regardless of the state of the plurality of obstacle nails K, the game ball can be accepted into the open large winning opening 2005 with an extremely high probability, and the player can be fully entertained.

Further, the large winning opening sensor 2403 that detects the acceptance of the game ball into the large winning opening 2005 is located outside the block member 2430, that is, between the left end of the large winning opening 2005 and the left end of the block member 2430 (game). Since the ball is arranged directly below the area where the ball can be accepted, the game ball received in the large winning opening 2005 can be immediately detected by the large winning opening sensor 2403. Therefore, when the big winning opening 2005 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern (for example, "big hit game"), when the big winning opening 2005 is closed (one round is completed) by accepting a predetermined number of game balls. When a predetermined number of game balls are received in the large winning opening 2005, the game balls can be immediately detected and the large winning opening door 2413 can be closed, so that an extra game ball is placed in the large winning opening 2005. It is possible to reduce acceptance, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

[5-8d. Center role]
Next, the center accessory 2500 of the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 121 and 122. The center accessory 2500 is arranged in the game area 5a above the start port unit 2100, the side unit 2200, and the attacker unit 2400, slightly above the center of the front view, and is located on the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. It is mounted on the front. The center accessory 2500 is substantially entirely transparent and is formed in a frame shape, and various effect units and the like provided in the main effect display device 1600 and the back unit 3000 arranged behind the game panel 1100 through the frame are used. It can be visually recognized from the front.

The entire circumference of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 except for the lower side protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and the game ball driven into the game area 5a is inside the frame. It cannot be invaded.

The center accessory 2500 has a warp entrance 2520 that is open so that the game ball in the game area 5a can enter and a game ball that has entered the warp entrance 2520 on the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front view. It includes an open warp outlet 2522 and a stage 2530 that can roll the game ball discharged from the warp outlet 2522 in the left-right direction and then release it into the game area 5a (see FIG. 119 and the like). ..

The stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 is curved so that the center in the left-right direction is recessed downward, and the center in the left-right direction slightly bulges upward, and the left and right sides in the center in the left-right direction are the lowest. It is formed in a wavy shape. The stage 2530 is inclined so as to be lowered toward the front at the central guide portion 2531 which is inclined toward the front in the center in the left-right direction and at the lowest portion on both the left and right sides of the center in the left-right direction. It is provided with a pair of side guide portions 2532 and the like. The stage 2530 can release the game ball supplied from the warp outlet 2522 through the warp inlet 2520 from either the central guide portion 2531 or the pair of side guide portions 2532 into the game region 5a.

In the center accessory 2500, the central guide portion 2531 of the stage 2530 is located directly above the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100 in a state where the center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5. As a result, when the game ball is released from the central guide portion 2531 into the game area 5a, it is received by the first starting port 2002 with an extremely high probability.

Further, the center accessory 2500 projects into the right guide passage 2540 and the right guide passage 2540, which guides the game ball flowing down along the outer peripheral surface on the right side of the front view slightly to the left and then discharges it downward. It has a plurality of ridges 2541 and. When assembled on the game board 5, the right guide passage 2540 forms a passage (passage) having a width in which only one game ball can circulate between the right guide passage 2540 and the right rail 1005 of the front component 1000. The right guide passage 2540 extends from the vicinity of the abutment portion 1006 to a position slightly below the center in the vertical direction along the right rail 1005, and the downstream end is located directly above the gate portion 2003 in the attacker unit 2400. ing. Further, the plurality of ridges 2541 can reduce the circulation speed of the game balls when the game balls circulating in the right guide passage 2540 come into contact with each other.

[5-9. Overall configuration of the back unit]
Next, the overall configuration of the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 123 to 125. FIG. 123 (a) is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 123 (b) is a perspective view of the back unit as viewed from the back. Further, FIG. 124 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit disassembled for each main component and viewed from the front, and FIG. 125 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit disassembled for each main component and viewed from the rear. be. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100. Further, a main effect display device 1600 and a peripheral control unit 1500 are attached to the rear side of the back unit 3000.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 which is box-shaped and has a square opening 3010a in the rear wall and is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. On the rear surface of the back box 3010, the lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the effect display device 1600, the panel relay board 3031 attached to the left end of the rear view below the opening 3010a on the rear surface of the back box 3010, and the rear surface of the back box 3010. The effect drive board 3032 attached to the right side of the panel relay board 3031 in the rear view, the motor drive board 3033 attached to the rear surface of the effect drive board 3032 on the rear surface of the back box 3010, and the rear surface of the back box 3010. The upper relay board 3034 attached to the upper side of the opening 3010a is provided.

The panel relay board 3031 includes a main control board 1310, a function display unit 1400, a gate sensor 2401, a second start port sensor 2402, a large winning opening sensor 2403, a general winning opening sensor 3166, a first starting port sensor 3167, and a starting port solenoid. It relays the connection with 2412, the attacker solenoid 2414, and the magnetic sensor (not shown). Based on the control signals from the peripheral control board 1510, the effect drive board 3032 and the motor drive board 3033 have a back front decoration unit 3100, a back bottom movable effect unit 3200, a back left movable effect unit 3300, and a back right movable effect unit 3400. It also controls the decorative substrate, drive motor, etc. provided in the back-middle movable effect unit 3500. The upper relay board 3034 relays the connection between the effect drive board 3032 and the motor drive board 3033 and the back middle movable effect unit 3500.

Further, the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 so as to cover the rear sides of the panel relay board 3031, the effect drive board 3032, the motor drive board 3033, and the upper relay board 3034, respectively. The cover 3035, the effect drive board cover 3036, the motor drive board cover 3037, and the upper relay board cover 3038 are provided.

Further, the back unit 3000 is attached to the flat frame-shaped back front decoration unit 3100 attached to the front end of the back box 3010 and to the lower side of the opening 3010a on the rear side of the back front decoration unit 3100 in the back box 3010. The back left movable production unit 3200 and the back left movable production unit 3300 and the back right movable production unit 3400 attached to the upper side of the opening 3010a on the rear side of the back front decoration unit 3100 in the back box 3010. Inside the back box 3010, the back middle movable production unit 3500 is installed so as to surround the upper side and the left and right sides of the opening 3010a between the back front decoration unit 3100, the back left movable production unit 3300, and the back right movable production unit 3400. And have.

[5-9a. Back box]
Next, the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 123 and the like. The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-shaped opening 3010a with an open front and a square penetration through the rear wall, and a space is provided from the peripheral edge of the opening 3010a in the direction along the surface of the game panel 1100. A flat plate frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b projecting rearward and a left fixed piece 1601 of the main effect display device 1600, which is recessed from the inside to the outside in the frame on the right side of the rear view of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, are inserted. The two fixing grooves 3010c are cut out from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 at the center of the left side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b in the vertical direction, and the cutout portion 3010d to which the lock mechanism 3020 is mounted, and the front end of the back box 3010. It is provided with a flange-shaped fixed piece portion 3010e extending outward from the guide groove 3010f, and a guide groove 3010f formed on the lower side of the opening 3010a and open upward.

The opening 3010a of the back box 3010 is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the main effect display device 1600. Further, the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is formed in a size capable of fitting the main effect display device 1600 into the frame. The lock mechanism 3020 is slidably attached to the back box 3010 on the left side of the notch 3010d on the rear surface when viewed from the rear.

Further, the fixed piece portion 3010e of the back box 3010 is attached to the panel holder 1120 with the front surface in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100. The back box 3010 is formed with bosses, mounting holes, and the like for mounting the movable effect units and the like at appropriate positions.

Further, the guide groove 3010f of the back box 3010 is, from above, the guide piece 3353c of the decorative body base 3353 in the back left decorative body unit 3350 of the back left movable effect unit 3300 and the back right decorative body unit of the back right movable effect unit 3400. The guide piece 3453c of the decorative body base 3453 in the 3450 is slidably inserted in the left-right direction. The guide groove 3010f regulates the movement of the guide piece 3353c and the guide piece 3453c in the front-rear direction.

[5-9b. Back front decoration unit]
Next, the back front decoration unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 123 to 133. FIG. 126 is an exploded perspective view of the back front decoration unit in the back unit disassembled into a back front front unit, a back front middle unit, and a back front and rear unit, and FIG. 127 shows a back front decoration unit in the back unit. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the back by disassembling into the back front front unit, the back front middle unit, and the back front and rear unit. FIG. 128 (a) is an enlarged front view showing a portion of the upper left corner of the game board, and FIG. 128 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line RR in (a). FIG. 129 is a perspective view showing a state in which the center accessory is omitted with respect to the arrow B in FIG. 128. FIG. 130 is an exploded perspective view of the back-front-middle unit of the back-front decoration unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 131 is an exploded perspective view of the back-front-middle unit of the back-front decoration unit disassembled and viewed from the back. be. FIG. 132 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the back-front-middle unit of the back-front decoration unit cut in the middle of the vertical direction and viewed from above, and FIG. 132 (b) is an enlarged view of the vicinity of the left end of the cross-sectional view of (a). It is explanatory drawing which shows, and (c) is an explanatory view which enlarges and shows near the right end of the cross-sectional view of (a). FIG. 133 (a) is a front view showing the decoration of the first light guide plate of the back front middle unit, and FIG. 133 (b) is a front view showing the decoration of the second light guide plate of the back front middle unit.

The back front decoration unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 is formed in a flat frame shape having a thin depth in the front-rear direction, and is attached to the front end of the back box 3010. The back front decoration unit 3100 is arranged so as to close the back front front unit 3110, which is formed in a substantially C shape with the lower side open in the front view, and the inner circumference of the back front front unit 3110 from the rear side. The flat plate-shaped back front middle unit 3130, back front middle unit 3130, and back front front unit 3110 are supported from the rear side, and are attached near the front end of the back box 3010 so that the upper side is open in a plan view. It includes a back front and rear unit 3160 formed in a character shape.

The back front front unit 3110 in the back front decoration unit 3100 is a flat plate-shaped back front upper base 3111 attached to the front end above the opening 3010a of the back box 3010 and extending in the left-right direction, and the back front upper base 3111. The back front upper left decorative body 3112 and the back front upper right decorative body 3113 attached to the front left and right ends, respectively, and the back front upper left decorative body 3112 and the back front upper right decorative body 3113. The back front upper middle decoration body 3114 attached to the front surface of the base 3111, the back front upper left decoration body 3112, the back front upper right decoration body 3113, and the back front upper middle decoration body 3114 extending to the left and right. It is equipped with a back front logo decoration body 3115 in which a logo (not shown) is formed according to the concept of the cage pachinko machine 1.

Further, the back front front unit 3110 has the back front left side decorative body 3116 and the back front right side decorative body 3117, each of which has upper ends attached to the vicinity of the left and right ends of the back front upper base 3111 and extends vertically, and the back front. It includes a back front lower left decorative body 3118 and a back front lower right decorative body 3119 arranged near the lower ends of the left side decorative body 3116 and the back front right side decorative body 3117, respectively.

Further, the back front front unit 3110 is arranged between the back front upper base 3111, the back front upper left decorative body 3112, the back front upper right decorative body 3113, and the back front upper middle decorative body 3114, and is arranged on the front surface. The back front upper decorative board 3120 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, and the back front right decorative board 3121 mounted on the rear side of the back front right side decorative body 3117 and on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface. I have.

The back front upper left decorative body 3112 of the back front front unit 3110 is formed in a three-dimensional relief shape, and has one continuous decoration. The back front upper left decorative body 3112 includes a middle decorative portion 3112a extending obliquely from the upper left to the lower right, and a peripheral decorative portion 3112b surrounding the left and right sides and the upper side of the middle decorative portion 3112a. The intermediate decoration portion 3112a is formed in a sliding glass shape in which the surface of a colorless and transparent member is textured. The peripheral decoration portion 3112b is formed in a shape imitating a flame by a red transparent member. The back front upper left decorative body 3112 is formed so as to be continuous with the decoration of the back left decorative body 3354 in the back left movable effect unit 3300 described later.

The back front upper left decorative body 3112 is located on the rear side of the panel plate 1110 on the outside of the opening 1112 in the transparent panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 when assembled on the game board 5. And a decorative front portion 3112d located inside the opening 1112 in the panel plate 1110 (inside the frame of the center accessory 2500). The front surface of the decorative front portion 3112d of the back front upper left decorative body 3112 projects forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 as shown in FIGS. 128 (a) and 129. In other words, the decorative front portion 3112d of the back front upper left decorative body 3112 bulges (projects) into the opening 1112 in the panel plate 1110 from the rear. As a result, when the game board 5 is viewed from the front, the decorative front portion 3112d of the back front upper left decorative body 3112 bulges forward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 in the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110. Therefore, the depth feeling of the back front upper left decorative body 3112 can be emphasized, and the decorativeness in the game area 5a can be further enhanced. Further, the back front upper left decorative body 3112 is formed into a three-dimensional decoration recognized as one by the decorative rear portion 3112c and the decorative front portion 3112d.

The back front upper right decorative body 3113 of the back front front unit 3110 is formed in a three-dimensional relief shape, and has one continuous decoration. The back front upper right decorative body 3113 includes a middle decorative portion 3113a extending obliquely from the upper right to the lower left, and a peripheral decorative portion 3113b surrounding the left and right sides and the upper side of the middle decorative portion 3113a. The intermediate decoration portion 3113a is formed in a sliding glass shape in which the surface of a colorless and transparent member is textured. The peripheral decoration portion 3113b is formed in a shape imitating a flame by a red transparent member. The back front upper right decorative body 3113 is formed so as to be continuous with the back right decorative body 3454 in the back right movable effect unit 3400, which will be described later.

The back front upper right decorative body 3113 is located on the rear side of the panel plate 1110 on the outside of the opening 1112 in the transparent panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 when assembled on the game board 5. And a decorative front portion 3113d located inside the opening 1112 in the panel plate 1110 (inside the frame of the center accessory 2500). The front surface of the decorative front portion 3113d of the back front upper right decorative body 3113 projects forward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110. In other words, the decorative front portion 3113d of the back front upper right decorative body 3113 bulges (protrudes) into the opening 1112 in the panel plate 1110 from the rear. As a result, when the game board 5 is viewed from the front, the decorative front portion 3113d of the back front upper right decorative body 3113 bulges forward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 in the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110. Therefore, the depth feeling of the back front upper right decorative body 3113 can be emphasized, and the decorativeness in the game area 5a can be further enhanced. Further, the back front upper right decorative body 3113 is formed into a three-dimensional decoration recognized as one by the decorative rear portion 3113c and the decorative front portion 3113d.

As shown in the figure, the back front upper middle decorative body 3114 has a decoration imitating a globe formed in the center, and is partially translucent. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the back front logo decoration body 3115 is formed on the front surface with a translucent logo composed of a predetermined character string in accordance with the concept of the pachinko machine 1. Further, the back front logo decoration body 3115 has a plating layer having a metallic luster on the surface of the portion excluding the front logo.

The back front upper left decorative body 3112, the back front upper right decorative body 3113, the back front upper middle decorative body 3114, and the back front logo decorative body 3115 are displayed on the display screen of the main effect display device 1600 in a state of being assembled on the game board 5. It is located above and decorates the upper part in the game area 5a.

The back front left side decorative body 3116 includes a portion having a translucent portion and a portion having a metallic luster, and a linear radial decoration centered on the center of the game area 5a is formed. The back front right side decorative body 3117 includes a portion having a translucent portion and a portion having a metallic luster, and a linear radial decoration centered on the center of the game area 5a is formed. The back front left side decorative body 3116 and the back front right side decorative body 3117 are located on both the left and right outside of the display screen of the main effect display device 1600 in a state of being assembled on the game board 5, and are left in the game area 5a. The part and the right part are decorated respectively.

The back front lower left decorative body 3118 includes a portion having a translucent portion and a portion having a metallic luster, and a mechanical decoration based on a straight line is formed. The back front lower right decorative body 3119 includes a portion having a translucent portion and a portion having a metallic luster, and a mechanical decoration based on a straight line is formed. The back front lower left decorative body 3118 and the back front lower right decorative body 3119 are arranged below the display screen of the main effect display device 1600 in a state of being assembled on the game board 5, and the lower part in the game area 5a is arranged. It is decorated.

A plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted on the back front upper decorative substrate 3120, and the back front upper left decorative body 3112, the back front upper right decorative body 3113, the back front upper middle decorative body 3114, and the back front logo decorative body 3115 are mounted. , Each can be independently luminescent and decorated. Further, the back front upper decorative substrate 3120 is independent of the middle decoration portion 3112a and the peripheral decoration portion 3112b of the back front upper left decoration body 3112, and the middle decoration portion 3113a and the peripheral decoration portion 3113b of the back front upper right decoration body 3113, respectively. It can be luminescent and decorated. The back front right decorative substrate 3121 can illuminate the back front right side decorative body 3117.

As shown in FIGS. 130 and 131, the back front middle unit 3130 of the back front decoration unit 3100 is arranged so as to be separated from each other on the left and right, and the left base 3131 and the right base extending vertically are attached to the back front and rear units 3160, respectively. The 3132, the left cover 3133 and the right cover 3134 attached to the front surfaces of the left base 3131 and the right base 3132, and the transparency arranged between the left cover 3133 and the right cover 3134 and the left base 3131 and the right base 3132. A flat first light guide plate 3135 and a transparent flat second light guide plate arranged between the left cover 3133 and the right cover 3134 and the left base 3131 and the right base 3132 behind the first light guide plate 3135. It is equipped with 3136.

The shape of the left base 3131 extends vertically downward by a distance of about 3/4 of the total height from the upper end, then extends shortly horizontally to the right, and then vertically extends downward to the lower end. It is formed in a crank shape. In the right base 3132, the shape of the front view extends vertically downward by a distance of about 3/4 of the total height from the upper end, then extends shortly horizontally to the left, and then extends diagonally to the lower left to the lower end. It is formed in a shape. The left cover 3133 and the right cover 3134 are formed so that the front view shape is substantially the same as that of the left base 3131 and the right base 3132, respectively.

The first light guide plate 3135 and the second light guide plate 3136 extend to the left and right so as to connect (close) between the left base 3131 and the right base 3132 which are separated from each other to the left and right, and the left and right sides are respectively left. It is formed in a shape that conforms to the shapes of the base 3131 and the right base 3132. The first light guide plate 3135 and the second light guide plate 3136 are formed to have the same shape in a plan view, and a plurality of through holes for attaching to the left base 3131 and the right base 3132 are formed in the vicinity of both the left and right sides. There is.

As shown in FIG. 133 (a), the first light guide plate 3135 has a first pattern 3135a drawn by a plurality of minute irregularities formed in a height range of about 3/4 from the top with respect to the total height. ing. The first pattern 3135a of the first light guide plate 3135 is a pattern having a predetermined character string (here, "HERE COMES A NEW CHALLENGER"). As shown in FIG. 133 (b), the second light guide plate 3136 is formed with a second pattern 3136a depicted by a plurality of minute irregularities throughout. The second pattern 3136a of the second light guide plate 3136 is a pattern of a flame (or thunder light) extending radially around the center.

The first pattern 3135a of the first light guide plate 3135 can be visually recognized by being light-emitting and decorated by light from the first LED 3141a of the back front middle left decorative substrate 3141 and the first LED 3143a of the back front middle right decorative substrate 3143, which will be described later. It becomes. The second pattern 3136a of the second light guide plate 3136 includes the second LED 3141b of the back front middle left decorative substrate 3141, the LED 3142a of the back front middle left lower decorative substrate 3142, the second LED 3143b of the back front middle right decorative substrate 3143, and the back. It becomes visible by being light-emitting and decorated by the light from the LED 3144a of the front middle right lower decorative substrate 3144.

Further, the back front middle unit 3130 is arranged between the first light guide plate 3135 and the second light guide plate 3136 at a portion between the left cover 3133 and the right cover 3134 and the left base 3131 and the right base 3132. It is provided with a light-transmitting strip-shaped upper left spacer 3137, a lower left spacer 3138, an upper right spacer 3139, and a lower right spacer 3140. A gap is formed between the first light guide plate 3135 and the second light guide plate 3136 by the upper left spacer 3137, the lower left spacer 3138, the upper right spacer 3139, and the lower right spacer 3140.

The upper left spacer 3137 is formed in a size and shape corresponding to a portion extending vertically downward from the upper end and a portion extending horizontally on the left side of the first light guide plate 3135 and the second light guide plate 3136. The lower left spacer 3138 is formed in a size and shape corresponding to a portion of the first light guide plate 3135 and the second light guide plate 3136 that extends vertically upward from the lower end on the left side. The upper right spacer 3139 is formed in a size and shape corresponding to a portion extending vertically downward from the upper end and a portion extending horizontally on the right side of the first light guide plate 3135 and the second light guide plate 3136. The lower right spacer 3140 is formed in a size and shape corresponding to a portion obliquely extending upward from the lower end on the right side of the first light guide plate 3135 and the second light guide plate 3136.

The upper left spacer 3137, the lower left spacer 3138, the upper right spacer 3139, and the lower right spacer 3140 have a part of the width in the left-right direction (specifically, about 1/6 of the total width) of the first light guide plate 3135 and the second light guide plate 3136. The remaining portion is located between the first light guide plate 3135 and the second light guide plate 3136 and protrudes outward.

Further, in the back front middle unit 3130, the first LED 3141a and the second LED 3141b capable of irradiating light from the upper end on the left side surface of the first light guide plate 3135 and the second light guide plate 3136 toward the side surface extending vertically downward, respectively. A plurality of mounted back front middle left decorative substrates 3141 and a back front on which a plurality of LEDs 3142a capable of irradiating light toward a side surface extending vertically upward from the lower end on the left side surface of the second light guide plate 3136 are mounted. A plurality of first LED 3143a and second LED 3143b capable of irradiating light from the upper end to the side surface extending vertically downward from the upper end on the right side surface of the first light guide plate 3135 and the second light guide plate 3136 are mounted on the lower middle left decorative substrate 314, respectively. The back front middle right decorative substrate 3143 and the back front middle right on which a plurality of LEDs 3144a capable of irradiating light toward the side surface extending diagonally upward from the lower end on the right side surface of the second light guide plate 3136 are mounted. The lower decorative substrate 3144 and the like are provided.

In the back front middle left decorative substrate 3141, a plurality of first LEDs 3141a are vertically arranged in a row near the front side, and a plurality of second LEDs 3141b are vertically separated from the rows of the plurality of first LEDs 3141a. It is lined up in. A plurality of LEDs 3142a are vertically arranged in a row on the back front middle left lower decorative substrate 3142. In the back front middle right decorative substrate 3143, a plurality of first LEDs 3143a are vertically arranged in a row near the front side, and a plurality of second LEDs 3143b are vertically separated from the row of the plurality of first LEDs 3143a. It is lined up in. A plurality of LEDs 3144a are vertically arranged in a row on the back front middle right lower right decorative substrate 3144.

The back front middle left decorative substrate 3141 and the back front middle left decorative substrate 3142 are attached so as to be sandwiched between the left base 3131 and the left cover 3133. The back front middle right decorative board 3143 and the back front middle right decorative board 3144 are attached so as to be sandwiched between the right base 3132 and the right cover 3134. The first LED 3141a and the second LED 3141b of the back front middle left decorative board 3141, the LED 3142a of the back front middle left lower decorative board 3142, the first LED 3143a and the second LED 3143b of the back front middle right decorative board 3143, and the back front middle right decoration The LEDs 3144a of the substrate 3144 are each full-color LEDs.

Further, the back front middle unit 3130 has a transparent strip shape that guides the light from the first LED 3141a of the back front middle left decorative substrate 3141 to the side surface extending vertically downward from the upper end on the left side surface of the first light guide plate 3135. A transparent strip-shaped light that guides the light from the first lens left 3145 and the second LED 3141b of the back front middle left decorative substrate 3141 to the side surface extending vertically downward from the upper end on the left side surface of the second light guide plate 3136. A transparent strip-shaped second lens that guides the light from the second lens left 3146 and the LED 3142a of the back front middle left lower decorative substrate 3142 to the side surface extending vertically upward from the lower end on the left side surface of the second light guide plate 3136. The right side of the transparent strip-shaped first lens that guides the light from the lower left 3147 and the first LED 3143a of the back front middle right decorative substrate 3143 to the side surface extending vertically downward from the upper end on the right side surface of the first light guide plate 3135. A transparent strip-shaped second lens right 3149 that guides the light from the 3148 and the second LED 3143b of the back front middle right decorative substrate 3143 to the side surface extending vertically downward from the upper end on the right side surface of the second light guide plate 3136. And the lower right 3150 of the transparent strip-shaped second lens that guides the light from the LED 3144a of the lower right decorative substrate 3144 in the front front to the side surface extending diagonally upward from the lower end on the left side surface of the second light guide plate 3136. , Is equipped.

The first lens left 3145, the second lens left 3146, the second lens lower left 3147, the first lens right 3148, the second lens right 3149, and the second lens lower right 3150 are the first light guide plate 3135 and the second light guide plate 3136. The surface facing the side surface of the lens is formed in a wavy shape, and the light incident from the opposite surface can be diffused and radiated to the side surfaces of the first light guide plate 3135 and the second light guide plate 3136.

In the assembled state of the back front middle unit 3130, the left end of the upper left spacer 3137 protruding outward from between the first light guide plate 3135 and the second light guide plate 3136 is the first in the back front middle left decorative substrate 3141. It is located near the right side surface between the LED 3141a and the second LED 3141b. Further, the front and rear sides of the portion of the upper left spacer 3137 that protrudes outward from between the first light guide plate 3135 and the second light guide plate 3136 are sandwiched between the first lens left 3145 and the second lens left 3146. There is. As a result, the light from the first LED 3141a of the back front middle left decorative substrate 3141 is irradiated only on the left side surface of the first lens left 3145, and the light on the second lens left 3146 side is blocked by the upper left spacer 3137 and irradiated. There is no such thing. Further, the light from the second LED 3141b of the back front middle left decorative substrate 3141 is irradiated only on the left side surface of the second lens left 3146, and the light on the left 3145 side of the first lens is blocked by the upper left spacer 3137 and irradiated. There is no. That is, the light from the first LED 3141a of the back front middle left decorative substrate 3141 irradiates only the first light guide plate 3135 via the first lens left 3145, and the light from the second LED 3141b passes through the second lens left 3146. It is formed so as to irradiate only the second light guide plate 3136 through the light guide plate 3136.

Further, in the back front middle unit 3130, the left end of the lower left spacer 3138 protruding outward from between the first light guide plate 3135 and the second light guide plate 3136 is in front of the LED 3142a of the back front middle left lower decorative substrate 3142. It is located near the right side. Further, the lower left 3147 of the second lens is in contact with the rear surface of the portion of the lower left spacer 3138 that protrudes outward from between the first light guide plate 3135 and the second light guide plate 3136. As a result, the light from the LED 3142a of the lower left decorative substrate 3142 in front of the back is irradiated only to the left side surface of the lower left 3147 of the second lens, and the front side (first light guide plate 3135 side) is blocked by the lower left spacer 3138 and irradiated. Will not be done. Therefore, the light from the LED 3142a of the lower left decorative substrate 3142 in front of the back is formed so as to irradiate only the second light guide plate 3136 via the lower left 3147 of the second lens.

Further, in the back front middle unit 3130, the right end of the upper right spacer 3139 protruding outward from between the first light guide plate 3135 and the second light guide plate 3136 is the first LED 3143a and the first LED 3143a in the back front middle right decorative substrate 3143. It is located near the left side surface between the two LEDs 3143b. Further, the front and rear sides of the portion of the upper right spacer 3139 that protrudes outward from between the first light guide plate 3135 and the second light guide plate 3136 are sandwiched between the first lens right 3148 and the second lens right 3149. There is. As a result, the light from the first LED 3143a of the back front middle right decorative substrate 3143 is irradiated only on the right side surface of the first lens right 3148, and the light on the second lens right 3149 side is blocked by the upper right spacer 3139 and irradiated. There is no such thing. Further, the light from the second LED 3143b of the back front middle right decorative substrate 3143 is irradiated only on the right side surface of the second lens right 3149, and the light on the first lens right 3148 side is blocked by the upper right spacer 3139 and irradiated. There is no. That is, the light from the first LED 3143a of the back front middle right decorative substrate 3143 irradiates only the first light guide plate 3135 via the first lens right 3148, and the light from the second LED 3143b passes through the second lens right 3149. It is formed so as to irradiate only the second light guide plate 3136 through the light guide plate 3136.

Further, in the back front middle unit 3130, the right end (the end facing the lower right) of the lower right spacer 3140 protruding outward from between the first light guide plate 3135 and the second light guide plate 3136 is the back front. It is located near the left side surface (the surface facing the upper left) in front of the LED3144a of the lower right decorative substrate 3144. Further, the lower right 3150 of the second lens is in contact with the rear surface of the portion of the lower right spacer 3140 that protrudes outward from between the first light guide plate 3135 and the second light guide plate 3136. As a result, the light from the LED 3144a of the lower right decorative substrate 3144 in the front front is irradiated only to the right side surface of the lower right 3150 of the second lens, and the front side (first light guide plate 3135 side) is blocked by the lower right spacer 3140. It is not irradiated. Therefore, the light from the LED 3144a of the lower right decorative substrate 3144 in front of the back is formed so as to irradiate only the second light guide plate 3136 via the lower right 3150 of the second lens.

When the first LED 3141a of the back front middle left decorative substrate 3141 and the first LED 3143a of the back front middle right decorative substrate 3143 are made to emit light, the back front middle unit 3130 emits light and decorates the first pattern 3135a of the first light guide plate 3135. (See FIG. 133 (a) and FIG. 159). Further, the second LED 3141b of the back front middle left decorative board 3141, the LED 3142a of the back front middle left lower decorative board 3142, the second LED 3143b of the back front middle right decorative board 3143, and the LED 3144a of the back front middle right lower decorative board 3144 are made to emit light. The second pattern 3136a of the second light guide plate 3136 can be light-emitting and decorated (see FIGS. 133 (b) and 160).

As shown in FIGS. 126 and 127, the back front and rear unit 3160 of the back front decoration unit 3100 is formed in a U shape with the front view open upward and is attached near the front end of the back box 3010. A plate-shaped unit base 3161 and a first starting port that is attached to the lower center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the unit base 3161 and receives a game ball received in the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100 and discharges it downward. It is located on the left side of the front view of the discharge port 3162 and the first start port discharge port 3162, and receives the game balls received in the three general prize ports 2001 of the side unit 2200 and discharges them downward. The left discharge port 3163 and the first start port discharge port 3162 are arranged on the right side of the front view, and the game ball received in the general prize port 2001 of the attacker unit 2400 is received and discharged downward. The second start port discharge port, which is located on the right side of the front view of the exit 3164 and the right discharge port 3164 of the general winning port, receives the game ball received in the second start port 2004 of the attacker unit 2400 and discharges it downward. It is equipped with 3165.

Further, the back front and rear units 3160 are attached to the unit base 3161 and are received by the general winning opening 2001, and detect the game balls delivered to the general winning opening left discharge port 3163 and the general winning opening right discharge port 3164, respectively. Near the general winning opening sensor 3166, the first starting port sensor 3167 that detects the game ball received by the first starting port 2002 and delivered to the first starting port discharge port 3162, and the vicinity of the first starting port discharge port 3162. It is equipped with an arranged magnetic sensor (not shown). A magnetic sensor (not shown) is for monitoring fraudulent activity using magnets.

Further, the back front and rear units 3160 are attached to the lower center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the unit base 3161, and the back front lower middle decorative body 3168 having the first starting port discharge port 3162 open at the upper part, and the unit base 3161. Back front and rear left decorations 3169 mounted along the left side of the front, back front and rear right decorations 3170 mounted along the right side of the front of the unit base 3161, unit base 3161 and back front lower middle Between the back front left lower decorative board 3171 arranged between the decorative body 3168 and the back front and rear left decorative body 3169 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and between the unit base 3161 and the back front lower middle decorative body 3168. It is provided with a back front lower right decorative substrate 3172, which is arranged in the front and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The back front lower middle decorative body 3168 of the back front and rear unit 3160 is formed in a three-dimensional relief shape. The back front lower middle decoration body 3168 covers the lower side and the left and right sides of the first starting port discharge port 3162, and the middle decoration portion 3168a formed so that the width in the left-right direction increases from the lower end to the upper end, and the middle decoration. The peripheral decorative portion 3168b, which is arranged on both the left and right outer sides of the portion 3168a, is provided. The intermediate decoration portion 3168a is formed in a sliding glass shape in which the surface of a colorless and transparent member is textured. The peripheral decoration portion 3168b is formed in a shape imitating a flame by a red transparent member. The back front / rear left decorative body 3169 and the back front / rear right decorative body 3170 are formed in a three-dimensional relief shape imitating a flame by a member having translucency.

The back front lower left decorative substrate 3171 can illuminate the left half of the back front lower middle decorative body 3168, the lower part of the back front front left decorative body 3169, and the back front left lower decorative body 3118 of the back front front unit 3110. can. The back front lower right decorative substrate 3172 can illuminate the right half of the back front lower middle decorative body 3168 and the back front right lower decorative body 3119 of the back front front unit 3110. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the back front lower left decorative board 3171 and the back front lower right decorative board 3172, respectively, are full-color LEDs.

In the assembled state, the back front decoration unit 3100 is formed in a frame shape having an outer periphery substantially the same size as the game area 5a. The back front decoration unit 3100 includes a back front upper left decorative body 3112, a back front upper right decorative body 3113, a back front upper middle decorative body 3114, a back front left side decorative body 3116, a back front right side decorative body 3117, and a back front lower left. The decorative body 3118, the back front lower right decorative body 3119, the back front lower middle decorative body 3168, the back front and rear left decorative body 3169, and the back front and rear right decorative body 3170 are inside the display screen of the main effect display device 1600 in the front view. It is formed in a frame shape having a large circumference, and the transparent first light guide plate 3135 and the second light guide plate 3136 are closed in the frame.

Further, the back front decoration unit 3100 includes a decorative front portion 3112d of the back front upper left decorative body 3112, a decorative front portion 3113d of the back front upper right decorative body 3113, a part of the back front upper middle decorative body 3114, and a back front logo decoration. A part of the body 3115 and the back front / rear right decorative body 3170 is located inside the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100 in the front view, and is forward (player) through the frame of the center accessory 2500. It can be visually recognized from the side), and the rest can be visually recognized from the front (player side) through the transparent panel plate 1110.

The back front decorative unit 3100 includes the first LED 3141a and the second LED 3141b of the back front middle left decorative board 3141, the LED 3142a of the back front middle left lower decorative board 3142, the first LED 3143a and the second LED 3143b of the back front middle right decorative board 3143, and the back front middle right decorative board 3143. In the state where the LED 3144a of the lower right decorative substrate 3144 is not emitted, the first pattern 3135a of the first light guide plate 3135 and the second pattern 3136a of the second light guide plate 3136 are visually recognized from the front (player side). The rear can be clearly seen through the first light guide plate 3135 and the second light guide plate 3136.

The back front decorative unit 3100 causes the first LED 3141a of the back front middle left decorative substrate 3141 and the first LED 3143a of the back front middle right decorative substrate 3143 to emit light, thereby appropriately displaying the first pattern 3135a of the first light guide plate 3135. It can be luminescently decorated with color (see FIG. 159). In the state where the first pattern 3135a is light-emittingly decorated, as shown in FIG. 159, a pattern composed of a predetermined character string is displayed in front of the main effect display device 1600.

Further, the second LED 3141b of the back front middle left decorative substrate 3141, the LED 3142a of the back front middle left lower decorative substrate 3142, the second LED 3143b of the back front middle right decorative substrate 3143, and the LED 3144a of the back front middle right decorative substrate 3144 are emitted. By doing so, the second pattern 3136a of the second light guide plate 3136 can be luminescently decorated with an appropriate color (see FIG. 160). In the state where the second pattern 3136a is luminescent and decorated, as shown in FIG. 160, the center of the game area 5a is centered on a wide range extending from the front of the main effect display device 1600 to the rear of the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500. The radial pattern is displayed.

Further, although not shown, the back front decoration unit 3100 is obtained by simultaneously emitting and decorating the first pattern 3135a of the first light guide plate 3135 and the second pattern 3136a of the second light guide plate 3136 with the same color. The portion of the pattern 3135a and the second pattern 3136a that overlap each other in the front-rear direction emits light brighter than the other parts. Further, when the first pattern 3135a of the first light guide plate 3135 and the second pattern 3136a of the second light guide plate 3136 are simultaneously luminescent and decorated with different colors, the first pattern 3135a and the second pattern 3136a overlap each other in the front-rear direction. Lights up in a color based on additive mixing of the three primary colors of light.

In the back front decoration unit 3100, as shown in FIG. 133, the first pattern 3135a is formed (depicted) even though the first pattern 3135a is smaller than the second pattern 3136a. Since the light guide plate 3135 and the second light guide plate 3136 on which the second pattern 3136a is formed (depicted) have the same size, the case where the first light guide plate 3135 is matched to the size of the first pattern 3135a In comparison, it is possible to prevent the end edge of the first light guide plate 3135 from being visible when viewed from the front and the appearance from being deteriorated, and it is possible to improve the appearance of the first pattern 3135a and the second pattern 3136a.

Further, since the back front decoration unit 3100 has different sizes of the first pattern 3135a of the first light guide plate 3135 and the size of the second pattern 3136a of the second light guide plate 3136, different sizes of patterns are displayed. By doing so, the player can be surprised, the effect of the effect can be enhanced, and the player can be more entertained.

[5-9c. Back bottom movable production unit]
Next, the under-back movable effect unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 134 to 141. FIG. 134 (a) is a perspective view of the under-back movable effect unit of the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 134 (b) is a perspective view of the under-back movable effect unit of the back unit as viewed from behind. FIG. 135 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the under-back movable effect unit disassembled into an under-back elevating unit and an under-back decorative body unit, and FIG. 135 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the under-back movable effect unit. It is an exploded perspective view which was disassembled into a unit and a decorative body unit under the back and seen from the back. FIG. 136 is an exploded perspective view of the lower back elevating unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 137 is an exploded perspective view of the lower back elevating unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 138 is an exploded perspective view of the back lower decorative body unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 139 is an exploded perspective view of the back lower decorative body unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 140 is an exploded perspective view of the lower back left decorative unit and the lower right decorative unit viewed from the front by disassembling the lower back decorative unit, and FIG. 141 is the lower left decorative unit of the lower back decorative unit. It is an exploded perspective view of the unit and the lower right decorative body unit viewed from behind by disassembling.

The lower back movable effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the lower side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The lower back movable effect unit 3200 is a pair of a lower back elevating unit 3210 attached to the lower side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 and a pair of columns attached to the front surface of the lower back elevating unit 3210 at a distance from each other to the left and right. The elevating shaft 3201 and the shaft mounting member 3202 in which the upper end side of the pair of elevating shafts 3201 is attached to the underside elevating unit 3210, and the pair of elevating shafts 3201 are movably attached in the vertical direction. It includes a backside decorative unit 3230 that can be raised and lowered by the unit 3210. The under-back decorative unit 3230 includes a sub-effect display device 3240 capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, a pair of under-back left decorative units 3250 rotatably attached to the front side of the sub-effect display device 3240, and the back. It is equipped with a lower right decorative unit 3260.

As shown in FIGS. 136 and 137, the lower back elevating unit 3210 of the lower back movable effect unit 3200 is attached to the lower side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010, and is a flat plate-shaped unit base 3211 extending to the left and right. A pair of spur gear-shaped elevating drive motors 3212 attached to the lower left and right ends of the front surface of the unit base 3211 and a pair of spur gears attached to the rotating shafts of the pair of underside elevating drive motors 3212, respectively. A pair of spur gear-shaped transmission gears 3214, each of which is meshed with the elevating drive gear 3213 and each of the elevating drive gears 3213 and rotatably attached to the front surface of the unit base 3211, and each of the transmission gears 3214. A pair of annular rings having a gear portion 3215a and a columnar elevating pin 3215b projecting forward from the front surface of the gear portion 3215a and rotatably attached to the front surface of the unit base 3211. A pair of discs that penetrate the elevating cam member 3215 and each elevating cam member 3215 and are attached to the front surface of the unit base 3211 and rotatably attach the elevating cam member 3215 in cooperation with the unit base 3211. The rotation support member 3216 and the like.

Further, the lower back elevating unit 3210 is rotatably attached around an axis whose base end side extends in the front-rear direction at a portion outside the pair of elevating cam members 3215 on the front surface of the unit base 3211 in the left-right direction. A pair of strip-shaped elevating arms 3217 and a unit base 3211 that extend to the center side in the left-right direction from the elevating cam member 3215 and rotate so that the tip side moves up and down due to the rotation of the elevating cam member 3215. A pair of elevating detection sensors 3218, which are mounted on the front surface and detect the rotation position of each elevating arm 3217, and each elevating arm 3217 are urged so as to rotate in a direction in which the tip side moves upward. It includes a pair of elevating support springs 3219 and a lower back relay board 3220 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the unit base 3211.

The unit base 3211 of the lower back elevating unit 3210 is formed so as to be separated from each other on the left and right near the lower end of the front surface, and a pair of lower shaft mounting portions 3211a for mounting the lower end of the elevating shaft 3201 and a pair of lower shaft mounting portions 3211a. It is formed at the upper end of the unit base 3211 directly above each of the above, and includes a pair of mounting portions 3211b on the shaft for mounting the upper end of the elevating shaft 3201. The unit base 3211 includes an elevating drive motor 3212, a transmission gear 3214, an elevating cam member 3215, a rotation support member 3216, an elevating arm 3217, and an elevating detection sensor 3218 on both outer sides in the left-right direction of the portion where the pair of elevating shafts 3201 are attached. , And the elevating support spring 3219 is attached. Further, in the unit base 3211, the lower back relay board 3220 is mounted between the portions where the pair of elevating shafts 3201 are mounted.

The elevating cam member 3215 is rotatably attached around an axis extending back and forth at a position slightly upward from the center of the unit base 3211 in the vertical direction. The elevating arm 3217 is rotatably attached at a position where the base end side is substantially the same height as the rotation center of the elevating cam member 3215, and the tip extends to the vicinity of the elevating shaft 3201.

The elevating arm 3217 penetrates in the front-rear direction and extends in the longitudinal direction, and the elevating pin 3215b of the elevating cam member 3215 is slidably inserted into the elongated drive slit 3217a and the tip side of the drive slit 3217a. An elongated hole-shaped elevating slit 3217b that penetrates back and forth and extends in the longitudinal direction to the vicinity of the tip, and a detection piece 3217c that extends downward from the lower side near between the drive slit 3217a and the elevating slit 3217b. And have. An action pin 3231c in the elevating base 3231 of the lower back decorative unit 3230, which will be described later, is slidably inserted into the elevating slit 3217b of the elevating arm 3217. Further, the detection piece 3217c of the elevating arm 3217 is detected by the elevating detection sensor 3218.

The back bottom relay board 3220 includes a back bottom elevating drive motor 3212, an elevating detection sensor 3218, a back bottom middle decoration board 3233 of the back bottom decoration unit 3230, a back bottom rotation drive motor 3234, a sub effect display device 3240, and a back bottom left. The connection between the decorative substrate 3254 and the lower right decorative substrate 3264 and the effect drive substrate 3032 and the motor drive substrate 3033 is relayed.

As shown in FIGS. 138 and 139, the under-back decorative unit 3230 of the under-back movable effect unit 3200 has a slightly oblong square shape in front view and is formed in a shallow box shape with the front open. The elevating base 3231 guided by the elevating shaft 3201, the sub-effect display device 3240 arranged in the elevating base 3231 and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and the frame shape that decorates the outer periphery of the sub-effect display device 3240. A translucent under-back decorative frame 3232 and a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting and decorating the under-back decorative frame 3232 are mounted on the front surface, and are mounted behind the sub-effect display device 3240 in the elevating base 3231. It is provided with a decorative substrate 3233 under the back and underneath.

Further, the lower back decorative unit 3230 includes a lower back rotation drive motor 3234 attached so that the rotation shaft projects forward on the left side of the front view near the lower end of the rear surface of the elevating base 3231, and a lower back rotation drive. The rotation drive gear 3235 attached to the rotation shaft of the motor 3234 and the rotation drive gear 3235 rotate to rotate around the axis extending back and forth near the lower end of the elevating base 3231 to the left from the center in the left-right direction. It rotates together with the lower back left decorative unit 3250 and the lower back left decorative unit 3250 that are possibly attached, and can rotate around the axis extending back and forth near the lower end to the right from the center in the left-right direction of the elevating base 3231. It includes an attached lower back right decorative unit 3260, and a pair of rotation support springs 3236 that support the rotation of the lower back left decorative unit 3250 and the lower right decorative unit 3260.

The elevating base 3231 has a protruding portion 3231a that protrudes outward in the left-right direction from the vicinity of the lower ends of both left and right ends, and a through hole 3231b that penetrates the protruding portion 3231a vertically and into which the elevating shaft 3201 is slidably inserted. An action pin 3231c that projects from the rear surface of the projecting portion 3231a to the rear in a columnar shape and is slidably inserted into the elevating slit 3217b of the pair of elevating arms 3217 in the lower back elevating unit 3210, and below the projecting portion 3231a. A pair of shaft hole portions 3231d that are separated from each other to the left and right near the center in the left-right direction on the side and penetrate back and forth to rotatably support the lower back left decorative unit 3250 and the lower right decorative unit 3260. It has.

The pair of shaft hole portions 3231d in the elevating base 3231 are formed at symmetrical positions about the center in the left-right direction of the elevating base 3231, and each of them is a shaft portion of the left base member 3251 in the lower back left decorative body unit 3250. The 3251b and the shaft portion 3261b of the right base member 3261 in the lower back right decorative body unit 3260 are rotatably inserted.

The pair of rotation support springs 3236 has two tips of the lower back left decorative unit 3250 and the lower right decorative unit 3260 rotatably attached to the pair of shaft hole portions 3231d of the elevating base 3231. It is urged to rotate in the approaching direction.

The lower back left decorative unit 3250 of the lower back decorative unit 3230 has a left base member 3251 rotatably attached to the elevating base 3231 and a base end on the front surface of the left base member 3251, as shown in FIGS. 140 and 141. A flat plate-shaped left base 3252 that is attached to the side and extends to the left, and a back bottom that is attached to the front side of the left base 3252 and has a predetermined decoration formed in a relief shape having translucency. It includes a left decorative body 3253, and a back lower left decorative board 3254 arranged between the lower back left decorative body 3253 and the left base 3252 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The left base member 3251 of the lower back left decorative unit 3250 extends rearward from the disc-shaped main body portion 3251a and the rear surface of the main body portion 3251a, and can be rotated to the shaft hole portion 3231d on the left side of the front view of the elevating base 3231. A cylindrical shaft portion 3251b to be attached, a drive gear portion 3251c formed on the outer circumference of the main body portion 3251a and capable of meshing with the rotary drive gear 3235 of the back lower decorative body unit 3230, and a drive gear on the outer circumference of the main body portion 3251a. A transmission gear portion 3251d formed on the opposite side to the portion 3251c is provided. The drive gear portion 3251c and the transmission gear portion 3251d of the left base member 3251 are formed in an angle range of about 90 degrees on the circumference centered on the shaft portion 3251b.

The rear surface of the left base 3252 on the base end side is attached to the front surface of the main body portion 3251a of the left base member 3251. The left base 3252 is formed in a substantially J-shape in which the front view extends from the base end side to the left and then extends upward in an arc shape.

The lower back left decorative body 3253 is formed in a shape along the left base 3252, which is larger than the outer shape of the left base 3252. The lower back left decorative body 3253 has a sliding glass-like middle decorative portion 3253a extending from the base end side to the tip end side and having a textured surface of a colorless and transparent member, and the lower side and the upper side of the middle decorative portion 3253a. It is provided with a peripheral decorative portion 3253b formed in a shape imitating a flame by a red transparent member on the tip side.

A plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the lower back left decorative substrate 3254, and the inner decorative portion 3253a and the peripheral decorative portion 3253b of the lower back left decorative body 3253 can be individually luminescent and decorated.

As shown in FIGS. 140 and 141, the lower right decorative unit 3260 of the lower back decorative unit 3230 has a right base member 3261 rotatably attached to the elevating base 3231 and a base end on the front surface of the right base member 3261. A flat plate-shaped right base 3262 that is attached to the side and extends to the right, and a back bottom that is attached to the front side of the right base 3262 and has a predetermined decoration formed in a relief shape having translucency. It includes a lower right decorative body 3263, a lower back right decorative board 3264 arranged between the lower right decorative body 3263 and the right base 3262, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The right base member 3261 of the lower back right decorative unit 3260 extends rearward from the plate-shaped main body 3261a and the rear surface of the main body 3261a, and can be rotated to the shaft hole 3231d on the right side of the front view of the elevating base 3231. A cylindrical shaft portion 3261b to be attached and a driven gear portion 3261c formed on the right outer periphery of the main body portion 3261a and meshing with a transmission gear portion 3251d of the left base member 3251 in the lower back left decorative body unit 3250. I have. The driven gear portion 3261c of the right base member 3261 is formed in an angle range of about 90 degrees on the circumference centered on the shaft portion 3261d.

The rear surface of the right base 3262 on the base end side is attached to the front surface of the main body portion 3261a of the right base member 3261. The right base 3262 is formed in a substantially J-shape in which the front view extends upward from the base end side to the right and then extends upward in an arc shape.

The lower back right decorative body 3263 is formed in a shape along the right base 3262, which is larger than the outer shape of the right base 3262. The lower back right decorative body 3263 extends from the base end side to the tip end side, and has a sliding glass-like middle decorative portion 3263a on which the surface of a colorless and transparent member is textured, and the lower side and the upper side of the middle decorative portion 3263a. It is provided with a peripheral decorative portion 3263b formed in a shape imitating a flame by a red transparent member on the tip side.

A plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the lower back right decorative substrate 3264, and the inner decorative portion 3263a and the peripheral decorative portion 3263b of the lower right decorative body 3263 can be individually luminescent and decorated.

The lower back left decorative unit 3250 and the lower back right decorative unit 3260 are formed symmetrically with each other in a front view.

Subsequently, the operation of the lower back movable effect unit 3200 will be described. In the normal state of the back lower movable production unit 3200, the back lower decorative unit 3230 is the most lowered, and the back lower left decorative unit 3250 and the back lower right decorative unit 3260 have tips of each other. It is the most distant, and the entire display screen of the sub-effect display device 3240 can be visually recognized from the front. More specifically, under normal conditions, the pair of protruding portions 3231a of the elevating base 3231 in the under-back decorative unit 3230 abut from above the pair of under-shaft mounting portions 3211a of the unit base 3211 in the under-back elevating unit 3210. It is in the state (state of the descending position).

Further, in a normal state, the elevating pins 3215b of the pair of elevating cam members 3215 in the back lower elevating unit 3210 are located near the bottom dead center, and the elevating arm 3217 is slidably inserted. It is located in the drive slit 3217a near the end on the base end side (the side on which the elevating arm 3217 is rotatably attached). As a result, the pair of elevating arms 3217 in the lower back elevating unit 3210 extend obliquely so that the tips thereof are positioned downward with respect to the base end rotatably supported. In this normal state, each detection piece 3217c of the pair of elevating arms 3217 is detected by the elevating detection sensor 3218.

Further, under normal conditions, the lower back left decorative unit 3250 and the lower back right decorative unit 3260, which are rotatably attached to the pair of shaft hole portions 3231d of the elevating base 3231, are respectively from the positions of the shaft hole portions 3231d. It is in a state of extending substantially horizontally to the outside in the left-right direction (state of separation position), and the tip side of the lower back left decorative unit 3250 and the lower right decorative unit 3260 is outside the front of the sub-effect display device 3240. At the position, each is curved in an arc shape so as to extend upward. As a result, the entire display screen of the sub-effect display device 3240 is exposed forward.

In this normal state, when the rotation drive gear 3235 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front by the back rotation drive motor 3234 of the underside decoration unit 3230, it meshes with the rotation drive gear 3235. The drive gear portion 3251c of the left base member 3251 in the lower back left decorative unit 3250 causes the left base member 3251 to rotate in the front view clockwise direction around the shaft portion 3251b, and the lower back left decorative unit unit. The entire 3250 will rotate in the front-view clockwise direction around the shaft portion 3251b. When the lower back left decorative unit 3250 rotates in the clockwise direction in the front view, the driven gear portion of the right base member 3261 in the lower back right decorative unit 3260 meshing with the transmission gear portion 3251d of the left base member 3251. The 3261c causes the right base member 3261 to rotate in the front-view counterclockwise direction around the shaft portion 3261b, and the entire lower back right decorative unit 3260 in the counterclockwise direction around the shaft portion 3261b. Will rotate to.

Therefore, in a normal state, when the rotation drive gear 3235 is rotated in the front-view counterclockwise direction by the back-bottom rotation drive motor 3234, the back-bottom left decorative unit 3250 rotates in the front-view clockwise direction. At the same time, the lower right decorative unit 3260 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front. That is, the lower back left decorative unit 3250 and the lower right decorative unit 3260 rotate so that their tip sides move upward, and the tips of each other come close to each other. Then, when the tips of the lower back left decorative unit 3250 and the lower right decorative unit 3260 come into contact with each other (or come as close as possible), the rotational drive of the lower back rotation drive motor 3234 is stopped.

When the tips of the lower back left decorative unit 3250 and the lower right decorative unit 3260 are in contact with each other (close position), the left and right parts of the display screen of the sub-effect display device 3240 are on the back. It is covered by the lower left decorative unit 3250 and the lower right decorative unit 3260, and only the central part of the sub-effect display device 3240 is between the lower left decorative unit 3250 and the lower right decorative unit 3260. It becomes visible from the front (see FIG. 148 and the like). In a state where the tips of the lower back left decorative unit 3250 and the lower right decorative unit 3260 are in contact with each other (in an approaching position), the lower back left decorative unit 3250 and the lower right decorative unit 3260 are formed. The outer shape of one decoration to be made is approximately a heart shape.

With the back bottom left decoration unit 3250 and the back bottom right decoration unit 3260 in close positions, the back bottom left decoration board 3254 and the back bottom right decoration board 3264 make the back bottom left decoration body 3253 and the back bottom right decoration body 3253 and the back bottom right decoration body. The heart-shaped luminescent decoration can be shown to the player by displaying the entire 3263 in red and displaying the red image (heart-complementary decorative image) on the display screen of the sub-effect display device 3240. (See FIG. 162).

On the other hand, the lower back left decorative substrate 3254 and the lower back right decorative substrate 3264 emit light of the intermediate decorative portion 3253a of the lower back left decorative body 3253 and the intermediate decorative portion 3263a of the lower right decorative body 3263 in a predetermined color (for example, white). In addition to decorating, the sub-effect display device 3240 displays an effect image (V-complementary decorative image) that is the same color as the intermediate decoration unit 3253a and the intermediate decoration unit 3263a and is continuous with them, thereby producing a small V-shaped light emitting decoration. It can be shown to the player (see FIG. 163).

Further, in the normal state, the under-back movable effect unit 3200 uses a pair of under-back elevating drive motors 3212 in the under-back elevating unit 3210 to move the left elevating cam member 3215 counterclockwise through the transmission gear 3214. When the elevating cam member 3215 on the right side is rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view while rotating in the direction, the elevating pin 3215b of each elevating cam member 3215 revolves in the direction in which each elevating cam member 3215 rotates. .. When each of the elevating pins 3215b revolves, the elevating pin 3215b slides in the drive slit 3217a of the elevating arm 3217 which is slidably inserted toward the tip side and above the elevating pin 3215b which revolves. The drive slit 3217a is pushed upward by moving to.

Since the base end side of each of the left and right elevating arms 3217 is rotatably attached to the outside of the elevating cam member 3215 in the left-right direction, the elevating and lowering of the left side is caused by the revolution of the elevating pin 3215b of the left and right elevating cam members 3215. The arm 3217 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in the front view, and the elevating arm 3217 on the right side rotates in the clockwise direction in the front view, and the tip end side of each elevating arm 3217 moves upward. Then, since the action pin 3231c of the elevating base 3231 in the back lower decorative body unit 3230 is slidably inserted into the elevating slit 3217b formed on the tip side of each elevating arm 3217, the elevating arm 3217 By rotating so that the tip side moves upward, the lower back decorative unit 3230 moves upward via the action pin 3231c.

In this way, from the normal state, the left and right elevating cam members 3215 are rotated in opposite directions by the pair of under-back elevating drive motors 3212, so that the under-back decorative unit is provided via the left and right elevating arms 3217. The 3230 can be moved upwards. Then, when the elevating pin 3215b of each elevating cam member 3215 revolves with respect to the revolving locus of the elevating pin 3215b to the upper contact point (top dead center) in contact with the central axis of the drive slit 3217a in the elevating arm 3217, the back bottom The decorative unit 3230 is in the most elevated state. After that, when each of the elevating pins 3215b revolves further and comes into contact with the end portion of the drive slit 3217a on the base end side, the underside elevating drive motor 3212 stops and the revolving of the elevating pin 3215b also stops. As a result, the lower back decorative unit 3230 is in the state of the ascending position moved upward from the descending position (see FIG. 149 and the like).

In this ascending position, when a load from the lower back decorative unit 3230 that moves the tip end side of the elevating arm 3217 downward acts on the elevating pin 3215b via the drive slit 3217a, the elevating pin 3215b moves downward. The elevating pins 3215b of the left and right elevating cam members 3215 are in contact with the end portion of the elevating arm 3217 on the base end side beyond the top dead center. Therefore, the elevating pin 3215b cannot revolve any more and is held (locked) in the ascending position. As a result, the load of the lower back decorative body unit 3230 does not act on the lower back elevating drive motor 3212 via the elevating cam member 3215, and the load is not applied to the lower back elevating drive motor 3212.

The lower back movable effect unit 3200 moves the lower back left decorative unit 3250 and the lower right decorative unit 3260 between the separated position and the approaching position even when the lower back decorative unit 3230 is moved to the ascending position. It can be rotated with the above-mentioned light emitting decoration as described above.

[5-9d. Back left movable production unit]
Next, the back left movable effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 142 to 146. FIG. 142 (a) is a perspective view of the back left movable effect unit and the back right movable effect unit of the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 142 (b) shows the back left movable effect unit and the back right movable effect unit of the back unit behind. It is a perspective view seen from. FIG. 143 is an exploded perspective view of the back left movable effect unit and the back right movable effect unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 144 shows the back left movable effect unit and the back right movable effect unit mainly. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled each member and looked at from the back. Further, FIG. 145 is an exploded perspective view of the back left decorative body unit of the back left movable effect unit and the back right decorative body unit of the back right movable effect unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 146 is a back left movable effect unit. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the back right decorative body unit of the back left decorative body unit and the back right movable production unit, and looked at from the back.

The back left movable effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the upper side of the opening 3010a on the left side in the front view from the center in the left-right direction in the back box 3010. The back left movable effect unit 3300 is attached to the left side of the center of the upper part of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 in the left-right direction and extends to the left and right, and the left unit base 3301 is on the left side of the front upper part of the left unit base 3301. The slide rail unit 3302 which is attached and can be expanded and contracted in the left-right direction, the back left decorative unit 3350 whose upper part is attached to the front surface of the slide rail unit 3302, and the upper front surface of the back left decorative unit 3350 so as to cover the upper front surface. It includes a left unit cover 3303 attached to the front side of the left unit base 3301.

The left unit cover 3303 has a guide slit 3303a that extends horizontally from the vicinity of the left end of the left unit cover 3303 to the right and then extends diagonally to the lower right in the front and rear on the left side of the front view at the lower part. In the guide slit 3303a of the left unit cover 3303, the guide pin 3353b of the decorative body base 3353 in the back left decorative body unit 3350 is slidably inserted.

Further, the back left movable effect unit 3300 is attached to the upper right corner of the front view on the front surface of the left unit cover 3303, and the back left drive motor 3304 whose rotation axis protrudes between the left unit base 3301 and the left unit cover 3303. A spur gear-shaped drive gear 3305 attached to the rotating shaft of the back left drive motor 3304, a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3306 meshing with the drive gear 3305 from below, and a first transmission gear. A spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 3307 that meshes with the 3306 from slightly below the left side of the front view, and a spur gear-shaped third transmission gear 3308 that meshes with the second transmission gear 3307 from slightly below the left side of the front view. The fourth transmission gear 3309 meshes with the third transmission gear 3308 from the left side of the front view at the same height as the second transmission gear 3307, and the first transmission gear 3306 and the fourth transmission gear 3309 engage with the fourth transmission gear 3309 from the left side of the front view. A fifth transmission gear 3310, which meshes with the second transmission gear 3307 at a height, is provided. The rack gear 3351a of the rack member 3351 in the back left decorative body unit 3350 meshes with the fifth transmission gear 3310 from the upper side.

Further, the back left movable effect unit 3300 is separated from the back left relay board 3311 attached to the left side of the front view on the front upper side of the left unit cover 3303 and the back left relay board 3311 to the left and right. A pair of first movement detection sensors 3312 and second movement detection sensors 3313 (see FIG. 144) that are attached and detect the movement of the back left decorative unit 3350 in the left-right direction, and the lower front portion of the left unit cover 3303. A cable cover 3314 that is attached near the left end of the front view and holds a flat cable (not shown) that connects the back left relay board 3311 and the back left decorative board 3355 of the back left decorative unit 3350. It has. The back left relay board 3311 includes a back left drive motor 3304, a first movement detection sensor 3312, a second movement detection sensor 3313, a back left decorative board 3355 of the back left decorative unit 3350, an effect drive board 3032, and a motor drive board. The connection with 3033 is relayed.

As shown in FIGS. 145 and 146, the back left decorative body unit 3350 of the back left movable effect unit 3300 is formed in a quadrangle having a front view extending to the left and right, and is attached to the front surface of the slide rail unit 3302. The rack member 3351, the flat plate-shaped slide base 3352 having an upper portion attached to the front surface of the rack member 3351 and extending vertically, and the slide base 3352 being rotatably attached around an axis extending back and forth on the front side. A flat plate-shaped decorative base 3353 that extends vertically, a translucent back left decorative body 3354 that is attached to the front of the decorative base 3353 and forms a three-dimensional decoration, and a back left decoration. It is attached between the body 3354 and the decorative body base 3353 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side of the back left decorative board 3355, and is attached between the back left decorative board 3355 and the back left decorative body 3354. It includes a partition member 3356 and a diffuser lens member 3357 attached to the front surface of the partition member 3356.

The rack member 3351 extends to the left and right on the lower surface and meshes with the fifth transmission gear 3310, and the rack gear 3351a protrudes forward in a flat plate shape from the vicinity of the left end of the front view to the front, and the first movement detection sensor 3312 and the second movement detection. It includes a detection piece 3351b detected by the sensor 3313. The detection piece 3351b penetrates the slide base 3352 and projects forward.

The slide base 3352 is formed of a metal plate and has a mounting shaft 3352a that projects forward in a columnar shape in the lower right corner of the front view. The decorative base 3353 is rotatably attached to the attachment shaft 3352a of the slide base 3352.

The decorative body base 3353 is formed in a substantially quadrangular shape having a front view shape that extends vertically longer than the vertical dimension of the opening 3010a of the back box 3010. The decorative base 3353 penetrates back and forth from the upper end near the right end of the front view at a position of about 1/5 of the total height, and the mounting shaft 3352a of the slide base 3352 is inserted into the mounting shaft hole 3353a so as to be relatively rotatable. A guide pin 3353b that protrudes forward from the upper left corner of the front view and is slidably inserted into the guide slit 3303a of the left unit cover 3303, and a flat plate shape at the lower end of the back box 3010. The guide piece 3353c is slidably inserted into the guide groove 3010f of the above. The decorative body base 3353 can rotate around an axis extending back and forth around the mounting shaft 3352a by attaching the mounting shaft 3352a of the slide base 3352 to the mounting shaft hole 3353a via a pair of bushes 3358. can.

The back left decorative body 3354 is attached to a portion of the front surface of the decorative body base 3353 between the mounting shaft hole 3353a and the guide piece 3353c, and has substantially the same height as the vertical dimension of the opening 3010a of the back box 3010. Is formed in. The back left decorative body 3354 includes a middle decorative portion 3354a extending vertically with a predetermined width in the center in the left-right direction, and peripheral decorative portions 3354b formed on both left and right sides of the middle decorative portion 3354a. The intermediate decoration portion 3354a is formed in a sliding glass shape in which the surface of a colorless and transparent member is textured. The peripheral decoration portion 3354b is formed in a shape imitating a flame by a red transparent member. The back left decorative body 3354 is formed so as to be continuous with the decoration of the back front upper left decorative body 3112.

The back left decorative substrate 3355 is formed in a size corresponding to the back left decorative body 3354, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted at positions behind the middle decorative portion 3354a and the peripheral decorative portion 3354b. The back left decorative substrate 3355 emits light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface to appropriately illuminate the entire back left decorative body 3354 with a predetermined color, or to illuminate the middle decorative portion 3354a and the peripheral decorative portion 3354b. It can be decorated with light emission separately.

The partition member 3356 is formed of a translucent white member so as to correspond to the intermediate decorative portion 3354a in the back left decorative body 3354. The partition member 3356 is formed with a plurality of through holes so that the LED of the back left decorative substrate 3355 faces forward. The diffuser lens member 3357 is formed of a transparent member. Further, the diffuser lens member 3357 has a plurality of minute lenses formed on the front surface, and diffuses the light from the LED facing forward from the plurality of through holes of the partition member 3356 on the back left decorative substrate 3355 to diffuse the light from the back left. The inner decorative portion 3354a of the decorative body 3354 can be irradiated from the rear side.

Subsequently, the operation of the back left movable effect unit 3300 will be described. In the normal state, the back left movable effect unit 3300 is in a state in which the back left decorative unit 3350 is located on the leftmost side (retracted position) in the front view (see FIG. 118 and the like). In this normal state, the back left decorative unit 3350 (back left decorative 3354) is vertically extended, and the guide pin 3353b of the decorative base 3353 is in front of the guide slit 3303a in the left unit cover 3303. It is located at the left end of the view.

Further, in a normal state, the rack gears 3351a extending to the left and right of the rack member 3351 in the back left decorative unit 3350 mesh with the fifth transmission gear 3310 near the right end in the front view. Further, in a normal state, the detection piece 3351b of the rack member 3351 is detected by the first movement detection sensor 3312 on the left side of the front view attached to the back left relay board 3311.

In this normal state, the back left drive motor 3304 causes the fifth transmission gear 3310 via the drive gear 3305, the first transmission gear 3306, the second transmission gear 3307, the third transmission gear 3308, and the fourth transmission gear 3309. When rotationally driven in the clockwise direction in the front view, the rack gear 3351a meshing with the fifth transmission gear 3310 causes the rack member 3351 to move to the right in the front view, and at the same time, the slide rail unit 3302 extends to the right. It becomes. When the rack member 3351 moves to the right in the front view, the slide base 3352 attached to the rack member 3351 moves together to the right in the front view and is attached to the mounting shaft 3352a of the slide base 3352. The back left decorative body 3354 moves to the right in the front view via the decorative body base 3353. That is, the movement of the rack member 3351 to the right in the front view causes the entire back left decorative unit 3350 to move to the right in the front view.

Then, as the back left decorative unit 3350 moves to the right in the front view, the guide pin 3353b of the decorative body base 3353 slides in the guide slit 3303a of the left unit cover 3303 to the right in the front view. Become. When the back left decorative body unit 3350 moves from the retracted position, which is the moving end to the left in the front view, to the right in the front view, the guide pin 3353b of the decorative body base 3353 extends horizontally in the guide slit 3303a. Since the height relationship between the mounting shaft 3352a and the guide pin 3353b does not change, the decorative body base 3353 (back left decorative body 3354) moves to the right in the front view while maintaining a vertically extended posture. It will be. The movement of the decorative body base 3353 to the right in the front view while being vertically extended is continued until the guide pin 3353b reaches the right end of the front view (first appearance position) of the horizontally extending portion in the guide slit 3303a. .. In the back left movable effect unit 3300, when the guide pin 3353b reaches the right end of the front view of the horizontally extending portion of the guide slit 3303a, the rotational drive of the back left drive motor 3304 can be stopped (see FIG. 151). ).

The back left decorative unit 3350 moves from the retracted position to the right in the front view, and the guide pin 3353b of the decorative base 3353 goes diagonally to the lower right beyond the right end in the front view of the horizontally extending portion of the guide slit 3303a. When it reaches the extending portion, the guide pin 3353b is guided downward by the portion extending diagonally to the lower right of the guide slit 3303a and moves downward. When the guide pin 3353b is guided downward by the guide slit 3303a, the decorative base 3353 rotates around the mounting shaft 3352a (mounting shaft hole 3353a) in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the guide pin The decorative body base 3353 (back left decorative body 3354) is tilted by the amount that the 3353b is moved downward.

Then, the back left decorative unit 3350 moves to the right in the front view, and the detection piece 3351b of the rack member 3351 is detected by the second movement detection sensor 3313 on the right side in the front view attached to the back left relay board 3311. Then, the rotational drive of the back left drive motor 3304 is stopped, and the movement of the back left decorative unit 3350 to the right in the front view is stopped. In the state where the back left decorative unit 3350 is moved most to the right in the front view (second appearance position), the guide pin 3353b of the decorative base 3353 is the front end of the guide slit 3303a in the left unit cover 3303. It is located at the right end of the view, and the decorative body base 3353 (back left decorative body 3354) is in a state of being most rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the front view and tilted diagonally (see FIG. 152 and the like).

In the state where the back left decorative body 3354 of the back left decorative body unit 3350 is most tilted (the state of the second appearance position), the tilt of the middle decorative portion 3354a of the back left decorative body 3354 is inside the back front upper left decorative body 3112. The inclination of the inner decorative portion 3253a of the lower back left decorative body 3253 when the decorative portion 3112a and the lower back left decorative body unit 3250 are in the approaching position is substantially the same. Therefore, the back left decorative body 3354 at the time of the second appearance position can form a continuous decoration with the back front upper left decorative body 3112 and the back lower left decorative body 3253 at the time of the approaching position. (See FIG. 153 and the like).

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the back left decorative unit 3350 can be moved further to the right in the front view from the second appearance position, and the guide slit 3303a of the left unit cover 3303 is viewed in the front view. It may be in the form of extending horizontally from the lower end extending to the lower right to the right in the front view. As a result, when the back left decorative unit 3350 is further moved to the right in the front view from the second appearance position, the decorative base 3353 (back left decorative 3354) remains tilted without changing its inclination. In this state, it can be moved to the third appearance position on the right side of the front view (see FIG. 154).

The back-left movable effect unit 3300 appropriately emits a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back-left decorative substrate 3355 regardless of the moving position of the back-left decorative unit 3350, thereby causing the entire back-left decorative body 3354 to be predetermined. The interior decoration portion 3354a and the peripheral decoration portion 3354b of the back left decorative body 3354 can be light-emitting decorated with a color (for example, red).

[5-9e. Back right movable production unit]
Next, the back right movable effect unit 3400 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 142 to 146. The back right movable effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the upper side of the opening 3010a on the right side in the front view from the center in the left-right direction in the back box 3010. The back right movable effect unit 3400 is attached to the left side of the center of the upper part of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 in the left-right direction and extends to the left and right, and on the right side of the front upper part of the right unit base 3401. The slide rail unit 3402 which is attached and can be expanded and contracted in the left-right direction, the back right decorative unit 3450 whose upper part is attached to the front surface of the slide rail unit 3402, and the upper front surface of the back right decorative unit 3450 so as to cover the upper front surface. It includes a right unit cover 3403 that is attached to the front side of the right unit base 3401.

The right unit cover 3403 has a guide slit 3403a that extends horizontally from the vicinity of the right end of the right unit cover 3403 to the left and then extends diagonally to the lower left in the front-rear direction on the right side of the front view at the lower part. In the guide slit 3403a of the right unit cover 3403, the guide pin 3453b of the decorative body base 3453 in the back right decorative body unit 3450 is slidably inserted.

Further, the back right movable effect unit 3400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front view on the front surface of the right unit cover 3403, and the back right drive motor 3404 having a rotating shaft protruding between the right unit base 3401 and the right unit cover 3403. A spur gear-shaped drive gear 3405 attached to the rotating shaft of the back right drive motor 3404, a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3406 meshing with the drive gear 3405 from below, and a first transmission gear. A spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 3407 that meshes with 3406 from slightly below the right side of the front view, and a spur gear-shaped third transmission gear 3408 that meshes with the second transmission gear 3407 from slightly below the right side of the front view. The fourth transmission gear 3409 meshes with the third transmission gear 3408 from the right side of the front view at the same height as the second transmission gear 3407, and the first transmission gear 3406 and the fourth transmission gear 3409 from the right side of the front view with the fourth transmission gear 3409. It includes a fifth transmission gear 3410, which meshes with the second transmission gear 3407 at a height. The fifth transmission gear 3410 is meshed with the rack gear 3451a of the rack member 3451 in the back right decorative body unit 3450 from the upper side.

Further, the back right movable effect unit 3400 is separated from the back right relay board 3411 attached to the right side of the front view on the front upper side of the right unit cover 3403 and the back right relay board 3411 to the left and right. A pair of first movement detection sensors 3412 and second movement detection sensors 3413 (see FIG. 144) that are attached and detect the movement of the back right decorative unit 3450 in the left-right direction, and the lower front portion of the right unit cover 3403. A cable cover 3414 that is attached near the right end of the front view and holds a flat cable (not shown) that connects the back right relay board 3411 and the back right decorative board 3455 of the back right decorative unit 3450. It has. The back right relay board 3411 includes a back right drive motor 3404, a first movement detection sensor 3412, a second movement detection sensor 3413, a back right decorative board 3455 of the back right decorative unit 3450, an effect drive board 3032, and a motor drive board. The connection with 3033 is relayed.

As shown in FIGS. 145 and 146, the back right decorative body unit 3450 of the back right movable effect unit 3400 is formed in a quadrangle having a front view extending to the left and right, and is attached to the front surface of the slide rail unit 3402. The rack member 3451, the flat plate-shaped slide base 3452 having an upper portion attached to the front surface of the rack member 3451 and extending vertically, and the slide base 3452 being rotatably attached around an axis extending back and forth on the front side. A flat plate-shaped decorative base 3453 extending vertically, a translucent back right decorative body 3454 attached to the front surface of the decorative base 3453 to form a three-dimensional decoration, and a back right decoration. It is mounted between the body 3454 and the decorative base 3453 and has multiple LEDs mounted on the front of the back right decorative board 3455, and between the back right decorative board 3455 and the back right decorative body 3454. It includes a partition member 3456 and a diffuser lens member 3457 attached to the front surface of the partition member 3456.

The rack member 3451 extends to the left and right on the lower surface and meshes with the fifth transmission gear 3410, and the rack gear 3451a protrudes forward in a flat plate shape from the vicinity of the right end of the front view to the front, and the first movement detection sensor 3412 and the second movement detection. It includes a detection piece 3451b detected by the sensor 3413. The detection piece 3451b penetrates the slide base 3452 and projects forward.

The slide base 3452 is formed of a metal plate and has a mounting shaft 3452a that projects forward in a columnar shape in the lower left corner of the front view. The decorative base 3453 is rotatably attached to the attachment shaft 3452a of the slide base 3452.

The decorative body base 3453 has a front view shape formed into a substantially quadrangle extending vertically longer than the vertical dimension of the opening 3010a of the back box 3010. The decorative base 3453 penetrates back and forth from the upper end near the left end of the front view at a position of about 1/5 of the total height, and the mounting shaft 3452a of the slide base 3452 is inserted into the mounting shaft hole 3453a so as to be relatively rotatable. The guide pin 3453b, which protrudes forward from the upper right corner of the front view and is slidably inserted into the guide slit 3403a of the right unit cover 3403, and the back box 3010 which is formed in a flat plate shape at the lower end. The guide piece 3453c is slidably inserted into the guide groove 3010f of the above. The decorative body base 3453 can rotate around an axis extending back and forth around the mounting shaft 3452a by attaching the mounting shaft 3452a of the slide base 3452 to the mounting shaft hole 3453a via a pair of bushes 3458. can.

The back right decorative body 3454 is attached to a portion of the front surface of the decorative body base 3453 between the mounting shaft hole 3453a and the guide piece 3453c, and has substantially the same height as the vertical dimension of the opening 3010a of the back box 3010. Is formed in. The back right decorative body 3454 includes a middle decorative portion 3454a extending vertically with a predetermined width in the center in the left-right direction, and peripheral decorative portions 3454b formed on both left and right sides of the middle decorative portion 3454a. The intermediate decoration portion 3454a is formed in a sliding glass shape in which the surface of a colorless and transparent member is textured. The peripheral decoration portion 3454b is formed in a shape imitating a flame by a red transparent member. The back right decorative body 3454 is formed so as to be continuous with the decoration of the back front upper right decorative body 3113.

The back right decorative substrate 3455 is formed in a size corresponding to the back right decorative body 3454, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted at positions behind the middle decorative portion 3454a and the peripheral decorative portion 3454b. The back right decorative substrate 3455 emits light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface to appropriately illuminate the entire back right decorative body 3454 with a predetermined color, or to illuminate the middle decorative portion 3454a and the peripheral decorative portion 3454b. It can be decorated with light emission separately.

The partition member 3456 is formed of a translucent white member so as to correspond to the intermediate decorative portion 3454a in the back right decorative body 3454. The partition member 3456 is formed with a plurality of through holes so that the LED of the back right decorative substrate 345 faces forward. The diffuser lens member 3457 is formed of a transparent member. Further, the diffuser lens member 3457 has a plurality of minute lenses formed on the front surface, and diffuses the light from the LED facing forward from the plurality of through holes of the partition member 3456 on the back right decorative substrate 3455 to diffuse the light from the back right. The inner decorative portion 3454a of the decorative body 3454 can be irradiated from the rear side.

Subsequently, the operation of the back right movable effect unit 3400 will be described. In the normal state, the back right movable effect unit 3400 is in a state in which the back right decorative unit 3450 is located on the rightmost side (retracted position) in the front view (see FIG. 118 and the like). In this normal state, the back right decorative unit 3450 (back right decorative body 3454) is vertically extended, and the guide pin 3453b of the decorative body base 3453 is in front of the guide slit 3403a in the right unit cover 3403. It is located at the right end of the view.

Further, in a normal state, the rack gears 3451a extending to the left and right of the rack member 3451 in the back right decorative body unit 3450 mesh with the fifth transmission gear 3410 near the left end in the front view. Further, in a normal state, the detection piece 3451b of the rack member 3451 is detected by the first movement detection sensor 3412 on the right side of the front view attached to the back right relay board 3411.

In this normal state, the back right drive motor 3404 causes the fifth transmission gear 3410 via the drive gear 3405, the first transmission gear 3406, the second transmission gear 3407, the third transmission gear 3408, and the fourth transmission gear 3409. When rotationally driven in the counterclockwise direction in the front view, the rack gear 3451a meshing with the fifth transmission gear 3410 moves the rack member 3451 to the left in the front view, and at the same time, the slide rail unit 3402 extends to the left. It will be. When the rack member 3451 moves to the left in the front view, the slide base 3452 attached to the rack member 3451 moves together to the left in the front view and is attached to the mounting shaft 3452a of the slide base 3452. The back right decorative body 3454 moves to the left in the front view via the decorative body base 3453. That is, when the rack member 3451 moves to the left in the front view, the entire back right decorative body unit 3450 moves to the left in the front view.

Then, as the back right decorative unit 3450 moves to the left in the front view, the guide pin 3453b of the decorative base 3453 slides to the left in the front view in the guide slit 3403a of the right unit cover 3403. Become. When the back right decorative unit 3450 moves from the retracted position, which is the moving end to the right in the front view, to the left in the front view, the guide pin 3453b of the decorative body base 3453 extends horizontally in the guide slit 3403a. Since the height relationship between the mounting shaft 3452a and the guide pin 3453b does not change, the decorative body base 3453 (back right decorative body 3454) moves to the left in the front view while maintaining a vertically extended posture. It will be. The movement of the decorative body base 3453 to the left in the front view while being vertically extended is continued until the guide pin 3453b reaches the left end of the front view (first appearance position) of the horizontally extending portion in the guide slit 3403a. .. In the back right movable effect unit 3400, when the guide pin 3453b reaches the left end of the front view of the horizontally extending portion of the guide slit 3403a, the rotational drive of the back right drive motor 3404 can be stopped (see FIG. 151). ).

The back right decorative unit 3450 moves from the retracted position to the left in the front view, and the guide pin 3453b of the decorative base 3453 extends diagonally to the lower left beyond the left end in the front view of the horizontally extending portion of the guide slit 3403a. When the guide pin 3453b reaches the portion, the guide pin 3453b is guided downward by the portion extending diagonally to the lower left of the guide slit 3403a and moves downward. When the guide pin 3453b is guided downward by the guide slit 3403a, the decorative base 3453 rotates about the mounting shaft 3452a (mounting shaft hole 3453a) in the front view clockwise direction, and the guide pin 3453b The decorative body base 3453 (back right decorative body 3454) is tilted by the amount that is moved downward.

Then, the back right decorative unit 3450 moves to the left in the front view, and the detection piece 3451b of the rack member 3451 is detected by the second movement detection sensor 3413 on the left side in the front view attached to the back right relay board 3411. Then, the rotational drive of the back right drive motor 3404 is stopped, and the movement of the back right decorative unit 3450 to the left in the front view is stopped. In the state where the back right decorative unit 3450 is moved to the leftmost in the front view (second appearance position), the guide pin 3453b of the decorative base 3453 is the front surface which is the lower end of the guide slit 3403a in the right unit cover 3403. It is located at the left end of the view, and the decorative body base 3453 (back right decorative body 3454) is in a state of being most rotated clockwise in the front view and tilted diagonally (see FIG. 152 and the like).

In the state where the back right decorative body 3454 of the back right decorative body unit 3450 is most tilted (the state of the second appearance position), the tilt of the middle decorative portion 3454a of the back right decorative body 3454 is inside the back front upper right decorative body 3113. The inclination of the inner decorative portion 3263a of the lower back right decorative body 3263 when the decorative portion 3113a and the lower back right decorative body unit 3260 are in the approaching position is substantially the same. Therefore, the back right decorative body 3454 at the time of the second appearance position can form a continuous decoration with the back front upper right decorative body 3113 and the back lower right decorative body 3263 at the time of the approaching position. (See FIG. 153 and the like).

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the back right decorative unit 3450 can be moved further to the left in the front view from the second appearance position, and the guide slit 3403a of the right unit cover 3403 is viewed in the front view. It may be in the form of extending horizontally from the lower end extending to the lower left to the left in the front view. As a result, when the back right decorative unit 3450 is further moved to the left in the front view from the second appearance position, the decorative base 3453 (back right decorative 3454) remains tilted without changing its inclination. In this state, it can be moved to the third appearance position on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 154).

The back-right movable effect unit 3400 appropriately emits a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back-right decorative substrate 3455 regardless of the moving position of the back-right decorative unit 3450, thereby causing the entire back-right decorative body 3454 to be predetermined. The interior decoration portion 3454a and the peripheral decoration portion 3454b of the back right decorative body 3454 can be light-emitting decorated with a color (for example, red).

[5-9f. Movable production unit in the back]
Next, the back-middle movable effect unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 147. FIG. 147 (a) is a perspective view of the back-inside movable effect unit of the back unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 147 (b) is a perspective view of the back-inside movable effect unit of the back unit as viewed from the back. The back middle movable effect unit 3500 is attached between the back front decoration unit 3100, the back left movable effect unit 3300, and the back right movable effect unit 3400 in the back box 3010 so as to surround the upper side and the left and right sides of the opening 3010a. Has been done.

The back middle movable production unit 3500 has a gate-shaped unit base 3501 formed in a U shape with the lower part open, and a back middle left decorative unit unit arranged on the left side of the front view in front of the upper part of the unit base 3501. The back middle right decorative unit 3520, which is rotatably connected to the 3510 on the right end side of the back middle left decorative unit 3510 and is arranged on the right side of the front view in front of the upper part of the unit base 3501, and the back middle left decorative unit 3510. The back center decorative body unit 3530, which is attached to the portion where the body unit 3510 and the back middle right decorative unit 3520 are connected so as to be relatively rotatable, and the back middle center decorative unit 3530, which is attached to the left side in the left-right direction in the upper part of the front surface of the unit base 3501. The back middle left elevating drive mechanism 3540 that raises and lowers the back middle left decorative body unit 3510, and the back middle right elevating drive that is attached to the right side in the left-right direction at the upper front of the unit base 3501 and raises and lowers the back middle right decorative body unit 3520. It is equipped with a mechanism 3550.

Further, the back middle movable effect unit 3500 is a pair of back middle left side decorative unit units rotatably attached around an axis extending left and right apart from each other in the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction in the upper part of the unit base 3501. The back that is attached to the lower left corner of the front of the 3560 and the back middle right side decorative unit 3570 and the unit base 3501 and rotates the back middle left side decorative unit 3560 (and the back middle right side decorative unit 3570). It is provided with a middle side decorative body rotation drive mechanism 3580.

The back middle left decorative body unit 3510 of the back middle movable production unit 3500 has a translucent back middle left decorative body 3511 in which the decoration of a predetermined character (here, the character "K") is formed in a relief shape. And, a flat plate-shaped left decorative body base 3512 attached to the rear side of the back middle left decorative body 3511, and a plurality of flat left decorative body bases 3512 mounted between the left decorative body base 3512 and the back middle left decorative body 3511. It is equipped with a back middle left decorative board (not shown) on which LEDs are mounted.

The left decorative body base 3512 has an elevating slit 3512a into which the elevating pin 3546a of the left elevating arm 3546 in the back center left elevating drive mechanism 3540 is slidably inserted, and a rear center left elevating drive mechanism protruding rearward in a columnar shape. A mounting shaft (not shown) to which the tip of the left link arm 3547 of the 3540 is mounted so as to be relatively rotatable, a disk-shaped rear support portion 3512b extending rearward of the back center decorative unit 3530, and rear support. A connecting tubular shaft portion (not shown) that protrudes in an annular shape on the front surface of the portion and is rotatably inserted into a connecting piece (not shown) of the right decorative body base 3522 in the back center right decorative unit 3520. There is. A center decoration unit 3530 in the back is attached to the rear support portion 3512b of the left decoration base 3512.

The back middle right decorative body unit 3520 includes a back middle right decorative body 3521 having a translucent back middle right decorative body 3521 in which a decoration of a predetermined character (here, the letter "F") is formed in a relief shape, and a back middle right decorative body. A flat plate-shaped right decorative base 3522 attached to the rear side of the 3521, a right decorative base 3522, and a back middle right decorative 3521 mounted on the front with a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back. It is equipped with a middle right decorative substrate (not shown).

The right decorative body base 3522 has an elevating slit 3522a into which an elevating pin 3556a of the right elevating arm 3556 in the back center right elevating drive mechanism 3550 is slidably inserted, and a rear center right elevating drive mechanism protruding rearward in a columnar shape. A mounting shaft (not shown) to which the tip of the right link arm 3557 of the 3550 is mounted so as to be relatively rotatable, and a rear support portion 3512b of the left decorative base 3512 behind the center decorative unit 3530 in the back. It is provided with an annular connecting piece (not shown) into which the connecting cylinder shaft portion of the left decorative body base 3512 is rotatably inserted.

The back middle center decorative unit 3530 is arranged in front of the rear support portion 3512b in the left decorative base 3512 of the back middle left decorative unit 3510, and is decorated with a predetermined letter (here, the letter "O"). A disc-shaped back center decorative body 3531 formed in a relief shape and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side of the rear support portion 3512b on the rear side of the back center central decoration body 3531. Is mounted on the back center decorative substrate (not shown), and the rear center decorative body 3531 penetrates the rear support portion 3512b from the center of the rear surface and extends rearward in a columnar shape to the rear support portion 3512b. A shaft member (not shown) that is rotatably attached, a spur gear-shaped driven gear (not shown) that is attached to the rear end of the shaft member, and a back that is attached to the rear side of the rear support portion 3512b. It includes a center center drive motor (not shown) and a spur gear-shaped drive gear (not shown) that is attached to the rotating shaft of the back center drive motor and meshes with a driven gear.

The back center decoration body 3531 of the back center center decoration unit 3530 can be rotated around an axis extending back and forth around the disk-shaped center by a back center center drive motor (not shown). Further, the back middle center decorative body 3531 is formed with a sub decorative portion 3531a capable of forming a part of the characters of the back middle left decorative body 3511.

The back middle left elevating drive mechanism 3540 is attached to the upper left corner of the front view of the front of the unit base 3501, and the back middle left drive motor 3541 whose rotating shaft penetrates the unit base 3501 and protrudes rearward, and the back middle left. The spur gear-shaped left drive gear 3542 attached to the rotation shaft of the drive motor 3541, the large-diameter first gear portion that meshes with the left drive gear 3542 from the right side when viewed from the front, and the first gear portion rotate integrally. The speed change gear member 3543, which has a small diameter second gear part and is rotatably attached to the rear side of the unit base 3501, meshes with the second gear part of the speed change gear member 3543 from the right side when viewed from the front. The unit is from a position different from the spur gear-shaped transmission gear 3544 rotatably attached to the rear side of the cage unit base 3501, the gear portion 3545a meshing with the transmission gear 3544 from the right side when viewed from the front, and the gear portion 3545a. It has a columnar drive pin 3545b that penetrates the base 3501 and projects forward, and includes a left crank member 3545 that is rotatably attached to the rear side of the unit base 3501.

The drive pin 3545b of the left crank member 3545 projects forward through an arcuate slit formed in the unit base 3501.

Further, the back middle left elevating drive mechanism 3540 can rotate around an axis in which the base end extending in a rod shape at a position slightly to the left from the center in the left-right direction in the front view near the upper end of the upper front surface of the unit base 3501 extends back and forth. A long hole-shaped drive slit that extends from the vicinity of the base end toward the tip side and penetrates back and forth, and the drive pin 3545b of the left crank member 3545 is slidably inserted, on the tip side. An elevating pin that protrudes forward in a columnar shape and is slidably inserted into the elevating slit 3512a in the left decorative body base 3512 of the back middle left decorative unit 3510. The left elevating arm 3546, which has a link attachment portion that protrudes forward in a columnar shape in the vicinity, and the link attachment portion of the left elevating arm 3546 are rotatably attached to the base end side, and the tip side is the back middle left. It includes a left link arm 3547 that is rotatably attached to a mounting shaft portion of the left decorative body base 3512 of the decorative body unit 3510.

The left elevating arm 3546 includes a connecting gear portion that meshes with the connecting gear portion of the right elevating arm 3556 on the arcuate outer peripheral surface on the base end side. The left link arm 3547 extends upward from the link attachment portion (middle) of the left elevating arm 3546, then extends along the left elevating arm 3546 ahead of the tip of the left elevating arm 3546, and then bends downward. It is formed in a shaped shape. The left link arm 3547 has a flat plate-shaped detection piece 3547a extending outward from the vicinity of the tip.

Further, the back middle left elevating drive mechanism 3540 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3501 and detects the elevating and lowering of the back middle left decorative unit 3510 by detecting the detection piece 3547a of the left link arm 3547. It includes a sensor 3548 and a left assist spring (not shown) that urges the tip end side of the left elevating arm 3546 to rotate upward in the moving direction.

In the normal state, the back middle left elevating drive mechanism 3540 is in a state in which the left elevating arm 3546 extends horizontally so that the tip side is to the left in front view with respect to the base end side, and the left link. The detection piece 3547a of the arm 3547 is in a state of being detected by the left elevating detection sensor 3548. From this normal state, when the left crank member 3545 is rotated in the front view clockwise direction by the back middle left drive motor 3541 via the left drive gear 3542, the transmission gear member 3543, and the transmission gear 3544, it revolves. The drive pin 3545b can rotate the left elevating arm 3546 in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front.

In this example, the left lift arm 3546 can be rotated between an angle range of 90 degrees between a horizontally extended state and a vertically extended state. By rotating the left elevating arm 3546, the back middle left decorative unit 3510 attached to the tip can be elevated and lowered. Further, in the back middle left elevating drive mechanism 3540, since the connecting gear portion of the left elevating arm 3546 meshes with the connecting gear portion of the right elevating arm 3556 in the back middle right elevating drive mechanism 3550, the back middle left drive motor When the left elevating arm 3546 is rotated by 3541, the right elevating arm 3556 can be rotated in the opposite direction symmetrically, and the back middle right decorative unit 3520 can also be elevated.

The back middle right elevating drive mechanism 3550 is attached to the upper right corner of the front view on the front surface of the unit base 3501, and the back middle right drive motor 3551 and the back middle right drive motor 3551 whose rotating shaft penetrates the unit base 3501 and protrudes rearward. The spur gear-shaped right drive gear 3552 attached to the rotation shaft of the drive motor 3551, the large-diameter first gear portion that meshes with the right drive gear 3552 from the left side when viewed from the front, and the first gear portion rotate integrally. The speed change gear member 3553, which has a small diameter second gear part and is rotatably attached to the rear side of the unit base 3501, meshes with the second gear part of the speed change gear member 3553 from the left side when viewed from the front. The unit is from a position different from the spur gear-shaped transmission gear 3554 rotatably attached to the rear side of the cage unit base 3501, the gear portion 3555a meshing with the transmission gear 3554 from the left side when viewed from the front, and the gear portion 3545a. It has a columnar drive pin 3555b that penetrates the base 3501 and projects forward, and includes a right crank member 3555 that is rotatably attached to the rear side of the unit base 3501.

The drive pin 3555b of the right crank member 3555 projects forward through an arcuate slit formed in the unit base 3501.

Further, the back middle right elevating drive mechanism 3550 can rotate around an axis in which the base end extending in a rod shape at a position slightly to the right from the center in the left-right direction in the front view near the upper end of the upper front surface of the unit base 3501 extends back and forth. A long hole-shaped drive slit that extends from the vicinity of the base end toward the tip side and penetrates back and forth, and the drive pin 3555b of the right crank member 3555 is slidably inserted, on the tip side. An elevating pin that protrudes forward in a columnar shape and is slidably inserted into the elevating slit 3522a in the right decorative body base 3522 of the right decorative body unit 3520 in the back, substantially in the center of the longitudinal direction on the tip side of the drive slit. The right elevating arm 3556, which has a link attachment portion that protrudes forward in a columnar shape in the vicinity, and the link attachment portion of the right elevating arm 3556 are rotatably attached to the base end side, and the tip side is the back middle right. It includes a right link arm 3557 that is rotatably attached to a mounting shaft portion of the right decorative body base 3522 of the decorative body unit 3520.

The right elevating arm 3556 includes a connecting gear portion that meshes with the connecting gear portion of the left elevating arm 3546 on the arcuate outer peripheral surface on the base end side. The right link arm 3557 extends upward from the link attachment portion (middle) of the right elevating arm 3556, then extends along the right elevating arm 3556 ahead of the tip of the right elevating arm 3556, and then bends downward. It is formed in a shaped shape. The right link arm 3557 has a flat plate-shaped detection piece 3557a extending outward from the vicinity of the tip.

Further, the back middle right elevating drive mechanism 3550 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3501 and detects the elevating and lowering of the back middle right decorative unit 3520 by detecting the detection piece 3557a of the right link arm 3557. It includes a sensor 3558 and a right assist spring (not shown) that urges the tip end side of the right elevating arm 3556 to rotate upward in the moving direction.

In the normal state, the back middle right elevating drive mechanism 3550 is in a state in which the right elevating arm 3556 extends horizontally so that the tip side is to the right in front view with respect to the base end side, and the right link. The detection piece 3557a of the arm 3557 is in a state of being detected by the right elevating detection sensor 3558. From this normal state, when the right crank member 3555 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front via the right drive gear 3552, the transmission gear member 3553, and the transmission gear 3554 by the back middle right drive motor 3551, it revolves. The right elevating arm 3556 can be rotated clockwise in the front view by the drive pin 3555b.

In this example, the right elevating arm 3556 can be rotated between an angle range of 90 degrees between a horizontally extended state and a vertically extended state. By rotating the right elevating arm 3556, the back middle right decorative unit 3520 attached to the tip can be elevated and lowered. Further, in the back middle right elevating drive mechanism 3550, since the connecting gear portion of the right elevating arm 3556 meshes with the connecting gear portion of the left elevating arm 3546 in the back middle left elevating drive mechanism 3540, the back middle right drive motor When the right elevating arm 3556 is rotated by the 3551, the left elevating arm 3546 can be rotated in the opposite direction symmetrically, and the back middle left decorative unit 3510 can also be elevated.

The back middle left side decorative unit 3560 of the back middle movable production unit 3500 is arranged on the front side of the front left side of the unit base 3501 and has a flat plate-shaped left side base 3651 having a substantially spindle-shaped outer shape. Translucent back middle left side decoration 3562, which is attached to the front of the left side base 3651 and has a relief-like decoration that imitates wings on the front, and back middle left side decoration 3562 and left. The back middle left side decorative substrate 3563, which is mounted between the side base 3651 and has multiple LEDs mounted on the front surface, and the upper end of the left side base 3651 in the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the left side base 3651. A left side support arm that extends to the right in the front view and is rotatably attached around an axis that extends back and forth from the center in the left-right direction of the front view near the lower end of the upper rear surface of the unit base 3501. It is equipped with 3564.

The left side base 3651 has a protruding pin 3651a projecting in a columnar shape from the vicinity of the center in the longitudinal direction to the rear, and a longitudinal end portion extending from the left side support arm 3564 in the direction opposite to the left side support arm 3564. It has a protruding flat plate-shaped detection piece 3651b. The protruding pin 3651a is pressed in the left-right direction by the drive arm 3583 of the back middle side decorative body rotation drive mechanism 3580, which will be described later. The detection piece 3651b of the left side base 3651 is detected by the rotation detection sensor 3586 of the back middle side decoration rotation drive mechanism 3580.

The back middle left side decorative body 3562 is formed with a plating layer having a metallic luster having translucency on the surface. Further, the back middle left side decorative body 3562 can be decorated with light emission in any color by appropriately emitting light of a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back middle left side decorative substrate 3563.

The left side support arm 3564 includes an arc-shaped transmission gear portion 3564a centered on a portion rotatably attached to the unit base 3501 on the tip end side (right end side in front view). The transmission gear portion 3564a of the left side support arm 3564 meshes with the transmission gear portion 3574a of the right side support arm 3574 in the back middle right side decorative unit 3570.

In the back middle left side decorative unit 3560, when the left side support arm 3564 extends horizontally, the back middle left side decorative unit 3562 is vertically formed in front of the left side of the unit base 3501 formed in a gate shape. It is in an extended state. In this state, the detection piece 3651b of the left side base 3651 is detected by the rotation detection sensor 3586 of the back middle side decoration rotation drive mechanism 3580. In the back middle left side decorative unit 3560, the lower end of the back middle left side decorative body 3562 moves to the right in the front view centering on the tip end side of the left side support arm 3564 rotatably attached to the unit base 3501. It can rotate in the direction.

The back middle right side decorative unit 3570 of the back middle movable production unit 3500 is arranged on the front side of the front left side of the unit base 3501 and has a flat plate-shaped right side base 3571 whose outer shape is formed in a substantially spindle shape. Translucent back middle right side decoration 357, which is attached to the front of the right side base 3571 and has a relief-like decoration that imitates wings on the front, and back middle right side decoration 357 and right. The back middle right side decorative board 3573, which is mounted between the side base 3571 and has multiple LEDs mounted on the front surface, and the upper end of the right side base 3571 in the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the right side base 3571. A right side support arm that extends to the left in the front view and is rotatably attached around an axis that extends back and forth from the center in the left-right direction of the front view near the lower end of the upper rear surface of the unit base 3501. 3574 and.

The right side base 3571 has a protruding pin 3571a that projects rearward in a columnar shape from the vicinity of the center in the longitudinal direction. The protruding pin 3571a is pressed in the left-right direction by the support arm 3584 of the back middle side decorative body rotation driving mechanism 3580, which will be described later. A plating layer having a metallic luster having translucency is formed on the surface of the back middle right side decorative body 3572. Further, the back middle right side decorative body 3572 can be light-emitting decorated in any color by appropriately emitting light of a plurality of LEDs mounted on the back middle right side decorative substrate 3573.

The right side support arm 3574 is provided with an arc-shaped transmission gear portion 3574a centered on a portion rotatably attached to the unit base 3501 on the tip end side (left end side in front view). The transmission gear portion 3574a of the right side support arm 3574 meshes with the transmission gear portion 3564a of the left side support arm 3564 in the back middle left side decorative unit 3560.

In the back middle right side decorative unit 3570, when the right side support arm 3574 extends horizontally, the back middle right side decorative unit 357 is vertically in front of the right side of the unit base 3501 formed in a gate shape. It is in an extended state. In the back middle right side decorative unit 3570, the lower end of the back middle right side decorative body 357 moves to the left in the front view centering on the tip end side of the right side support arm 3574 rotatably attached to the unit base 3501. It can rotate in the direction.

The back middle side decorative body rotation drive mechanism 3580 of the back middle movable production unit 3500 includes a back middle side drive motor 3581 attached to the lower left corner of the front view of the unit base 3501 formed in a gate shape, and the back middle side. A spur gear-shaped side drive gear (not shown) attached to the rotating shaft of the drive motor 3581, and a rotatably attached shaft that extends forward and backward to the front of the left side of the unit base 3501 above the side drive gear. The side drive crank 3582, which rotates in the direction opposite to the side drive gear due to the rotation of the side drive gear, and the side drive crank 3582, which rotates around the axis extending back and forth to the front of the left side of the unit base 3501 above the turning range of the side drive crank 3582. It is possibly attached and includes a drive arm 3583 that presses the protruding pin 3651a of the left side base 3651 in the back middle left side decorative unit 3560 by the rotation of the side drive crank 3582 in the left-right direction.

Further, the back middle side decorative body rotation drive mechanism 3580 can rotate around an axis extending back and forth at the same height position as the drive arm 3583 on the front right side of the unit base 3501 formed in a gate shape. The support arm 3584, which is attached and can press the protruding pin 3571a of the right side base 3571 in the back middle right side decoration unit 3570 in the left-right direction, and the support arm 3584 so as to rotate in the front-view clockwise direction. The urging side support spring 3585 and the rotation detection sensor 3586, which is attached to the upper part of the left side of the unit base 3501 in the front view and can detect the detection piece 3651b of the left side base 3651 in the back middle left side decorative unit 3560. And have.

In the back middle side decorative body rotation drive mechanism 3580, the back middle side drive motor 3581 rotates the drive arm 3583 via the side drive gear and the side drive crank 3582, and the drive arm 3583 drives the back middle left side. The protruding pin 3651a of the left side base 3651 of the decoration unit 3560 can be pressed in the left-right direction to rotate the entire back middle left side decoration unit 3560. The back middle left side decorative unit 3560 is back because the transmission gear portion 3574a of the left side support arm 3564 meshes with the transmission gear portion 3574a of the right side support arm 3574 in the back middle right side decorative unit 3570. By rotating the middle left side decorative unit 3560, the back middle right side decorative unit 3570 can be rotated in the opposite direction.

When the right side decorative unit 3570 in the back is rotated, the protruding pin 3571a of the right side base 3571 moves relatively in the left-right direction. The 3584 rotates against or supported by the urging force of the side support spring 3585. That is, the rotation of the back middle right side decorative unit 3570 can be supported by the side support spring 3585 via the support arm 3584.

Subsequently, the operation of the back-middle movable effect unit 3500 will be described. In the normal state, the back middle movable production unit 3500 has the back middle left decorative unit 3510 and the back middle right decorative body in front of the upper side of the gate-shaped unit base 3501 with the back middle central decorative unit 3530 as the center. The unit 3520 and the center decorative unit 3530 in the back are arranged side by side (retracted position). Further, in a normal state, the back middle left side decorative body 3562 of the back middle left side decorative unit 3560 and the back middle right side decorative body 357 of the back middle right side decorative unit 3570 are of the gate type unit base 3501. In front of both the left and right sides, each is in a vertically extended state (retracted state).

In this normal state, the back middle left drive motor 3541 of the back middle left lift drive mechanism 3540 and the back middle right drive motor 3551 of the back middle right lift drive mechanism 3550 are simultaneously rotationally driven in different directions, respectively. When the horizontally extending left elevating arm 3546 and the right elevating arm 3556 are rotated in the front-view counterclockwise direction and the front-view clockwise direction, respectively, the back middle left decorative body 3511 and the back middle right decorative body 3521 are rotated. , And the central decorative body 3531 in the back, will move downward.

The back middle left decorative unit 3510, the back middle right decorative unit 3520, the left elevating arm 3546, and the right elevating arm 3556 are all mounted in a pantograph type because their respective mounting portions are rotatably mounted. It has a link structure. Further, between the back middle left decorative body unit 3510, the left elevating arm 3546, and the left link arm 3547, and between the back middle right decorative body unit 3520, the right elevating arm 3556, and the right link arm 3557, the back middle Since the left decorative unit 3510 and the left elevating arm 3546 and the back middle right decorative unit 3520 and the right elevating arm 3556 are mounted so as to be rotatable and movable, the whole is a double link structure. It has become. Thereby, the rotation range of the back middle left decorative body unit 3510 and the back middle right decorative body unit 3520 and the rotation range of the left elevating arm 3546 and the right elevating arm 3556 can be made different. In this example, the pair of left elevating arms 3546 and right elevating arm 3556 can be in a horizontal state, and the overall height can be lowered to make it compact when in the retracted position.

When the back middle left decorative body 3511, the back middle right decorative body 3521, and the back middle center decorative body 3531 move downward, the back middle left decorative body 3511 and the back middle right decorative body 3521 are moved to the back middle center, respectively. It rotates around the decorative body 3531 in the direction of approaching each other (see FIGS. 155 and 156). Then, when the left elevating arm 3546 and the right elevating arm 3556 rotate to the positions where they are vertically extended, the rotational drive of the back middle left drive motor 3541 and the back middle right drive motor 3551 is stopped, and the back middle left The downward movement of the decorative body 3511, the back middle right decorative body 3521, and the back middle center decorative body 3531 is stopped.

In the state where the left elevating arm 3546 and the right elevating arm 3556 are vertically extended (in the state of the appearance position), the back middle center decorative body 3531 is located at the lowest position, and the back middle left decorative body 3511 and the back. The middle right decorative body 3521 and the middle right decorative body 3521 are in contact with each other on the upper side of the back middle central decorative body 3531, and the overall shape is an inverted triangular shape with the back middle center decorative body 3531 as the apex (). See FIG. 156). In this state, when the back center center drive motor rotates the back center center decoration 3531 and stops the sub decoration portion 3531a so as to match the decoration of the back center left decoration 3511, the back center left decoration 3511 and the back The middle right decorative body 3521 and the back middle center decorative body 3531 can show the decoration of a predetermined logo to the player (see FIG. 157). The back center center decoration body 3531 can be rotated at any height position by the back center center drive motor.

On the other hand, in a normal state, when the drive arm 3583 is rotated in the front view clockwise direction by the back middle side drive motor 3581, the protrusion pin 3651a of the left side base 3651 is pressed by the drive arm 3583 to the right side in the front view. The entire back center left side decoration unit 3560 rotates counterclockwise in the front view so that the lower end of the back center left side decoration body 3562 moves to the right in the front view. In the back middle left side decorative unit 3560, the transmission gear portion 3574a of the left side support arm 3564 meshes with the transmission gear portion 3574a of the right side support arm 3574 in the back middle right side decorative unit 3570. When the back middle left side decoration unit 3560 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in the front view, the back middle right side decoration unit 3570 moves in the front view clock so that the back middle right side decoration unit 357 moves to the front view left. It will rotate in the clockwise direction.

When the back middle left side decoration unit 3560 and the back middle right side decoration unit 3570 rotate about 45 degrees, the rotation drive of the back middle side drive motor 3581 stops, and the back middle left side decoration unit 3562 and the back middle The right side decorative body 3572 is tilted diagonally so that the lower ends approach each other (state of appearance position) (see FIG. 158). As shown in FIG. 158, the back middle left side decorative body 3511, the back middle right decorative body 3521, and the back middle center decorative body 3531 are lowered to the appearance position, and the back middle left side decorative body 3562 and the back When the center right side decoration body 3572 was rotated to the appearance position, the back center left side decoration body 3562 and the back center right side decoration body 3572 extended outward from the left and right sides of the circular back center center decoration body 3531. In such a state, one large decorative body can be formed by combining the back middle left decorative body 3511, the back middle right decorative body 3521, and the back middle center decorative body 3531.

[5-10. Movable production on the game board]
Next, the main movable effects on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 148 to 158. FIG. 148 is a front view of the game board showing the lower back decorative body unit of the lower back movable effect unit in the lowered position and the lower back left decorative unit and the lower right decorative unit in the approached position. FIG. 149 is a front view of the game board showing the lower back decorative body unit of the lower back movable effect unit in the ascending position and the lower back left decorative unit and the lower right decorative unit in the separated position. FIG. 150 is a front view of the game board showing the lower back decorative body unit of the lower back movable effect unit in the ascending position and the lower back left decorative unit and the lower right decorative unit in the approaching position.

FIG. 151 is a front view of the game board showing the back left movable effect unit and the back right movable effect unit with the back left decorative unit and the back right decorative unit in the first appearance position. FIG. 152 is a front view of the game board showing the back left movable effect unit and the back right movable effect unit with the back left decorative unit and the back right decorative unit in the second appearance position. In FIG. 153, the back lower left decorative body unit and the back lower right decorative unit are in the approaching position while the back lower decorative body unit of the back lower movable effect unit is in the lowered position, and the back left movable effect unit and the back right movable. It is a front view of the game board which shows the back left decorative body unit and the back right decorative body unit of the production unit in the state of the 2nd appearance position. In FIG. 154, the back lower left decorative body unit and the back lower right decorative body unit are in the approaching position while the back lower decorative body unit of the back lower movable effect unit is in the raised position, and the back left movable effect unit and the back right movable. It is a front view of the game board which shows the back left decorative body unit and the back right decorative body unit of the production unit in the state of the 3rd appearance position.

FIG. 155 shows a game board in which the back middle left decorative body unit, the back middle right decorative body unit, and the back middle center decorative body unit of the back middle movable effect unit are positioned between the evacuation position and the appearance position. It is a front view of. FIG. 156 is a front view of the game board showing the back middle left decorative body unit, the back middle right decorative body unit, and the back middle center decorative body unit in the appearance position of the back middle movable effect unit. In FIG. 157, the back middle left decorative body unit, the back middle right decorative body unit, and the back middle center decorative body unit of the back middle movable production unit are set as appearance positions, and the sub-decorative portion of the back middle center decorative body is backed. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state of matching with the decoration of the center left decorative body. In FIG. 158, the back middle left decorative body unit, the back middle right decorative body unit, and the back middle center decorative body unit of the back middle movable production unit are set as appearance positions, and the sub-decorative portion of the back middle center decorative body is backed. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which matched with the decoration of the middle left decorative body, and the back middle left side decorative body unit and the back middle right side decorative body unit are the appearance positions.

In the game board 5 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 118 and the like, the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 that partitions the rear end of the game area 5a is colorless and transparent, and the opening of the panel board 1110. The start port unit 2100, the side unit 2200, and the center accessory 2500 attached to 1112 are formed substantially as colorless and transparent, and the back unit is arranged on the rear side of the game panel 1100 through them. 3000 can be visually recognized. More specifically, the back front upper left decorative body 3112, the back front upper right decorative body 3113, and the back front upper are arranged in a frame shape in the back front decoration unit 3100 through the transparent panel plate 1110, the center accessory 2500, and the like. Middle decoration 3114, back front left side decoration 3116, back front right side decoration 3117, back front left lower decoration 3118, back front right lower decoration 3119, back front lower middle decoration 3168, back front front left decoration 3169 The back front and rear right decorative body 3170 can be visually recognized, and the back lower decorative body unit 3230 is passed through the transparent first light guide plate 3135 and the second light guide plate 3136 that close the frame of the back front decorative unit 3100. , Back left decorative body 3354, back right decorative body 3454, back middle left side decorative body 3562, and back middle right side decorative body 3572, respectively, can be visually recognized.

In the game board 5, under the normal state, in the under-back movable effect unit 3200 in the back unit 3000, the under-back decorative unit 3230 is located at the descending position which is the downward moving end, and a pair of under-back. The left decorative unit 3250 and the lower right decorative unit 3260 are located at separate positions where their tips are separated from each other. Further, in the back left movable effect unit 3300, the back left decorative unit 3350 is located at the evacuation position which is the moving end to the left in the front view, and in the back right movable effect unit 3400, the back right decorative unit unit. The 3450 is located at the retracted position, which is the moving end to the right in the front view. Further, in the back middle movable effect unit 3500, the back middle left decorative unit 3510, the back middle right decorative unit 3520, and the back middle center decorative unit 3530 are located at the evacuation position which is the moving end upward. At the same time, a pair of back middle left side decorative unit 3560 and back middle right side decorative unit 3570 are located at retracted positions, which are rotation ends to the left and right, respectively.

In this normal state, the display screen of the sub-effect display device 3240 of the back-rear decorative body unit 3230 in the back-rear movable effect unit 3200 is located behind the frame-shaped center accessory 2500, and the front view first start. On the upper side of the mouth 2002, it can be visually recognized from the front (player side) through the panel plate 1110 of the transparent game panel 1100 and the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500. Further, the back left decorative body 3354 of the back left movable production unit 3300 is located behind the left side of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500, and the vicinity of the right side is forward (on the player side) through the frame of the center accessory 2500. Can be seen from. Further, the back right decorative body 3454 of the back right movable production unit 3400 is located behind the right side of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500, and the vicinity of the left side is forward (on the player side) through the frame of the center accessory 2500. Can be seen from.

Further, in a normal state, the back middle left decorative body 3511, the back middle right decorative body 3521, and the back middle center decorative body 3531 of the back middle movable production unit 3500 are the back front upper left decorative body 3112 of the back front decorative unit 3100. , Back front upper right decorative body 3113, back front upper middle decorative body 3114, and back front logo decorative body 3115, which are located behind and cannot be seen from the front (player side). In addition, the back middle left side decoration body 3562 of the back middle movable production unit 3500 is located behind the back front left side decoration body 3116 of the back front decoration unit 3100, and a part of it passes through the frame of the center accessory 2500. It can be visually recognized from the front (player side). Further, the back middle right side decoration body 357 of the back middle movable production unit 3500 is located behind the back front right side decoration body 3117 of the back front decoration unit 3100, and a part thereof passes through the frame of the center accessory 2500. It can be visually recognized from the front (player side).

In this normal state, the outer periphery of the display screen of the main effect display device 1600 attached to the rear side of the back box 3010 is the back front upper left decorative body 3112 and the back front upper right decorative body 3113 of the back front front unit 3110. , And the back front upper middle decorative body 3114, the back lower decorative frame 3232 that decorates the outer periphery of the sub-effect display device 3240, the back left decorative body 3354, and the back right decorative body 3454.

Under normal conditions, the under-back rotation drive motor 3234 of the under-back movable production unit 3200 is driven to rotate the under-back left decorative unit 3250 in the front-view clockwise direction, and at the same time, the under-back right decorative unit unit. When the 3260 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the tips of the lower back left decorative unit 3250 and the lower right decorative unit 3260 come into contact with each other (or are possible) in front of the sub-effect display device 3240. It will be in the state of the approaching position (see FIG. 148).

When the lower back left decorative unit 3250 (lower back left decorative body 3253) and the lower back right decorative unit 3260 (lower back right decorative body 3263) are rotated to close positions, the lower back left decorative body 3253 and the lower back left decorative body 3253. The lower right decorative body 3263 and the lower back right decorative body form a heart-shaped decorative body. Further, in a state where the lower back left decorative body 3253 and the lower back right decorative body 3263 are rotated to the approaching positions, the middle decorative portion 3253a of the lower back left decorative body 3253 and the middle decorative portion 3263a of the lower back right decorative body 3263 Form a small V-shaped decoration. Further, the lower back left decorative body 3253 and the lower back right decorative body 3263 are in a state of covering the left and right parts of the display screen of the sub-effect display device 3240, and the lower back left decorative body 3253 and the lower back right decorative body 3253 and the lower back right decorative body. From between 3263 and 3243, only the central part of the display screen of the sub-effect display device 3240 passes from the front (player side) through the transparent panel plate 1110 and the center accessory 2500 (stage 2530) on the upper side of the first starting port 2002. It will be visible.

As a result, behind the stage 2530, the lower back left decorative body 3253 and the lower back right decorative body 3263 can be united (approached) to form one heart-shaped decoration, which is of interest to the player. It can be attracted to 2530, the first starting port 2002, and the like. Further, since a part (left part and right part) of the sub-effect display device 3240 can be hidden by the back lower left decorative body 3253 and the back lower right decorative body 3263, the player's interest can be seen in the sub-effect display device 3240 and the back. It can be attracted to the lower decorative unit 3230 or the like.

Further, in a normal state, when the pair of under-back elevating drive motors 3212 of the under-back movable effect unit 3200 is driven to move the under-back decorative unit 3230 from the descending position to the ascending position which is the moving end upward. , Most of the display screen of the sub-effect display device 3240 is located within the frame of the center accessory 2500 (see FIG. 149). As a result, since the underside decoration unit 3230 is located in front of the lower part of the display screen of the main effect display device 1600, the effect image displayed on the display screen of the main effect display device 1600 is decorated under the back. Since it is blocked by the body unit 3230, the backside decoration unit 3230 can be made to stand out and the player's attention can be directed to the backside decoration unit 3230.

Further, by setting the lower back decorative unit 3230 to the raised position, the display screen of the sub-effect display device 3240 can be clearly seen through the frame of the center accessory 2500, so that the player can see the sub effect display device. The effect image displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 3240 can be visually recognized in a good state, and the effect image by the sub effect display device 3240 can be further enjoyed.

With the back lower decoration unit 3230 of the back lower movable production unit 3200 moved to the ascending position, the back lower left decoration unit 3250 and the back lower right decoration unit 3260 are driven by the back lower rotation drive motor 3234. , Rotate from the detached position to the approached position (see FIG. 150). As a result, within the frame of the center accessory 2500 near the center of the game area 5a, the lower back left decorative body 3253 and the lower back right decorative body 3263 form a heart shape, which is good for the player. It can make you think that there is something, and you can raise the expectation for the game. Further, in the frame of the center accessory 2500, a small V-shaped decoration formed by the middle decoration portion 3253a of the lower back left decorative body 3253 and the middle decoration portion 3263a of the lower right decorative body 3263 is given to the player. Since it can be shown, it is possible to suggest the arrival of an opportunity to the player.

Further, in a normal state, the back left drive motor 3304 of the back left movable effect unit 3300 and the back right drive motor 3404 of the back right movable effect unit 3400 are driven to drive the back left decorative unit 3350 (back left decorative body 3354). ) And the back right decorative unit 3450 (back right decorative body 3454) are moved from the retracted position to the first appearance position on the center side of the game area 5a. As a result, the left and right sides of the display screen of the main effect display device 1600 are narrowed (see FIG. 151). As a result, the display screen of the main effect display device 1600 becomes smaller, so that the player can be made aware of the movement of the back left decorative body 3354 and the back right decorative body 3454, and the back left decorative body 3354 and the back right decorative body 3354 can be noticed. It is possible to entertain with a sense of anticipation for the future movement of the body 3454.

By driving the back left drive motor 3304 of the back left movable effect unit 3300 and the back right drive motor 3404 of the back right movable effect unit 3400, the back left decorative body 3354 and the back right decorative body 3454 are further moved from the first appearance position. When it is moved to the second appearance position moved to the center side of the game area 5a, the lower ends of the back left decorative body 3354 and the back right decorative body 3454 come close to each other in front of the display screen of the main effect display device 1600. , Each becomes slanted (see FIG. 152). In this state, since the pair of back left decorative body 3354 and back right decorative body 3454 diagonally block the display screen of the main effect display device 1600, the back left decorative body 3354 and the back right decorative body 3454 stand out. This allows the player's attention to be strongly attracted to the back left decorative body 3354 and the back right decorative body 3454.

Further, in the state of FIG. 152, the left side decoration extending diagonally between the back front upper left decorative body 3112 and the back left decorative body 3354, and the back front upper right decorative body 3113 and the back right decorative body 3454 diagonally. Since the extending right side decoration is symmetrically formed with the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction as a boundary and is separated from each other to the left and right, it is in an incomplete state as one decoration. , It is possible to remind the player that it will be a complete decoration, and to have a sense of expectation for the subsequent production.

Further, when the back left decorative body 3354 and the back right decorative body 3454 are moved to the second appearance position, the lower ends of the back left decorative body 3354 and the back right decorative body 3454 are the back lower decorative body 3230. It is located behind the upper side of the frame 3232, and the upper ends of the back left decorative body 3354 and the back right decorative body 3454 are the back front upper left decorative body 3112 and the back front upper right decorative body 3113 of the back front front unit 3110. It is located so as to be continuous with the lower end of each. As a result, the player is shown a continuous decoration diagonally extended by the back front upper left decorative body 3112 and the back left decorative body 3354, and the back front upper right decorative body 3113 and the back right decorative body 3454. It can attract the attention of the player. Further, since the back left decorative body 3354 and the back right decorative body 3454 appear to extend radially upward from the sub effect display device 3240, the player's interest is attracted to the sub effect display device 3240 (back lower decorative body unit 3230). ), And it is possible to raise expectations for the production performed by the backside decorative unit 3230.

With the back left decorative body 3354 and the back right decorative body 3354 moved to the second appearance position, the back lower left decorative body unit 3250 and the back lower right decorative body unit 3260 are driven by the back lower rotation drive motor 3234. When rotated from the separated position to the approaching position, the lower back left decorative body 3253 and the back left decorative body 3354 are arranged diagonally in a straight line to form an integral decoration, and the lower back right decorative body 3263 and the back side are formed. The right decorative body 3454 and the right decorative body 3454 are arranged diagonally in a straight line to form an integral decoration (see FIG. 153). As a result, it is possible to show the player a large V-shaped decoration over the entire height in the game area 5a, with the base end side of the lower back left decorative body 3253 and the lower back right decorative body 3263 as the lower ends. It is possible to give a strong impact to the player, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state (for example, a "big hit" game) in which the player is advantageous.

When forming this large V-shaped decoration, the lower back left decorative body 3253 and the lower back right decorative body 3263 may be repeatedly rotated back and forth between the separation position and the approach position. When the lower back left decorative body 3253 and the lower back right decorative body 3263 move to the approaching positions, the back left decorative body 3354 and the back right decorative body 3454 form a V-shaped decoration in succession, so that they move back and forth. The player can be thrilled depending on whether or not the lower back left decorative body 3253 and the lower back right decorative body 3263 stop at an approaching position to form a large V-shaped decoration. The movements of the lower left decorative body 3253 and the lower back right decorative body 3263 can be enjoyed.

By the way, after moving the back lower decorative unit 3230 to the ascending position, the back lower left decorative body 3253 and the back lower right decorative body 3263 are moved to the approaching positions, and the back left decorative body 3354 and the back right decorative body 3454 are moved. When is moved to the third appearance position, the back lower left decorative body 3253 and the back left decorative body 3354 are arranged diagonally in succession, and the back lower right decorative body 3263 and the back right decorative body 3454 are arranged. It is in a state of being arranged diagonally continuously (see FIG. 154). As a result, a V-shaped decoration having a size over the entire height within the frame of the center accessory 2500 is formed, so that the player can be made to suggest the arrival of an opportunity, and the expectation for the game is further increased. Can be made to.

As shown in FIGS. 148, 150, 153, and 154, since V-shaped decorations of three sizes, large, medium, and small, can be formed, the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 can be formed. The V-shaped decoration formed by showing the player a V-shaped decoration of a size corresponding to the result of the first special lottery and the result of the second special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball of Depending on the size of, the probability of occurrence of "big hit game", the degree of expectation of big hit, and the value of "big hit" (for example, the number of rounds such as "4 rounds, 6 rounds, 16 rounds", "probability change hit", "time reduction" "Hit", etc.), etc. can be suggested, the player's expectation for the game can be raised, and it can be used properly so as to correspond to various productions.

Further, in a normal state, the pair of back-middle left drive motors 3541 and back-middle right drive motor 3551 of the back-middle movable effect unit 3500 are driven to rotate the left elevating arm 3546 in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front. At the same time, when the right elevating arm 3556 is rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view, the back middle left decorative body 3511, the back middle right decorative body 3521, and the back middle center decorative body 3531 are moved downward from the retracted position. As a result, at the time of the evacuation position, the back front upper left decorative body 3112, the back front upper right decorative body 3113, and the back front upper middle decorative body 3114 are located behind the back front upper left decorative body 3114 and cannot be visually recognized from the player side. As shown in FIG. 155, the center left decorative body 3511, the back middle right decorative body 3521, and the back middle center decorative body 3531 are the back front upper left decorative body 3112, the back front upper right decorative body 3113, and the back front upper middle. Since it becomes visible by appearing under the decoration body 3114, the appearance of the back middle left decoration body 3511, the back middle right decoration body 3521, and the back middle center decoration body 3531 attracts the player's attention. be able to.

Then, when the back middle left decorative body 3511, the back middle right decorative body 3521, and the back middle center decorative body 3531 are moved to the most lowered appearance position, the lower end of the circular back middle central decorative body 3531 is displayed as the main effect. It is located near the lower side of the device 1600, and the back middle left decorative body 3511 and the back middle right decorative body 3521 are in contact with each other on the upper side of the back middle center decorative body 3531 (see FIG. 156). As a result, in front of the display screen of the main effect display device 1600, the movements of the back middle left decorative body 3511, the back middle right decorative body 3521, and the back middle center decorative body 3531 can be enjoyed, and the back middle left decorative body 3531 can be enjoyed. It is possible to surprise the player by showing one large decoration formed by the body 3511, the back center right decoration body 3521, and the back center center decoration body 3531 as an inverted triangle.

With the back middle left decoration body 3511, the back middle right decoration body 3521, and the back middle center decoration body 3531 moved to the appearance positions, the back middle center decoration body 3531 is rotated around by a back middle center drive motor (not shown). After that, the sub-decorative portion 3531a of the back center central decoration 3531 stops the rotation of the back center central decoration 3531 so as to match the decoration of the back center left decoration 3511 (see FIG. 157). As a result, the decoration of a large predetermined logo formed by the back middle left decoration body 3511, the back middle right decoration body 3521, and the back middle center decoration body 3531 can be shown to the player. It can make you think that there is something good, and you can raise the expectation for the game.

The back middle left decoration body 3511, the back middle right decoration body 3521, and the back middle center decoration body 3531 are moved to the appearance positions, and the back middle center decoration body 3531 is rotated to rotate the back middle center decoration body 3531a and the back middle left decoration body 3511. By driving the back middle side drive motor 3581, the back middle left side decoration unit 3560 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the back middle right side decoration unit 3570 is matched with the decoration of. When the front view is rotated clockwise to move each to the appearance position, the lower ends of the back middle left side decoration body 3562 and the back middle right side decoration body 3572 are moved to the back middle center decoration body 3531. It was tilted diagonally so that it approached the rear side, and the back middle left side decoration 3562 and the back middle right side decoration 357 extended outward from the left and right of the circular back middle center decoration 3531. (See FIG. 158). As a result, the display screen of the main effect display device 1600 is formed by the back middle left decorative body 3511, the back middle right decorative body 3521, the back middle center decorative body 3531, the back middle left side decorative body 3562, and the back middle right side decorative body 3572. Since it is possible to form one huge decoration that covers almost the entire area of the game, the player can be greatly surprised, and against the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state (for example, a "big hit" game) in which the player has an advantage. Expectations can be raised.

As described above, according to the game board 5 of the present embodiment, since various movable effects can be performed, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored, and the player is sufficiently entertained to reduce the interest in the game. Can be suppressed.

[5-11. Luminous effect on the game board]
Next, the main light emitting effect on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 159 to 165. In FIGS. 159 to 165, for convenience, the light and darkness at the time of light emission is reversed. FIG. 159 is a front view of a game board showing a state in which the first light guide plate of the back front middle unit is light-emitting decorated, and FIG. 160 is a game board showing a state in which the second light guide plate of the back front middle unit is light-emitting decorated. It is a front view of. FIG. 161 shows a sub-effect display device, a lower left decorative body, with the lower back decorative unit of the lower back movable effect unit in a descending position and the lower back left decorative unit and the lower right decorative unit in an approaching position. It is a front view of a game board shown in a state of being light-emitting decorated in a small V shape using a lower right decorative body and a lower right decorative body. In FIG. 162, the back lower decoration unit of the back lower movable effect unit is in the ascending position, and the back lower left decoration unit and the back lower right decoration unit are in the approach position, and the sub effect display device, the back lower left decoration, It is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the lower right decorative body and the lower right decorative body are lightly decorated in a heart shape with the same color.

In FIG. 163, the back lower decorative body unit of the back lower movable effect unit is in the ascending position, and the back lower left decorative unit and the back lower right decorative unit are in the approaching position, and the sub effect display device, the back lower left decorative body, It is a front view of a game board shown in a state of being light-emitting decorated in a small V shape using a lower right decorative body and a lower right decorative body. FIG. 164 shows the back lower left decorative unit and the back lower right decorative unit in the approaching position while the back lower decorative unit is in the lowered position, and the back left movable effect unit and the back right movable. The back left decorative unit and the back right decorative unit of the production unit are set as the second appearance position, and the back front upper left decorative unit, the back front upper right decorative body, the sub production display device, and the back lower left decorative body are set as the second appearance position. It is a front view of a game board shown in a state in which a large V-shaped light emitting decoration is performed using a back lower right decorative body, a back left decorative body, and a back right decorative body. In FIG. 165, the back lower left decorative unit and the back lower right decorative unit are in the approaching position while the back lower decorative unit is in the raised position, and the back left movable effect unit and the back right movable are shown. The back left decorative unit and the back right decorative unit of the production unit are set as the third appearance position, and the sub production display device, the back lower left decorative body, the back lower right decorative body, the back left decorative body, and the back right decorative body are used. It is a front view of the game board which is shown in the state which it is light-emitting and decorated in the shape of a medium-sized V shape.

As shown in FIG. 118 and the like, the game board 5 of the present embodiment has a back front upper left decorative body 3112, a back front upper right decorative body 3113, and a back front upper middle decorative body in the back front decorative unit 3100 in a normal state. 3114, back front left side decoration 3116, back front right side decoration 3117, back front left lower decoration 3118, back front right lower decoration 3119, back front lower middle decoration 3168, back front front left decoration 3169, and back The transparent first light guide plate 3135 and second light guide plate 3136 of the back front middle unit 3130 that closes the inside of the frame formed by the front and rear right decorative bodies 3170 are (almost) invisible from the player side. ing.

When the back front middle unit 3130 of the back front decoration unit 3100 causes the first LED 3141a of the back front middle left decorative board 3141 and the first LED 3143a of the back front middle right decorative board 3143 to emit light, the game board 5 first emits light. The first pattern 3135a of the light guide plate 3135 is luminescent and decorated, and the first pattern 3135a is displayed in front of the display screen of the main effect display device 1600 above the display screen of the sub effect display device 3240. (See FIG. 159). As a result, the first pattern 3135a is displayed in front of the display screen of the main effect display device 1600 as if it were raised, so that the player can be surprised and the player can be entertained. The first pattern 3135a can encourage the player to participate in the player participation type production by a predetermined character string, and can entertain the player by participating in the player participation type production.

Further, as shown in FIG. 159, in the state where the first pattern 3135a of the first light guide plate 3135 is light-emitting decorated, the display screen of the sub-effect display device 3240 is not blocked by the first picture 3135a, so that the player can use it. On the other hand, the effect image displayed on the display screen of the sub-effect display device 3240 can be visually recognized in a good state, and the effect image by the sub-effect display device 3240 can be enjoyed. Further, when the first pattern 3135a is light-emittingly decorated, it is desirable to display information on the game, the player participation type production, and the like on the sub-effect display device 3240, which can further entertain the player. When the first light guide plate 3135 (first pattern 3135a) is light-emitting and decorated, the LED of the decorative substrate behind the first light guide plate 3135 is turned off or dimmed, or the display of the main effect display device 1600 is displayed. It is desirable to darken or blacken the screen.

Further, in the back front middle unit 3130 of the back front decoration unit 3100, the second LED 3141b of the back front middle left decorative board 3141, the LED 3142a of the back front middle left lower decorative board 3142, the second LED 3143b of the back front middle right decorative board 3143, and the back When the LED 3144a of the front middle right decorative substrate 3144 is made to emit light, the second pattern 3136a of the second light guide plate 3136 is in a state of being light-emitting decorated, and the second pattern is in front of the main effect display device 1600 and the sub effect display device 3240. 3136a is displayed (see FIG. 160). As a result, the radial second pattern 3136a centered on the center of the game area 5a is displayed as if it were raised in a wider range than the first pattern 3135a in front of the main effect display device 1600 and the sub effect display device 3240. Therefore, the player can be greatly surprised.

Further, if the second pattern 3136a of the second light guide plate 3136 is light-emitting and decorated while the main effect display device 1600 is displaying a predetermined effect image, the effect images having different front and rear positions and the second pattern 3136a overlap. It is possible to give a sense of perspective with, and the player can be more entertained by the display effect with a three-dimensional effect. Further, the second pattern 3136a of the second light guide plate 3136 may be light-emitting and decorated during the movable effect as described above, and the collaboration between the second pattern 3136a and the movable effect attracts the player's attention more strongly. It can be made to entertain the player more.

Further, with respect to the normal state, after rotating the lower back left decorative unit 3250 and the lower right decorative unit 3260 of the lower back movable effect unit 3200 to close positions, the back front lower left decorative substrate 3171 and the back The middle decoration part 3168a of the back front lower middle decoration body 3168 by the front lower right decorative board 3172, and the middle decoration part 3253a and the back lower right of the back lower left decoration body 3253 by the back lower left decorative board 3254 and the back lower right decorative board 3264. The intermediate decoration portion 3263a of the decorative body 3263 is light-emitting-decorated with a predetermined color (for example, white), and the sub-effect display device 3240 is produced so as to be continuous with the intermediate decoration portion 3253a and the intermediate decoration portion 3263a in the same color. When the image (V complementary decoration image) is displayed, a small V-shaped light emitting decoration can be shown to the player behind the stage 2530 in the center accessory 2500 (see FIG. 161). As a result, the player can be made to think that the V-shaped luminescent decoration represents "Victory" (victory), so that the player is in an advantageous gaming state (for example, "big hit game"). It is possible to raise the expectation for the occurrence of ").

Small size with the middle decoration part 3168a of the back front lower middle decoration body 3168, the middle decoration part 3253a of the back lower left decoration body 3253, the middle decoration part 3263a of the back lower right decoration body 3263, and the sub-effect display device 3240. When performing the V-shaped light emitting decoration, the peripheral decoration portion 3168b of the back front lower middle decoration body 3168, the peripheral decoration portion 3253b of the back lower left decoration body 3253, and the peripheral decoration portion of the back lower right decoration body 3263. 3263b and may be luminescently decorated in red. As a result, it is possible to show the player a light emitting effect in which a flame is emitted from around the V-shaped band of light, and the player can be more noticed.

Further, with respect to the normal state, after moving the back lower decoration unit 3230 of the back lower movable production unit 3200 to the ascending position, the back lower left decoration unit 3250 and the back lower right decoration unit 3260 are brought closer to each other. The lower back left decorative substrate 3254 and the lower back right decorative substrate 3264 make the entire lower back left decorative body 3253 and the lower back right decorative body 3263 emit red light and decorate the sub-effect display device 3240 in red. When the effect image (heart complementary decoration image) is displayed, the heart-shaped luminescent decoration can be shown to the player at the lower part of the frame of the center accessory 2500 (see FIG. 162). As a result, the player can be made to think that there is something good, and the player's expectation for the game can be raised.

Although not shown, the heart-shaped light emitting decoration may be shown when the lower back decoration unit 3230 is in the lowered position. At this time, the back front lower middle decorative body 3168 in the back front and rear unit 3160 of the back front decoration unit 3100 is lightly decorated in red by the back front lower left decorative substrate 3171 and the back front lower right decorative substrate 3172.

Further, with respect to the normal state, after moving the back lower decoration unit 3230 of the back lower movable production unit 3200 to the ascending position, the back lower left decoration unit 3250 and the back lower right decoration unit 3260 are brought closer to each other. By rotating to the lower back left decorative substrate 3254 and the lower back right decorative substrate 3264, the inner decorative portion 3253a of the lower back left decorative body 3253 and the inner decorative portion 3263a of the lower right decorative body 3263 are made to have a predetermined color (for example, When the sub-effect display device 3240 is displayed with the effect image (V complementary decoration image) which is the same color as the middle decoration part 3253a and the middle decoration part 3263a and is continuous with them, the center accessory 2500 is displayed. At the bottom of the frame, a small V-shaped luminescent decoration can be shown to the player (see FIG. 163). As a result, a small V-shaped light emitting decoration can be seen near the center of the game area 5a, so that the expectation for the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state can be further increased as compared with the example of FIG. 161. It can be more entertaining.

When the middle decoration part 3253a of the back lower left decorative body 3253, the middle decoration part 3263a of the back lower right decoration body 3263, and the sub-effect display device 3240 perform a medium-sized V-shaped light emitting decoration, the back bottom The peripheral decoration portion 3253b of the left decorative body 3253 and the peripheral decorative portion 3263b of the lower right decorative body 3263 may be light-emitting decorated in red. As a result, it is possible to show the player a light emitting effect as if a flame is emitted from around the V-shaped band of light, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted and the light emitting effect can be further enjoyed. You can do it.

Further, with respect to the normal state, the back lower left decorative body unit 3250 and the back lower right decorative body unit 3260 are rotated to the approaching positions, and the back left decorative body 3354 and the back right decorative body 3454 are set to the second appearance positions. In the moved state, the back front upper decoration substrate 3120 of the back front decoration unit 3100 allows the back front upper left decorative body 3112 middle decoration part 3112a and the back front upper right decoration body 3113 middle decoration part 3113a, and the back front upper left decoration. The inner decorative portion 3168a of the back front lower middle decorative body 3168 by the substrate 3171 and the back front lower right decorative substrate 3172, and the inner decorative portion 3253a of the back lower left decorative body 3253 by the back lower left decorative substrate 3254 and the back lower right decorative substrate 3264. And the middle decoration part 3263a of the back lower right decoration body 3263, and the middle decoration part 3354a of the back left decoration body 3354 and the middle decoration part 3454a of the back right decoration body 3454 by the back left decoration board 3355 and the back right decoration board 3455. When luminescent decoration is performed with a predetermined color (for example, white) and the sub-effect display device 3240 is displayed with a production image (V complementary decoration image) which is the same color as the middle decoration portion 3253a and the middle decoration portion 3263a and is continuous with them. , A large V-shaped luminescent decoration over substantially the entire height in the game area 5a can be shown to the player (see FIG. 164).

As a result, it is possible to show the player a large V-shaped luminescent decoration that is larger than the center accessory 2500 and covers substantially the entire height of the game area 5a, which is advantageous to the player. It is possible to be sure that a gaming state (for example, a "big hit game") will occur, and it is possible to greatly increase the expectation of the player.

Inside the back front upper left decorative body 3112 middle decoration part 3112a, the back front upper right decoration body 3113 middle decoration part 3113a, the back front lower middle decoration body 3168 middle decoration part 3168a, and the back lower left decoration body 3253. The decoration portion 3253a, the middle decoration portion 3263a of the back lower right decoration body 3263, the middle decoration part 3354a of the back left decoration body 3354, the middle decoration part 3454a of the back right decoration body 3454, and the sub-effect display device 3240. When performing a large V-shaped light emitting decoration, the peripheral decoration portion 3112b of the back front upper left decoration body 3112, the peripheral decoration portion 3113b of the back front upper right decoration body 3113, and the back front lower middle decoration body 3168. Peripheral decoration part 3168b, peripheral decoration part 3253b of the back lower left decoration body 3253, peripheral decoration part 3263b of the back lower right decoration body 3263, peripheral decoration part 3354b of the back left decoration body 3354, and back right decoration body 3454. 3454b and the peripheral decoration portion 3454b of the above may be light-emitting decorated in red. As a result, it is possible to show the player a light emitting effect as if a flame is emitted from around a large V-shaped band of light, so that a strong impact can be given to the player, and expectations for the game can be obtained. The feeling can be further enhanced.

Further, with respect to the normal state, after moving the back lower decoration unit 3230 of the back lower movable production unit 3200 to the ascending position, the back lower left decoration unit 3250 and the back lower right decoration unit 3260 are brought closer to each other. With the back left decorative body 3354 and the back right decorative body 3454 moved to the third appearance position while rotating to, the back lower left decorative board 3254 and the back lower right decorative board 3264 make the back lower left decorative body 3253. The middle decoration part 3253a of the back left decoration body 3354 and the middle decoration part 3454 of the back right decoration body 3354 by the middle decoration part 3253a and the middle decoration part 3263a of the back lower right decoration body 3263, and the back left decoration board 3355 and the back right decoration board 3455. An effect image (V complementary decorative image) in which 3454a and 3454a are luminescently decorated with a predetermined color (for example, white), and the sub-effect display device 3240 has the same color as the intermediate decoration portion 3253a and the intermediate decoration portion 3263a and is continuous with them (V complementary decoration image). Is displayed, a medium-sized V-shaped luminescent decoration can be shown to the player within the frame of the center accessory 2500 (see FIG. 165). As a result, in the center of the game area 5a, a medium-sized V-shaped light emitting decoration over the entire height within the frame of the center accessory 2500 can be seen. It is possible to raise the expectation for the occurrence of the above and to entertain the player more.

The middle decoration part 3253a of the back lower left decoration body 3253, the middle decoration part 3263a of the back lower right decoration body 3263, the middle decoration part 3354a of the back left decoration body 3354, and the middle decoration part 3454a of the back right decoration body 3454. When performing a medium-sized V-shaped light emitting decoration with the sub-effect display device 3240, the peripheral decoration portion 3253b of the lower back left decorative body 3253, the peripheral decoration portion 3263b of the lower right decorative body 3263, and the back left. The peripheral decorative portion 3354b of the decorative body 3354 and the peripheral decorative portion 3454b of the back right decorative body 3454 may be light-emitting decorated in red. As a result, it is possible to show the player a light emitting effect as if a flame is emitted from around a medium-sized V-shaped light band, so that the V-shaped light emitting effect can be made more conspicuous, and the player can make the light emitting effect more conspicuous. It is possible to strongly attract the interest of the person and entertain the light emission effect.

The above-mentioned light emitting effect is only a part, and various light emitting effects can be presented to the player by appropriately combining the LEDs of each decorative substrate. In addition, innumerable effects can be presented to the player by appropriately combining the movable effect, the light emitting effect, the effect image by the main effect display device 1600, and the effect image by the sub effect display device 3240 as described above. , It is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored, and it is possible to entertain the player, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

[6. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 166. FIG. 166 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of a pachinko machine. As shown in the figure, the main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 951 attached to the main body frame 4. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls the game operation (progress of the game). The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 that controls various effects during the game based on commands from the main control board 1310, a door frame side effect display device 460 based on commands from the peripheral control unit 1511, and a main effect. The display device 1600 and the effect display control unit 1512 for controlling the display of the effect image on the sub effect display device 3240 and the like are provided. The payout control board 951 includes a payout control unit 952 that controls payout of the game ball and the like, and a launch control unit 953 that controls the launch of the game ball by the rotation operation of the handle 302.

[6-1. Main control board]
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game is a main control that is a microprocessor having a built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. MPU1310a, main control I / O port as input / output device (I / O device), main control input circuit for inputting detection signals from various detection switches, and main control solenoid drive for driving various solenoids. It includes a circuit and a RAM clear switch for completely erasing the information stored in the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the main control MPU 1310a also has a built-in watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has a first start port sensor 3167 that detects a game ball received in the first start port 2002, and a second start port sensor that detects a game ball received in the second start port 2004. 2402, the general winning opening sensor 3166 that detects the game ball received in the general winning opening 2001, the gate sensor 2401 that detects the game ball that has passed through the gate unit 2003, and the large that detects the game ball received in the large winning opening 2005. Detection signals from the winning opening sensor 2403, the magnetic sensor that detects illegal magnetism in the game area 5a (not shown), and the like are input via the main control I / O ports, respectively.

Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a control signal from the main control I / O port to the main control solenoid drive circuit, thereby outputting a drive signal to the start port solenoid 2412 and the attacker solenoid 2414. , Status display 1401, normal symbol display 1402, first special symbol display 1403, first special hold number indicator 1404, second special symbol display 1405, first from the main control I / O port of the function display unit 1400. (Ii) A drive signal is output to the special hold indicator 1406, the round indicator 1407, the normal hold indicator 1408, and the like.

In the present embodiment, the first start port sensor 3167, the second start port sensor 2402, the gate sensor 2401, and the grand prize opening sensor 2403 use a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch. On the other hand, a contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch is used for the general winning opening sensor 3166. This is because the game ball frequently enters the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 and frequently passes through the gate portion 2003, so that the first start port sensor 3167 and the second start port sensor 2402, And the detection of the game ball by the gate sensor 2401 also frequently occurs. Therefore, the proximity switch having high durability and long life is used for the first start port sensor 3167, the second start port sensor 2402, and the gate sensor 2401. In addition, when an advantageous gaming state (“big hit” game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the big winning opening 2005 is opened and the game ball frequently enters, so that the game ball by the big winning opening sensor 2403 Detection also occurs frequently. For this reason, the large winning opening sensor 2403 also uses a proximity switch with high durability and long life. On the other hand, in the general winning opening 2001 where the game ball does not enter frequently, the detection by the general winning opening sensor 3166 does not occur frequently. Therefore, the general winning opening sensor 3166 uses a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 951, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951. Or Further, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to the control of the game effect and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I / O port. The main control MPU 1310a will be described in detail later, but when it receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951, these various commands are shaped and transmitted to the peripheral control unit 1511.

Although detailed description will be described later, various voltages are supplied to the main control board 1310 from the power supply board in the power supply board box 930. The power supply board that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply referred to as "capacitor") as a backup power source for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power supply is cut off. To do.) With this capacitor, the main control MPU 1310a can store various information in the RAM in the power off processing even when the power is cut off. When the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on, the various stored information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch is also output to the payout control board 951.

Further, the main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors a decrease in various voltages supplied from the power supply board, and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning when those voltages are equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. This power failure warning signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a via the main control I / O port, and is also output to the payout control board 951 and the like.

[6-2. Payout control board]
Although detailed illustration of the payout control board 951 for controlling the payout of the game ball is omitted, the payout control unit 952 that performs various controls related to the payout, the launch control by the launch solenoid 682, and the ball by the ball feed solenoid 255 are performed. A launch control unit 953 that performs feed control, an error LED display that displays the status of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch for canceling the error displayed on the error LED display, a ball tank 802, and a tank rail. The 803, the ball guidance unit 820, and the ball removing switch for discharging the game ball in the payout device 830 to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 and starting the ball removing operation are provided.

[6-2a. Payout control unit]
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the payout control unit 952 that performs various controls related to payout on the payout control board 951 is a micro having a built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. The payout control MPU952a, which is a processor, the payout control I / O port as an I / O device, the external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether the payout control MPU952a is operating normally, and the payout. It includes a payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the device 830, and a payout control input circuit for inputting detection signals from various detection switches related to payout. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the payout control MPU952a also has a built-in function to prevent fraud.

The payout control MPU952a of the payout control unit 952 receives various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 1310 and various commands related to the payout in a serial manner via the payout control I / O port, or the main control board 1310. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch from is input via the payout control I / O port, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is input, and the ball burnout detection sensor 827 is paid out. The detection signals from the detection sensor 842 and the blade rotation detection sensor 840 are input.

The detection signals from the ball-out detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, and the blade rotation detection sensor 840 of the payout device 830 are input to the payout control input circuit and input to the payout control MPU952a via the payout control I / O port. NS.

Further, the detection signals from the door frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are input to the payout control input circuit. It is input to the payout control MPU952a via the payout control I / O port.

Further, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 of the foul cover unit 270 is input to the payout control input circuit, and is input to the payout control MPU952a via the payout control I / O port.

The payout control MPU952a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 834 to the payout motor 834 via the payout control I / O, and outputs a signal for displaying the status of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED display. , Output to the error LED display via the payout control I / O port, or send a command to indicate the status of the pachinko machine 1 to the main control board 1310 via the payout control I / O port in a serial manner. Alternatively, the number of game balls actually paid out is output to an external terminal board via the payout control I / O port. This external terminal board is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. This hall computer monitors the player's game by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1.

The error LED display is a segment display, and displays alphanumeric characters, figures, and the like to display the status of the pachinko machine 1. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display are as follows. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is notified that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it means that it is "connection abnormality" (specifically, with the main control board 1310). Notifies that an abnormality has occurred in the electrical connection between the payout control board 951 and the board, and when the number "1" is displayed, it means that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is out). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 827, it notifies that there is no game ball in the payout device 830, and when the number "2" is displayed, it means that it is a "ball" (specifically, the blade). Based on the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840, the payout blade 839 and the game ball are engaged with each other in the payout passage 831d and the payout passage 832d of the payout device 830, and the payout blade 839 is difficult to rotate. When "3" is displayed, a "count switch error" is notified (specifically, a defect has occurred in the payout detection sensor 842 based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842). When the number "5" is displayed, it is notified that a "retry error" has occurred (specifically, the number of retries for the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit), and the number "6" is displayed. When it is, it notifies that it is "full" (specifically, it means that the game ball stored in the foul cover unit 270 is full based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279). , When the number "7" is displayed, it is notified that "CR is not connected" (the electrical connection is disconnected in any of the payout control board 951 to the CR unit), and the number " When "9" is displayed, it is informed that it is "in stock" (specifically, the number of game balls that have not been paid out has reached a predetermined number).

The ball lending request signal for the game ball from the ball lending button 328 and the return request signal for the prepaid card from the return button 329 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit serially transmits a signal specifying the number of balls of the game ball to be rented according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 951, and this signal is received by the payout control I / O port and input to the payout control MPU952a. Will be done. Further, the CR unit updates the remaining amount of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of balls of the rented game ball, and outputs a signal for displaying the remaining amount on the ball lending display unit 330, and this signal. Is input to and displayed on the ball loan return display unit 330.

[6-2b. Launch control unit]
The launch control unit 953, which performs launch control by the launch solenoid 682 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 255, is not shown in detail, but is a launch control input to which detection signals from various detection switches related to launch are input. A circuit, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular time intervals, a launch timing control circuit that outputs a launch reference pulse for launching a game ball toward the game region 5a based on this clock signal, and this launch reference pulse. It is provided with a firing solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the firing solenoid 682 based on the above, and a ball feeding solenoid drive circuit that outputs a driving signal to the ball feeding solenoid 255 based on the firing reference pulse. The launch timing control circuit generates a launch reference pulse so that 100 game balls are launched toward the game region 5a per minute based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit, and outputs the launch reference pulse to the launch solenoid drive circuit. A ball feed reference pulse obtained by multiplying the launch reference pulse by a predetermined number is generated and output to the ball feed solenoid drive circuit.

In relation to the handle unit 300, a handle touch sensor 310 that detects whether or not the palm or finger is touching the handle 302, and a single-shot button that detects whether or not the launch of the game ball is forcibly stopped by the player's will. The detection signal from the operation sensor 312 is input to the launch timing control circuit after being input to the launch control input circuit. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal board are electrically connected, they are input to the firing control input circuit as a CR connection signal and input to the firing timing control circuit. A signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307 that electrically adjusts the strength of launching the game ball toward the game area 5a according to the rotation position of the handle 302 is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

In this launch solenoid drive circuit, based on the signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307, the launch reference pulse inputs the drive current for launching the game ball toward the game region 5a with the launch strength commensurate with the rotation position of the handle 302. When this is done, the output is output to the firing solenoid 682. On the other hand, the ball feed solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feed solenoid 255 when the ball feed reference pulse is input, so that the game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 is balled. One ball is received in the sending unit 250, and when the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the received game ball is sent to the ball launching device 680 side by stopping the output of the constant current. In this way, the drive current output from the launch solenoid drive circuit to the launch solenoid 682 is variably controlled, while the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 255 is controlled to be constant. ing.

The power supply board that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 951 includes a capacitor as a backup power source for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power supply is cut off. With this capacitor, the payout control MPU952a can store various information in the RAM of the payout control board 951 in the power off processing even when the power is cut off. When the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on, the various stored information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM of the payout control board 951.

[6-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 166, the peripheral control board 1510 has a peripheral control unit 1511 that performs effect control based on a command from the main control board 1310, and a door frame side effect based on control data from the peripheral control unit 1511. It includes an effect display control unit 1512 that controls drawing of the display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, the sub effect display device 3240, and the like.

[6-3a. Peripheral control unit]
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the peripheral control unit 1511 that performs the effect control on the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control MPU 1511a as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, and high-quality sound performance. It is provided with a sound source IC for performing the above and a sound ROM for storing sound information such as music and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a has a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, etc. built-in, and when various commands are received from the main control board 1310, each decorative board of the game board 5 is based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting the lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting signal to the provided color LED or the like can be transmitted from the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board to the effect drive board 3032, or the game board. The game board side drive data for outputting the drive signal to the drive motor for operating the various effect units provided in 5 is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the game board decorative drive board to the motor drive board 3033, or the door. Door-side drive data for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a vibration motor 424 provided in the frame 3, and a lighting signal and blinking for a color LED or the like provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3. Door-side light emission data for outputting a signal or gradation lighting signal and door-side drive light emission data composed of the frame decoration drive board serial I / O port can be transmitted to the door frame 3 side, or the door frame side. Control data (display command) indicating a screen to be displayed on the effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3240 can be transmitted from the serial I / O port for the display control unit to the effect display control unit 1512. In addition to this, a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM is output to the sound source IC.

Detection signals from various detection sensors for detecting the positions of various movable effect units provided on the game board 5 are input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a via the motor drive board 3033 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. There is. Further, the detection signal from the pressure detection sensor 440 of the effect operation unit 400 provided on the door frame 3 is input to the peripheral control MPU1511a.

Further, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, a signal (operation signal) indicating that the effect display control unit 1512 is operating normally is input from the effect display control unit 1512, and the effect display control unit 1512 is based on this operation signal. The operation is being monitored.

The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on the control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU1511a, and makes various effects from the upper speaker 573 and the speaker 921 provided on the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4. Control so that the combined music and sound effects flow. The volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume protruding rearward from the peripheral control board box 1520 in which the peripheral control board 1510 is housed. In the present embodiment, the upper speaker 573 on the door frame 3 side and the bass speaker 921 on the main body frame 4 have acoustic signals as sound information (for example, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo signal, 2.1ch surround signal, or By sending 4.1ch surround signal, etc.), it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound effect) than before.

In addition to the built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built into the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the peripheral control unit 1511 also includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown). The peripheral control MPU 1511a has the built-in WDT and an external device. In combination with WDT, he diagnoses whether his system is out of control.

The display command output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a to the effect display control unit 1512 is performed by the serial input / output port, and in the present embodiment, the bit rate (the size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 km (19.2 km). k) BPS (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as "bps") is set. On the other hand, it is different from the initial data, the door frame side lighting / blinking command, the game board side lighting / blinking command, the movable body drive command, and the display command output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a to the effect drive board 3032 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. It is performed by a plurality of serial input / output ports, and in this embodiment, 250 kbps is set as a bit rate.

The effect drive board 3032 outputs a lighting signal or a blinking signal based on the received door frame side lighting / blinking command to the LED of each decorative board provided in the door frame 3, or receives a game board side lighting / blinking command. A lighting signal or a blinking signal based on the above is output to the LED of each decorative board provided on the game board 5.

Further, the motor drive board 3033 outputs a drive signal based on the received drive command to the vibration motor 424 provided in the door frame 3, each drive motor provided in the game board 5, and the like.

[6-4. Production display control unit]
Next, the effect display control unit 1512 that controls the drawing of the door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3240 on the peripheral control board 1510 is described as a microprocessor, although detailed illustration is omitted. Display control MPU, display control ROM that stores various processing programs, various commands, and various data, and VDP (Video Display) that displays and controls the door frame side effect display device 460, main effect display device 1600, and sub effect display device 3240. Processor), an image ROM that stores various data of the screen displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3240, and various data stored in this image ROM. It has an image RAM that is transferred and copied.

This display control MPU has a built-in parallel I / O port, serial I / O port, etc., and controls VDP based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to display the door frame side effect. Drawing control is performed on the 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3240. When the display control MPU is operating normally, the display control MPU outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 1511. Further, the display control MPU performs interrupt processing when an executing signal is input from VDP and the output of the executing signal is stopped every 16 ms.

The display control ROM includes various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3240, as well as control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511. ) And the corresponding schedule data, the control data (display command) and the corresponding non-resident area transfer schedule data, etc. are stored. The schedule data is composed of screen data that defines the screen configuration arranged in chronological order, and the order of the screens drawn on the door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3240 is It is stipulated. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging the non-resident area transfer data that defines the order of various data stored in the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM in chronological order. The non-resident area transfer data transfers screen data drawn on the door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3240 according to the progress of the schedule data from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM in advance. The order in which various data are transferred is specified.

The display control MPU extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM, outputs it to the VDP, and then outputs the screen data following the first screen data. It is extracted from the display control ROM and output to VDP. In this way, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data from the display control ROM one by one from the first screen data and outputs the screen data to the VDP.

When the screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data, and the door frame side effect display device 460, main effect display device 1600, The drawing data to be displayed on the sub-effect display device 3240 is generated, and the generated drawing data is output to the door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub-effect display device 3240. Further, when the door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3240 do not accept the screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP sends an executing signal to the display control MPU to that effect. Output. The line buffer method is adopted for VDP. This "line buffer method" is a line buffer in which drawing data for one line for drawing the left-right direction of the door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3240 is held in the line buffer. This is a method of outputting the drawing data for one line held in the door frame side effect display device 460, main effect display device 1600, and sub effect display device 3240.

An extremely large amount of sprite data is stored in the image ROM, and its capacity is large. When the capacity of the image ROM increases, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3240 increases, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored, and the door This will affect the speed of drawing on the frame-side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3240. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the image RAM. The sprite data is basic data that is data before the sprite is expanded in the bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

Here, the "sprite" will be described. The "sprite" is an image displayed as a unit on the door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3240. For example, when displaying various characters on the door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3240, the data for drawing each person is called a "sprite". .. As a result, when displaying a plurality of people on the door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3240, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to people, houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are arranged on the screen and the vertical relationship when the sprites overlap each other (hereinafter, referred to as "the order of superimposing the sprites") is set, and the door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect. It is drawn on the display device 1600 and the sub-effect display device 3240.

The sprite is composed of a plurality of rectangular areas having 64 pixels in each of the vertical and horizontal directions. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "sprite character". In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed using one sprite character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, a total of 6 sprite characters arranged in a width of 2 x a length of 3 can be used. Can be expressed. In the case of a larger sprite such as a background, it can be expressed by using a larger number of sprite characters. In this way, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

The door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3240 sequentially set the display state for each pixel in one direction along the pixels from left to right when viewed from the front. It is driven by a scan and a sub-scan that repeats the main scan in a direction intersecting that one direction. When the drawing data for one line output from the effect display control unit 1512 is input to the door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3240, the door frame side effect display is performed as the main scan. When viewed from the front of the device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3240, outputs are sequentially output to pixels for one line from left to right. When the output for one line is completed, the door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3240 shift to the line directly below as a sub scan, and similarly, the drawing data for the next line is displayed. When input, based on the drawing data for the next line, the door frame side effect display device 460, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3240 are sequentially viewed from the left to the right as the main scan. Output to each line of pixels.

[7. Game content]
Next, the content of the game by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 119 and 120 and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 is generated by the player rotating the handle 302 of the handle unit 300 arranged in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3. , The game is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a through between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 on the game board 5, and the game by the game ball is started. The game ball driven into the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the driving strength. The driving strength of the game ball can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 302, and the stronger the ball can be driven by rotating it in the clockwise direction, that is, a maximum of 100 game balls per minute in a row, that is, , You can hit the game ball at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

Further, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails K (see FIG. 120) are planted in front of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) at appropriate positions in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and the game ball is obstructed. By abutting on the nail K, the flow speed of the game ball is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball so that the movement can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail K, a wind turbine (not shown) that rotates due to the contact of the game ball is provided at an appropriate position.

When the game ball driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 enters the left side of the front view from the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500, it comes into contact with a plurality of obstacle nails K and is centered. It will flow down the area on the left side of the accessory 2500. Then, when the game ball flowing down the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 enters the warp inlet 2520 opened on the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front view of the center accessory 2500, it is supplied from the warp outlet 2522 to the stage 2530. ..

The game ball supplied to the stage 2530 rolls on the stage 2530 and moves back and forth from side to side, is discharged forward from either the central guide portion 2531 or the side guide portion 2532, and returns to the game region 5a. Will be done. When the game ball is released into the game area 5a from the central guide portion 2531 located in the center of the stage 2530 in the left-right direction, the central guide portion 2531 is located directly above the first start port 2002, so that there is a high probability that the first Accepted at the start port 2002. When the game ball is received in the first starting port 2002, it is detected by the first starting port sensor 3167. Then, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are dispensed from the payout device 830 to the upper plate 321 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 based on the detection of the game balls by the first start port sensor 3167. Will be done.

When the game ball rolling on the stage 2530 is released into the game area 5a from the side guide portions 2532 provided on both the left and right sides of the central guide portion 2531, it flows down toward the start port unit 2100. The game ball released from the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 into the game area 5a may be accepted by the general winning opening 2001 of the starting port unit 2100, the first starting port 2002, and the like.

By the way, when the game ball that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2520, it is moved to the center side in the left-right direction by the shelf portion 2202 of the side unit 2200, and the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200 or , The first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100, etc. may be accepted. When a game ball is received in the general winning opening 2001, it is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3166, and based on the detection of the game ball by the general winning opening sensor 3166, the payout device is passed through the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. A predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls from 830 are paid out to the upper plate 321.

On the other hand, when the game ball driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500 (so-called right-handed strike), It is discharged from the right guide passage 2540 of the center accessory 2500 to the upper part of the attacker unit 2400. The gate portion 2003 of the attacker unit 2400 is arranged below the downstream end of the right guide passage 2540, and the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 with high probability.

When the right-handed game ball passes through the gate portion 2003, the gate sensor 2401 detects the passage of the game ball, and based on the detection, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310, and the lottery normal lottery result is "normal". In the case of "hit", the second start port door 2411 closing the second start port 2004 protrudes forward by the drive of the start port solenoid 2412 for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds) and is in an open state. Therefore, it becomes possible to accept the game ball into the second starting port 2004. Then, when the game balls are received in the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. NS.

In the present embodiment, in the ordinary lottery performed by passing the game ball through the gate portion 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the ordinary lottery until the result of the ordinary lottery is suggested (for example, 0. 01 to 60 seconds, also called normal fluctuation time). The suggestion of the normal lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second starting port 2004 is normally opened after the lapse of the fluctuation time. The shorter the normal fluctuation time, the more the game ball for which the "normal hit" is drawn in the gate portion 2003 will be accepted by the second starting port 2004 arranged directly below the gate portion 2003.

If the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 between the time when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 and the result of the normal lottery is suggested, the suggestion of the normal lottery result cannot be started, so that the normal lottery result cannot be started. The start of the suggestion of the result is suspended until the suggestion of the previous ordinary lottery result is completed. In addition, the maximum number of pending lottery results is four, and more than that, even if the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003, it is discarded without being reserved. As a result, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the hold.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game balls are received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the main control board 1310 has an advantageous gaming state (for example, "big hit", "big hit", " A lottery of special lottery results that generate "medium hits", "small hits", "probability fluctuation hits", "time reduction hits", etc.) is performed. Then, the lottery special lottery result is suggested to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as a special fluctuation time). In addition, the special lottery results drawn by accepting the game balls in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 include "loss", "small hit", "4R big hit", "6R big hit", and " There are 8R big hit, "10R big hit", "16R big hit", "probability change (probability change) hit", "time reduction (time reduction) hit", "probability change time reduction hit", "probability change time reduction no hit", and the like.

When the special lottery result (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by accepting the game balls to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 is a special lottery result that causes an advantageous gaming state. After the special fluctuation time has elapsed, the large winning opening door 2413, which closes the large winning opening 2005, opens and closes in a predetermined opening / closing pattern by the drive of the attacker solenoid 2414, and the game ball can be accepted into the large winning opening 2005. It becomes a state. If a game ball is received in the large winning opening 2005 when the large winning opening 2005 is open, it is detected by the large winning opening sensor 2403. Then, based on the detection of the game balls by the large winning opening sensor 2403, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) of game balls are moved up from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout board. It is paid out to the plate 321. Therefore, when the large winning opening 2005 is capable of accepting the game balls, by accepting the game balls in the large winning opening 2005, a large number of game balls can be paid out and the player can be entertained.

When the special lottery result is "small hit", after the big winning opening 2005 is in an open state where a game ball can be accepted for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds). The closing opening / closing pattern is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice). On the other hand, when the special lottery result is "big hit", a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) has elapsed after the big winning opening 2005 is in an open state where the game ball can be accepted, or the big winning opening 2005 is entered. When any of the conditions of accepting a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is satisfied, an opening / closing pattern (one opening / closing pattern is referred to as one round) that makes the game balls unacceptable in a closed state is specified. Repeat the number of times (predetermined number of rounds). For example, "4R jackpot" is repeated for 4 rounds, "6R jackpot" is for 6 rounds, and "16R jackpot" is for 16 rounds, respectively, to generate an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player.

In "big hit", after the big hit game is finished, the probability that a special lottery result such as "big hit" will be drawn is changed ("probability change hit"), or the display time of the production image suggesting the special lottery result is changed. ("Time saving hit") There is a "hit".

In the present embodiment, the first starting port 2002 and the first starting port 2002 and the first starting port 2002 and the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2002 are between the start of the special lottery and the suggestion of the lottery special lottery result by accepting the game balls to the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. (Ii) When the game ball is accepted in the starting port 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started. Therefore, the start of the suggestion of the special lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. NS. The number of reserved special lottery results is limited to four for each of the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, and for more than that, the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. Even if the game ball is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is not reserved and is discarded. As a result, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the hold.

The suggestion of the special lottery result is performed by the function display unit 1400, the main effect display device 1600, and the sub effect display device 3240. In the function display unit 1400, the special lottery result is suggested by being directly controlled by the main control board 1310. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 suggests the special lottery result by repeatedly turning on and off the plurality of LEDs to blink for a predetermined time and then by combining the lit LEDs.

On the other hand, in the main effect display device 1600, the sub effect display device 3240, etc., based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 indirectly controls the effect image to suggest the special lottery result. The effect image suggesting the result of the special lottery on the main effect display device 1600 or the like changes by changing each symbol sequence in a state where three symbol rows consisting of a plurality of symbols (decorative symbols) are displayed side by side in the left-right direction. The displayed symbol rows are sequentially stopped and displayed, and each of the three symbol rows that are stopped and displayed is stopped and displayed so that the combinations correspond to the special lottery results. If the special lottery result is other than "missing", after the three symbol rows are stopped and each symbol is stopped and displayed, a definite image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the main effect display device 1600 or the like, and the lottery is performed. An advantageous gaming state (for example, a small hit game, a big hit game, etc.) is generated according to the result of the special lottery.

The time suggesting the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (variable time)) and the time suggesting the special lottery result in the main effect display device 1600 or the like (the symbol sequence fluctuates and is confirmed). The time until the image is displayed) is different, and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to displaying the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the main effect display device 1600 or the like, the effect operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 according to the lottery special lottery result. Operation button 410, door frame side effect display device 460, back front decoration unit 3100 of back unit 3000, back bottom movable effect unit 3200, back left movable effect unit 3300, back right movable effect unit 3400, and back middle movable effect unit 3500 , Etc. can be used as appropriate to perform light emission effect, movable effect, display effect, etc., and the player can be entertained by various effects, and the player's interest in the game is reduced. It can be suppressed.

[8. Main control board control process]
Next, an example of the control process executed on the main control board 1310 (particularly the main control MPU 1310a) will be described. FIG. 167 (a) is a flowchart showing a procedure of control processing performed by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 167 (a), the main control board 1310 according to this embodiment is first processed in step S1 on the condition that the operation switch 954 having a function as a RAM clear switch is operated. , Initializes the data stored in various registers and RAM. The operation switch 954 is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 so that it cannot be operated unless the main body frame 4 is opened. Further, the operation switch 954 outputs a clear signal to the main control board 1310 in response to an operation before a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) elapses from the power-on, and the main control MPU 1310a inputs the clear signal when the power is turned on. When it is determined, the initialization process (step S1) is executed to initialize the data stored in the RAMs of various registers and the main control MPU 1310a.

Although not shown, in this example, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a backup process is executed in which information indicating the progress of the game (for example, various flags) is stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a. If the operation switch 954 is not operated when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the information stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is referred to in the backup process without executing the initialization process (step S1). , Execute the recovery process to restore the state according to the information. Further, when the operation switch 954 is operated when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the initialization process is executed without executing the recovery process to set the pachinko machine 1 to the initial state.

Next, as the process of step S2, the random numbers, which are the numbers to be updated within the predetermined numerical range, are updated. That is, in the main control board 1310 according to this embodiment, the special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) used for the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped, and the special symbol. In the variable random number used for the lottery process for the predetermined time (variable time) required for the variable display control of, and the variable display of the decorative symbol executed by the main effect display device 1600 in response to the variable display of the special symbol. Reach (The left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed with the same symbol, and the middle decorative symbol is not yet stopped and displayed, or the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are all changed in synchronization so that they are the same symbol. The reach random number used in the lottery process to determine whether or not to display), and the symbol random number used in the lottery process to determine the type of big hit when it is determined to be a big hit based on the above special random number (No. 1) It is equipped with a random number counter that holds random numbers such as (1 symbol random number, 2nd symbol random number), random numbers (ordinary random numbers) used for lottery processing related to winning the hit that triggers the operation of the second start door 2411, etc. There is.

In this example, the same reach random number is used for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, that is, even when the first starting port 2002 is started and the second starting port 2004 is started and won. Even in the case, it is configured to acquire the reach random number from the same counter that updates the reach random number, but the execution ratio of the reach effect is increased by acquiring from the counters that update the reach random number from different random numbers. It may be different, or it corresponds to the first reach judgment table corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol as the reach judgment table to be compared with the acquired reach random numbers, and is different from the first reach judgment table. The execution ratio of the reach effect may be different by providing the second reach determination table in which the determination value is set.

In the process of step S2, the counter operation of the random number counter is performed so that only the random numbers (variable random numbers) that are not related to the winning of these random numbers are updated. After the processes of steps S1 and S2 are performed in this way, only the process of step S2 is basically repeated. However, in this embodiment, the following timer interrupt control is performed, for example, every 4 ms.

FIG. 167 (b) is a flowchart showing a processing procedure for timer interrupt control periodically performed by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.

As shown in FIG. 167 (b), in this interrupt control, first, a register save process is performed as the process of step S11. Next, as the process of step S12, the gate sensor 2401, the first starting port sensor 3112, the second starting port sensor 4004, the first major winning opening sensor 4005, the second major winning opening sensor 2402, and the first first Detection signals from various switches such as the entrance sensor 2434, the second entrance sensor 2435, and the general winning opening sensor 3111 are input. Next, as the process of step S13, a random number update process for updating the value of the random number counter that generates the random number is performed. In the process of step S13, among the above-mentioned random numbers, the random numbers (special random numbers, ordinary random numbers) related to the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol and the ordinary symbol is stopped are updated in the random number counter. A counter operation is performed.

Then, after the random numbers are updated in this way, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 performs a special symbol process process including a lottery process related to the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped as the process of step S14. To execute. The special symbol process processing will be described later, but here, basically, a special symbol process flag (first special symbol process flag, first special symbol process flag, first) indicating the progress of the game stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a. (Ii) The corresponding process will be selectively executed based on the special symbol process flag).

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 executes a normal symbol process process including a lottery process for winning a hit that triggers the operation of the second start opening door 2411 as the process of step S15. In this normal symbol process process as well, basically, the corresponding process is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag indicating the progress of the game. Further, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is configured to execute the lottery process so that the driving frequency of the second starting door 2411 becomes higher within a predetermined period after the end of the jackpot gaming state. (So-called time saving state). In this embodiment, the winning probability of the normal symbol is increased only within a predetermined period after the end of the jackpot game state, the time required for the variable display control of the normal symbol is shortened, and the lottery of the normal symbol is performed. When the result is successful, the opening time of the second starting door 2411 is extended to realize such a time saving state.

When the special symbol process process (step S14) and the normal symbol process process (step S15) are performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is then subjected to the special symbol process process as the process of step S16. The process of transmitting a command set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 or the like is performed. Next, as the process of step S17, a process of transmitting a command set in a predetermined area of the RAM in the normal symbol process process to, for example, the peripheral control board 1510 is performed.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is an information output process for outputting data such as hit information (15R jackpot A, 15R jackpot B) supplied to a hall management computer, for example, as the process of step S18. I do.

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has the first start port sensor 3112, the second start port sensor 4004, the first big prize opening sensor 4005, and the second big as the process of step S19. When the detection signals of the winning opening sensor 2402, the general winning opening sensor 3111, and the like are in the ON state, a payout control command is output to the payout control board 951 so that the prize balls corresponding to those signals are paid out to the player. As a result, the payout control MPU952a mounted on the payout control board 951 outputs a drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 952d to the payout motor 834, and pays out the prize ball to the player.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 then executes a storage process for checking the increase / decrease in the number of start storages as the process of step S20. Next, as the process of step S21, a test terminal process, which is a process of outputting a test signal so that the control state of the pachinko machine 1 can be confirmed outside the gaming machine, is executed. After that, the drive control of the actuator that always operates is performed (step S22), the contents of the register are restored (step S23), and when the interrupt permission state is set (step S24), this control ends. It becomes.

With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 ms. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the interrupt process by the timer, but in the interrupt process, for example, only the flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred may be set. However, in this case, the game control process is executed in the main process.

FIG. 168 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol process process (step S14).

Assuming that the random numbers used for various lottery processes are updated (step S13), as shown in FIG. 168, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is first driven by the first start port sensor 3112. On condition that the detection signal is in the ON state (the ball has entered the first start port 2002) (step S31), the first special random number of the first special symbol is acquired from the above random number counter, and this is the first of the RAM. (I) The first start port passage process such as storing in the special symbol hold storage area is executed (step S32). Further, on condition that the detection signal by the second start port sensor 4004 is in the ON state (the ball has entered the second start port 2004) (step S33), the second special random number of the second special symbol is set to the above random number. A second start port passage process such as acquiring from a counter and storing this in the second special symbol hold storage area of the RAM is executed (step S34).

Next, it is determined whether or not the jackpot executing flag indicating that the jackpot gaming state is controlled is set (step S35), and if the jackpot executing flag is set, the jackpot gaming state is controlled. The jackpot control process (step S39) is executed. In the jackpot control process, when the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is stopped is a mode suggesting "15R jackpot A". The opening and closing of the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 are controlled according to the 15R big hit game state A, and the game ball accepted by the second big winning opening 2006 is placed in the first entrance 2431 or the second entrance 2432. In the 1st to 3rd rounds in which the distribution piece 2433 to be distributed to any of the above is driven and controlled to open the 2nd prize opening 2006, the game ball can be distributed to the 2nd entrance 2432. Execute the process set to. In addition, when the mode suggesting "15R jackpot B", the opening and closing control of the first winning opening 2005 and the second winning opening 2006 is performed according to the 15R jackpot gaming state B, and the second winning opening 2006 is used. The second reception in the first to third rounds in which the distribution piece 2433 that distributes the accepted game ball to either the first reception 2431 or the second reception 2432 is driven and controlled to open the second big winning opening 2006. The process of setting the valid state in the first round in which the game ball can be distributed to the entrance 2432 is executed.

Here, the "valid state" and the "invalid state" will be described. First, in the present embodiment, a "valid state" is provided as a state when the game ball is received at the second receiving port 2432. Here, the "valid state" is set to the second entrance 2432 in the first round in which the game ball can be distributed to the second entrance 2432 out of the first to third rounds in which the second major winning opening 2006 is opened. It is a state in which it is permissible (enabled) to control to a high probability state after the end of the big hit game state by accepting the game ball. Therefore, when the game ball is accepted at the second entrance 2432 in the "valid state", it is controlled to the high probability state after the end of the big hit game state. Further, in the present embodiment, the second receiving port 2432 has an "invalid state" different from the "valid state" as a state in which the game ball is not accepted. Here, in the "invalid state", the 2nd and 3rd rounds in which the game ball is distributed to the 1st entrance 2431 out of the 1st to 3rd rounds in which the 2nd big winning opening 2006 is opened and the 1st big winning opening 2005 are opened. In principle, the game ball is not accepted at the second entrance 2432, such as in the 4th to 15th rounds, and even if the game ball is accepted at the second entrance 2432, there is a high probability that the game ball will be accepted after the jackpot game state ends. A state in which control of the state is unacceptable (disabled). Therefore, even if the game ball is accepted at the second entrance 2432 in the "invalid state", it is not controlled to the high probability state after the end of the big hit game state. In addition, the "invalid state" is to enable the hall management side to be notified of information regarding the occurrence of such an abnormality when the game ball is accepted at the second entrance 2432 due to an abnormality such as fraudulent activity. , It is said that it is a period during which it is monitored whether or not the game ball is accepted at the second entrance 2432. In the present embodiment, the game ball is set to the "valid state" in a predetermined round (first round) that enables the game ball to be distributed to the second reception 2432, and the game ball is set to the second reception 2432. Whenever is accepted, it is controlled to a high probability state after the end of the big hit game state. Further, although the "invalid state" is set in a predetermined round (2nd to 15th rounds) in which the game ball is not distributed to the second entrance 2432, it may be set in the "valid state". In this way, even if the "valid state" is set in all rounds during the jackpot game state, the game ball is not accepted by the second entrance 2432 in principle in the 2nd to 15th rounds, so 2 to 15 As in the case of setting the "invalid state" in the round, it is important whether or not the game ball is accepted by the second entrance 2432 in the first round set in the "valid state".

Further, in the jackpot control process (step S41), after the opening control of the first major winning opening 2005 and the second major winning opening 2006 is performed, each set processing of the high probability flag, the time saving flag, and the time saving number counter is executed. .. The high probability flag is a flag indicating that the state is in a high probability state. During the execution of the jackpot game state based on the jackpot (15R jackpot A, 15R jackpot B), it is possible to distribute the game ball to the second entrance 2432 out of the 1st to 3rd rounds in which the second jackpot 2006 is opened. If the game ball is accepted at the second entrance 2432 during the valid state in the first round, the high probability flag is set because it is controlled to the high probability state (high probability time saving state) after the end of the big hit game state. Although it is set, if the game ball is not accepted at the second entrance 2432 during the valid state in the first round, it is not controlled to the high probability state (high probability time saving state) after the end of the big hit game state. Therefore, the high probability flag is not set. Then, when the high probability flag is set, the first special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 178, which will be described later, or when the counter value of the time reduction counter becomes "0" when the next big hit occurs or The high probability flag is reset by the second special symbol stop processing (not shown).

Further, the time saving flag is a flag indicating that the time saving state is reached, and is a big hit (15R big hit A, 15R big hit B) that controls the time saving state (high probability time saving state, low probability time saving state) after the end of the big hit game state. Set when ending the based jackpot game state. Then, when the time saving flag becomes a big hit next time, or when the counter value of the time saving number counter becomes "0", the first special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 178 described later or the second special symbol stop not shown is shown. It is reset by the process.

In addition, the time reduction counter is a counter that indicates the remaining number of fluctuations of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) as the number of continuations of the time reduction state, and is a time reduction state (high probability) after the end of the jackpot game state. When the jackpot game state based on the jackpot (15R jackpot A, 15R jackpot B) controlled to the time saving state (low probability time saving state) is ended, the number of continuations of the time saving state is set, and the time saving number counter is set. , The counter value is counted down every time the fluctuation display of the special symbol is executed until the counter value becomes "0", but when the next big hit occurs before the counter value becomes "0", FIG. 178, which will be described later. It is reset by the first special symbol stop processing shown in (1) or the second special symbol stop processing (not shown) (the counter value is returned to "0").

If the jackpot executing flag is not set, the value of the second special hold number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special symbol hold storage area is "0". (Step S36), the first special symbol process process including the lottery process related to the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is executed (step S37), and the second special symbol is stored in the second special symbol reservation storage area. On condition that the value of the second special hold number counter indicating the number of special random numbers is not "0" (step S36), the second special symbol including the lottery process related to the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped. The process process is executed (step S38). As described above, in this example, when the value of the second special hold number counter is not "0", the variation display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed.

FIG. 169 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first starting port passing process (step S32).

Now, if it is determined in the process of step S31 that the first start port sensor 3112 is in the ON state and the game ball has entered the first start port 2002, as shown in FIG. 169. In addition, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first acquires the counter value by the first special hold number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a as the process of step S41. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved first special symbols described above is the maximum value of "4".

In the process of step S41, when it is determined that the number of reserved first special symbols is not the maximum value, the following steps are taken to put the variable display control of the first special symbol into a new pending state. The processing of S42 to S44 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S42, the first special hold number counter is counted up (1 addition). Next, as the process of step S43, the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number are acquired from the random number counter. Next, as the process of step S44, each random number thus acquired is stored in the first special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the first special hold number counter in the RAM storage area of the main control MPU 1310a. Store in.

However, in the process of step S41, when it is determined that the number of reserved first special symbols is the maximum value, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, by terminating the processing without executing the processing of steps S42 to S44, the variation display control of the first special symbol is not newly put on hold.

FIG. 170 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the second starting port passing process (step S34).

Now, if it is determined in the process of step S33 that the second start port sensor 2593 is in the ON state and the game ball has entered the second start port 2004, as shown in FIG. 170. In addition, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first acquires the counter value by the second special hold number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a as the process of step S51. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved second special symbols described above is the maximum value of "4".

In the process of step S51, when it is determined that the number of reserved second special symbols is not the maximum value, the following steps are taken in order to newly put the variable display control of the second special symbol into the pending state. The processing of S52 to S54 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S52, the second special hold number counter is counted up (added by 1). Next, as the process of step S53, the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the variable random number are acquired from the random number counter. Next, as the process of step S54, each random number thus acquired is stored in the second special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the second special hold number counter in the RAM storage area of the main control MPU 1310a. Store in.

However, in the process of step S51, when it is determined that the number of reserved second special symbols is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, by terminating the processing without executing the processing of steps S52 to S54, the variation display control of the second special symbol is not newly put on hold.

FIG. 171 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process process (step S37). The first special symbol process process executed in step S37 of the special symbol process process and the second special symbol process process executed in step S38 of the special symbol process process are the same program modules, and are random numbers used for determination. Since the above and the table are different, only the first special symbol process process executed in step S37 of the special symbol process process will be described here. In the first special symbol process process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag.

1. 1. The first special random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is read, and based on the read first special random number, a lottery process for displaying the display mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped is performed. Design normal processing (step S80)
2. The first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81) in which the process of determining the mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped is performed based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped. )
3. 3. A lottery about the variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 based on the variable random number and the variation mode of the effect display executed on the main effect display device 1600 corresponding to the special symbol. First variation pattern setting process in which processing or the like is performed (step S82)
4. First special symbol variation processing (step S83) that waits until the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 is stopped.
5. The mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped, which is determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped, is displayed on the first special symbol display 1403. First special symbol stop processing (step S84) to stop the variable display of the first special symbol

The first special symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the first special symbol normal process (step S80) should be performed in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 167).

FIG. 172 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol normal processing (step S80).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal processing should be performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first, as shown in FIG. 172, first steps S101. As the process of, it is determined whether or not there is variable display control of the first special symbol in the hold state based on the counter value by the first special hold number counter. As a result, when it is determined that there is variable display control of the first special symbol in the hold state, it is then stored in the first special symbol hold storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a as the process of step S102. The random number stored in the earliest storage area of the random numbers related to the display mode of the first special symbol (for example, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, the variable random number) is read from the same RAM. .. Next, as the processing of steps S103 and S104, the first special hold number counter is counted down, and the first special symbol hold storage area of the RAM of the main control FIFO 1310a is stored in each storage area. The random numbers (first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped are shifted in the first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

Specifically, the first special symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and the random numbers extracted according to the occurrence of the start winning prize are stored in order from the first (earliest) area. Then, when a start winning prize occurs when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1-3) storage area, the extracted random number is stored in the n + 1th (n = 1-3) storage area, and the first prize is stored. When the start condition of the variable display based on the random number stored in the storage area of is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area. Various random numbers are moved to the N-1st (N = 2-4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the variable display control hold of the first special symbol occurs is identifiable and memorized, and the hold of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest hold (hold that occurred first). become.

Then, as the process of step S105, a jackpot determination process, which is a lottery process for winning the jackpot, is performed based on the first special random number of the first special symbol read out. After that, when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81) (step S106), this process ends.

FIG. 173 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the jackpot determination process (step S105).

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has a high probability time shown in FIG. 174 (A) if the current gaming state is a high probability state (high probability time saving state, high probability non-time saving state) (step S111). If the jackpot determination table is selected (step S112) and the current gaming state is a low probability state (step S111), the jackpot determination table at the time of low probability shown in FIG. 174 (A) is selected (step S113) and selected. The jackpot determination table is compared with the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S114).

The jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 174 (A) is stored in the ROM 4100d of the main control MPU 1310a, and when the gaming state is a low probability state (normal state (low probability non-time saving state) and time saving state (low probability time saving state)). It is provided with a jackpot determination table at a low probability used for, and a jackpot determination table at a high probability used when the gaming state is a high probability time (high probability time saving state). Then, in the jackpot determination table at the time of low probability, it matches the jackpot determination value indicating that one type of first special random number has won the jackpot, and the deviation determination indicating that 299 types of first special random numbers are out of the above. The first special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the values (big hit probability at low probability: 1/300). In the second special symbol process process executed in step S38 of the special symbol process process, the jackpot determination table at the time of low probability referred to for comparison with the second special random number is compared with the first special random number. Similar to the low-probability jackpot determination table referenced for this, it matches the jackpot determination value indicating that one type of second special random number has won the jackpot, and 299 types of second special random numbers are out of the above. The above-mentioned second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the deviation determination value indicating that (big hit probability at low probability: 1/300).

Further, in the big hit judgment table at the time of high probability, 10 kinds of first special random numbers including the same first special random number as the first special random number set in the big hit judgment table at low probability match the big hit judgment value. The first special random numbers are associated with each other so that the 290 kinds of first special random numbers match the outlier determination value (big hit probability at high probability: 1/30). As described above, in this embodiment, in the high-probability state (high-probability time-saving state), the jackpot determination values indicating that the jackpot has been won are the low-probability time (normal state (low-probability non-time-saving state)) and the time-saving state (low). Probability time saving state)) is increased to 10 times. In the second special symbol process process executed in step S38 of the special symbol process process, the jackpot determination table at the time of high probability referred to for comparison with the second special random number is compared with the first special random number. Similar to the high-probability jackpot judgment table referenced for this purpose, 10 types of second special random numbers including the same second special random number as the second special random number set in the low-probability jackpot judgment table will be the jackpot. The second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the jackpot judgment value indicating that the player has won and the 290 types of second special random numbers match the loss judgment value indicating that the second special random number is out of the above (at high probability). Big hit probability: 1/30).

When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is determined to be a big hit as a result of comparison between the selected jackpot determination table and the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S115). ), The jackpot flag indicating that the fluctuation has won the jackpot is set to end the process (step S116), and the selected jackpot determination table and the first special symbol read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process are read. If it is determined that the result is out of alignment as a result of comparison with the random numbers, the reach determination table (not shown) is compared with the reach random numbers read in step S102 (step S117). Then, as a result of comparing the reach determination table with the reach random number read in step S102, if it is determined that the reach is out of reach (step S118), a reach flag indicating that the fluctuation is reach is set and processing is performed. It ends (step S119).

FIG. 175 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first, as shown in FIG. 175. The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the jackpot determination process (step S105) is determined. The lottery processing result is determined by determining whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step S121).

If the jackpot flag is set in step S121, the main control MPU 1310a compares the first symbol random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing with the symbol determination table shown in FIG. 174 (B). (Step S122), the type of jackpot is determined, and the mode (stop symbol of the first special symbol) at the time of stopping the fluctuation control of the first special symbol corresponding to the determined type of jackpot is determined (step S123). On the other hand, if the jackpot flag is not set in step S121, the first special symbol is determined to be an out-of-order symbol as the mode when the fluctuation is stopped (step S124).

As shown in FIG. 174 (B), a symbol random number (first symbol random number, second symbol random number) is stored in the symbol determination table in a form associated with each determination result (15R jackpot A, 15R jackpot B). ing. In the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the type of jackpot is determined by specifying the determination result associated with the acquired symbol random number. In the symbol determination table of this example, the probability of determining the type of jackpot determined based on the first symbol random number and the probability of determining the type of jackpot determined based on the second symbol random number are set to be different. ing.

In particular,
1.15R The first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 are controlled to open and close according to the game state A, and the second big winning opening 2006 is opened for a short time in the first round (the game ball is open). Opening that is difficult to enter. For example, 0.5 seconds) and opening for a long time (opening that allows the game ball to enter (easy). For example, 20 seconds). If the game ball is accepted at the second entrance 2432 during the valid state in the first round, it is set to a state in which the game is controlled to a high probability state after the end of the jackpot game state by being accepted. After the end of the jackpot game state, the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) is controlled to a high probability time saving state until it is executed 100 times, while the second reception is performed during the valid state in the first round. When the game ball is not accepted at the entrance 2432, it is controlled to a low probability time saving state until the variation display of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) is executed 100 times after the end of the big hit game state. 15R jackpot A
2.15R The opening and closing of the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 is controlled according to the big hit game state B, and the second big winning opening 2006 is opened for a short time in the first round (the game ball is open). Opening that is difficult to enter. For example, when the ball is opened (for example, 0.5 seconds), it becomes an effective state (a state in which the game ball is accepted at the second entrance 2432 and is controlled to a high probability state after the end of the big hit game state). If the game ball is accepted at the second entrance 2432 during the valid state in the first round, the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) are displayed in a variable manner after the jackpot game state ends. Is controlled to a high probability time saving state until 100 times is executed, but if the game ball is not accepted at the second entrance 2432 during the valid state in the first round, a special symbol is displayed after the end of the jackpot game state. One of the two types of jackpots, 15R jackpot B, which controls the variable display of (first special symbol and second special symbol) to a low probability time saving state until it is executed 100 times, is determined.

In this example, a symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol and a symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol are provided. Then, in the symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol, the distribution of the judgment values is set to be different from that of the symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol, so that the determination ratio of each jackpot is different. ing. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 174 (B), in the symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol, among the 15R jackpot A and the 15R jackpot B, the 15R jackpot A (1 round) which is relatively advantageous to the player. There is a high probability that the game ball will be accepted by the second entrance 2432 during the valid state with the eyes, and there is a high probability that the game ball will be controlled to the high probability state after the end of the big hit game state. Although it is set, 15R jackpot B, which is relatively disadvantageous to the player (the probability that the game ball will be accepted at the second entrance 2432 during the valid state in the first round is low, and it is high after the jackpot game state ends. Distribution of 50 judgment values is set for a jackpot with a low probability of controlling to a probability state). On the other hand, in the symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol, the distribution of the determination value is set only for the 15R jackpot A, which is relatively advantageous to the player, among the 15R jackpot A and the 15R jackpot B. In this way, at the time of the big hit on the first special symbol side, since either the 15R big hit A or the 15R big hit B having different degrees of advantage of the player is determined, what kind of big hit is determined at the time of the first big hit. Can be noticed. Further, in the time saving state controlled after the end of the big hit game state, the game on the second special symbol side (the game that allows the game ball to enter the second starting port 2004) is performed, but the second special symbol At the time of the big hit on the side, the 15R big hit game A is always decided, so it is possible to pay attention only to how much prize ball amount can be obtained at the time of consecutive villas. Therefore, the game is not monotonous because the game characteristics change between the first big hit and the consecutive villas.

Further, when the type of jackpot is determined, the stop symbol corresponding to the type of jackpot is determined as the mode when the first special symbol is stopped. Specifically, when the 15R jackpot A is determined, the 15R jackpot A symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol, and when the 15R jackpot B is determined, the 15R jackpot B symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol. In the second special symbol stop symbol setting process (not shown), when the 15R jackpot A is determined, the 15R jackpot A symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol.

Then, after the determination process for the stop symbol is performed in this way, as the process of step S125, any of these lottery results (type of jackpot, missed reach, or missed) is instructed (the mode of the stop symbol of the first special symbol is indicated). A determination result notification command corresponding to each of the lottery results is set so that the instruction)) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. After that, as the process of step S126, this process ends when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first variation pattern setting process (step S82). Peripheral control MPU1511a starts variable display of left, middle, and right decorative symbols based on the received determination result notification command and variation pattern command, and stops and displays in the order of left decorative symbol → right decorative symbol → middle decorative symbol. The main effect display device 1600 is displayed and controlled as described above.

Specifically, the peripheral control MPU1511a is one of the jackpots related to the first special symbol from the received determination result notification command as the mode (stop symbol) at the time of stopping the fluctuation of the decorative symbol displayed on the main effect display device 1600. When the 15R jackpot A is specified, the 15R jackpot A symbol (combination of the same decorative symbols) is determined, and when the 15R jackpot B is specified, the 15R jackpot B symbol (common to the 15R jackpot A symbol) is determined. When the variation time specified from the variation pattern command elapses (at the end of the reach effect), the determined stop symbol is displayed and controlled on the main effect display device 1600. In this way, when the decorative symbol displayed on the main effect display device 1600 is fluctuated and stopped by either the 15R jackpot A symbol or the 15R jackpot B symbol, it is determined from the stop symbol of the decorative symbol that it is a jackpot. However, since a common symbol is used as the 15R jackpot A symbol and the 15R jackpot B symbol, it is not possible to discriminate between the 15R jackpot A and the 15R jackpot B.

Further, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is a mode (stop symbol) at the time of stopping the fluctuation of the decorative symbol displayed on the main effect display device 1600. If the design (combination of decorative patterns that are not the same, but the left and right decorative patterns are the same) is determined and the outlier is specified, the outlier design (combination of the decorative patterns that are not the same, but the left and right decorations) is not accompanied by reach. The symbols are determined to be non-identical), and when the variation time specified from the variation pattern command elapses (at the end of the game effect), the determined stop symbol is displayed and controlled on the main effect display device 1600.

FIG. 176 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first fluctuation pattern setting process (step S82).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first fluctuation pattern setting process should be performed, the jackpot flag is set in the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 as shown in FIG. 176. If so (step S141), the type of jackpot determined in step S123 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process and the variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of jackpot according to the current gaming state are selected (step). S142), if the reach flag is set (step S143), a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach according to the current gaming state is selected (step S144), and both the jackpot flag and the reach flag are both. If it is not set, that is, if it is a normal deviation (a deviation that does not execute the reach effect), a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of the deviation is selected (step S145).

Then, the variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the variation random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S146), and the determined variation pattern is started. A variation pattern command to be notified to the control board 1510 is set, and variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 is started (step S147). Further, the main control MPU 1310a sets the fluctuation time set corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined to determine the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation timer (step S148). As a result, the effect control is performed by the first special symbol display 1403 and the main effect display device 1600 for the fluctuation time determined in this way.

The fluctuation pattern table of this example is provided with a plurality of types for each determination result based on a special random number (first special random number, second special random number) and a symbol random number (first symbol random number, second symbol random number). Further, in the fluctuation pattern set in each fluctuation pattern table, a plurality of fluctuation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for the fluctuation display control of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is described above. It is stored in a form associated with each variable random number. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a includes the selected variation pattern table and the variation random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing among a plurality of types of variation pattern tables according to the determination result based on the special random number and the symbol random number. By comparing the above and acquiring the fluctuation time information associated with the read fluctuation random number from this table, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is determined. As a result, the lottery process for the variation pattern of the above special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. The fluctuation pattern table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 1310a.

Further, in the variation pattern table at the time of reach of this example, it is set to determine the mode type of the reach effect to be executed by comparing the determination value indicating which reach effect is to be executed with the variable random number. .. For example, among the reach effects, the super reach effect has a higher expectation of a big hit than the normal reach effect, and when the super reach effect is executed, the player's expectation for the big hit gaming state is increased.

Further, when the variation display control of the first special symbol is started, the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is set so that the process is transferred to the first special symbol variation process (step S83) as the process of step S149. This process ends when the update is performed.

In this example, in the fluctuation pattern table at the time of disconnection, the fluctuation time information of the special symbol set to about 1 second at the time of shortening is associated with the above special symbol random number (first special symbol, second special symbol), but is not. When the time is shortened, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is set in such a form that the fluctuation time information of the special symbol set to about 12 seconds is associated with the special symbol random number (first special symbol, second special symbol). That is, the variation pattern at the time of loss selected at the time reduction is compared with the variation pattern at the time of deviation selected at the non-time reduction, so that the time required for the variation display control of the special symbol is extremely short. The fluctuation time information of the symbol is set.

FIG. 177 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol variation processing (step S83).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation process should be performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first, as shown in FIG. 177, first steps S171. As the process of, the fluctuation timer in which the fluctuation time is set according to the fluctuation pattern determined in the lottery process (step S82) for the fluctuation pattern is subtracted by 1. Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation time timer is 0, that is, the lottery fluctuation time has elapsed (step S172), the process proceeds to step S173. That is, in the process of step S173, this process ends when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop process (step S84).

FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop processing (step S84).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop processing should be performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first, as shown in FIG. 178, first steps S181. As the process of, the display control for displaying the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process on the first special symbol display 1403 is performed, and the first special on the main effect display device 1600. Stop of the symbol A stop display command for instructing the derivation display of the display result of the decorative symbol according to the symbol is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S182).

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines whether or not the counter value of the time reduction counter value in which the time reduction flag is set and the number of continuations of the time reduction state is set is "0". (Step S183). Then, if this counter value is not "0", after counting down the time reduction counter (step S184), it is further determined whether or not the counter value of the simultaneous reduction counter is "0" (step S185). .. As a result, if the counter value is "0", the time saving flag is reset, and if the high probability flag is set, the high probability flag is reset (step S186). When it is determined that the counter value of the time reduction counter is "0" in the process of step S183, or when it is determined that the time reduction counter is not "0" in the process of step S185. At that point, the process proceeds to step S187.

When the jackpot flag is set (step S187), a jackpot start command indicating to start the jackpot game state is set (step S188), and the jackpot game state is started (the jackpot round start command is set). The waiting time (the period for displaying the start of the jackpot game state, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S189). Then, when the high probability flag is set, the high probability flag is reset, when the time saving flag is set, the time saving flag is reset, and the counter value of the time saving count counter is further increased. If it is not "0", the counter value is reset (returned to "0"), and then the jackpot executing flag indicating that the jackpot game state is being executed is set (step S190), and the first special symbol process is performed. This process ends when the flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol normal process, which is the initial value (step S191).

The jackpot start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is individually prepared according to the type of jackpot (15R jackpot A, 15R jackpot B). In step S188, a jackpot start command (15R jackpot A start command, 15R jackpot B start command) is set according to the type of jackpot. As a result, the effect corresponding to the type of the jackpot instructed by the jackpot start command is executed by the main effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, and the like.

FIG. 179 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the jackpot control process (step S39).

In step S189, the waiting time until the start of the jackpot game state is set in the interval timer. However, in the process of step S401, after the waiting time set in the interval timer has elapsed, FIG. 179 is shown in FIG. As shown, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 controls the opening and closing of the first prize opening 2005 and the second prize opening 2006, and opens the second prize opening 2006 in the first to third rounds. Among them, the large winning opening opening / closing process (step S402) of setting the valid state in the first round (a state in which the game ball is accepted at the second entrance 2432 and is controlled to a high probability state after the end of the big hit game state). And, out of the 1st to 3rd rounds to open the 2nd big winning opening 2006, the game ball accepted by the 2nd big winning opening 2006 can be distributed to the 2nd entrance 2432. The second inlet opening / closing process (step S403) for driving and controlling the fragment 2433 and monitoring whether or not the game ball is accepted at the second inlet 2432 during the valid state in the first round is executed in order. do.

FIG. 180 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the large winning opening opening / closing process (step S402).

Now, if it is determined in the process of step S411 that the first prize opening 2005 or the second prize opening 2006 is in the open state, as shown in FIG. 180, the main control board 1310 The main control MPU 1310a is set for a predetermined time (for example, from the open state of the first major winning opening 2005 or the second major winning opening 2006) according to the operation schedule of the first major winning opening 2005 and the second major winning opening 2006 described later. , 20 seconds when opened for a long time, 0.5 seconds when opened for a short time) (step S412), or the first major winning opening 2005 or the second major winning opening 2006 in the open state. When the maximum number of winnings (for example, nine) is won in the game ball (step S413), the open state of the first major winning opening 2005 or the second major winning opening 2006 is controlled to be closed (step S414). Then, when it is determined that the current round is ended by controlling the first major winning opening 2005 or the second major winning opening 2006 in the closed state (step S415), the command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. As a command, a jackpot round end command corresponding to the type of jackpot and the current number of rounds is set (step S416), and the process proceeds to step S428.

Further, if it is determined in the process of step S411 that the first prize opening 2005 or the second prize opening 2006 is in the closed state, as shown in FIG. 180, the main control board 1310 The main control MPU 1310a is at the timing to open the first major winning opening 2005 or the second major winning opening 2006 according to the operation schedule of the first major winning opening 2005 and the second major winning opening 2006, which will be described later. At that time (step S417), if it is determined that a new round is started by controlling the first prize opening 2005 or the second prize opening 2006 in the open state (step S418), the peripheral control board As a command to be transmitted to 1510, a jackpot round start command corresponding to the type of jackpot and the number of new rounds is set (step S419). Then, when it is determined that it is time to set the valid state flag according to the state setting schedule of the second entrance 2432, which will be described later, that is, among the first to third rounds in which the second big winning opening 2006 is opened. If it is the start of the first round (step S420), the valid state flag is set (step S421). When the valid state flag is set, if it is determined in step S420 that it is not the timing to set the valid state flag, that is, at the start of the second round, the valid state flag is reset. There is a need to. Then, the closed first prize opening 2005 or the second prize opening 2006 is controlled to be open (step S422), and the process proceeds to step S428. When it is determined that a new round will not be started by controlling the first prize opening 2005 or the second prize opening 2006 in the open state (such as the second opening in the same round). (Step S418), or when it is determined that it is not the timing to set the valid state flag (when it is not the start of the first round) (step S420), the closed state first prize opening 2005 or The second major winning opening 2006 is controlled to be in the open state (step S422), and the process proceeds to step S428. Thereby, the main effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, and the like can execute the effect according to the type of the jackpot and the current number of rounds instructed by the jackpot round start command and the jackpot round end command.

The valid state flag indicates that the state is set to the valid state (a state in which the game ball is accepted at the second entrance 2432 and is controlled to a high probability state after the end of the big hit game state). It is a flag. In the first round of the first to third rounds in which the second major winning opening 2006 is opened, the game ball accepted by the second major winning opening 2006 in the second entrance opening / closing process (step S403) described later is first. By driving and controlling the distribution piece 2433 that is distributed to either the reception port 2431 or the second reception port 2432, the game ball can be accepted at the second reception port 2432 and is set to the effective state.

Further, if it is determined in the process of step S428 that the game ball has been accepted by the first prize opening 2005 or the second prize opening 2006, as shown in FIG. 180, the main control board 1310 The main control MPU 1310a of the above sets a grand prize opening ball entry command as a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S429), and ends this process. As a result, when the big winning opening command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 side, the main effect is to accept the game ball into the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006. It can be executed by a display device 1600, a lamp / LED, a speaker, or the like.

Further, if it is determined in the process of step S417 that it is not the timing to open the first prize opening 2005 or the second prize opening 2006, as shown in FIG. 180, the main control When the main control MPU 1310a of the substrate 1310 finishes all the rounds by repeating the open state and the closed state of the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 (step S423), the big hit is being executed. Reset the flag (step S424). Then, when it is determined that the second entrance passage flag, which will be described later, is set (step S425), the high probability flag is set (step S426), the time saving flag is set, and the counter value of the time saving count counter is set. This process ends when the initial value (for example, 100 times) is set as the number of times the time saving state is continued in (step S427). If it is determined that the second entrance passage flag is not set (step S425), the high probability flag is not set, the time reduction flag is set, and the time reduction state is set in the counter value of the time reduction counter. This process ends when the initial value (for example, 100 times) is set as the number of continuations of (step S427). In this way, when it is determined that the second entrance passage flag is set (the game ball is accepted at the second entrance 2432 during the valid state in the first round), the high probability flag and the high probability flag and The time saving flag is set to control the time saving state with high probability, but the second entrance passage flag is not set (the game ball was not accepted at the second entrance 2432 during the valid state in the first round). If it is determined that, only the time saving flag is set and the time saving state is controlled with a low probability.

FIG. 181 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the second entrance opening / closing process (step S403).

Now, if it is determined in the process of step S431 that the second receiving port 2432 is in the open state (the state in which the game ball is distributed to the second receiving port 2432 side by the distribution piece 2433), FIG. As shown, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has been opened for a predetermined time (for example, 10 when it is open for a long time) from the open state of the second inlet 2432 according to the operation schedule of the distribution piece 2433 described later. The current round (first round) is ended when (step S423) elapses (step S423) when the second prize is opened for a short time, or by controlling the second prize opening 2006 to be closed. Occasionally (step S433), the open second receiving port 2432 is controlled to be closed (a state in which the game ball is distributed to the first receiving port 2431 side by the distribution piece 2433) (step S434).

Further, if it is determined in the process of step S431 that the second receiving port 2432 is in the closed state, as shown in FIG. 181, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is subjected to the vibration described later. When it is time to open the second inlet 2432 according to the operation schedule of the fragment 2433 (step S435), the closed second inlet 2432 is controlled to be open (step S436).

Next, in the process of step S437, if it is determined that the game ball has been accepted by the second receiving port 2432 in the open state, as shown in FIG. 181, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 , In the setting of the valid state flag, it is determined whether or not the game ball is accepted at the second entrance 2432 during the valid state in the first round (step S438). If it is determined that the game ball has been accepted by the second inlet 2432 during the valid state in the first round (step S438), the second inlet is in the valid state in the first round. When the second entrance passage flag indicating that the game ball has been accepted is not set in 2432 (step S439), the second inlet passage flag is set (step S440) and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. This process ends when the second entrance passage command is set as the command (step S411). In this way, unless the game ball is accepted at the second entrance 2432 during the valid state in the first round, the second entrance passage flag is not set, and the high probability flag is set in step S426. Since it is not set, it is not controlled to a high probability state after the end of the jackpot game state. Further, when the command for passing through the second inlet / outlet is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 side, the effect according to the acceptance of the game ball to the second inlet / outlet 2432 is performed by the main effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, etc. Can be executed by.

FIG. 182 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal symbol process process (step S15).

Now, if it is determined in the process of step S801 that the detection signal by the gate sensor 2401 is in the ON state and the game ball has passed through the gate portion 2003, as shown in FIG. 182, the main As the process of step S802, the main control MPU 1310a of the control board 1310 first executes a gate passage process such as acquiring a normal random number of a normal symbol from the random number counter and storing it in the normal symbol hold storage area of the RAM. do.

Next, in the normal symbol process process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag.

1. 1. A normal symbol normal process (step S803) in which a normal random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is read, and a lottery process for displaying the display mode when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped is performed based on the read normal random number.
2. Normal symbol fluctuation time determination process (step S804) in which a lottery process or the like is performed for the fluctuation mode (variation time) of the normal symbol displayed on the normal symbol display 1402 based on the normal symbol fluctuation random number.
3. 3. Normal symbol variation processing (step S805) that waits until the variation display of the normal symbol on the ordinary symbol display 1402 is stopped.
4. The variation display of the normal symbol so that the mode when the variation control of the normal symbol is stopped, which is determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variation control of the normal symbol is stopped, is displayed on the normal symbol display 1402. Normal symbol stop processing (step S806)
5. When the result of the lottery process for the mode when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped is a mode suggesting "hit the normal figure", the second start port door 2411 rotates to play the game to the second start port 2004. Ordinary electric accessory opening process (step S807) for executing a process for controlling the acceptance of balls.

The normal symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the normal symbol normal process (step S803) should be performed in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 167).

FIG. 183 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the gate portion passing process (step S802).

Now, assuming that the detection signal by the gate sensor 2401 is in the ON state in the process of step S801 and it is determined that the game ball has passed through the gate portion 2003, as shown in FIG. 183, the above As the process of step S811, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first acquires the counter value by the normal hold number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved symbols is "4", which is the maximum value.

In the process of step S811, when it is determined that the number of held normal symbols is not the maximum value, the following steps S812 to S814 are performed in order to put the variable display control of the normal symbols into a new hold state. Processing will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S812, the normal hold number counter is counted up (1 addition). Next, as the process of step S813, the ordinary random number and the normal figure variation random number are acquired from the random number counter. Next, as the process of step S814, each random number thus acquired is stored in the normal symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the normal hold number counter in the RAM storage area of the main control MPU 1310a.

However, in the process of step S811, when it is determined that the number of reserved normal symbols is the maximum value, the variable display control of the ordinary symbols is not newly suspended. That is, by not executing the processes of steps S812 to S814, the fluctuation display control of the normal symbol is not newly put on hold.

FIG. 184 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal symbol normal processing (step S803).

When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol normal process should be performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first, as the process of step S821, as shown in FIG. 184. Based on the counter value of the normal hold number counter, it is determined whether or not there is variable display control of the normal symbol in the hold state. As a result, when it is determined that there is a variable display control of the normal symbol in the hold state, then, as the process of step S822, the normal symbol is stored in the normal symbol hold storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a. The random number stored in the earliest storage area among the random numbers (for example, ordinary random numbers and ordinary random numbers) related to the display mode of the symbol is read from the RAM. Next, as the processing of steps S823 and S824, when the normal hold number counter is counted down and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol stored in each storage area of the normal hold storage area of the RAM of the main control FIFO 1310a is stopped. Random numbers (ordinary random numbers, random numbers that fluctuate in the normal figure) related to the display mode in the above are shifted in the first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

Specifically, the normal symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and random numbers extracted according to the passage of the game ball to the gate portion 2003 are sequentially extracted from the first (first) area. Remember. Then, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 when the random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the random number extracted in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area is stored. When the start condition of the variation display based on the random number stored in the first storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read and the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area is stored. The various random numbers stored in are moved to the N-1st (N = 2-4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the fluctuation display control hold of the normal symbol occurs can be identifiable and stored, and the hold of the fluctuation display control is released in order from the earliest hold (hold that occurred first). ..

Next, if the current gaming state is the time saving state (low probability time saving state, high probability time saving state) (step S826), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is a normal drawing hit determination table (not shown). ) Is selected (step S826), and if the current gaming state is a non-time saving state (low probability non-time saving state) (step S825), a non-time saving hit determination table (not shown) is selected (step). S827), the selected normal symbol hit determination table is compared with the ordinary random number read in step S822 of the normal symbol normal processing (step S828).

The normal figure hit determination table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU1310a, and is used when the game state is a time saving time (low probability time saving state, high probability time saving state). It is equipped with a non-time-saving normal map hit determination table used when the game state is non-time-saving (low-probability non-time-saving state). Then, in the time-saving normal figure hit judgment table referred to for comparison with the normal random numbers, all 251 kinds of normal random numbers match the normal figure hit judgment value indicating that the normal random numbers were won, and the normal figure hit. The above-mentioned ordinary random numbers are associated with each other so as not to match the out-of-order judgment value indicating that the outlier is obtained. In this way, in the short time, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003, the player always wins the game, and the second start port door 2411 rotates to the second start port 2004. It controls the acceptance of game balls.

In addition, in the non-time saving normal figure hit judgment table referred to for comparison with the normal random numbers, it is possible that all 251 types of normal random numbers match the normal figure hit judgment value indicating that the normal random numbers have been won. The above ordinary random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the deviation determination value of the normal figure, which indicates that the normal figure is out of order. In this way, in the non-time saving time, even if the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003, it is not won in the normal drawing, so the second starting door 2411 rotates and the second There is no control over the acceptance of the game ball into the starting port 2004.

When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is determined to be a normal figure hit as a result of comparison between the selected normal figure hit determination table and the normal random number read in step S822 of the normal symbol normal processing (step S829). ), After setting the normal symbol hit flag indicating that the fluctuation is won per normal symbol (step S830), the normal symbol hit as the mode (normal symbol stop symbol) when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped. The symbol is determined (step S831). On the other hand, when the result of comparison between the selected ordinary symbol hit determination table and the ordinary random number read in step S822 of the ordinary symbol normal processing is determined to be out of order, the variation of the ordinary symbol is determined. A symbol out of the ordinary symbol is determined as an mode (stop symbol of the normal symbol) when the control is stopped (step S832). After that, when the above-mentioned ordinary symbol process flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the above-mentioned ordinary symbol fluctuation time determination process (step S804) (step S833), this process is terminated.

In this example, in the control of the time saving state, the winning probability of the normal symbol is set to 251/251, the lottery result of the normal symbol is always a hit, and the time required for the fluctuation display control of the normal symbol is extreme. It is shortened to a short predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds). Then, when the lottery result of the normal symbol is won, the second start port 2004 is controlled by an opening / closing pattern that closes in an open state for an extremely long predetermined time (for example, 5.5 seconds). .. That is, during the control of the time saving state, the lottery result of the normal symbol is extremely high, the time required for the fluctuation display control of the normal symbol is constant and short, and the second starting port 2004 is in the open state. Because of the long time, it is much easier to win the game ball to the second starting port 2004, and it is more efficient to aim at the second starting port 2004 than the first starting port 2002. You can win a prize. In the control of the non-time saving state, the winning probability of the normal symbol is set to 0/251, and the lottery result of the normal symbol is not always a hit, and the second starting port 2004 is aimed at. Also, the game ball cannot be won in the second starting port 2004.

As described above, during the control of the non-time saving state, even if the second starting port 2004 is aimed at, the game ball cannot be won by the second starting port 2004, so that the first starting port 2002 is used. The game ball must be launched (so-called "left-handed") aiming at the left side of the center accessory 2500 so that the game ball wins a prize. Further, in the game area 5a on the left side of the center accessory 2500, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted in front of the game panel 1100 in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, and the game ball hits the obstacle nails. By touching the game ball, various movements are given to the game ball so that it flows down. Therefore, even if a game ball is hit on the left side of the center accessory 2500 aiming at the first starting port 2002, the first starting port 2002 is not always won, and the first starting port 2002 is won. The missing game ball is discharged to the outside from the out port 1126 provided at the lower center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a.

On the other hand, during the control of the time saving state, it is possible to win the game ball more efficiently by aiming at the second start port 2004 than at the first start port 2002. Therefore, the game ball can be won at the second start port 2004. Must shoot a game ball (so-called "right-handed") aiming at the right side of the center accessory 2500 so that the player wins the prize. Further, due to the structure of the game board 5, when the second starting port 2004 is opened, if a game ball is driven into the right side of the center accessory 2500 aiming at the second starting port 2004, the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003. The game ball has come to win the second starting port 2004 with an extremely high probability. Therefore, during the control of the time saving state, the game ball driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500 is hardly wasted (is discharged to the outside from the out port 1126 or the sub out port 2007), and the non-time saving state is not shortened. Compared with the first starting port 2002 during state control, the game ball comes to win the second starting port 2004 extremely efficiently.

Further, during the control of the time saving state, in addition to the structure of the game board 5, there is an extremely high probability that the lottery result of the normal symbol will be a hit when passing through the gate portion 2003, and the variation display of the normal symbol will be displayed. The time required for control is constant and short, and the open state of the second starting port 2004 is long, so that the game ball can easily win a prize in the second starting port 2004, and further, the game is played in the second starting port 2004. When the ball wins, the time required for controlling the fluctuation display of the special symbol is set to about 1 second, which is extremely shorter than the range of 10 to 120 seconds during the control of the non-time saving state. It is possible to digest the fluctuation display control of the symbol (holding the fluctuation display control of the special symbol). That is, when the time reduction state is controlled after the end of the big hit game state, the game ball is hit on the right side of the center accessory 2500 aiming at the second start port 2004, and the big hit is made again in a short time. It is possible to control the jackpot game state and expect the acquisition of many game balls. As described above, in the present embodiment, the number of game balls paid out by winning the game ball to the second start port 2004 is one, so that the game ball to the second start port 2004 Even if prizes occur frequently, it is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side while enhancing the interest of the player.

[9. Peripheral control board control processing]
Next, the processing executed by the peripheral control MPU 1511a mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 will be described. FIG. 185 is a flowchart showing a processing procedure for the control performed by the peripheral control MPU 1511a mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 185, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control MPU1511a performs the initial setting process (step S501). In this initial setting process, a process of clearing the RAM of the peripheral control MPU 1511a mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 is performed. Note that interrupts are prohibited during this initial setting process, and interrupts are permitted after the initial setting process. When the initial setting process (step S501) is completed, the loop process for monitoring whether or not the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set is started (step S502).

In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU1511a generates an interrupt every 2 ms and executes a 2 ms steady process. In the 2 ms steady-state process, the process of counting up the 16 ms progress monitoring counter (adding 1 to the 16 ms progress monitor counter) is executed, and when the value of the 16 ms progress monitor counter becomes 8, that is, when 16 ms has elapsed, 16 ms has elapsed. Along with setting the flag T, the process of resetting (setting 0) the 16 ms progress monitoring counter is executed. As described above, the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set (set) to "1" every 16 ms in the 2 ms steady processing, and is usually set (reset) to "0". When the 16 ms elapsed flag is set in step S502 (16 ms elapsed flag T is "1"), after resetting the 16 ms elapsed flag (step S503), 16 ms steady processing is performed (step S504).

In this 16 ms steady-state process, a process of controlling the main effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, and the like is executed based on the command received from the main control board 1310. When the 16 ms steady-state processing is completed, the process returns to step S502 again, and the above-mentioned steps S503 to S504 are repeated every time the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set, that is, every 16 ms. On the other hand, when the 16 ms elapsed flag T is not set in step S502 (16 ms elapsed flag T is “0”), loop processing is performed until the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set.

FIG. 186 is a flowchart showing an example of a 16 ms steady-state process executed every 16 ms in the sub-main process. In the 16 ms steady-state process, the peripheral control MPU1511a executes the processes of steps S601 to S606. In the command analysis process of step S601, the command received from the main control board 1310 is analyzed. In the effect control process of step S602, the variation pattern setting process (step S147 of the first variation pattern setting process, the process corresponding to the first variation pattern setting process of the second special symbol process process (second variation pattern setting process)). The control process related to the main effect display device 1600 is executed based on the reception of the variation pattern command transmitted by being set.

Further, in the sound control process of step S603, the control process related to the speaker or the like is executed. In the lamp control process of step S604, the control process related to the lamp / LED provided in the pachinko machine 1 is executed. In the information output process of step S605, a process of transmitting a lamp / LED lighting signal to the lamp drive board 4017 is executed. In the random number update process of step S606, a process of updating a random number (for example, a look-ahead random number) used for various settings in the effect control process (step S602) is executed.

The processing of steps S601 to S606 in the 16ms steady-state processing is completed within 16ms. Even if it takes 16 ms or more from the start of the 16 ms steady-state process to the end of the 16 ms steady-state process, the 16 ms steady-state process is immediately started from the beginning (command in step S601) 16 ms after the start of the 16 ms steady-state process. Do not execute (from the analysis process). That is, when 16 ms elapses during the execution of the 16 ms steady state process, only the 16 ms progress flag is set, and when it is determined in step S502 that the 16 ms progress flag is set after the end of the 16 ms steady state process, the 16 ms steady state process is performed. To start.

Further, in this embodiment, the random number update process (step S606) is executed in the 16 ms steady process to update various random numbers, but the timing (timing) for updating various random numbers is limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, various random numbers may be updated in either or both of the loop processing and the 16ms steady processing in the sub-main processing.

[10. Modification 1]
In the above example, as shown in FIG. 165, the back left decorative body 3354 and the back right decorative body 3454 are moved to the front of the main effect display device 1600, and these decorative bodies are luminescently decorated, and further, the center accessory 2500. The back front upper left decorative body 3112, the back front lower middle decorative body 3168, the back lower left decorative body 3253, and the back lower right decorative body 3263 provided on the outer outer periphery of the back surface are luminescently decorated with a predetermined color (for example, white). By displaying an effect image (V complementary decorative image) that is the same color as the intermediate decoration unit 3253a and the intermediate decoration unit 3263a and is continuous with them on the sub-effect display device 3240, a large size over substantially the entire height in the game area 5a is displayed. The V-shaped luminescent decoration is configured to be shown to the player, but when the peripheral control MPU1511a receives a specific variation pattern command, the back left decoration 3354 and the back right decoration are in front of the main effect display device 1600. Without moving the 3454, the light guide plates (first light guide plate 3135, second light guide plate 3136) provided in front of the main effect display device 1600 are replaced with the back left decorative body 3354 and the back right decorative body 3454 with a predetermined pattern. The light emitting decoration may be realized by the light emitting decoration integrated with the decorative body (including the display device) provided on the outer periphery of the center accessory 2500.

When a predetermined timing (specific timing based on the scheduler data, for example, a timing for executing the reach effect or a predetermined timing for the reach effect) arrives while the variable display of the decorative symbol is being executed on the main effect display device 1600, the "guidance" is displayed. Light emission control of the light plate (first light guide plate 3135, second light guide plate 3136) and one or both of the decorative body and the like provided on the outer periphery of the center accessory 2500 and the predetermined portion of the door frame 3 at the same time with the same color. Based on the "specific light emission effect pattern", the peripheral control MPU1511a emits light by controlling light emission of one or both of the light guide plate, the decorative body provided on the outer periphery of the center accessory 2500, and the predetermined portion of the door frame 3. The effect will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 187 to 191. In addition, in FIGS. 187 to 191, the left and right decorative symbols stop at the same symbol (“7” in this example) to reach the light guide plate (first light guide plate 3135, second light guide plate 3136) and the center. A light emitting effect is executed by a decorative body or the like provided on the outer periphery of the accessory 2500. Further, in the luminescent decorations of the first and second modifications, the luminescent decoration is shown in a "V shape" as in the above-described embodiment, but the mode of the luminescent decoration (emission color, decoration body to be luminescent, etc. (display) (Including the device)) is not limited to this, and the mode of luminescent decoration is not limited to one type, and when a specific variation pattern command is received, a plurality of types of modes (emission color and decoration body for luminescent decoration) are received. Etc. (including display device)), a light guide plate (first light guide plate 3135, second light guide plate 3136) and a decorative body or the like (display device) provided on the outer periphery of the center accessory 2500 in a mode determined by the peripheral control MPU1511a. ) And may be integrally luminescent and decorated.

Further, when the light emitting decoration is performed in any of a plurality of types of modes, the jackpot expectation may be different depending on the light emitting decoration mode. For example, the expectation of a big hit is highest when a "V-shaped" light emitting decoration is made with a red light emitting color (for example, only when the peripheral control MPU1511a receives a variation pattern command that becomes a big hit, the red light emitting color is "V-shaped". (Determined to be a V-shaped" luminescent decoration), the jackpot expectation is the lowest when the "V-shaped" luminescent decoration is made with the blue luminescent color (for example, the fluctuation that the peripheral control MPU1511a is out of order). Peripheral control MPU1511a determines the mode and executes the luminescent decoration in the determined mode so that the luminescent decoration is "V-shaped" with the blue luminescent color only when the pattern command is received. It may be (the jackpot expectation is different depending on the emission color), and the jackpot expectation is the highest when the "V-shaped" light emitting decoration is made (for example, the peripheral control MPU1511a is a jackpot variable pattern command). When it is received, it is decided to make a "V-shaped" light emitting decoration at a rate of 80/100, and when a variable pattern command that is out of order is received, it is "V-shaped" at a rate of 5/100. The expectation of a big hit is the lowest when the light emitting decoration of "one horizontal character" is made (for example, 5/100 when the peripheral control MPU1511a receives a variation pattern command which becomes a big hit). Decide on the mode of luminescent decoration of "one horizontal character" at the ratio of Peripheral control MPU1511a may determine the mode and execute the light emitting decoration in the determined mode (the jackpot expectation is different depending on the pattern (shape) of the light emitting decoration), or the bold "V shape". The peripheral control MPU1511a determines and determines the mode so that the jackpot expectation is the highest when the luminescent decoration is made, and the jackpot expectation is the lowest when the luminescent decoration is made in fine print and "V-shaped". The luminescent decoration may be performed in the above manner (the jackpot expectation is different depending on the line width), or a combination of these (for example, a bold "V-shaped" luminescent decoration with a red luminescent color is provided. The mode in which the peripheral control MPU1511a determines the mode so that the jackpot expectation is the highest in the case of the above, and the jackpot expectation is the lowest when the light emission decoration of the fine character "horizontal one character" is made with the blue emission color. (To execute luminescent decoration with) may be executed.

A single light guide plate (for example, the first light guide plate 3135) may be used to represent a plurality of types of patterns (shape and line width), or a plurality of light guide plates (for example, the first light guide plate 3135 and the first light guide plate 3135) may be used. (2) The light guide plate 3136) may be used to represent a plurality of types of patterns (shape and line width). When expressing multiple types of patterns (shape and line width) using a single light guide plate, the direction of light incident on the light guide plate (for example, light incident from above and light incident from the lateral direction) These patterns are drawn so that different patterns (shape and line width) appear. Further, when a plurality of types of patterns (shape and line width) are represented by using a plurality of light guide plates, different patterns (shape and line width) are drawn so as to appear for each light guide plate. Then, when a single light guide plate (for example, the first light guide plate 3135) is used to represent a plurality of types of patterns (shape and line width), the peripheral control MPU1511a is an LED (for example, of the light guide plate) according to the mode of light emission decoration. Of the LED provided near the upper side and light incident from the upper side of the light guide plate and the LED provided near the right side of the light guide plate and light incident from the right side of the light guide plate, the LED depending on the mode of light emission decoration) emits light. When the light guide plate is light-emitting and decorated in a desired manner and a plurality of types of patterns (shape and line width) are represented by using a plurality of light guide plates (for example, the first light guide plate 3135 and the second light guide plate 3136). Peripheral control MPU1511a emits light into the first LED 3141a and the first LED 3143a, which are light incident on the first light guide plate 3135, and LEDs corresponding to the light guide plate on which the pattern corresponding to the mode of the light emitting decoration is drawn (for example, the first LED 3141a and the first LED 3143a are light incident on the second light guide plate. The light guide plate is light-emitting and decorated in a desired manner by causing the second LED 3141b, LED 3142a, the second LED 3143b, and the LED 3144a (LED corresponding to the light guide plate on which the pattern corresponding to the mode of light emission decoration is drawn) to emit light. .. When a single light guide plate is used to represent a plurality of patterns, space can be saved in the front-rear direction. On the other hand, when a plurality of light guide plates are used to represent a plurality of patterns, the LEDs need only be arranged on one side, which saves space in the vertical or horizontal direction and reduces the number of LEDs installed. The cost can be reduced.

In FIG. 187, the first light guide plate of the first modification is light-emitting and decorated, and the lower back left decorative unit and the lower right decorative unit are approached while the lower back decorative unit of the lower back movable effect unit is in the lowered position. Then, using the back front upper left decoration body, the back front upper right decoration body, the sub-effect display device, the back lower left decoration body, and the back lower right decoration body, the back front decoration unit is light-emitting and decorated in a large V shape. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state, and FIG. 188 is a front view which shows the decoration of the 1st light guide plate of the modification 1. In FIG. 189, the first light guide plate of the first modification is light-emittingly decorated, and the lower back left decorative unit and the lower right decorative unit are approached in a state where the lower back decorative unit of the lower back movable effect unit is in the lowered position. The position is a large V-shaped light emitting decoration using the back front upper left decoration body, the back front upper right decoration body, the sub-effect display device, the back lower left decoration body, and the back lower right decoration body of the back front decoration unit. It is a front view of the pachinko machine shown in the state of being made. FIG. 190 is a simplified cross-sectional view of the center accessory of Modification 2 cut at substantially the center in the left-right direction and viewed from the side. FIG. 191 shows a state in which the light guide plate of the second modification is light-emitting decorated, and the left intermediate decorative body, the right intermediate decorative body, the left unit decorative cover, and the right unit cover are light-emitting decorated in a super-large V shape. It is a front view of the pachinko machine shown by. In FIGS. 187 to 191 for convenience, the light and darkness at the time of light emission is reversed, the light emitting decoration of the decorative body is shown by cross hatching, and the light emitting decoration of the light guide plate is shown by single hatching.

As shown in FIG. 187, the first LED 3141a of the back front middle left decorative substrate 3141 and the first LED 3143a of the back front middle right decorative substrate 3143 are made to emit light with a predetermined emission color, and the first light guide plate 3135 has a predetermined pattern. In the case of light emission decoration (when light emission is controlled based on a specific light emission effect pattern), the back lower left decoration unit 3250 and the back lower right decoration unit 3260 are rotated to close positions, and the back front decoration unit 3100 Back front upper left decorative board 3120 backs front upper left decorative body 3112 middle decorative part 3112a, back front upper right decorative body 3113 middle decorative part 3113a, back front left lower decorative board 3171 and back front right lower decorative board 3172 The middle decoration part 3168a of the front lower middle decoration body 3168, the middle decoration part 3253a of the back lower left decoration body 3253 and the middle decoration part 3263a of the back lower right decoration body 3263 by the back lower left decoration board 3254 and the back lower right decoration board 3264. With a pattern that emits light (for example, red) with the same color (for example, red) as the pattern that emits and decorates the first light guide plate 3135, and further emits and decorates the first light guide plate 3135 on the sub-effect display device 3240. By displaying an effect image (V complementary decoration image) that is continuous with them in the same color, the light emitting decoration of the first light guide plate 3135 is expanded so as to cover almost the entire height in the game area 5a, and a large V The character-shaped luminous decoration can be shown to the player.

As a result, it is possible to show the player a large V-shaped light emitting decoration in which the light emitting decoration of the first light guide plate 3135 is larger than that of the center accessory 2500 and is extended so as to cover substantially the entire height of the game area 5a. It is possible to convince the player that an advantageous gaming state (for example, "big hit game") in which the player is advantageous will occur, and it is possible to greatly increase the expectation of the player. Further, when the decorative symbols that are variablely displayed on the main effect display device 1600 reach the reach, when these light emission effects are executed, a large V-shape that is expanded so as to cover substantially the entire height in the game area 5a. The light emitting decoration is suddenly performed, and the light emitting decoration is performed at a position closer to the player than the main effect display device 1600 (a position closer to the player than the main liquid crystal display device 1600) and visually recognized by the player. Since it can be made to surprise the player, it can be surprised and unexpected, and the deterioration of the game interest can be suppressed.

In addition, there is little difference in the front-rear direction from the decorative body (including the display device) arranged behind the game panel 1100 on the outer periphery of the center accessory 2500, which is arranged closer to the player than the main effect display device 1600. Since the light guide plate (first light guide plate 3135 in this example) is used, the light guide plate (first light guide plate 3135 in this example) and a decorative body or the like (display device) provided behind the game panel 1100 on the outer periphery of the center accessory 2500. (Including) and can be light-emitting decorated in a state close to flat, thereby the light-emitting decoration on the light guide plate (first light guide plate 3135 in this example) and the rear of the game panel 1100 on the outer periphery of the center accessory 2500. Since the continuity with the light emitting decoration of the decorative body or the like (including the display device) provided in the above is increased, a more integrated light emitting decoration can be realized. In addition, as long as it can be recognized as an integrated luminescent decoration, each or a part of them may be luminescent decorated with different colors without luminescent decoration of all of them with the same color.

Further, the peripheral control MPU1511a terminates the light emission control after continuously executing the light emission control of the first light guide plate 3135 or the like based on the specific light emission effect pattern for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds). It should be noted that the main effect display device 1600 is dimmed or the brightness of the backlight (white LED) is lowered more than usual while the light emission control of the first light guide plate 3135 or the like based on the specific light emission effect pattern is being executed. The light emitting decoration (picture) of the light guide plate 3135 may be made to stand out, and in addition to this, a decorative body or the like whose light emission is controlled based on a specific light emitting effect pattern (in this example, the first light guide plate 3135, middle). Luminance of LEDs and the like for stopping or luminescent decoration of decorative objects other than the decorative part 3112a, the middle decoration part 3113a, the middle decoration part 3168a, the middle decoration part 3253a, the middle decoration part 3263a, and the sub-effect display device 3240). By lowering it, the light emitting decoration executed based on the specific light emitting effect pattern may be made to stand out.

As shown in FIG. 188, only a part of the V-shaped pattern is drawn on the first light guide plate 3135 of the first modification 1 due to a plurality of minute irregularities, and only the pattern that emits and decorates the first light guide plate 3135. Then, it is difficult to identify what kind of pattern is represented. Then, when the first LED 3141a of the back front middle left decorative substrate 3141 and the first LED 3143a of the back front middle right decorative substrate 3143 are made to emit light with a predetermined light emitting color, and the first light guide plate 3135 is light-emitting and decorated with a predetermined pattern. , The middle decoration portion 3112a and the back front upper of the back front upper left decorative body 3112 by the back front upper decoration substrate 3120 of the back front decoration unit 3100 so as to compensate for the incomplete pattern that illuminates the first light guide plate 3135. The middle decorative part 3113a of the right decorative body 3113, the middle decorative part 3168a of the back front lower middle decorative body 3168, the back lower left decorative board 3254 and the back lower right by the back front lower left decorative board 3171 and the back front lower right decorative board 3172. The inner decorative portion 3253a of the lower left decorative body 3253 and the inner decorative portion 3263a of the lower right decorative body 3263 by the decorative substrate 3264 are of the same color as the pattern that illuminates the first light guide plate 3135 (for example, red). The sub-effect display device 3240 displays a production image (V-complementary decoration image) that is continuous with the pattern that emits light and decorates the first light guide plate 3135. By doing so, the entire V-shaped pattern is represented and the player can easily recognize it.

When the first light guide plate 3135 is light-emittingly decorated, a decorative body or the like (including a display device) provided in the outer peripheral outer peripheral outer peripheral side of the center accessory 2500 (in the game area 5a (in this example, behind the game panel 1100)). )) Is not luminescent, but the incomplete pattern that illuminates the first light guide plate 3135 is supplemented with a decorative body or the like (V complementary decorative body) on the outer periphery of the center accessory 2500. The whole may be made recognizable by the player. For example, the back front upper left decorative body 3112 and the back front upper right decorative body 3113 are arranged so as to be continuous with the pattern that illuminates the first light guide plate 3135, and the back front upper left decorative body 3112 and the back front are arranged. The first light guide plate 3135 may be light-emittingly decorated with a light-emitting color that can be seen integrally with the upper right decorative body 3113.

Further, the first light guide plate 3135 of the first modification is configured so that only a part of a predetermined pattern (V-shaped pattern) is drawn, but all of the predetermined patterns are drawn. However, the present invention is applicable. For example, although all of the predetermined patterns are depicted on the first light guide plate 3135, a part of the patterns is difficult for the player to see due to the decorative body or the like arranged in front of the first light guide plate 3135. When the incomplete pattern is visible to the player, another decorative body is provided in a predetermined manner so as to compensate for the portion that has become difficult to see when the first light guide plate 3135 is light-emittingly decorated. (The same color as the pattern that illuminates the first light guide plate 3135) may be used to represent the entire predetermined pattern, or the game among the predetermined patterns that illuminate the first light guide plate 3135. When it is easy for the player to recognize specific information (for example, information that a big hit is made when a "V" pattern is drawn) from a pattern that is visible to a person, another decorative body is specified. By emitting and decorating the first light guide plate 3135 in the same color as the pattern that emits and decorates the first light guide plate 3135, a predetermined pattern may be expressed in a wider range than the area occupied by the first light guide plate 3135.

Further, in this example, when the first light guide plate 3135 is light-emittingly decorated, in addition to the decorative body or the like provided on the outer periphery of the center accessory 2500 of the game board 5, the decorative body or the like provided on the door frame 3 (display device is used. It is designed to realize a luminous decoration that is integrated with (including). In this example, the decorative lens portion 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 and the unevenness of the square pyramid that is arranged in a row in front of the decorative lens portion 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 and protrudes forward correspond to each of the irregularities. A plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs) are provided, and it is possible to individually emit and decorate the unevenness of the square pyramid on the front surface of the decorative lens portion 579a.

As shown in FIG. 189, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a emits and decorates the first light guide plate 3135, the decorative lens portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 is continuous with the pattern that emits and decorates the first light guide plate 3135. The first light guide plate 3135 illuminates the unevenness of the square pyramid in the corresponding region (the region surrounded by the broken line in FIG. 189) of the decorative lens portion 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 and 579a. By luminescent decoration (V complementary luminescent decoration) in the same color as the pattern, the luminescent decoration of the first light guide plate 3135 is extended so as to extend to substantially the upper end of the door frame 3, and a large V-shaped luminescent decoration is played. It is designed to be shown to others.

As a result, the player is shown a large V-shaped light emitting decoration in which the light emitting decoration of the first light guide plate 3135 is larger than the center accessory 2500 and the game area 5a and extends to substantially the upper end of the door frame 3. Therefore, it is possible to make the player more convinced that an advantageous gaming state (for example, "big hit game") in which the player is advantageous will occur, and greatly raise the expectation of the player. Can be done. Further, a light guide plate (in this example, the first guide) which is arranged closer to the player than the main effect display device 1600 and has a small difference in the front-rear direction from a decorative body or the like (including the display device) provided on the door frame 3. Since the light plate 3135) is used, the light guide plate (first light guide plate 3135 in this example) and the decorative body (including the display device) provided on the door frame 3 can be light-emitting and decorated in a state close to flat. Since the continuity between the pattern luminescent and decorated on the light guide plate (first light guide plate 3135 in this example) and the luminescent decoration of the decorative body or the like (including the display device) provided on the door frame 3 is increased, it is more integrated. Luminescent decoration can be realized.

Further, in this example, when the first light guide plate 3135 is light-emitting decorated, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is continuous with the door frame side effect display device 460 in the same color as the pattern in which the first light guide plate 3135 is light-emitting and decorated. Display the effect image (V complementary decorative image). As a result, the light emitting decoration of the first light guide plate 3135 is extended so as to extend beyond the upper and lower ends of the game area 5a (protruding vertically from the game area 5a), and a large V-shaped light emitting decoration can be shown to the player. This makes it possible to show the player a large V-shaped light emitting decoration in which the light emitting decoration of the first light guide plate 3135 is expanded so as to extend over a wide range exceeding the vertical width of the game area 5a. On the other hand, it is possible to be more convinced that an advantageous gaming state (for example, "big hit game") in which the player is advantageous will occur, and the expectation of the player can be greatly increased.

If the light emitting decoration of the first light guide plate 3135 is expanded so as to extend over a range larger than that of the center accessory 2500, the inside of the game area 5a on the outer periphery of the center accessory 2500 (in this example, the rear of the game panel 1100). ), The decorative body or the like (including the display device) provided on the door frame 3 and the decorative body or the like (including the display device) provided on the door frame 3 may be light-emittingly decorated. However, both the decorative body and the like (including the display device) provided in the game area 5a on the outer periphery of the center accessory 2500 and the decorative body and the like (including the display device) provided on the door frame 3 emit light. By decorating, the pattern that is luminescently decorated on the first light guide plate 3135 and the luminescent decoration of the decorative body or the like (including the display device) provided on the door frame 3 are inside the game area 5a on the outer periphery of the center accessory 2500. It is possible to show the player a large-sized luminescent decoration in which the patterns luminescent and decorated on the first light guide plate 3135 are connected by the luminescent decoration of the decorative body or the like (including the display device) provided in the first light guide plate 3135. In other words, both the decorative body and the like (including the display device) provided in the game area 5a on the outer periphery of the center accessory 2500 and the decorative body and the like (including the display device) provided on the door frame 3 emit light. A pattern that illuminates the first light guide plate 3135 by decorating it, and a decorative body or the like provided on the outer periphery of the center accessory 2500 (in the game area 5a (in this example, behind the game panel 1100)). It is possible to enhance the continuity between the light emitting decoration (including the display device) and the light emitting decoration by the decorative body or the like (including the display device) provided on the door frame 3.

Further, when the light emitting decoration is performed in any of a plurality of types of modes as described above, the decorative body (inside the game area 5a (in this example, the game panel 1100)) on the outer periphery of the center accessory 2500 is arranged according to the light emitting decoration mode. Of the decorative body and the like (including the display device) provided on the door frame 3) and the decorative body and the like (including the display device) provided on the door frame 3, the decorative body to be light-emitting and decorated may be different. Among the decorative bodies provided on the door frame 3, the decorative lens portion 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 and the decorative lens portion 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 are the first of a plurality of types of light emitting decorations of the light guide plate. The left unit decoration cover 536 and the right unit cover 563 may be light-emitting decorated according to the second aspect of the plurality of types of light-emitting decoration of the light guide plate.

Further, in the above example, the decorative body provided in the game area 5a on the outer periphery of the center accessory 2500 (in this example, behind the game panel 1100) is light-emittingly decorated, but inside the center accessory 2500. When a predetermined pattern is drawn behind the transparent game panel 1100 so as to be continuous from the pattern drawn on the arranged first light guide plate 3135, and the first light guide plate 3135 is light-emitting and decorated, the game panel 1100 is illuminated. The game panel 1100 itself may function as a light guide plate when incident. As a result, the inside of the game area 5a on the outer periphery of the center accessory 2500 is light-emitting decorated with a pattern of the same color as the pattern that emits light-decorates the first light guide plate 3135, and the light-emitting decoration of the first light guide plate 3135 is the game area 5a. It can be extended to extend over the edges to show the player a luminescent decoration with a large pattern.

[11. Modification 2]
In the second modification, the same light emitting decoration as in the first modification is performed, but the light guide plate and the decorative body provided in the game area 5a on the outer periphery (in this example, behind the game panel 1100) are referred to as the first modification. They are placed in different positions.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 190, in the second modification, all the openings of the center accessory 2500 are closed so as to close the opening in front of the center accessory 2500 (so as not to hinder the rolling of the game ball on the stage 2530). A light guide plate 1610 is provided (which may have an opening in a part thereof without blocking). That is, the light guide plate (first light guide plate 3135, second light guide plate 3136) of the modified example 1 is provided behind the game panel 1100 as shown in FIG. 126, whereas the light guide plate 1610 of the modified example 2 is provided. It is provided in front of the game panel 1100 (on the player side) and is close to the glass unit 190. Therefore, in the light guide plate 1610 of the modified example 2, the difference in the front-rear direction with the decorative body or the like (including the display device) provided on the door frame 3 is reduced as compared with the light guide plate (first light guide plate 3135) of the modified example 1. Since the light guide plate 1610 and the decorative body (including the display device) provided on the door frame 3 can be light-emitting-decorated at a position closer to flat than the first modification, the light-shield 1610 is light-emitting decorated with a predetermined pattern. The continuity between the pattern luminescent on the light guide plate 1610 and the luminescent decoration of the decorative body (including the display device) provided on the door frame 3 is increased, and a more integrated luminescent decoration can be realized. ..

Further, in this example, among the decorative objects (including the display device) provided on the door frame 3, the center role is provided so as to be close to the decorative objects (including the display device) provided at a position continuous with the light emitting decoration of the light guide plate. By forming the object 2500 and performing the light emitting decoration of the center accessory 2500 at a position close to the glass unit 190 in front of the game panel 1100 (on the player side), the light emitting decoration of the center accessory 2500 and the door frame 3 The continuity with the decorative body (including the display device) provided in the door is enhanced.

Specifically, the center accessory 2500 of the modified example 2 has a tunnel-shaped left guide passage 2550 that discharges the game ball that has flowed down along the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front view as shown in FIG. 191 and a left guide passage 2550. It is provided with a plurality of ridges 2551 protruding into the passage 2550. When assembled on the game board 5, the left guide passage 2550 forms a passage (passage) having a width in which only one game ball can flow between the left guide passage 2550 and the inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000. The plurality of ridges 2551 can reduce the circulation speed of the game balls when the game balls circulating in the left guide passage 2550 come into contact with each other. Further, the center accessory 2500 of the modified example 2 is a tunnel-shaped right guide that guides the game ball that has flowed down along the outer peripheral surface on the right side of the front view slightly to the left and then releases it downward as in the other embodiments. It includes a passage 2540 and a plurality of ridges 2541 protruding into the right guide passage 2540. However, a sheet-shaped left sheet LED substrate 1611 made of transparent or transparent (semi-transparent) PET resin so that the back can be visually recognized is attached to the surface of the left guide passage 2550 on the player side. A sheet-shaped right sheet LED substrate 1612 made of transparent or transparent (semi-transparent) PET resin so that the back can be visually recognized is attached to the surface of the right guide passage 2540 on the player side. Further, the LED mounted on the left sheet LED board 1611 made of PET resin is connected to the wiring pattern printed on the left sheet LED board 1611, and the wiring pattern is connected to the wiring pattern via a connector (not shown). It is connected to the peripheral control MPU1511a. Similarly, the LED mounted on the right sheet LED board 1612 made of PET resin is connected to the wiring pattern printed on the left sheet LED board 1611, and the wiring pattern is connected to the wiring pattern via a connector (not shown). It is connected to the peripheral control MPU1511a.

The left guide passage 2550 and the right guide passage 2540 are made of transparent or transparent (semi-transparent) resin (acrylic resin, etc.) so that the back can be visually recognized. Further, the left sheet LED substrate 1611 and the right sheet LED substrate 1612 attached to the respective surfaces are also made of transparent or transparent (semi-transparent) PET resin so that the back portion can be visually recognized. Further, the LEDs mounted on the left sheet LED board 1611 and the right sheet LED board 1612 are smaller than the game balls, and the wiring pattern printed on each sheet LED board is also smaller than the diameter of the game balls. In this way, the left guide passage 2550, the right guide passage 2540, the left sheet LED substrate 1611, and the right sheet LED substrate 1612 are formed of transparent or transparent (semi-transparent) resin so that the back can be visually recognized, and the left sheet. In order to mount LEDs smaller than the game ball on the LED board 1611 and the right sheet LED board 1612, the game ball is provided in the tunnel-shaped left guide passage 2550 and right guide passage 2540 on the back of the left sheet LED board 1611 and the right sheet LED board 1612. Does not reduce the visibility of the flowing game ball even if the LED flows down (it does not hinder the visibility). As a result, it is possible to execute a large luminescent decoration extended over a wide area in front of the game area 5a, and by showing this large luminescent decoration, the player can be surprised and surprised. , It is possible to prevent the deterioration of the game entertainment.

Then, when the light guide plate 1610 is light-emittingly decorated with a predetermined pattern, the LED mounted on the left sheet LED substrate 1611 attached to the surface of the left guide passage 2550 on the player side and the player side of the right guide passage 2540. The LED mounted on the right sheet LED substrate 1612 attached to the surface is made to emit light in a predetermined mode (emission color, light emitting area, etc.) so as to be continuous with the pattern to be light-emitting and decorated on the light guide plate 1610, and is guided to the left. By luminescent decoration of the passage 2550 and the right guide passage 2540, the pattern luminescently decorated on the light guide plate 1610 is extended to the outside of the light guide plate 1610.

The surface of the left guide passage 2550 on the player side and the surface of the right guide passage 2540 on the player side are formed so as to be close to the glass unit 190, and are in a state close to flat with the light guide plate 1610 (substantially flush with each other). ing. Therefore, the left sheet LED substrate 1611 attached to the surface of the left guide passage 2550 on the player side, the right sheet LED substrate 1612 attached to the surface of the right guide passage 2540 on the player side, the light guide plate 1610, and the door. The difference in the front-rear direction with the decorative body or the like (including the display device) provided in the frame 3 is reduced, and the light guide plate 1610 and the decorative body or the like (including the display device) provided in the door frame 3 overlap with the game area 5a. Since the left guide passage 2550 and the right guide passage 2540 provided in the above direction can be light-emitting-decorated at a position closer to flat than in the first modification, the light-shielding plate 1610 emits light when the light-shielding plate 1610 is light-emitting-decorated with a predetermined pattern. The continuity between the picture to be decorated and the light emitting decoration of the decorative body (including the display device) provided on the door frame 3 and the light emitting decoration of the left guide passage 2550 and the right guide passage 2540 is increased, and the light emitting decoration is more integrated. Can be realized.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 191 when the light guide LED 1620 is made to emit light to decorate the light guide plate 1610 with a pattern of one horizontal character, the left guide passage corresponds to the light emission region and the light emission color of the light guide plate 1610. The LED mounted on the left sheet LED board 1611 attached to the surface of the 2550 player side and the LED mounted on the right sheet LED board 1612 attached to the surface of the right guide passage 2540 on the player side. Light is emitted in the same color as the light guide LED 1620, and the light guide plate 1610 is light-emitting and decorated on the surface of the left guide passage 2550 and the right guide passage 2540 on the player side. And the right unit cover 563 is decorated with light emission in the same color as the light guide LED 1620 so as to have substantially the same width as one horizontal character that emits light decoration on the light guide plate 1610.

As a result, each light emitting decoration can be performed at a position closer to flat, and the light emitting decoration of the light guide plate 1610 is expanded so as to cover substantially the entire horizontal direction of the pachinko machine 1, and a large horizontal single character light emitting decoration is played. It is designed to be shown to others. Further, by luminescent decoration at a position close to flat, the continuity (sense of unity) of luminescent decoration is increased, and it is possible to give an impression that the pattern for luminescent decoration of the light guide plate 1610 is expanded more realistically.

[12. Modification 3]
Next, another example of the decorative effect using the light guide plate will be described as a modification 3. In the third modification, similarly to the light guide plate 1610 of the second modification, the entire opening of the center accessory 2500 is closed so as to close the opening in front of the center accessory 2500 (so as not to hinder the rolling of the game ball on the stage 2530). A light guide plate is provided in front of the game panel 1100 (on the player side), and light is incident from one side of the light guide plate. The light guide plate is light-emitting and decorated with a predetermined pattern, and one or more LEDs out of a plurality of LEDs provided corresponding to one side are made to emit light in a predetermined order to emit light on the same side of the light guide plate. By making the incident position different, it is possible to switch the pattern that illuminates the light guide plate to a different pattern.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 192, there are four LEDs (LED 1621a to 1621d, LEDs 1622a to 1622d, LEDs 1623a to 1623d, LEDs 1624a to 1624d, LEDs 1625a to 1625d, LEDs 1626a to 1626d, LEDs 1627a, respectively, on the upper side of the light guide plate 1610. A plurality of light guide LED substrates 1621 to 1627 on which ~ 1627d) is mounted are provided. Then, among the LEDs mounted on the plurality of light guide LED substrates 1621 to 1627, the leftmost LED (LED 1621a, LED 1622a, LED 1623a, LED 1624a, LED 1625a, LED 1626a, LED 1627a) is caused to emit light and is incident on the light guide plate 1610. The light guide plate 1610 is light-emittingly decorated with a pentagonal pattern (first continuous pattern) of the maximum size.

Further, one right side (from the left) of the LEDs (group a; LED1621a, LED1622a, LED1623a, LED1624a, LED1625a, LED1626a, LED1627a) located on the leftmost side of the LEDs mounted on the plurality of light guide LED substrates 1621 to 1627. The LED (group b; LED1621b, LED1622b, LED1623b, LED1624b, LED1625b, LED1626b, LED1627b) located in the second) is made to emit light and is incident on the light guide plate 1610 to cause a pentagonal pattern slightly smaller than the maximum size pentagon. The light guide plate 1610 is light-emitting decorated with (second continuous pattern). Similarly, one right side (from the left) of the LEDs (LED1621b, LED1622b, LED1623b, LED1624b, LED1625b, LED1626b, LED1627b) located second from the left in the illustration among the LEDs mounted on the plurality of light guide LED substrates 1621 to 1627. The LED (group c; LED1621c, LED1622c, LED1623c, LED1624c, LED1625c, LED1626c, LED1627c) located at the third) is made to emit light and is incident on the light guide plate 1620 to make a smaller pentagonal pattern (third continuous pattern). The light guide plate 1610 is decorated with light emission and is located on the rightmost side of the LEDs mounted on the plurality of light guide LED substrates 1621 to 1627, respectively (d group; LED1621d, LED1622d, LED1623d, LED1624d, LED1625d, LED1626d, LED1627d). Is emitted and light incident on the light guide plate 1620, so that the light guide plate 1610 is light-emittingly decorated with a pentagonal pattern (fourth continuous pattern) of the smallest size.

As described above, in the modified example 3, among the four LEDs mounted on the plurality of light guide LED substrates 1621 to 1627 provided on the upper side of the light guide plate 1610, the LEDs of the group a located on the leftmost side in the drawing are on the far right. By switching the LED group that emits light one by one up to the LED of the d group located, the pattern that emits light and decorates the light guide plate 1610 changes continuously from the first continuous pattern to the fourth continuous pattern. There is. Further, a group and b of LEDs (LED 1621a to 1621d, LEDs 1622a to 1622d, LEDs 1623a to 1623d, LEDs 1624a to 1624d, LEDs 1625a to 1625d, LEDs 1626a to 1626d, LEDs 1627a to 1627d) mounted on a plurality of light guide LED substrates 1621 to 1627. The light guide plate 1610 is light-emitting and decorated with the first continuous pattern, the second continuous pattern, the third continuous pattern, and the fourth continuous pattern corresponding to the group, the c group, and the d group. In this embodiment, each LED is used. When light is incident on the side surface of the light guide plate 1610, light leakage is caused by the light diffusion effect of the LED. That is, no light collecting member or the like is provided between the LED (LED 1621a to 1621d, LED 1622a to 1622d, LED 1623a to 1623d, LED 1624a to 1624d, LED 1625a to 1625d, LED 1626a to 1626d, LED 1627a to 1627d) and the side surface of the light guide plate. Using the light diffusion effect of (LED 1621a to 1621d, LED 1622a to 1622d, LED 1623a to 1623d, LED 1624a to 1624d, LED 1625a to 1625d, LED 1626a to 1626d, LED 1627a to 1627d), a pattern that does not correspond to the emitting LED. It is made to be slightly exposed on the light guide plate 1610.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 192 (A), when the LEDs of the group a (LED 1621a, LED 1622a, LED 1623a, LED 1624a, LED 1625a, LED 1626a, LED 1627a) are made to emit light, the light entering portion facing the LED of the group a The amount of light entering (group a facing part) is the largest, and the first continuous pattern is displayed relatively clearly with the light entering the group a facing part, but the light emission of the LED of group a is emitted from the side surface of the light guide plate. Part of the light enters the b-group facing portion in the above (the amount of light entering is smaller than that of the a-group facing portion), and the second continuous pattern is slightly displayed as the light enters the b-group facing portion. That is, when the LEDs of group a emit light, in addition to the clear expression of the first continuous pattern, the faint expression of the second continuous pattern can occur at the same time. Similarly, when the LEDs of group b emit light, in addition to the clear expression of the second continuous pattern, the faint expression of the third continuous pattern and the first continuous pattern can occur at the same time, and the c group When the LED of the d group emits light, in addition to the clear expression of the third continuous pattern, the faint expression of the fourth continuous pattern and the second continuous pattern can occur at the same time. , In addition to the clear expression of the 4th continuous pattern, the faint expression of the 3rd consecutive pattern can occur at the same time. As a result, a group of LEDs (LED 1621a to 1621d, LEDs 1622a to 1622d, LEDs 1623a to 1623d, LEDs 1624a to 1624d, LEDs 1625a to 1625d, LEDs 1626a to 1626d, LEDs 1627a to 1627d) mounted on a plurality of light guide LED substrates 1621 to 1627, Along with the sequential switching of groups b, c, and d, a continuous change occurs from the first continuous pattern to the fourth continuous pattern, and the light guide animation in which the pattern continuously changes on the light guide plate 1610 is smoothly expressed. It becomes possible to do.

Although not shown, the light guide plate 1610 of the modified example 3 is also provided with a plurality of LEDs on the right side, and by causing the plurality of LEDs to emit light, light is incident from the right side of the light guide plate 1610 and the first continuous is shown in FIG. 192. A pattern different from the picture or the fourth continuous picture is displayed. For example, the left guide passage 2550, the right guide passage 2540, and the left unit are decorated with a “one horizontal character” pattern or the like as in the light guide plate 1610 of the second modification, and correspond to the light emitting region and the light emitting color of the light guide plate 1610. The decorative cover 536 and the right unit cover 563 may be light-emitting decorated at a position closer to flat to realistically expand the pattern represented on the light guide plate 1610.

Similar to the first light guide plate 3135 of the first modification, the light guide plate 1610 may be provided behind the game panel 1100 (instead of the first light guide plate 3135), and in this case, it is provided on the upper side of the light guide plate 1610. A group and b group of LEDs (LED 1621a to 1621d, LEDs 1622a to 1622d, LEDs 1623a to 1623d, LEDs 1624a to 1624d, LEDs 1625a to 1625d, LEDs 1626a to 1626d, LEDs 1627a to 1627d) mounted on a plurality of light guide LED substrates 1621 to 1627. The pattern that emits light and decorates the light guide plate 1610 is continuously changed from the first continuous pattern to the fourth continuous pattern according to the sequential switching of the c group and the d group, and the first pattern provided on the right side of the light guide plate 1610 is provided. By emitting light from the LED 3141a and the first LED 3143a and causing light to enter from the right side of the light guide plate 1610, the light guide plate 1610 is light-emitting decorated with a "V-shaped" pattern as in the first light guide plate 3135 of the first modification. Decorative bodies, etc. on the outer periphery of the center accessory 2500 so as to compensate for the incomplete pattern (including the decorative body, etc. (including the display device) provided in the game area 5a (in this example, behind the game panel 1100)). Or a decorative body (including a display device) provided on the door frame 3 may be light-emittingly decorated.

Further, in the modification 3, the light emitting decoration of the light guide plate 1610 and the decorative body (including the display device) provided on the door frame 3 are related to the effect display (reach effect, etc.) executed by the main effect display device 1600. It is possible to execute an animation effect of continuously switching the luminescent decoration in conjunction with the luminescent decoration and the luminescent decoration such as a decorative body provided in the game area 5a. The animation effect of this example will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 193 to 197. Note that FIGS. 193 to 197 show the pachinko machine 1 provided with the center accessory 2500 in which the left guide passage 2550 of the modified example 2 is formed, and a decorative body or the like (display) provided in front of the game panel 1100 (player side). (Including the device) and the decorative body (including the display device) provided on the door frame 3 are light-emittingly decorated in relation to the light-emitting decoration of the light guide plate 1610. If a decorative body or the like (including a display device) other than the light guide plate 1610 is to be light-emitting decorated in relation to the light-emitting decoration of the light guide plate 1610, it is provided behind the game panel 1100 like the pachinko machine 1 of the first modification. The decorative body or the like (including the display device) or the decorative body or the like (including the display device) provided on the door frame 3 may be light-emittingly decorated in relation to the light-emitting decoration of the light guide plate 1610.

Further, the mode of the animation effect of the modification 3 (emission color, decorative body for luminescent decoration, etc. (including display device), pattern of the light guide plate 1610 (first continuous pattern to fourth continuous pattern)) is shown in FIGS. 193 to 197. The switching speed of the light emitting decoration in the animation production (for example, the mode of switching every 2 seconds and the mode of switching every 0.5 seconds) and the switching order (for example, from the first continuous pattern to the second continuous pattern) are not limited to those shown in. A mode in which the pattern is switched in the order of the pattern, the third continuous pattern, and the fourth continuous pattern, and a mode in which the fourth continuous pattern is switched to the third continuous pattern, the second continuous pattern, and the first continuous pattern), the luminescent color of the luminescent decoration, and the luminescent decoration. The animation effect of the mode determined by the peripheral control MPU 1511a may be executed from a plurality of different modes such as the stage (step) of the above.

In addition, different jackpot expectations may be obtained depending on the mode of animation production. For example, when an animation effect is executed in which the light guide plate 1610, a decorative body, or the like is light-emitting and decorated with a red emission color, the jackpot expectation is highest (for example, when the peripheral control MPU1511a receives a variation pattern command that becomes a jackpot). Only the red light emitting color is used to illuminate the light guide plate 1610 and the decorative body, etc.), and the blue light emitting color is used to illuminate the light guide plate 1610, the decorative body, etc. Peripheral control MPU1511a is set so that the degree of expectation is low (for example, the peripheral control MPU1511a is determined to emit light and decorate the light guide plate 1610, the decorative body, etc. with the blue emission color only when the peripheral control MPU1511a receives the out-of-order fluctuation pattern command). The mode may be determined and the light emitting decoration may be executed in the determined mode (the jackpot expectation is different depending on the color of the light guide plate 1610, the decorative body, etc.), or the switching of the light emitting decoration is 2 The jackpot expectation is highest when the animation effect performed every second is executed (for example, when the peripheral control MPU1511a receives a fluctuation pattern command that becomes a jackpot, the light emission decoration is switched every 2 seconds at a rate of 80/100. An animation that switches the luminescent decoration every 0.5 seconds after deciding on the mode and switching the luminescent decoration every 2 seconds at a rate of 5/100 when a variable pattern command that is out of order is received). When the effect is executed, the expectation of a big hit is the lowest (for example, when the peripheral control MPU1511a receives a fluctuation pattern command that becomes a big hit, the light emitting decoration is switched every 0.5 seconds at a rate of 5/100. A mode determined by the peripheral control MPU1511a to determine and determine a mode in which the light emitting decoration is switched every 0.5 seconds at a rate of 60/100 when a variation pattern command that is out of order is received. (The jackpot expectation is different depending on the switching speed of the luminescent decoration), and after the decorative body or the like is luminescent decorated, the light guide plate 1610 is the first continuous pattern, the first. The highest expectation for a big hit is when an animation effect is executed in which the luminescent decoration is switched so that the luminescent decoration is luminescent in the order of the second continuous pattern, the third continuous pattern, and the fourth continuous pattern, and the light guide plate 1610 is the fourth continuous pattern. The biggest hit expectation is when an animation effect is executed in which the luminescent decoration is switched so that the decorative body or the like is luminescent decorated after the luminescent decoration is performed in the order of the third continuous pattern, the second continuous pattern, and the first continuous pattern. Peripheral control MPU1511a may determine the mode so that the degree is low, and execute the light emitting decoration in the determined mode (the jackpot expectation is different depending on the switching order of the light emitting decoration), the decorative body, etc. Is luminescent and decorated, and then the light emitting decoration is luminescent in the order of the first continuous pattern, the second continuous pattern, the third continuous pattern, and the fourth continuous pattern in five stages (5 steps). When the animation effect that can be switched is executed, the expectation of a big hit is the highest, and after the decorative body etc. is luminescent and decorated, the light guide plate 1610 is luminescent and decorated in the order of the first continuous pattern and the second continuous pattern. The peripheral control MPU1511a determines the mode and executes the light emitting decoration in the determined mode so that the jackpot expectation is the lowest when the animation effect that is switched over 3 steps (3 steps) is executed. It may be good (the expectation of big hits is different depending on the stage (step) of light emission decoration), or a combination of these (for example, an animation effect in which the light emission mode is switched over 5 stages every 2 seconds with a red light emission color). The jackpot expectation is highest when executed, and the jackpot expectation is lowest when an animation effect is executed in which the emission decoration is switched in three stages every 0.5 seconds with the blue emission color. Peripheral control MPU1511a may determine the mode and execute the luminescent decoration in the determined mode).

As shown in FIG. 193, the center accessory 2500 of the modified example 3 is provided with a center upper decorative body 2560 at the upper portion thereof and a lower center decorative body 2570 at the lower portion thereof. Further, a sheet-shaped upper center sheet LED substrate 1613 made of PET resin is attached to the surface of the upper decorative body 2560 on the player side, and PET is attached to the surface of the lower decorative body 2570 on the player side. A sheet-shaped lower center sheet LED substrate 1614 made of resin is attached. The upper decorative body 2560 and the lower center decorative body 2570 are formed so that the surface on the player side is close to the glass unit 190. Therefore, the difference in the front-rear direction between the upper decorative body 2560 and the lower center decorative body 2570, the decorative body provided on the door frame 3 (including the display device), and the left guide passage 2550 and the right guide passage 2540 is reduced. Then, the upper center decorative body 2560 and the lower center decorative body 2570, the decorative body provided on the door frame 3 (including the display device), and the left guide passage 2550 and the right guide passage 2540 emit light at a position close to flat. Since it can be decorated, the sense of unity of the luminescent decoration can be enhanced.

Further, in this example, in addition to the center upper decorative body 2560 and the center lower decorative body 2570, the decorative body provided on the door frame 3 (including the display device), the left guide passage 2550 and the right guide passage 2540, the guide is provided. Since the light plate 1610 is also arranged in front of the game panel 1100 (on the player side) and all of them are arranged in a state close to flat, the continuity of the light emitting decoration is increased and the switching of the light emitting decoration becomes smooth, so that the animation effect is produced. Can be improved by executing.

When executing the animation effect, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first attaches the LED mounted on the left sheet LED substrate 1611 to the surface of the left guide passage 2550 on the player side and the surface of the right guide passage 2540 on the player side. The LED mounted on the right sheet LED substrate 1612 to be attached and the LED mounted on the center upper sheet LED substrate 1613 attached to the player side surface of the center upper decoration body 2560 and the game of the center lower decoration body 2570. The LED mounted on the lower center sheet LED substrate 1614 attached to the surface on the person side is made to emit light in a predetermined mode (emission color, light emitting area, etc.), and the left guide passage 2550, the right guide passage 2540, and the center are above. The decoration body 2560 and the decoration body 2570 under the center are light-emitting decorated with a predetermined light-emitting color (for example, red), and the left unit decoration cover 536 and the right unit cover 563 are continuously represented by these light-emitting decorations. The predetermined range of the above is light-emitting decorated with the same color as the left guide passage 2550, the right guide passage 2540, the center upper decoration body 2560, and the center lower decoration body 2570. In addition, as long as it can be recognized as an integral luminescent decoration, each or a part of them may be luminescent decorated with different colors without luminescent decoration of all of them with the same color.

Further, in this example, in the animation production, when the left guide passage 2550, the right guide passage 2540, the center upper decoration body 2560, the center lower decoration body 2570, the left unit decoration cover 536, and the right unit cover 563 are light-emittingly decorated, peripheral control is performed. The MPU 1511a is connected to the door frame side effect display device 460 so as to be continuous with the light emitting decoration of the left guide passage 2550, the right guide passage 2540, the center upper decoration body 2560, the center lower decoration body 2570, the left unit decoration cover 536, and the right unit cover 563. Display a nice production image. As a result, an integral light emitting decoration is made over a wide range beyond the left and right end and the lower end of the game area 5a (protruding to the left and right of the game area 5a and also to the bottom), and a large predetermined form (in this example). Since the pentagon is represented, the player can be more convinced that an advantageous gaming state (for example, "big hit game") will occur in which the player has an advantage, and the player's expectation can be raised. It can be greatly enhanced.

After performing the light emitting decoration shown in FIG. 193, the peripheral control MPU 1511a ends the light emitting decoration shown in FIG. 193 when a predetermined period elapses. After that, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is mounted on the plurality of light guide LED substrates 1621 to 1627 provided on the upper side of the light guide plate 1610. ~ 1626d, LEDs 1627a ~ 1627d), the group a LEDs (LED1621a, LED1622a, LED1623a, LED1624a, LED1625a, LED1626a, LED1627a) are made to emit light to decorate the light guide plate 1610 with the first continuous pattern (FIG. 194). By switching the LED group to emit light each time the period elapses, the light emitting decoration of the second continuous pattern corresponding to the light emission of the LED group b (LED1621b, LED1622b, LED1623b, LED1624b, LED1625b, LED1626b, LED1627b), LED group c (LED1621c, LED1622c, LED1623c, LED1624c, LED1625c, LED1626c, LED1627c) corresponding to the light emission of the third continuous pattern light emitting decoration (FIG. 196), LED group d (LED1621d, LED1622d, LED1623d, LED1624d, LED1625d) , LED1626d, LED1627d), and the light emitting decoration of the fourth continuous pattern (FIG. 197) corresponding to the light emission is sequentially performed.

As described above, in the modified example 3, the light guide plate 1610 provided inside the inner circumference of the center accessory 2500 and the decorative body (left guide passage 2550, right guide passage 2540, and center) provided outside the inner circumference of the center accessory 2500. The upper decorative body 2560, the lower decorative body 2570, the left unit decorative cover 536 and the right unit cover 563) and the display device (door frame side effect display device 460) are interlocked to continuously change the light emitting decoration (light emitting effect). Since the animation effect) is executed, it is possible to execute an unprecedented novel effect of continuously changing the light emitting decoration over a wide range, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest.

Further, in the example shown in FIGS. 193 to 197, an animation effect is executed such that the pentagonal light emitting decoration gradually becomes smaller toward the central portion of the main effect display device 1600. As a result, the player's eyes can be directed to the effect executed by the main effect display device 1600, and the effect executed by the main effect display device 1600 can be focused on, and the deterioration of the game interest can be suppressed.

Further, the line widths of the first continuous pattern to the fourth continuous pattern are different for each size. Specifically, the line width is the thickest in the first continuous pattern representing the maximum size pentagon, and the line width gradually narrows as the size decreases (first continuous pattern> second). Continuous pattern> 3rd continuous pattern). In this way, it is possible to give a sense of depth by changing the line width in addition to changing the size of the pentagon, and by changing the luminescent decoration from the first continuous pattern to the fourth continuous pattern, the pentagonal pattern can be made. It can give the impression that it gradually becomes smaller and moves away in the depth direction.

In addition, although only one pentagonal pattern is clearly shown as a pattern for light emitting and decorating the light guide plate 1610 of the modified example 3, a plurality of clear pentagonal patterns may be displayed in multiples. Also in this case, the size and line width of each of the plurality of pentagons may be changed by changing the LED group to emit light.

Further, when the animation effect is executed, the light emitting decoration may be switched in conjunction with the operation of the operation button 410 by the player. For example, the light emitting decoration is switched each time the operation button 410 is pressed once or a predetermined time, or the duration of the light emitting decoration is timed only while the operation button 410 is pressed, and when the predetermined period elapses, the light emitting decoration is turned on. The light emitting decoration may be interrupted (disappeared) when the pressing operation is interrupted by performing the light emitting decoration only while the operation button 410 is pressed or switched.

Further, the animation effect shown in the above modification 3 is an example, and the decorative body (left guide passage 2550 and right guide passage 2540) provided outside the inner circumference of the pattern displayed on the light guide plate 1610 and the center accessory 2500. The form represented by luminescent decoration of the upper center decorative body 2560, the lower center decorative body 2570, the left unit decorative cover 536 and the right unit cover 563) and the display device (door frame side effect display device 460) is described above. It is not limited to things. For example, decorative bodies (left guide passage 2550, right guide passage 2540, upper center decoration 2560, lower center decoration 2570, left unit decoration cover 536, and right unit cover 563) provided outside the inner circumference of the center accessory 2500. ) And the display device (door frame side effect display device 460) to represent a predetermined form, and then the LEDs (LED 1621a) mounted on the light guide LED substrates 1621 to 1627 provided on one side of the light guide plate 1610. ~ 1621d, LED1622a ~ 1622d, LED1623a ~ 1623d, LED1624a ~ 1624d, LED1625a ~ 1625d, LED1626a ~ 1626d, LED1627a ~ 1627d) The character patterns with different postures gradually change or move as the LED group to emit light is switched. Alternatively, an animation effect may be executed in which the clear portion of the serif character pattern changes as the light guide LEDs are sequentially switched.

Further, the LEDs (LED 1621a to 1621d, LEDs 1622a to 1622d, LEDs 1623a to 1623d, LEDs 1624a to 1624d, LEDs 1625a to 1625d, LEDs 1626a to 1626d, LEDs 1627a to be mounted on the light guide LED substrates 1621 to 1627 provided on one side of the light guide plate 1610. Of 1627d), the pattern appearing on the light guide plate 1610 may be different depending on the switching pattern of the LED group to be emitted, and the production content may be branched in the middle of the animation production. For example, by switching the LED group that emits light in the order of the LED of group a, the LED of group b, and the LED of group c, the character gradually moves, and when the LED of group C emits light, an animation showing a pattern in which the character reaches the goal. By switching the effect pattern 1 and the LED group that emits light in the order of the LED of group a, the LED of group b, and the LED of group d, the character gradually moves and the character reaches the goal when the LED of group d emits light. An animation effect pattern 2 representing a pattern that retires without any problem may be provided, and these may be selected and executed in association with the jackpot expectation. Further, in this case, the animation pattern 3 for executing the animation effect pattern 1 may be provided after the animation effect pattern 2 is executed a plurality of times, so that even if the animation effect pattern 2 is executed a plurality of times, the expectation for a big hit is provided. Since it is possible not to lose the game, it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the game interest.

Further, in the above-described third modification, one light guide plate that changes the displayed pattern by switching the LED group that emits light among the plurality of LEDs provided on one side and changing the position of light incident on the light guide plate. Although it is configured to execute the animation effect using 1610, the animation effect may be executed by using a plurality of conventional light guide plates that do not change the displayed pattern by changing the light incident position. For example, a first light guide plate that displays the first continuous pattern in response to light incident, a second light guide plate that displays the second continuous pattern in response to light incident, and a light guide plate that displays the second continuous pattern in response to light incident. The third light guide plate that displays the third continuous pattern and the fourth light guide plate that displays the fourth continuous pattern in response to light incident are placed back and forth (in the depth direction of the pachinko machine 1). An animation effect that continuously changes the pattern by switching the light guide plates that are provided so as to overlap and light incident (for example, first light guide plate → second light guide plate → third light guide plate → fourth light guide plate) You may want to do it. Further, in this case, a plurality of patterns may appear at the same time by simultaneously causing light incident on a plurality of light guide plates. For example, when switching the light guide plate for light incident from the first light guide plate to the second light guide plate. By providing a period in which light is incident on both the first light guide plate, which is the light guide plate before switching, and the second light guide plate, which is the light guide plate after switching, at the same time, the first continuous pattern and the second continuous pattern can be obtained. Is displayed at the same time for a predetermined period of time, and then the light incident on the first light guide plate is terminated and the light is incident only on the second light guide plate to continuously display only the second continuous pattern. It is possible to smoothly express the light guide animation in which the pattern changes. Further, when light is incident on a plurality of light guide plates at the same time to display a plurality of patterns at the same time, the brightness of the LED to be light incident may be changed. For example, the first light guide plate which is the light guide plate before switching may be changed. The brightness of the LED that emits light with a lower brightness than the LED that is incident on the light is incident on the second light guide plate, which is the light guide plate after switching, and then the brightness of the LED that is light incident on the first light guide plate is gradually reduced. On the other hand, by increasing the brightness of the LED that causes light to enter the second light guide plate, the first continuous pattern gradually disappears, while the second continuous pattern gradually appears clearly, and the continuous pattern becomes Changes can be expressed smoothly.

In the above embodiment, the one applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a gaming machine is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko machine or a gaming machine obtained by fusing a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine can be used. It may be applied, and even in this case, the same action and effect as described above can be obtained.

1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 1000 Front component 1100 Game panel 1110 Panel board 1112 Opening 1120 Panel holder 1600 Main effect display device 2000 Front unit 2500 Center accessory 3000 Back unit 3100 Back front decoration unit 3110 Back front front unit 3112 Back front top left decoration (ornament)
3112c Decorative rear 3112d Decorative front 3113 Back front Upper right Ornament
3113c Decorative rear part 3113d Decorative front part 3120 Back front Upper decorative substrate (light emitting means)

Claims (1)

A gaming machine with a front door
The upper plate provided on the front door and
A bulging portion that has a decoration that decorates the front of the upper plate and is configured to bulge in front of the front door.
A predetermined operating device and a predetermined operating device arranged in a predetermined space formed in the bulging portion are provided.
The predetermined space includes a region in which at least a part of the front surface side of the bulging portion is opened.
The upper plate constitutes a part of a member forming the predetermined space regardless of the open / closed state of the front door.
A gaming machine characterized in that at least a part of the upper plate is visible from the outside through the predetermined space in a state where the operating device is removed from the predetermined space.

Images